LTE ENB Command Description SLR2.3 Ver.1.0

2600-00F3QEGA6
Ver.1.0
LTE eNB
Command Description_SLR2.3
COPYRIGHT
This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.
No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial
purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd.
TRADEMARKS
Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
This manual should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product.
This manual may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior
notice.
If you need updated manuals or have any questions concerning the contents of the manuals, contact our Document
Center at the following address or Web site:
Address: Document C enter 3rd F loor J eong-bo-tong-sin-dong. Dong-Suwon P.O. B ox 1 05, 4 16, Maetan-3dong
Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600
Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com
2012 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

LTE eNB Command Description
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
This manual provides descriptions on the LTE eNB command.
Document Content and Organization

This manual defines each of LTE eNB commands, shows the command format and describes the
input/output parameter.
Revision History
Version Date of Issue Remark
1.0 09. 2012. First Edition
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I

INTRODUCTION
This page is intentionally left blank.
II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C0062 RETRIEVE BULKCM SESSION STATUS ............................................................................... 1
C0063 RETRIEVE CALL STATE/STATUS ......................................................................................... 2
C0101 CHANGE CELL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 3
C0102 CHANGE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 5
C0133 EXPORT AND UPLOAD PART OF CONFIGURATION .......................................................... 7
C0136 RESTORE PLD ........................................................................................................................ 8
C0137 BACKUP PLD .......................................................................................................................... 9
C0138 IMPORT CONFIGURATION FILE ......................................................................................... 11
C0139 EXPORT CONFIGURATION FILE ......................................................................................... 12
C0152 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE BATCH ........................................................................................... 13
C0153 ACTIVATE NE SOFTWARE PACKAGE ............................................................................... 14
C0154 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE UNIT ............................................................................................... 15
C0155 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE BATCH .......................................................................................... 16
C0156 RETRIEVE ALL THE ACTIVE SOFTWARE UNIT ................................................................ 17
C0157 CHANGE ENVIRONMENT DATA ......................................................................................... 19
C0158 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE UNIT ............................................................................................ 20
C0159 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE BATCH ........................................................................................ 21
C0160 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE PACKAGE ................................................................................. 22
C0161 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE .................................................................................................... 23
C0162 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE BATCH ....................................................................................... 24
C0163 RETRIEVE ENVIRONMENT DATA ....................................................................................... 25
C0164 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR FIRMWARE LIST ........................................................................ 26
C0165 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR INVENTORY LIST ....................................................................... 28
C0166 UPLOAD INVENTORY .......................................................................................................... 30
C0167 RETRIEVE THE ACTIVE PACKAGE VERSION ................................................................... 31
C0168 DELETE ALL THE PASSIVE PACKAGE VERSION ............................................................ 32
C0169 RESET THE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 33
C0170 RESET PROCESSOR UNIT .................................................................................................. 34
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C0171 RESET SOFTWARE UNIT ..................................................................................................... 35
C0172 RETRIEVE ALL THE SOFTWARE UNIT'S INFORMATION ................................................. 36
C0173 RETRIEVE ALL THE DIRECTORY INFORMATION ............................................................. 38
C0174 RETRIEVE LOADING TIME INFORMATION ........................................................................ 39
C0188 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE ......................................................................................................... 40
C0189 RETRIEVE PSU INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 42
C0193 RESET RRH ........................................................................................................................... 44
C0206 ACTIVATE RRH FIRMWARE ................................................................................................ 45
C0207 ACTIVATE PSU FIRMWARE ................................................................................................ 46
C0220 RETRIEVE RRH INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 47
C0222 RETRIEVE GPS INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 49
C0224 RETRIEVE SFP INVENTORY LIST ....................................................................................... 51
C0246 RESET DSP ........................................................................................................................... 53
C0247 RESET GPS ........................................................................................................................... 54
C0249 RESET SCTP ......................................................................................................................... 55
C0300 RETRIEVE FILE LIST ............................................................................................................ 56
C0350 RESUME MEASUREMENT JOB ........................................................................................... 58
C0351 SUSPEND MEASUREMENT JOB ......................................................................................... 59
C0352 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT JOB INFORMATION .............................................................. 60
C0353 CHANGE MEASUREMENT JOB DATA ............................................................................... 61
C0356 RETRIEVE PM FILE DATA ................................................................................................... 64
C0357 CHANGE PM FILE DATA ...................................................................................................... 65
C0506 EXECUTE INTERNAL PING TEST ....................................................................................... 66
C0507 EXECUTE EXTERNAL PING TEST ...................................................................................... 67
C0508 MONITOR TEST STATUS ..................................................................................................... 69
C0510 EXECUTE TRACE ROUTE TEST ......................................................................................... 71
C0511 RETRIEVE ONLINE TEST PARAMETER ............................................................................. 72
C0512 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ............................................ 74
C0513 RETRIEVE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ............................................. 76
C0515 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST RESULT ....................................................... 77
C0516 RETRIEVE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST RESULT ........................................................ 80
C0517 RETRIEVE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST RESULT .......................................................... 82
C0520 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING TEST THRESHOLD DATA ................................................... 84
C0521 CHANGE ONLINE TEST PARAMETER ............................................................................... 85
IV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

LTE eNB Command Description/Ver.1.0
C0522 CHANGE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ...............................................88
C0523 CHANGE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ................................................90
C0525 CHANGE EXTERNAL PING TEST THRESHOLD DATA ......................................................91
C0529 RETRIEVE ETHERNET OAM CONFIGURATION .................................................................93
C0530 CHANGE ETHERNET OAM CONFIGURATION ...................................................................95
C0531 EXECUTE ETHERNET LOOPBACK TEST ...........................................................................98
C0534 CREATE ONLINE TEST LIST ................................................................................................99
C0535 DELETE ONLINE TEST LIST ..............................................................................................102
C0536 CHANGE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ................................................103
C0537 RETRIEVE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ..............................................105
C0550 START CELL TRAFFIC TRACE ..........................................................................................107
C0551 STOP CELL TRAFFIC TRACE ............................................................................................109
C0552 CHANGE CSL INFORMATION ............................................................................................110
C0553 RETRIEVE TRACE JOB LIST .............................................................................................112
C0554 RETRIEVE CSL INFORMATION .........................................................................................114
C0650 ADD SUBSCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................115
C0651 DELETE SUBSCRIPTION ....................................................................................................117
C0654 RESUME SUBSCRIPTION ..................................................................................................118
C0655 SUSPEND SUBSCRIPTION ................................................................................................119
C0656 RETRIEVE SUBSCRIPTION ................................................................................................120
C0657 EXPORT NOTIFICATION LOG RECORDS .........................................................................122
C0661 CHANGE EMS CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................123
C0662 RETRIEVE EMS CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................124
C0700 RETRIEVE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGURATION ..........................................................125
C0701 CHANGE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGURATION .............................................................127
C0704 RETRIEVE ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION ............................................................129
C0705 CHANGE ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION ..............................................................131
C0706 RETRIEVE ALARM THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION .......................................................133
C0707 CHANGE ALARM THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION .........................................................135
C0708 RETRIEVE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA .......................................................................137
C0709 CHANGE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA ..........................................................................138
C0710 RETRIEVE USER DEFINED CONTROL DATA ..................................................................140
C0711 CHANGE USER DEFINED CONTROL DATA .....................................................................141
C0712 RETRIEVE ACTIVE ALARMS .............................................................................................142
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. V

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C0713 RETRIEVE ALARM LOGS .................................................................................................. 144
C0714 RETRIEVE ALARM INFORMATION ................................................................................... 146
C0750 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR STATUS .................................................................................... 147
C0751 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL LINK STATE/STATUS .................................................................. 148
C0752 RETRIEVE CPU UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 149
C0753 RETRIEVE MEMORY UTILIZATION ................................................................................... 150
C0754 RETRIEVE DISK UTILIZATION ........................................................................................... 151
C0850 RETRIEVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................ 152
C0851 RETRIEVE SYSTEM PHYSICAL RESOURCE(BOARD,UNIT) CONFIGURATION ........... 154
C0853 RETRIEVE DB VERSION .................................................................................................... 156
C0859 RETRIEVE CELL CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 157
C0860 RETRIEVE NTP CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 159
C0861 CHANGE NTP CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................... 160
C1743 CREATE VLAN CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 161
C1744 DELETE VLAN CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 163
C1745 CHANGE VLAN CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 164
C1746 RETRIEVE VLAN CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 165
C1747 CHANGE EXTERNAL LINK CONFIGURATION ................................................................. 166
C1748 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL LINK CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 169
C1749 CREATE LAG CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 171
C1750 DELETE LAG CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 172
C1751 CHANGE LAG CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................... 173
C1752 RETRIEVE LAG CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 174
C1905 RETRIEVE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 175
C1906 CREATE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ........................................................................ 177
C1907 DELETE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 179
C1908 RETRIEVE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ................................................................. 180
C1909 CREATE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 182
C1910 DELETE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 184
C1911 RETRIEVE IPV4 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY CONFIGURATION ............................................ 185
C1912 CHANGE IPV4 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY CONFIGURATION .............................................. 186
C1913 RETRIEVE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 187
C1914 CREATE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 188
C1915 DELETE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 189
VI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C1916 RETRIEVE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION ......................................................................190
C1917 CREATE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION .........................................................................191
C1918 DELETE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................192
C1919 CHANGE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ........................................................................193
C1920 CHANGE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURATION ....................................................................195
C1921 RETRIEVE IPV6 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY CONFIGURATION ............................................198
C1922 CHANGE IPV6 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY CONFIGURATION ...............................................199
C1946 CHANGE PAT MAP INFORMATION ...................................................................................200
C1970 RETRIEVE ACL RULE .........................................................................................................202
C1971 CREATE ACL RULE ............................................................................................................205
C1972 DELETE ACL RULE .............................................................................................................210
C1973 RETRIEVE ACL CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................211
C1974 CREATE ACL CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................212
C1975 DELETE ACL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................213
C1976 RETRIEVE QoS CLASS ......................................................................................................214
C1977 CREATE QoS CLASS ..........................................................................................................215
C1978 DELETE QoS CLASS ..........................................................................................................216
C1979 RETRIEVE QoS POLICY .....................................................................................................217
C1980 RETRIEVE SYSTEM IP SELECTION ..................................................................................219
C1981 CHANGE SYSTEM IP SELECTION .....................................................................................220
C1982 RETRIEVE BH QOS CONFIGURATION .............................................................................222
C1983 CREATE BH QOS CONFIGURATION .................................................................................223
C1984 DELETE BH QOS CONFIGURATION .................................................................................224
C1985 RETRIEVE BH RATE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................225
C1986 CREATE BH RATE CONFIGURATION ...............................................................................226
C1987 DELETE BH RATE CONFIGURATION ...............................................................................227
C1990 CREATE QoS POLICY ........................................................................................................228
C1991 DELETE QoS POLICY .........................................................................................................230
C1992 RETRIEVE SYSDSCP INFORMATION ...............................................................................231
C1993 CHANGE SYSDSCP INFORMATION ..................................................................................233
C1996 RETRIEVE PAT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION ..........................................................235
C1997 CHANGE PAT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION ............................................................237
C1998 RETRIEVE PAT MAP INFORMATION ................................................................................239
C2000 CHANGE RIM CONTROL ....................................................................................................240
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. VII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2002 RETRIEVE TIMER INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 241
C2004 RETRIEVE EUTRAN CELL CONFIGURATION IDLE ......................................................... 247
C2008 RETRIEVE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMATION ........................................................... 250
C2009 RETRIEVE CELL ACCESS INFORMATION ....................................................................... 252
C2010 RETRIEVE CELL RESELECT INFORMATION ................................................................... 254
C2011 RETRIEVE CELL SELECT INFORMATION ........................................................................ 256
C2012 RETRIEVE CSG PCI IDLE INFORMATION ........................................................................ 258
C2013 RETRIEVE SIB SCHEDULING INFORMATION ................................................................. 260
C2014 RETRIEVE MOBILITY STATE INFORMATION .................................................................. 265
C2015 RETRIEVE UE TIMER CONSTANTS INFORMATION ........................................................ 266
C2025 RETRIEVE CELL ACCESS IDLE INFORMATION .............................................................. 271
C2027 RETRIEVE SIB SCHEDULING IDLE INFORMATION ........................................................ 272
C2028 RETRIEVE CELL CAC FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 273
C2029 RETRIEVE ENB CAC FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 276
C2030 RETRIEVE QOS CAC PARAMETER FUNCTION .............................................................. 278
C2031 RETRIEVE SON ANR PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 280
C2033 RETRIEVE SRB RLC INFORMATION ................................................................................ 282
C2034 RETRIEVE QCI DSCP MAP INFORMATION ...................................................................... 284
C2035 RETRIEVE DSCP COS MAP INFORMATION .................................................................... 285
C2038 RETRIEVE QCI VALUE INFORMATION ............................................................................. 286
C2039 RETRIEVE LOGICAL CH INFORMATION .......................................................................... 288
C2040 RETRIEVE RLC INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 290
C2041 RETRIEVE PDCP INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 292
C2042 RETRIEVE GTP INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 294
C2043 RETRIEVE PCCH CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 296
C2044 RETRIEVE PDSCH CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 297
C2045 RETRIEVE PHICH CONFIGURATION IDLE ....................................................................... 298
C2046 RETRIEVE PRACH CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 299
C2047 RETRIEVE PUSCH CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 300
C2048 RETRIEVE RACH CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 302
C2049 RETRIEVE TIME ALIGNMENT INFORMATION ................................................................. 304
C2050 RETRIEVE SOUNDING RS UPLINK CONFIGURATION ................................................... 305
C2051 RETRIEVE UPLINK POWER CONTROL PARAMETER .................................................... 306
C2052 RETRIEVE BCCH CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 308
VIII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C2053 RETRIEVE PUSCH CONFIGURATION IDLE ......................................................................309
C2054 RETRIEVE RACH CONFIGURATION IDLE ........................................................................310
C2055 RETRIEVE CQI REPORTING INFORMATION ....................................................................311
C2056 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY PUSCH INFORMATION ......................................................313
C2057 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY SPS INFORMATION ...........................................................314
C2058 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY SR INFORMATION .............................................................316
C2059 RETRIEVE DEDICATED UL PWR CTRL INFORMATION ..................................................317
C2060 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY UL SRS INFORMATION .....................................................319
C2061 RETRIEVE DPHY RLF INFORMATION ...............................................................................320
C2062 RETRIEVE DRX INFORMATION .........................................................................................321
C2063 RETRIEVE DL SCHEDULER INFORMATION ....................................................................324
C2064 RETRIEVE UL SCHEDULER INFORMATION ....................................................................325
C2065 RETRIEVE TRANSPORT CH BSR INFORMATION ...........................................................326
C2066 RETRIEVE TRANSPORT CH INFORMATION ....................................................................327
C2067 RETRIEVE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION ............................................................329
C2068 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT INFORMATION ....................................................................334
C2069 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT GAP INFORMATION ............................................................336
C2070 RETRIEVE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION ...............................................................337
C2073 RETRIEVE EUTRA A1CRITERIA INFORMATION ..............................................................339
C2078 RETRIEVE EUTRA PERIOD CRITERIA INFORMATION ...................................................349
C2079 RETRIEVE UTRAB1 CRITERIA INFORMATION ................................................................351
C2080 RETRIEVE UTRAB2 CRITERIA INFORMATION ................................................................353
C2081 RETRIEVE UTRA PERIOD CRITERIA INFORMATION ......................................................355
C2088 RETRIEVE QUANTITY CONFIG EUTRA ............................................................................357
C2089 RETRIEVE QUANTITY CONFIG UTRA ...............................................................................358
C2095 RETRIEVE UTRA RESELECT INFORMATION ..................................................................359
C2097 RETRIEVE ROHC INFORMATION ......................................................................................361
C2098 RETRIEVE SECURITY INFORMATION ..............................................................................364
C2100 RETRIEVE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION .....................................................................365
C2102 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFORMATION .....................................................367
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. IX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2105 RETRIEVE MME CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 371
C2106 RETRIEVE SON FUNCTION CELL CONTROL FLAGS ..................................................... 373
C2107 RETRIEVE SON DL ICIC PARAMETERS ........................................................................... 376
C2108 RETRIEVE SON UL ICIC PARAMETERS ........................................................................... 377
C2112 RETRIEVE SON MRO ......................................................................................................... 378
C2113 RETRIEVE CLOCK CONTROL INFORMATION ................................................................. 380
C2114 RETRIEVE QCI BH BW INFORMATION ............................................................................. 381
C2115 RETRIEVE SCTP PARAMETER ......................................................................................... 383
C2116 RETRIEVE SVC GRP BH BW INFORMATION ................................................................... 385
C2117 RETRIEVE SON SELF OPTIMIZATION PARAMETERS .................................................... 387
C2120 CHANGE ENB INFORMATION ........................................................................................... 389
C2121 CHANGE HANDOVER OPTION INFORMATION ............................................................... 391
C2122 CHANGE TIMER INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 393
C2124 CHANGE EUTRAN CELL CONFIGURATION IDLE ........................................................... 403
C2128 CHANGE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMATION .............................................................. 408
C2129 CHANGE CELL ACCESS INFORMATION ......................................................................... 410
C2130 CHANGE CELL RESELECT INFORMATION ..................................................................... 412
C2131 CHANGE CELL SELECT INFORMATION .......................................................................... 414
C2132 CHANGE CSG PCI IDLE INFORMATION ........................................................................... 417
C2133 CHANGE SIB SCHEDULING INFORMATION .................................................................... 419
C2134 CHANGE MOBILITY STATE INFORMATION ..................................................................... 427
C2135 CHANGE UE TIMER CONSTANTS INFORMATION .......................................................... 429
C2145 CHANGE CELL ACCESS IDLE INFORMATION ................................................................ 436
C2147 CHANGE SIB SCHEDULING IDLE INFORMATION ........................................................... 437
C2148 CHANGE CELL CAC FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 439
C2149 CHANGE ENB FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 444
C2150 CHANGE QOS CAC PARAMETER FUNCTION ................................................................. 446
C2151 CHANGE SON ANR PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 448
C2153 CHANGE SRB RLC INFORMATION ................................................................................... 452
C2154 CHANGE QCI DSCP MAP INFORMATION ........................................................................ 457
C2155 CHANGE DSCP COS MAP INFORMATION ....................................................................... 458
C2158 CHANGE QCI VALUE INFORMATION ............................................................................... 459
C2159 CHANGE LOGICAL CH INFORMATION ............................................................................ 463
C2160 CHANGE RLC INFORMATION ........................................................................................... 466
X SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C2161 CHANGE PDCP INFORMATION .........................................................................................474
C2162 CHANGE GTP INFORMATION ............................................................................................476
C2163 CHANGE PCCH CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................478
C2164 CHANGE PDSCH CONFIGURATION .................................................................................479
C2165 CHANGE PHICH CONFIGURATION IDLE ..........................................................................481
C2166 CHANGE PRACH CONFIGURATION .................................................................................482
C2167 CHANGE PUSCH CONFIGURATION .................................................................................484
C2168 CHANGE RACH CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................486
C2169 CHANGE TIME ALIGNMENT INFORMATION ....................................................................491
C2170 CHANGE SOUNDING RS UPLINK CONFIGURATION ......................................................492
C2171 CHANGE UPLINK POWER CONTROL PARAMETER .......................................................493
C2172 CHANGE BCCH CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................496
C2173 CHANGE PUSCH CONFIGURATION IDLE ........................................................................497
C2174 CHANGE RACH CONFIGURATION IDLE ..........................................................................498
C2175 CHANGE CQI REPORTING INFORMATION ......................................................................499
C2176 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY PUSCH INFORMATION ........................................................501
C2177 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY SPS INFORMATION .............................................................502
C2178 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY SR INFORMATION ................................................................506
C2179 CHANGE DEDICATED UL PWR CTRL INFORMATION ....................................................507
C2180 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY UL SRS INFORMATION .......................................................509
C2181 CHANGE DPHY RLF INFORMATION .................................................................................510
C2182 CHANGE DRX INFORMATION ...........................................................................................512
C2183 CHANGE DL SCHEDULER INFORMATION .......................................................................523
C2184 CHANGE UL SCHEDULER INFORMATION .......................................................................525
C2185 CHANGE TRANSPORT CH BSR INFORMATION ..............................................................526
C2186 CHANGE TRANSPORT CH INFORMATION ......................................................................529
C2187 CHANGE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION ...............................................................532
C2188 CHANGE MEASUREMENT INFORMATION .......................................................................541
C2189 CHANGE MEASUREMENT GAP INFORMATION ..............................................................543
C2190 CHANGE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION .................................................................545
C2193 CHANGE EUTRA A1CRITERIA INFORMATION ................................................................548
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XI

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2197 CHANGE EUTRA A5CRITERIA INFORMATION ................................................................ 564
C2198 CHANGE EUTRA PERIOD CRITERIA INFORMATION ..................................................... 568
C2199 CHANGE UTRAB1 CRITERIA INFORMATION .................................................................. 571
C2200 CHANGE UTRAB2 CRITERIA INFORMATION .................................................................. 575
C2201 CHANGE UTRA PERIOD CRITERIA INFORMATION ........................................................ 579
C2208 CHANGE QUANTITY CONFIG EUTRA .............................................................................. 582
C2209 CHANGE QUANTITY CONFIG UTRA ................................................................................. 583
C2215 CHANGE UTRA RESELECT INFORMATION .................................................................... 585
C2217 CHANGE ROHC INFORMATION ........................................................................................ 587
C2218 CHANGE SECURITY INFORMATION ................................................................................ 592
C2220 CHANGE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION ....................................................................... 593
C2221 CHANGE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD INFORMATION ............................................ 596
C2222 CHANGE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFORMATION ....................................................... 603
C2225 CHANGE MME CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 609
C2226 CHANGE SON FUNCTION CELL CONTROL FLAGS ....................................................... 612
C2227 CHANGE SON DL ICIC PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 616
C2228 CHANGE SON UL ICIC PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 617
C2231 CHANGE SON MRO ............................................................................................................ 618
C2232 CHANGE CLOCK CONTROL INFORMATION ................................................................... 621
C2233 CHANGE QCI BH BW INFORMATION ............................................................................... 622
C2234 CHANGE SCTP PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 625
C2235 CHANGE SVC GRP BH BW INFORMATION ..................................................................... 627
C2236 CHANGE SON SELF OPTIMIZATION PARAMETERS ...................................................... 630
C2237 CHANGE SIGNAL DSCP INFORMATION .......................................................................... 632
C2238 CREATE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMATION ............................................................... 633
C2239 RETRIEVE SIGNAL DSCP INFORMATION ........................................................................ 635
C2244 CREATE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION ....................................................................... 636
C2245 CREATE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD INFORMATION ............................................. 639
C2246 CREATE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFORMATION ........................................................ 646
C2249 DELETE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMATION ............................................................... 652
C2255 DELETE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION ........................................................................ 653
C2256 DELETE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD INFORMATION .............................................. 654
C2257 DELETE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFORMATION ......................................................... 655
C2260 RETRIEVE SON FUNCTION ENB CONTROL FLAGS ....................................................... 656
XII SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C2261 CHANGE SON FUNCTION ENB CONTROL FLAGS .........................................................657
C2266 RETRIEVE SON RO .............................................................................................................659
C2267 CHANGE SON RO ...............................................................................................................662
C2272 RETRIEVE HYBRID PCI RANGE INFORMATION ..............................................................669
C2273 CHANGE HYBRID PCI RANGE INFORMATION ................................................................671
C2274 RETRIEVE OPEN PCI RANGE INFORMATION .................................................................673
C2275 CHANGE OPEN PCI RANGE INFORMATION ....................................................................675
C2276 RETRIEVE POSITIONING CONFIGURATION ....................................................................677
C2277 CHANGE POSITIONING CONFIGURATION ......................................................................679
C2292 RETRIEVE SRS NEIGHBOR CELL CONFIGURATION .....................................................682
C2303 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD INFORMATION ...........................................683
C2304 RETRIEVE SYSTEM UE COUNT ........................................................................................687
C2305 RETRIEVE HANDOVER OPTION INFORMATION .............................................................688
C2306 RETRIEVE CELL UE COUNT ..............................................................................................690
C2307 CHANGE SRS INFORMATION ............................................................................................692
C2308 RETRIEVE SRS INFORMATION .........................................................................................693
C2309 RETRIEVE INTERWORK PARAMETER .............................................................................694
C2310 RETRIEVE SON LB INFORMATION ...................................................................................695
C2311 CHANGE SON LB INFORMATION .....................................................................................698
C2312 RETRIEVE SCHEDULER SERVER CONFIGURATION ....................................................702
C2313 CHANGE SCHEDULER SERVER CONFIGURATION .......................................................703
C2314 RETRIEVE SON SRS PARAMETERS ................................................................................704
C2315 CHANGE SON SRS PARAMETERS ..................................................................................705
C2316 RETRIEVE SMARTCELL AND SCHEDULER INTERWORKING CONFIGURATION ........707
C2317 CHANGE SMARTCELL AND SCHEDULER INTERWORKING CONFIGURATION ..........709
C2320 RETRIEVE IDLE MODE LB INFORMATION .......................................................................711
C2321 CHANGE IDLE MODE LB INFORMATION .........................................................................712
C2331 CHANGE INTERWORK PARAMETER ...............................................................................713
C2333 RETRIEVE EUTRAN CELL INFORMATION .......................................................................714
C2334 CHANGE EUTRAN CELL INFORMATION ..........................................................................718
C2335 RETRIEVE EMERGENCY AREA ID ....................................................................................724
C2336 CHANGE EMERGENCY AREA ID ......................................................................................727
C2338 CHANGE UTRA CARRIER SIB INFORMATION .................................................................731
C2339 RETRIEVE UTRA CARRIER SIB INFORMATION ..............................................................734
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2343 RETRIEVE INTERWORKING OPTION ............................................................................... 736
C2344 CHANGE INTERWORKING OPTION .................................................................................. 738
C2370 CHANGE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION ................................................................. 740
C2371 RETRIEVE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION .............................................................. 741
C2372 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE1 ................................................................................. 742
C2373 CHANGE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE1 .................................................................................... 747
C2374 RETRIEVE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION ............................................................ 757
C2375 CHANGE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMATION .............................................................. 758
C2376 RETRIEVE RIM CONTROL ................................................................................................. 759
C2377 RETRIEVE UTRAN MIB ...................................................................................................... 760
C2378 CHANGE UTRAN MIB ......................................................................................................... 763
C2379 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB1 ........................................................................................................ 768
C2380 CHANGE UTRA SIB1 .......................................................................................................... 770
C2381 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB3 ........................................................................................................ 774
C2382 CHANGE UTRA SIB3 .......................................................................................................... 777
C2383 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB7 ..................................................................................................... 783
C2384 CHANGE UTRAN SIB7 ....................................................................................................... 784
C2385 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB11 ................................................................................................... 785
C2386 CHANGE UTRAN SIB11 ..................................................................................................... 786
C2387 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB RELATION ...................................................................................... 788
C2388 CHANGE UTRA SIB RELATION ......................................................................................... 789
C2389 CHANGE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE 2 ................................................................................... 791
C2390 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB RESERVED .................................................................................. 800
C2391 CHANGE UTRAN SIB RESERVED ..................................................................................... 802
C2394 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE 2 ................................................................................ 805
C2400 RETRIEVE DIAG CALL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................ 809
C2401 CHANGE DIAG CALL CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 811
C2409 RETRIEVE FEMTO MOBILITY CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 813
C2410 CHANGE FEMTO MOBILITY CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 814
C2412 CHANGE SRS NEIGHBOR CELL CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 816
C2432 RETRIEVE PUCCH CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 818
C2433 CHANGE PUCCH CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 819
C2435 RETRIEVE UL RESOURCE CONFIGURATION ................................................................. 820
C2436 CHANGE UL RESOURCE CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 821
XIV SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C2477 RETRIEVE CELL THROUGHPUT .......................................................................................822
C2480 CHANGE ACCESS BARRING PARAMETERS ..................................................................823
C2481 RETRIEVE ACCESS BARRING PARAMETERS ................................................................834
C2484 RETRIEVE QOS CAC QCI PARAMETER FUNCTION .......................................................840
C2485 CHANGE QOS CAC QCI PARAMETER FUNCTION ..........................................................842
C2495 RETRIEVE CHANNELCARD UE COUNT ...........................................................................845
C2499 RETRIEVE ENB INFORMATION .........................................................................................846
C2516 RETRIEVE RRH CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................848
C2517 CHANGE RRH CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................852
C2518 RETRIEVE DURU PORT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................857
C2530 RETRIEVE SYSTEM STATE/STATUS ................................................................................858
C2531 RETRIEVE CELL STATE/STATUS .....................................................................................859
C2533 RETRIEVE CELL DATA .......................................................................................................861
C2608 RETRIEVE REMOTE DEVICE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA .........................................862
C2609 CHANGE REMOTE DEVICE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA ...........................................863
C2614 RETRIEVE REMOTE DEVICE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGURATION ............................865
C2615 CHANGE REMOTE DEVICE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGURATION .............................868
C2632 RETRIEVE RRH STATUS ....................................................................................................870
C2635 RETRIEVE GPSR STATUS .................................................................................................872
C2637 RETRIEVE S1 STATUS .......................................................................................................874
C2639 RETRIEVE PRB USAGE ......................................................................................................876
C2644 RETRIEVE PSU STATUS ....................................................................................................877
C2647 RETRIEVE X2 STATUS .......................................................................................................879
C2803 RETRIEVE CELL COMMON CHANNEL STATE ................................................................880
C2808 RETRIEVE TX POWER ONLINE TEST RESULT ................................................................882
C2809 TERMINATE ONGOING TEST ............................................................................................884
C2811 EXECUTE BER TEST ..........................................................................................................885
C2814 EXECUTE LOOPBACK TEST .............................................................................................887
C2815 EXECUTE MODEL TEST .....................................................................................................889
C2816 EXECUTE OCNS TEST .......................................................................................................891
C2817 EXECUTE OPTIC DATA TEST ............................................................................................892
C2818 MEASURE THE CELL TRANSMITTED POWER ................................................................893
C2819 MEASURE THE ANTENNA VSWR .....................................................................................895
C2821 CHANGE TX POWER ONLINE TEST INFORMATION .......................................................897
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XV

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2822 RETRIEVE TX POWER ONLINE TEST INFORMATION .................................................... 899
C2862 CHANGE SON ANR FUNCTION SCHEDULES .................................................................. 900
C2863 RETRIEVE SON ANR FUNCTION SCHEDULES ............................................................... 902
XVI SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

Command Description
C0062 RETRIEVE BULKCM SESSION STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-BKCM-SESS;
Command Description
Retrieves the last execution result in the Bulk CM session. The user can retrieve the session ID,
session execution state and detailed execution session state.
TIMEOUT 30
Input Parameter Description

No input parameter.
Output Parameter Description

ID The Bulk CM session ID.
STATE The state of the last executed Bulk CM (uploadCompleted,

downloadCompleted, activationCompleted).
STATE_DETAIL The detailed state of the last executed BulkCM.
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1

Command Description
C0063 RETRIEVE CALL STATE/STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-CALL-STS: CELL_NUM, [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves E-RAB (E-Utran Radio Access Bearer) by QCI [QoS (Quality of Service) Class Iden-
tifier] of the calls in a cell. The command displays the cumulative E-RAB count for 256 QCIs
per cell.
TIMEOUT 10
Parameter Description Range Unit Default

CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not 0~8 NONE 0
exceed the maximum number of cells sup-
ported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum
capacity provided to the carrier per system
is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are sup-
ported.
QCI QCI index. The range is from 0 to 255. The 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
standard QCIs defined in the standard doc-
uments is 1 to 9. The user can use QCI val-
ues 0 and 10-255.

CELL_NUM The cell number. This value must not exceed the maximum
number of cells supported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum capacity provided to
the carrier per system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are sup-
ported.
QCI QCI index. The range is from 0 to 255. The standard QCIs
defined in the standard documents is 1 to 9. The user can use
QCI values 0 and 10-255.
DRB_CNT The number of E-RABs (E-Utran Radio Access Bearers) set per
QCI.
2 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C0101 CHANGE CELL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-CONF: CELL_NUM, [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE];
Command Description
Changes the cell ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE parameter. The user can enter CELL_NUM to
select the cell to be changed. The user can control the cells service by changing the
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE parameter of the cell to locked, unlocked or shuttingDown. When
a cell is set to locked, the cell terminates the current call and stops servicing calls. When a cell is
set to unlocked, the cell starts call services. When a cell is set to shuttingDown, the cell stops
receiving further call service requests. When the current call process is complete, the cell enters
the unlocked state and does not service any calls.
TIMEOUT 10

ported by the system. It is determined by
FA/Sector. For example, if the maximum
capacity provided to the carrier per system
is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are sup-
ported.

Command Description

ADMINISTRATI The administrative state of the cell config- locked/unlocked/shut- NONE locked
VE_STATE ured by the user. The initial value is locked tingDown/
when growing the system. This can be
changed later by the user.
- locked: A transitional state in the cell
grow/degrow process. In this state,
resources are grown in the PLD but no call
services are offered. The user can delete
resources or change them to the unlocked
state so that a call service can be offered.
- unlocked: The cell growth is complete.
The grown resources are available in the
PLD to offer a call service.
- shuttingDown: A transitional state in the
cell degrowth process. In this state, the
grown resources in the PLD continue to
offer the call service of the previous
unlocked state but does not offer any new
call services. When the current call service
is complete, the resources automatically
change to the locked state.

ported.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the cell configured by the user. The
initial value is locked when growing the system. This can be
- locked: A transitional state in the cell grow/degrow process.
In this state, resources are grown in the PLD but no call services
are offered. The user can delete resources or change them to the
unlocked state so that a call service can be offered.
- unlocked: The cell growth is complete. The grown resources
are available in the PLD to offer a call service.
- shuttingDown: A transitional state in the cell degrowth pro-
cess. In this state, the grown resources in the PLD continue to
offer the call service of the previous unlocked state but does not
offer any new call services. When the current call service is
complete, the resources automatically change to the locked
state.

C0102 CHANGE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-SYS-CONF: [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE];
Command Description
Changes the system ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE parameter. The user can control the systems
service by changing the ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE parameter of the system to locked,
unlocked or shuttingDown. When a system is set to locked, the system terminates the current
call and stops servicing calls. When a system is set to unlocked, the system starts call services.
When a system is set to shuttingDown, the system stops receiving further call service requests.
When the current call process is complete, the system enters the unlocked state and does not ser-
vice any calls.
TIMEOUT 10

ADMINISTRATI The administrative state of the system con- locked/unlocked/shut- NONE locked
VE_STATE figured by the user. tingDown/
- locked: A transitional state in the system
- unlocked: The system resource growth is
complete. The grown resources are avail-
able in the PLD to offer a call service.
system resource degrowth process. In this
state, resources are grown in the PLD and
continue to offer the call service of the pre-
vious unlocked state but no call services
are offered. When the current call service is
complete, the resources automatically

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the system configured by the user.
- locked: A transitional state in the system grow/degrow pro-

Command Description
cess. In this state, resources are grown in the PLD but no call
services are offered. The user can delete resources or change
them to the unlocked state so that a call service can be offered.
- unlocked: The system resource growth is complete. The
grown resources are available in the PLD to offer a call service.
- shuttingDown: A transitional state in the system resource
degrowth process. In this state, resources are grown in the PLD
and continue to offer the call service of the previous unlocked
state but no call services are offered. When the current call ser-
vice is complete, the resources automatically change to the
locked state.

C0133 EXPORT AND UPLOAD PART OF CONFIG-

URATION
Command Format
UPLD-CONF-FILE: [DATA_FILE_REF], [MO_XPATH];
Command Description
Uploads the data stored in the System system database to the EMS in XML format. The user
must enter the path of the EMS data file in the DATA_FILE_REFERENCE parameter. To upload
only part of the data, the data name must be specified in the MO_XPATH parameter. If this
parameter is not specified, the entire data in the System database is included in the XML file for
uploading. When the System system receives this command, it sends a response to the EMS
immediately. When the upload is complete, a separate notification is sent to the EMS. When the
upload is successfully complete, the user can see the XML data file in the specified EMS direc-
tory.
TIMEOUT 10

DATA_FILE_RE The path of the configuration data file to be 256 NONE -
F uploaded in the EMS. For example, if the
user enters /log/conf/{neTYPE}/123/data-
file.xml, the file named datafile.xml will be
uploaded to the /log/conf/{neTYPE}/123
directory.
MO_XPATH The name of the data to be uploaded from 256 NONE *
the System system database. For example,
if the user enters ManagedElement, the
ManagedElement (the basic NE informa-
tion) data in the system is stored as the file
specified in the DATA_FILE_REF parame-
ter.

No output parameter.

Command Description
C0136 RESTORE PLD
Command Format
RST-PLD: PLD_BACKUP_FILE_REF, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Restores the database by applying the backup database stored in the EMS to the System. In the
PLD_BACKUP_FILE_REF parameter, the user must enter the file name and location where the
backup database is to be stored in the EMS. If it is not entered, an error occurs. The user can give
any value to the INVOCATION_ID parameter. This value is included in the result notification
after the command execution. If the same command is executed by more than one user, this is
useful for identifying the users who executed the command. When the System system receives
this command, it sends a response to the EMS immediately. When the restore is complete, a sep-
arate notification is sent to the EMS. The backup database is a tar of the binary data files consti-
tuting the database compressed in the GZIP format. Note that a system error may occur if the
user specify a file other than the backup database.
TIMEOUT 10

PLD_BACKUP_ The location of the backup PLD file in the 128 NONE -
FILE_REF EMS, which will be restored to the System.
For example, if the user enter /log/bak/pld/
{neTYPE}/123/{neTYPE}123.20110319-
173100.backup.db.tar.gz, the NE system
database is restored using the file named
{neTYPE}123.20110319-
173100.backup.db.tar.gz in the /log/bak/
pld/{neTYPE}/123 directory of the EMS.
INVOCATION_I The invocation ID used during PLD restore 0 ~ NONE NONE NONE
D and when returning the result. For exam-
ple, if the user enter 1234 for the invocation
ID, 1234 is displayed in the invocation item
of the PLD restore notification sent to the
EMS.


C0137 BACKUP PLD
Command Format
BKUP-PLD: [PLD_BACKUP_FILE_REF], [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Backs up the System database to the EMS. In the PLD_BACKUP_FILE_REF parameter, the
user must enter the file name and location where the backup database is to be stored in the EMS.
If nothing is entered, the default directory and file name are specified automatically as follows:
- Directory: /log/bak/pld/{neTYPE}/{neID}.
- File name: {neTYPE}{neID}.yyyymmdd-hhMMss.backup.db.tar.gz.
- File information: yyyy: Year, mm: Month, dd: Day, hh: Hour, MM: Minute, ss: Second. The
user can give any value to the INVOCATION_ID parameter. This value is included in the result
notification after the command execution. If the same command is executed by more than one
user, this is useful for identifying the users who executed the command. When the System sys-
tem receives this command, it sends a response to the EMS immediately. When the backup is
complete, a separate notification is sent to the EMS. The backup database is a tar of the binary
data files constituting the database compressed in the GZIP format.
TIMEOUT 10

PLD_BACKUP_ The location in EMS where the PLD file of 128 NONE -
FILE_REF the System will be backed up. For example,
if the user enter /log/bak/pld/{neTYPE}/123/
{neTYPE}123.20110319-
173100.backup.db.tar.gz, the NE system
database is backed up using the file named
{neTYPE}123.20110319-
173100.backup.db.tar.gz in the /log/bak/
pld/{neTYPE}/123 directory of the EMS.
INVOCATION_I The invocation ID used during PLD backup 0 ~ NONE NONE NONE
D and when returning the result. For exam-
ple, if the user enter 1234 for the invocation
ID, 1234 is displayed in the invocation item
of the PLD backup notification sent to the
EMS.

Command Description


C0138 IMPORT CONFIGURATION FILE
Command Format
IMPT-CONF-FILE: PLD_IMPORT_FILE_REF, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Import EMS XML PLD file to the System.
TIMEOUT 10

PLD_IMPORT_ It specify the EMS PLD Xml file path to 128 NONE -
FILE_REF apply for System. The file path must
include a full directory path and a file name.
For example, if the user enters /log/conf/
{neTYPE}/123/datafile.xml, the file named
datafile.xml in the directory /log/conf/
{neTYPE}/123 will be applied to the sys-
tem.
INVOCATION_I It used to identify the command result of 0 ~ NONE NONE NONE
D Import PLD Xml file.


Command Description
C0139 EXPORT CONFIGURATION FILE
Command Format
EXPT-CONF-FILE: [PLD_EXPORT_FILE_REF], [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Export Xml file of System PLD to the EMS storage
TIMEOUT 10

PLD_EXPORT_ It specify the file path to store the System 128 NONE -
FILE_REF Exported PLD Xml file. The file path must
include a full directory path and a file name.
For example, if the user enters /log/conf/
{neTYPE}/123/datafile.xml, the file named
datafile.xml will be uploaded to the /log/
conf/{neTYPE}/123 directory.
INVOCATION_I It carries PLD backup invocation ID from 0 ~ NONE NONE NONE
D IRP Manager. InvocationId shall reusing
when issuing notification after PLD backup


C0152 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE BATCH
Command Format
UDT-FW-BAT: BATCH_FILE, [APPLY_ACTION], [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Applies the firmware in a batch format. If this command is executed, the NE downloads the
batch file specified by the parameter and starts applying the firmware files included in the batch
file. Devices are applied directly to the main board while firmware files are applied to the sub
boards in parallel. After applying the firmware, the user must reset the target unit to run the
applied firmware. Before executing this command, the DNLD-FW(-BAT) command must be
executed in advance and all the specified firmware files must be downloaded to the NE.
TIMEOUT 10

BATCH_FILE The batch file name. It must be the full 256 NONE -
name of the file including the directory
name and the actual file name.
APPLY_ACTIO An action to be taken after applying the NONE/REBOOT/ NONE NONE
N firmware. The unit must be reset after
applying the firmware. The user can
choose to apply the firmware without reset
in order to avoid frequent resets.
- NONE: The firmware is applied without
reset.
- REBOOT: The firmware is applied and
the target unit is reset subsequently.
INVOCATION_I The command execution result ID assigned 0 ~ NONE NONE 0
D when executing the command. It is
recorded in the result notification after the
command execution and used when receiv-
ing and processing the command execution
result notification in the GUI.


Command Description
C0153 ACTIVATE NE SOFTWARE PACKAGE
Command Format
UDT-PKG: PACKAGE_VERSION, RELEASE_VERSION, ACTIVATION_MODE, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Applies a package to the NE. The package can be applied in two methods. The first is the online
upgrade method. This upgrade method does not restart the entire system but only restarts the
software components when upgrading them. The advantage is the short activation time, but this
method cannot be used when there are changes to the operating system or the firmware. The sec-
ond method is upgrade by rebooting. This upgrade method reboots the entire system. The disad-
vantage is the long activation time, but this method guarantees stable upgrading. Before
executing this command, the DNLD-PKG command must be executed at least once and two or
more versions of the package must be available in the NE.
TIMEOUT 10

PACKAGE_VE The package version to be used for 128 NONE -
RSION upgrading the package.
RELEASE_VE The release version to be used for upgrad- 128 NONE -
RSION ing the package
ACTIVATION_ The package activation mode. The user REBOOT/AP_RESET/ NONE REBOO
MODE can finish the package activation by reboot- T
ing the system or restarting the software
units while the operating system is running.
- REBOOT: The package is activated by
rebooting the system.
- AP_RESET: The package is activated by
resetting the application software.


C0154 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE UNIT
Command Format
UDT-SW: SW_UNIT_NAME, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Applies the software unit to NE. The software unit can be applied in two methods. The first
method is to apply the software unit to data files. This usually involves applying files stored in
the storage, for example configuration files. When the command is executed for these files, the
new files replace the old files. The data files are then applied after the NE restarts. The second
method involves applying the software unit running in demon. This replaces the runnable soft-
ware units with new software unit and restarts it. Before executing this command, the DNLD-
SW(-BAT) command must be executed in advance.
TIMEOUT 10

SW_UNIT_NA The name of the software unit to be 128 NONE -
ME applied. It must be the full name of the
actual file name.


Command Description
C0155 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE BATCH
Command Format
UDT-SW-BAT: BATCH_FILE, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Applies the software unit in batch format. If this command is executed, the NE downloads the
batch file specified by the parameter and starts applying the software unit included in the batch
file. The software unit running on the main board is updated on the main board and the software
unit running on the sub board is updated on the sub board. The software unit running both on the
main board and on the sub board is updated on the both boards simultaneously. Before executing
this command, the DNLD-SW(-BAT) command must be executed in advance and the specified
software unit must be downloaded to the NE.
TIMEOUT 10



C0156 RETRIEVE ALL THE ACTIVE SOFTWARE

UNIT
Command Format
RTRV-ACT-SW: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the currently activated software unit. The software units included in the software list
are either data units or active units. The data units are stored in the disk for reference by active
software units and the active units run as demons on the eNB. This command can be used for
retrieving the status of the software units running as demons.
TIMEOUT 20

PRC_UNIT_TY The processor unit type to be retrieved. If UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE no type is entered, all units are selected.
- UMP: The main processor of the system.
- ECP: The channel card processor for call
processing.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit to be retrieved. 0~2 NONE 0
If no ID is entered, all unit IDs are selected.
- 0 if the processor unit type selected is
UMP.
- 0 to 2 if the processor unit type selected
is ECP.

PRC_UNIT_TYPE The type of the processor unit where the active software unit is
running.
- UMP: The main processor of the eNB.
- ECP: The channel card processor of the eNB.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit where the active software unit is
running.
ID The list ID of the active software unit running on the retrieved

Command Description
processor unit. (The list order is the same as the order of the
active software unit in the software list.)
NAME The name of the disk where the active software unit is stored.
SIZE The file size of the software unit existing as a file. (The file can
be validated by the size value.)
CHKSUM The checksum value of the software unit existing as a file (the
file can be validated by the chksum value).
VERSION The package version of the software unit existing as a file. (The
file is validated by the version value.)
RELVER The release version of the software unit existing as a file. (The
file can be validated by the relver value.)
ACTIVATION_TIME The activation time of the active software unit.
STATUS The current state of the active software unit.

- DEACT: The software unit is deactivated.
- ACT: The software unit is activated.
- DISABLED: The software unit is inhibited from reactivation
because it was deactivated 10 times or more for 3 minutes.
DEACT_COUNT The deactivation count of the active software unit.

C0157 CHANGE ENVIRONMENT DATA
Command Format
CHG-ENV-INF: ENV_NAME, [ENV_VALUE];
Command Description
Changes environment variables of the NE. If only envName is specified, the selected envName
is deleted from the environment variables. If both envName and envValue are specified, the
specified environment information is recorded in the flash memory.
TIMEOUT 10

ENV_NAME The name of the environment variable. 128 NONE -
ENV_VALUE The value of the environment variable. If 128 NONE -
the variable value is not entered, the speci-
fied environment variable is deleted from
the flash memory.


Command Description
C0158 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE UNIT
Command Format
DNLD-FW: FW_UNIT_NAME, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Downloads the firmware file to the NE. Firmwares such as Booter, Kernel, RFS, RFS_RAW,
RU/RRH, IF-FPGA, post, EPLD, and GPS can be downloaded to the NE as well as to various
devices included in the NE.
TIMEOUT 10

FW_UNIT_NA The name of the firmware unit to be 128 NONE -
ME applied. It must be the full name of the file
including the directory name and the actual
file name.


C0159 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE BATCH
Command Format
DNLD-FW-BAT: BATCH_FILE, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Downloads the firmware recorded in the batch file on the main board of the NE. This command
downloads firmware files to the NE. Firmwares such as Booter, Kernel, RFS, RFS_RAW, RU/
RRH, IF-FPGA, post, EPLD, and GPS can be downloaded to the NE as well as to various
devices included in the NE.
TIMEOUT 10



Command Description
C0160 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE PACKAGE
Command Format
DNLD-PKG: PACKAGE_VERSION, RELEASE_VERSION, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Downloads the package. The user must enter the package version and release version to down-
load the package. When the software units of the new package are downloaded, the database
managed by the NE is automatically migrated into the new package's database. This procedure
ensures that the configuration information in the older version of the NE is maintained in the
new package.
TIMEOUT 10

PACKAGE_VE The new package version to be down- 128 NONE -
RSION loaded to the NE.
RELEASE_VE The new release version to be downloaded 128 NONE -
RSION to the NE.


C0161 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE
Command Format
DNLD-SW: SW_UNIT_NAME, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Downloads the software unit to the system. When a software patch for the system is distributed,
this command is used for downloading the necessary software unit to apply the patch. The soft-
ware units available for download to the NE are included in the software list. A software unit not
included in the software list cannot be downloaded.
TIMEOUT 10

SW_UNIT_NA The name of the software unit included in 128 NONE -
ME the software list. It must be the full name of
the file including the directory name and the
actual file name.


Command Description
C0162 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE BATCH
Command Format
DNLD-SW-BAT: BATCH_FILE, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Downloads the software unit included in a batch file. When a software patch for the system is
distributed, the software unit necessary for applying the patch is included in a batch file and
downloaded on the main board of the NE. The software unit available for download to the NE is
included in the software list. A software unit not included in the software list cannot be down-
loaded.
TIMEOUT 10



C0163 RETRIEVE ENVIRONMENT DATA
Command Format
RTRV-ENV-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the environment information of the NE. This command is used for retrieving all envi-
ronment information recorded in the flash memory.
TIMEOUT 20

No input parameter.

ENV_NAME The environment variable name.
ENV_VALUE The environment variable value.

Command Description
C0164 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR FIRMWARE LIST
Command Format
RTRV-PRC-FW: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID], [LOC_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieves the firmware version of the processor unit. The retrieved information is stored in the
flash memory. The following firmware types are available for the processor unit: BOOTER,
KERNEL, RFS_RAW, RFS, POST, IF-FPGA, CLOCK_CPLD, and CTRL_CPLD.
TIMEOUT 20

PRC_UNIT_TY The type of the processor unit for which the UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE firmware version is to be retrieved. If no
type is entered, all processor units are
selected.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit for which the 0~2 NONE 0
firmware version is to be retrieved. If no ID
is entered, all unit IDs are selected.
LOC_TYPE The type of the location where the firmware FLASH/RUNNING/ NONE FLASH
version is to be retrieved. Either the version
stored in the flash memory or the currently
running firmware version can be retrieved.
- FLASH: The firmware version stored in
the flash memory.
- RUNNING: The currently running firm-
ware version.

PRC_UNIT_TYPE The processor unit where the firmware version is retrieved (If
no unit is specified, all processor units are selected).
PRC_UNIT_ID The board ID of the processor unit where the firmware version
is retrieved. (If not ID is specified, all unit IDs are selected.)
LOC_TYPE The type of the location where the firmware version is retrieved
(if no location is specified, both the version stored in the flash

memory and the currently running firmware version can be

selected).
- FLASH: The firmware version stored in the flash memory.
- RUNNING: The currently running firmware version.
ID The list ID of the firmware version retrieved.
TYPE The type of the firmware unit existing as a file.
NAME The file name of the firmware unit existing as a file.
VERSION The package version of the firmware unit existing as a file. (The
file can be validated.)
REL_VER The release version of the firmware unit existing as a file. (The
file can be validated.)
FILE_SIZE The file size value of the firmware unit existing as a file. (The
firmware can be validated.)
CHKSUM The checksum value of the firmware unit existing as a file. (The
firmware can be validated.)
BUILD_TIME The build date of the firmware unit existing as a file. (The build
date of the firmware can be checked.)

Command Description
C0165 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR INVENTORY

LIST
Command Format
RTRV-PRC-INVT: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the inventory information of the processor unit. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) has
its unique inventory information which includes the serial number, hardware/firmware version,
unit type, unit ID, family type, and install date. The inventory information suggested by
TS32.692 can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 20

PE firmware version is to be retrieved. If no
selected.
processing.
PRC_UNIT_ID It carries ID of processor unit. 0~2 NONE 0

PRC_UNIT_TYPE The processor unit where the firmware version is retrieved (If
no unit is specified, all processor units are selected).
PRC_UNIT_ID The board ID of the processor unit where the firmware version
is retrieved. (If not ID is specified, all unit IDs are selected.)
UNIT_ID The ID of the inventory unit (unique in the eNB).
FAMILY_TYPE The vendor family type of the inventory unit.

TYPE_NUM The vendor type number of the inventory unit (the same unit
unique number as PBA_ID).
VERSION The version of the inventory unit (hardware or firmware ver-

sion).
SERIAL The serial number of the inventory unit.
VENDOR The vendor name of the inventory unit.
MNF_DATE The manufactured date of the inventory unit.
INSTALL_DATE The installation date of the inventory unit (the date the unit was
installed on the field).
SERV_DATE The last service date of the inventory unit.
SERV_DATA The last service data of the inventory unit.
POSITION The location of the inventory unit.
MNF_DATA Additional information provided by the manufacturer for the

inventory unit.

Command Description
C0166 UPLOAD INVENTORY
Command Format
UPLD-INVT: FILE_NAME, [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Upload files which exported inventory information to Management System.
TIMEOUT 20

FILE_NAME It carries the inventory file name include 256 NONE -
directory path to be saved.
INVOCATION_I It carries software unit activation invocation 0 ~ NONE NONE 0
D ID from IRP Manager. InvocationId shall
reusing when issuing notification after acti-
vation


C0167 RETRIEVE THE ACTIVE PACKAGE VER-

SION
Command Format
RTRV-PKG-VER;
Command Description
Retrieves the package version. A software package has its unique version according to its func-
tions and features. This command can be used for verifying the software package running on the
NE. There are two types of version information: package version and release version. The pack-
age version is determined by the main features provided by the NE. When features are added or
changed, most of them are no longer compatible with the previous functions and therefore the
package must be upgraded. The release version is used as an auxiliary identifier when a revision
is made in the same package version.
TIMEOUT 20

No input parameter.

ID The list ID of the package version, which indicates the list order
of the package version.
PKG_VER The package version of the currently active package in the NE.
REL_VER The release version of the currently active package in the NE.
STATUS Indicates package activation status.

Command Description
C0168 DELETE ALL THE PASSIVE PACKAGE

VERSION
Command Format
DLT-PASV-PKG;
Command Description
Delete all the system passive package version
TIMEOUT 20

No input parameter.


C0169 RESET THE SYSTEM
Command Format
INIT-SYS: [RESET_MODE], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Resets the system. Two methods are available for the system reset. The first is a software reset
which resets the software without disconnecting the power. The second is a hardware reset
which involves disconnecting the power and connecting it back.(The systems which do not have
hardware reset are not supported.)
TIMEOUT 10

RESET_MODE The reset method. Hardware and software SW/HW/ NONE SW
resets are supported.
- SW: Reset without disconnecting the
power.
- HW: Reset by disconnecting the power
and connecting it back. The systems which
do not have hardware reset are not sup-
ported.
FORCED_MOD It carries forced reset mode. OFF/ON/ NONE OFF
E - OFF: Do check environment and PLD
before Reset.
- ON: Do Not check environment and PLD
before Reset.


Command Description
C0170 RESET PROCESSOR UNIT
Command Format
INIT-PRC: PRC_UNIT_TYPE, [PRC_UNIT_ID], [RESET_MODE];
Command Description
Resets the processor unit of the system. Two methods are available for the system reset. The first
is a software reset which resets the software without disconnecting the power. The second is a
hardware reset which involves disconnecting the power and connecting it back.
TIMEOUT 10

PRC_UNIT_TY The processor unit type to be reset. UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE - UMP: The main processor of the system.
processing.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit to be reset. 0~2 NONE 0
UMP.
is ECP.
RESET_MODE The reset method. Hardware and software SW/HW/ NONE SW
resets are supported.
- SW: Reset without disconnecting the
power.
- HW: Reset by disconnecting the power
and connecting it back.


C0171 RESET SOFTWARE UNIT
Command Format
INIT-SW: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID], [SW_UNIT_NAME];
Command Description
Resets the software unit. The software unit only running on the main board is reset on the main
board and the software unit only running on the sub board is reset on the sub board. The software
unit running on both the main board and the sub board is reset on both the main board and the
sub board.
TIMEOUT 10

PRC_UNIT_TY The processor unit type to be reset. UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE - UMP: The main processor of the system.
processing.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit to be reset. 0~2 NONE 0
UMP.
is ECP.
SW_UNIT_NA The name of the software unit included in 128 NONE -
ME the software list. Only the file name must be
entered without the directory name.


Command Description
C0172 RETRIEVE ALL THE SOFTWARE UNIT'S

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SW-INF: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the software unit information. Each software unit downloaded to the eNB has a unique
version number assigned by the image creation system for software image creation. The soft-
ware version retrieval function extracts and displays the unique version of each software unit.
This command is used for checking whether appropriate software units are running on appropri-
ate boards.
TIMEOUT 20

PE software version is to be retrieved. If no
selected.
processing.
PRC_UNIT_ID The board ID of the processor unit for 0~2 NONE 0
which the software version is to be
retrieved. If no board ID is entered, all unit
IDs are selected.
- 0 if proUnitType selected is UMP.
- 0 to 2 if prcUnitType selected is ECP.

PRC_UNIT_TYPE The processor unit for which the software version is retrieved.
PRC_UNIT_ID The board ID of the processor unit for which the software ver-
sion is retrieved.

ID The list ID of the software units retrieved on each board
NAME The name of the software unit stored in the disk.
SIZE The size on the disk of the software unit existing as a file
CHKSUM The checksum value of the software unit created.
INSTALL_TIME The time at which the software unit is downloaded to the eNB
and stored in the package directory.
VERSION The unique version of the software unit.
RELVER The release version of the software unit existing as a file
BUILD_TIME The build time of the software unit.

Command Description
C0173 RETRIEVE ALL THE DIRECTORY INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-DIR-INF: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID];
Command Description
List up all the directory information stored at
TIMEOUT 60

PRC_UNIT_TY It carries type of processor unit. UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE

PRC_UNIT_TYPE It carries type of processor unit.
PRC_UNIT_ID It carries ID of processor unit.
ID Software list index.
FILE_PATH The name of software unit(Directory Name + File Name) stored

at Managed Element.
SIZE Indicates the software unist's file size. (Byte)
INSTALL_TIME The time when the software unit was stored on that System.
Time format: -> YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss (e.g,) 2009-05-
23T11:23:55
VERSION Version string on the software unit. Version format -> A.B.C

C0174 RETRIEVE LOADING TIME INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-LDTIME-INF: [PRC_UNIT_TYPE], [PRC_UNIT_ID];
Command Description
List up loading time information
TIMEOUT 60

PRC_UNIT_TY It carries type of processor unit. UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
PE

PRC_UNIT_TYPE It carries type of processor unit.
PRC_UNIT_ID It carries ID of processor unit.
START_TIME The time when the loading start. Time format: -> YYYY-MM-
DDThh:mm:ss (e.g,) 2009-05-23T11:23:55
END_TIME The time when the loading end. Time format: -> YYYY-MM-
DDThh:mm:ss (e.g,) 2009-05-23T11:23:55

Command Description
C0188 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE
Command Format
UDT-FW: FW_UNIT_NAME, APPLY_UNIT_TYPE, APPLY_UNIT_ID, [APPLY_SIDE],
[APPLY_ACTION], [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Updates the firmware. This command is used for applying the downloaded eNB firmware unit to
the actual Flash memory or the target device unit. When the command is executed, the specified
firmware is verified first and then it is applied to the Flash memory or to the specified device
unit through the specified proprietary interface. After applying the firmware, the user must reset
the target unit to run the applied firmware.
TIMEOUT 10

ME applied.
APPLY_UNIT_T The unit type to which the firmware is to be UMP/ECP/GPS/ NONE UMP
YPE applied. FCM_D/
APPLY_UNIT_I The unit ID to be applied to the firmware 0~2 NONE 0
D unit. This is used for identifying each unit
when multiple units exist in the eNB.
APPLY_SIDE The side to which the firmware is to be NONE/A_SIDE/ NONE NONE
applied. If this side is in redundancy, select B_SIDE/BOTH/
A_SIDE, B_SIDE, or BOTH for applying the
firmware. If the unit type does not support
redundancy, select NONE.
- NONE: The firmware apply unit is not in
redundancy.
- A_SIDE: The firmware apply unit is in
redundancy and the firmware is applied to
side A.
- B_SIDE: The firmware apply unit is in
side B.
- BOTH: The firmware apply unit is in
both side A and side B.


reset.
INVOCATION_I The invocation ID assigned when applying 0 ~ NONE NONE 0
D the firmware. This ID is recorded in the
execution result notification for easy
retrieval of the result.


Command Description
C0189 RETRIEVE PSU INVENTORY LIST
Command Format
RTRV-PSU-INVT: CONN_BD_ID, CONN_PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID;
Command Description
Retrieves the inventory information of the PSU unit. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) has its
unique inventory information which includes the serial number, hardware/firmware version, unit
type, unit ID, family type, and install date. The inventory information suggested by TS32.692
can be retrieved
TIMEOUT 20

CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the PSU 0~2 NONE 0
to be retrieved.
CONN_PORT_I The port ID of the board connected to the 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
D PSU to be retrieved.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID connected to the port of 0~2 NONE 0
the board connected to the PSU to be
retrieved.

CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the PSU which is retrieved.
CONN_PORT_ID The port ID of the board connected to the PSU which is

retrieved.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID connected to the port of the board connected to

the PSU which is retrieved.


sion).
FW_VERSION The firmware version of the inventory unit.

inventory unit.

Command Description
C0193 RESET RRH
Command Format
INIT-RRH: [CONN_BD_ID], [CONN_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID];
Command Description
Resets the RRH of the eNB. The RRH reset is done by the VSS reset. One or multiple RRHs can
be reset.
TIMEOUT 10

CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the RRH 0~2 NONE 0
to be reset. If no board ID is entered, all
boards are selected.
D RRH to be reset. If no port ID is entered, all
ports are selected.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID of the port of the board 0~2 NONE 0
connected to the RRH to be reset. If no
cascade ID is entered, all cascades are
selected.


C0206 ACTIVATE RRH FIRMWARE
Command Format
UDT-RRH-FW: FW_UNIT_NAME, [CONN_BD_ID], [CONN_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID],
[APPLY_ACTION], [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Updates the RRH firmware. If this command is executed, the specified firmware is verified first
and then applied to the RRH through the specified proprietary interface. After applying the firm-
ware, the user must reset the target unit to run the applied firmware.
TIMEOUT 10

ME applied.
CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the RRH 0~2 NONE 0
to which the firmware is to be applied.
D RRH to which the firmware is to be applied.
the board connected to the RRH to which
the firmware is to be applied.
reset.


Command Description
C0207 ACTIVATE PSU FIRMWARE
Command Format
UDT-PSU-FW: FW_UNIT_NAME, CONN_BD_ID, CONN_PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID,
[INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Updates the PSU firmware. If this command is executed, the specified firmware is verified first
and then applied to the PSU through the specified proprietary interface.After applying the firm-
ware, the user must reset the target unit to run the applied firmware.
TIMEOUT 10

ME applied.
CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the PSU 0~2 NONE 0
to be retrieved.
D PSU to be retrieved.
the board connected to the PSU to be
retrieved.


C0220 RETRIEVE RRH INVENTORY LIST
Command Format
RTRV-RRH-INVT: [CONN_BD_ID], [CONN_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the inventory information of the RRH unit. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) has its
can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 20

CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the RHH 0~2 NONE 0
for which the firmware version is to be
retrieved.
D RHH for which the firmware version is to be
retrieved.
the board connected to the RHH for which
the firmware version is to be retrieved.

CONN_BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the RHH for which the firm-
ware version is retrieved.
CONN_PORT_ID The port ID of the board connected to the RHH for which the
firmware version is retrieved.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID connected to the port of the board connected to

the RHH for which the firmware version is retrieved.

Command Description

sion).
MNF_DATE Additional information provided by the manufacturer for the

inventory unit.

inventory unit.

C0222 RETRIEVE GPS INVENTORY LIST
Command Format
RTRV-GPS-INVT;
Command Description
Retrieves the inventory information of the GPS unit. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) has its
can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 20

No input parameter.

FAMILY_TYPE Indicates vendor family type of inventory unit.

sion).

Command Description

inventory unit.

C0224 RETRIEVE SFP INVENTORY LIST
Command Format
RTRV-SFP-INVT;
Command Description
Retrieves the inventory information of the SFP module which is an optic module of the eNB.
Each field replaceable unit (FRU) has its unique inventory information which includes the serial
number, hardware/firmware version, unit type, unit ID, family type, and install date. The inven-
tory information suggested by TS32.692 can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 20

No input parameter.

PRC_UNIT_TYPE The type of the processor unit for which the inventory informa-
tion is retrieved.
PRC_UNIT_ID The ID of the processor unit for which the inventory informa-
tion is retrieved.
PORT_ID The port ID on which the SFP module is mounted.
unique number as BA_ID).
VERSION The hardware version of the inventory unit.

Command Description

inventory unit.
WAVELENGTH Tx/Rx optical wavelength supported by the SFP module.

C0246 RESET DSP
Command Format
INIT-DSP: [BD_ID], [DSP_ID];
Command Description
Resets the DSP. The DSP reset is done by disconnecting the power and connecting it back to the
DSP. One or multiple DSPs can be reset.
TIMEOUT 10

BD_ID The board ID of the DSP to be reset. If no 0~2 NONE 0
board ID is entered, all boards are
selected.
DSP_ID The ID of the DSP to be reset. If no DSP ID 0~2 NONE 0
is entered, all DSPs are selected.


Command Description
C0247 RESET GPS
Command Format
INIT-GPS;
Command Description
Resets the GPS. The GPS reset is done by disconnecting the power and connecting it back to
GPS.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


C0249 RESET SCTP
Command Format
INIT-SCTP: TYPE, INDEX;
Command Description
Reset SCTP.
TIMEOUT 10

TYPE It carries type of sctp to reset. S1/X2/ NONE S1
INDEX It carries index of mme(or nbr) to reset. 0 ~ 255 NONE 0


Command Description
C0300 RETRIEVE FILE LIST
Command Format
RTRV-FILE-LIST: [ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the list of NE files. The NE can create the following 8 categories of files, which can be
retrieved by this command. The files created in the NE are uploaded to the EMS and then
deleted. If all the files uploaded to EMS, command execution result can be empty(NO DATA).
- CG: Charging files.
- CM: Configuration files (except for inventory).
- CT: Call trace files (subscriber and equipment trace).
- IM: Inventory management files.
- NL: Notification log files.
- OT: Other files.
- PM: Performance data files.
- TE: Test management files.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
Parameter Description Range Unit
t
ID The list ID of the file created by the NE. If 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
no ID is entered, all files are selected.

ID The list ID of the file created by the NE.
MANAGEMENT_DATA_TYPE The category of the file created (CG/CM/CT/IM/NL/OT/PM/

TE).
SIZE The file size on the disk.
COMPRESSION The compression method of the file.
READY_TIME The creation time of the file.

EXPIRATION_TIME The expiration time of the file created. (The file is automatically
deleted after the expiration time.)
FORMAT The file format (the format information such as XML/TXT/

ASN.1).
LOCATION Directory name + File Name. (e.g., /tmp/Hello.World)

Command Description
C0350 RESUME MEASUREMENT JOB
Command Format
START-MEAS;
Command Description
The command changes OPM_SUSPEND, which is statistic collecting status, to OPM_ACTIVE.
When the statistic collecting status is OPM_SUSPEND, no data will be collected. NOK will be
returned when you execute the command if its formal status was OPM_ACTIVE.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


C0351 SUSPEND MEASUREMENT JOB
Command Format
STOP-MEAS;
Command Description
The command changes OPM_ACTIVE, which is statistic collecting status, to OPM_SUSPEND.
When the statistic collecting status is OPM_SUSPEND, no data will be collected. NOK will be
returned when you execute the command if its formal status was OPM_SUSPEND.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


Command Description
C0352 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT JOB INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-MEAS-JOB;
Command Description
The command retrieves statistic collecting status (OPM_ACTIVE/OPM_SUSPEND), each fam-
ily collecting status (OPM_ENABLE, OPM_DISABLE) and statistic data collecting period.
When statistic collecting status is OPM_SUSPEND, no data will be collected. Statistic data of
the family that collecting status is OPM_DISABLE will not be collected even though its statistic
collecting status is OPM_ACTIVE. The family which is not collected will be printed ND
regardless of occurring real data when you retrieve statistics in EMS.
TIMEOUT 30

No input parameter.

FAMILY_ID Family ID
FAMILY_STATUS Data collection status for the family.

- OPM_ENABLE: Data is collected for the family.
- OPM_DISABLE: Data is not collected for the family
GRANULARITY_PERIOD Granularity Period.
STATUS It specifies the status of Measurement Job.

- OPM_ACTIVE : Data is collected for Measurement Job.
- OPM_SUSPEND: Data is not collected for Measurement Job.
GRANULARITY_PERIOD Granularity Period.
STATUS It specifies the status of Measurement Job.

- OPM_ACTIVE : Data is collected for Measurement Job.
- OPM_SUSPEND: Data is not collected for Measurement Job.

C0353 CHANGE MEASUREMENT JOB DATA
Command Format
CHG-MEAS-JOB: FAMILY_ID, [STATUS];
Command Description
Change statistics collection status (OPM_ENABLE, OPM_DISABLE) of family
TIMEOUT 10

Command Description

FAMILY_ID The measurement STAT_RRC_ESTAB/STAT_RRC_RECONFIG/ NONE STAT_R
family ID. Retrieves STAT_RRC_REESTAB/STAT_RRC_RELEASE/ RC_ES
and changes the sta- STAT_RRC_CONN/STAT_RRC_TIME/ TAB
tistics collection status STAT_RRC_RESETUP_TIME/
(STOP/START) of the STAT_ERAB_ESTAB/STAT_ERAB_ESTAB_ADD/
faimly. STAT_ERAB_TIME/STAT_ERAB_ERASE_ENB/
STAT_ERAB_ERASE/STAT_ERAB_MOD/
STAT_ERAB_REL_ENB/STAT_ERAB_REL/
STAT_ERAB_NUM/STAT_HO_INTRA/
STAT_HO_X2_OUT/STAT_HO_X2_IN/
STAT_HO_S1_OUT/STAT_HO_S1_IN/
STAT_HO_TIME/STAT_CALL_DROP/STAT_CSL/
STAT_MRO_RLF/STAT_S1SIG/STAT_PAGING/
STAT_TA/STAT_CP_PACKET/STAT_SRB/
STAT_ACTIVE_UE/STAT_PDCP_DROP/
STAT_PDCP_LOSS/STAT_IP_LATENCY/
STAT_PDCP_DELAY/STAT_GTP_SN_QCI/
STAT_GTP_SN_ENB/STAT_GTP_FW_ENB/
STAT_RESOURCE/STAT_PACKET/
STAT_NET_HISTOGRAM/
STAT_AIR_RLC_BYTES/
STAT_AIR_MAC_BYTES/STAT_PRB_QCI/
STAT_PRB_TOTAL/STAT_CELL_UNAVAILABLE/
STAT_POWER/STAT_RNTP/STAT_RA/
STAT_TRANSMISSION/STAT_MIMO/
STAT_MCS/STAT_DL_MCS/STAT_DL_LAYER/
STAT_DL_CQI/STAT_DL_PMI/STAT_DL_RI/
STAT_DL_ACK_NACK_DTX_RATIO/
STAT_IOT_9LEVEL/STAT_PCI_300_REPORT/
STAT_PCI_504_REPORT/
STAT_ERAB_SESSION_UE/
STAT_ERAB_SESSION_QCI/
STAT_HO_INTER_RAT_UTRAN_OUT/
STAT_HO_INTER_RAT_UTRAN_IN/
STAT_CSFB_PSHO_UTRAN_OUT/
STAT_CSFB_REDIR_UTRAN_OUT/
STAT_RRH_RSSI/STAT_ACCESSIBILITY/
STAT_RETAINABILITY/STAT_INTEGRITY/
STAT_AVAILABILITY/STAT_MOBILITY/
STAT_THRU_DISTRIBUTION/
STAT_DELAY_DISTRIBUTION/
STAT_DROP_DISTRIBUTION/
STAT_CQI_DISTRIBUTION/
STAT_HO_UTRAN_SRVCC_OUT/
STAT_HO_INTRA_FREQ_OUT/
STAT_HO_INTER_FREQ_OUT_WITH_GAP/
STAT_HO_INTER_FREQ_OUT_WITHOUT_GAP/
STAT_HO_OUT_WITH_DRX/
STAT_HO_OUT_WITHOUT_DRX/
STAT_S1SIG_TIME/STAT_MR/STAT_RRC_MSG/
STAT_S1AP_MSG/STAT_X2AP_MSG/
STAT_LOAD/STAT_LBHO/
STAT_RECTI_POWER_CONSUM/
STAT_PSU_POWER_CONSUM/


STATUS Data collection status OPM_ENABLE/OPM_DISABLE/ NONE OPM_E
for the family. NABLE
- OPM_ENABLE:
Data is collected for
the family.
- OPM_DISABLE:
Data is not collected
for the family

FAMILY_ID The measurement family ID. Retrieves and changes the statis-
tics collection status (STOP/START) of the faimly.
STATUS Data collection status for the family.

- OPM_ENABLE: Data is collected for the family.
- OPM_DISABLE: Data is not collected for the family

Command Description
C0356 RETRIEVE PM FILE DATA
Command Format
RTRV-MEAS-FILEDATA;
Command Description
The command retrieve information relating to mesurement file backup. The user can retrieve
disk usage threshold, measurement file backup time and etc.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

DISK_USAGE_THR Disk usage threshold. If disk usage is higher than or equal to
this threshold, measurement files are removed
BACKUP_TIME_THR Measurement file backup time.
BACKUP_MODE Measurement file backup mode.

C0357 CHANGE PM FILE DATA
Command Format
CHG-MEAS-FILEDATA: [DISK_USAGE_THR], [BACKUP_TIME_THR], [BACKUP_MODE];
Command Description
The command change information relating to mesurement file backup. The user can change disk
usage threshold, measurement file backup time and etc.
TIMEOUT 10

DISK_USAGE_ Disk usage threshold. If disk usage is 1 ~ 100 % 95
THR higher than or equal to this threshold, mea-
surement files are removed
BACKUP_TIME Measurement file backup time. 1~8 hour 8
_THR
BACKUP_MOD Measurement file backup mode. PM_BACKUP_FLASH/ NONE PM_BA
E CKUP_
FLASH

DISK_USAGE_THR Disk usage threshold. If disk usage is higher than or equal to
this threshold, measurement files are removed
BACKUP_TIME_THR Measurement file backup time.
BACKUP_MODE Measurement file backup mode.

Command Description
C0506 EXECUTE INTERNAL PING TEST
Command Format
TEST-IPING: UNIT_ID;
Command Description
Performs the internal ping test which tests the IPC (inter processor communication) paths
between the main and sub processors. It performs the ping test on the master board of the
selected eNB for the CPU of UNIT_TYPE and UNIT_ID (destination) specified by the user and
then returns the ping test result. When there is a ping echo reply, the test result is returned as nor-
mal.
TIMEOUT 10

UNIT_ID The ID of the target board on which the 0 ~ 10 NONE 0
internal ping test is to be performed.


C0507 EXECUTE EXTERNAL PING TEST
Command Format
TEST-EPING: DST_IP_VER, [DST_IP_ADDR_V4], [DST_IP_ADDR_V6], [DSCP], [PKT_SIZE],
[PKT_PER_SEC], [TRY_SEC];
Command Description
Performs the external ping test for the network connection between the system and external
hosts. The external ping test generates Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets to
monitor the performance of the external interface (Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet) and returns
frame delay, frame delay min, max, avg and frame loss. The user can perform the external ping
test and determine that the external interface is working properly if the test result shows that
there is no packet loss. The delay in the test result indicates the round trip time (from time sent to
time received). The user can check min, max, avg and variance of the packet delay.
TIMEOUT 10

DST_IP_VER The IP address version of the external host IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
to be tested. Select IPV4 if the host uses an
IPv4 address; IPV6 if the host uses an IPv6
address.
DST_IP_ADDR The IP address of the external host to be IPv4 Address NONE -
_V4 tested. A version 4 address must be
entered in this parameter.
DSCP The Differentiated Services Code Point 0 ~ 63 NONE 0
(DSCP) specified to assign services of dif-
ferent levels in the network traffic.
PKT_SIZE The size of packets transmitted during the 56 ~ 1024 NONE 56
external ping test. 56 to 1024 bytes can be
entered. The default is 56 bytes.
PKT_PER_SEC The number of packets transmitted per sec- 1~5 NONE 1
ond during the external ping test. 1 to 5
packets can be sent per second.
TRY_SEC The maximum duration of the external ping 1 ~ 10 NONE 1
test. The test can be performed for from 1
to 10 seconds.

Command Description


C0508 MONITOR TEST STATUS
Command Format
MON-TEST: [INVOCATION_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the on-going tests in the eNB. This command is used for retrieving tests related to the
TM. Note that this command is not used for retrieving online tests because the RTRV-TEST-
LIST command can be used for retrieving the scheduler registration status. When a test com-
mand is executed, it is added to the monitor test list; when the test is complete and the result noti-
fication message is sent, the command is deleted from the monitor test list. Once it is deleted, the
command cannot be retrieved by the monitor test command. If there is no on-going test com-
mand, the command displays 'NO_DATA'.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
INVOCATION_ID The ID assigned when the command is 0 ~ 128 NONE 0
executed in the LSM or the CLI. At the
time the command is executed, the small-
est number among the invocation IDs
managed by the TM is assigned. When
executing MON-TEST, enter an invoca-
tion ID to display the command list for the
ID. If none is entered, the entire command
list is displayed.

INVOCATION_ID The ID assigned by the TM during command execution. It is the
same as the value displayed in the result notification message
which shows the test execution result.
STATE The command state at the time of retrieval by the monitor test
command.
- TEST_STATE_INITIALIZING: Receiving and initializing
the command.
- TEST_STATE_TESTING: Executing the command.

Command Description
- TEST_STATE_TERMINATING: Terminating the command

after completion.
TEST_OUTCOME The normal execution after the TM block has successfully

received the command (TEST_OUTCOME_PASS).
TEST_TYPE The type of the currently executing command.

- TEST_TYPE_EXTPING: External ping test.
- TEST_TYPE_INTPING: Internal ping test.
- TEST_TYPE_TXPOWER: PAU Tx power test.
- TEST_TYPE_VSWR: PAU VSWR test.
- TEST_TYPE_TEST_MODEL: Virtual traffic generation test.
- TEST_TYPE_TEST_OCNS: Virtual call generation test.
- TEST_TYPE_TRACERT: Trace route test for the IP path.
- TEST_TYPE_OPTIC_DATA: Optical distance and wave-
length measurement test.
- TEST_TYPE_DURULB : DU-RU loopback test.
- TEST_TYPE_BER: DU-RU BER test.
- TEST_TYPE_ANT: Antenna calibration test.
- TEST_TYPE_BATT: Battery test.
- TEST_TYPE_ETHLB: IEEE802.3ah Ethernet loopback test.
ATT_LIST The list of commands entered by the user.

C0510 EXECUTE TRACE ROUTE TEST
Command Format
TEST-TRC-ROUTE: DST_IP_VER, [DST_IP_ADDR_V4], [DST_IP_ADDR_V6], [DSCP];
Command Description
Performs the trace route test for the network path between the system and external hosts. When
performing the trace route test, the user can enter a destination IP address and check the hops
between the destination and the NE. The user can identify network elements with problems on
the external network by checking the gateway or route address and delay time for each hop.
Optionally, the destination IP version and the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) value
can be specified. The test result is normal if the state of all hops to the destination is normal. If
the test execution result is NOK, it indicates that the path to the target is broken.
TIMEOUT 10

address.


Command Description
C0511 RETRIEVE ONLINE TEST PARAMETER
Command Format
RTRV-TEST-LIST: [OT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the added online test schedules. Unlike on-demand tests, online tests are performed at
regular intervals according to the registered schedules. Test start/end and execution result (start,
end, success, fail) are sent to the LSM according to the notify information added to the test list.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
OT_ID The ID of the online test schedule. Up to 0 ~ 49 NONE 0
50 can be added.

OT_ID The ID of the online test schedule.
STATE The state of the online test scheduler (The scheduler is enabled
and the test is performed at the specified interval only when the
state is RUN_ONLINE).
- RUN_ONLINE: The scheduler is enabled to execute the test
command at the specified interval.
- STOP_ONLINE: The scheduler is stopped by the user. (Even
if before END_TIME, the scheduler is stopped and no further
tests are performed.)
TEST_ID The online test that can be performed on the system (ex.
EXT_PING_TEST/INT_PING_TEST/TX_POWER_TEST
etc.).
TI_ID The test item ID assigned to each online test.

PERIOD The online test interval in seconds.
START_TIME The online test start time.
END_TIME The online test end time.
START_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test start. (USED_FLAG_ON/
USED_FLAG_OFF)
END_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test end. (USED_FLAG_ON/
USED_FLAG_OFF)
SUCCESS_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test success. (USED_FLAG_ON/
USED_FLAG_OFF)
FAIL_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test fail. (USED_FLAG_ON/
USED_FLAG_OFF)

Command Description
C0512 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE

TEST INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-EPING-INF: [TI_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the external ping online test. The test item
ID provides the information such as destination IP version and address, DSCP, ping duration,
packet count per second, which is used as a reference by the external ping command. Entering a
TI_ID value displays the information corresponding to TI_ID. If none is entered, information for
all (10) test items is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
TI_ID The ID for identifying the information 0~9 NONE 0
added for online external ping tests. Up to
10 can be added. TI_ID defines the
detailed execution method of the external
ping online test (TEST_ID). This is set by
the user in advance.

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for online external
ping tests.
DST_IP_VER The IP address version (IPV4/IPV6) of the external host to be

tested.
DST_IP_ADDR_V4 The IP address of the external host to be tested. A version 4

address must be entered in this parameter.


DSCP The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) specified to

assign services of different levels in the network traffic.
PKT_SIZE The size of packets transmitted during the external ping test.
PKT_PER_SEC The number of packets transmitted per second during the exter-
nal ping test.
TRY_SEC The maximum duration of the external ping test.

Command Description
C0513 RETRIEVE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-IPING-INF: [TI_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the internal ping online test. The test item
ID provides the information such as target board type (UNIT_TYPE) and target board ID (unit
ID), which is used as a reference by the internal ping command. Entering a TI_ID value displays
the information corresponding to TI_ID. If none is entered, information for all (10) test items is
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
added for online internal ping tests. Up to
detailed execution method of the Internal
ping online test (TEST_ID). This is set by

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for online internal
ping tests.
UNIT_TYPE The type of the target processor board on which the internal
ping test is to be performed.
UNIT_ID The ID of the target processor board (UNIT_ID) on which the

internal ping test is to be performed.

C0515 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE

TEST RESULT
Command Format
RTRV-EPING-RSLT: TI_ID, [RESULT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the external ping online test results. It retrieves the results of the external ping test per-
formed by the test schedule added by the CRTE-TEST-LIST command. Each test item ID
(TI_ID) can have up to 30 results. Lower the result ID, the more recent the results are. Even
when the online test scheduler is added, if the actual test has not been performed, the result
retrieval returns NO_DATA with NOK processing. The online test results are saved only after
the actual test is executed. If the test is interrupted by STOP_ONLINE, for example, the result is
not updated.
TIMEOUT 10

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added 0~9 NONE 0
for online external ping tests. Up to 10 can
be added. TI_ID defines the detailed exe-
cution method of the external ping online
test (TEST_ID). This is set by the user in
advance.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the external 0 ~ 29 NONE 0
ping online test result is saved after the test
is executed. The smaller the result ID, the
more recent the result is. Each ID can have
up to 30 results. If more than 30 online
tests are performed, the oldest data is
deleted first.

ping tests.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the external ping online test result
is saved after the test is executed. The smaller the result ID, the

Command Description
more recent the result is. Each ID can have up to 30 results. If

more than 30 online tests are performed, the oldest data is
deleted first.
TIME_STAMP The execution time of the external ping online test.
DST_IP_VER The IP address version of the external host to be tested.
DST_IP_ADDR_V4 The IP address of the external host to be tested.

nal ping test.
SRC_IP_VER The IP address version of Source host.
SRC_IP_ADDR_V4 The IP address of the source which the test is performed.
ERROR_REASON The error reason when the external ping test result is NOK.
- TM_ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE: The destination is
unreachable.
- TM_ICMP_PARTIALTIMEOUT: Only some of the packets
transmitted are received.
- TM_ICMP_TIMEOUT: None of the packets transmitted are
received.
- TM_PKTLOSS_VIOLATION: The packet loss threshold
defined in the PLD is exceeded.
- TM_RTT_VIOLATION: The round trip time threshold
defined in the PLD is exceeded.
- TM_RTT_JITTER_VIOLATION: The round trip jitter (delay
variance) threshold defined in the PLD is exceeded.

TOTAL_PKT The number of packets transmitted during the external ping test.
SEND_PKT The number of packets successfully transmitted during the

external ping online test.
RECV_PKT Total packets received during the external ping test.
DELAY_VARIANCE The jitter value (standard deviation) of the average delay (round
trip) for the external ping test. The delay standard deviation
(msec) of all ICMP packets received during the external ping
test (TRY_SEC).

Command Description
C0516 RETRIEVE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST

RESULT
Command Format
RTRV-IPING-RSLT: TI_ID, [RESULT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the internal ping online test results. It retrieves the results of the internal ping test per-
not updated.
TIMEOUT 10

for online internal ping tests. Up to 10 can
cution method of the internal ping online
advance.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the internal 0 ~ 29 NONE 0
ping online test result is saved after the test
is executed. The smaller the result ID, the
deleted first.

ping tests.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the internal ping online test result
is saved after the test is executed. The smaller the result ID, the

more recent the result is. (Each ID can have up to 30 results. If

deleted first.)
TIME_STAMP The execution time of the internal ping online test.
UNIT_TYPE The type of the target processor board on which the internal
ping test is to be performed.
UNIT_ID The ID of the target processor board on which the internal ping
test is to be performed.
ERROR_REASON The error reason if the internal ping test result is NOK.
- TM_ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE: The destination is
unreachable.
- TM_ICMP_PARTIALTIMEOUT: Only some of the packets
transmitted are received.
- TM_ICMP_TIMEOUT: None of the packets transmitted are
received.
DELAY The delay (round trip) in milliseconds for the internal ping test.

Command Description
C0517 RETRIEVE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST

RESULT
Command Format
RTRV-TRC-RSLT: TI_ID, [RESULT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the trace route online test results. It retrieves the results of the trace route test per-
not updated.
TIMEOUT 10

TI_ID Test Item ID(0 to 9) 0~9 NONE 0
RESULT_ID Trace Route Test Result ID(0 to 29) 0 ~ 29 NONE 0

TI_ID Test Item ID(0 to 9)
RESULT_ID Trace Route Test Result ID(0 to 29)
TIME_STAMP Executed time of the test
DST_IP_VER IP Version for the Destination.

SRC_IP_VER The IP address version of Source host.
ERROR_REASON Error reason.
HOP_CNT HOP Count. Maximum number of Hops allowed is 30
HOP_IP_VER IP version of HOP IP address.
HOP_ADDR IP Address of each HOP
HOP_DELAY Echo Delay Average Time(msec)

Command Description
C0520 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING TEST

THRESHOLD DATA
Command Format
RTRV-TEST-THR;
Command Description
Retrieves the thresholds set for delay average, jitter and packet loss ratio measured during the
external ping test to determine the test result (OK or NOK). The thresholds used for the external
ping test are as follows.
- Packet Loss Threshold: The threshold for packets received over total packets transmitted (0-
100%).
- Round Trip Time Threshold: The threshold for RTT (round trip time) of ICMP packets (1-1000
msec).
- RTT Jitter Threshold: The threshold for RTT jitter of ICMP packets (1-1000 msec).
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

RTT_THR The threshold for round trip time (delay average for each
packet) during the external ping test.
RTT_JIT_THR The threshold for round trip jitter (delay standard deviation for
each packet) during the external ping test.
PKT_LOS_THR The threshold for the packet loss ratio during the external ping
test.

C0521 CHANGE ONLINE TEST PARAMETER
Command Format
CHG-TEST-LIST: OT_ID, [STATE], [TEST_ID], [TI_ID], [PERIOD], [START_TIME],
[END_TIME], [START_NOTIFY], [END_NOTIFY], [SUCCESS_NOTIFY], [FAIL_NOTIFY];
Command Description
Changes the added schedules for performing online tests. Up to 50 online tests can be added in
the schedule. The additions/changes are stored in the PLD so that the tests are performed even
when the system restarts.
TIMEOUT 10

OT_ID The ID of the online test schedule. Up to 50 0 ~ 49 NONE 0
can be added.
STATE The state of the online test scheduler. The RUN_ONLINE/ NONE STOP_
scheduler is enabled and the test is per- STOP_ONLINE/ ONLINE
formed at the specified interval only when
the state is RUN_ONLINE.
- RUN_ONLINE: The scheduler is enabled
to execute the test command at the speci-
fied interval.
- STOP_ONLINE: The scheduler is
stopped. Schedules in STOP_ONLINE
state are not retrieved. The periodic tests
are also not performed.
TEST_ID The following online tests can be performed EXT_PING_TEST/ NONE EXT_PI
in the system. For example, if the user wish INT_PING_TEST/ NG_TE
to perform Tx power online test, the CHG- TRC_ROUTE_TEST/ ST
TXPWR-INF command can be used to TX_POWER_TEST/
specify the target for the Tx power test and
enter TX_POWER_TEST for the test ID
parameter of the CHG-TEST-LIST com-
mand to have the online test performed at
the specified time.
for online tests. Up to 10 can be added.
TI_ID defines the detailed execution
method of the online test (TEST_ID). This
is set by the user in advance.
PERIOD The online test interval in seconds. 60 ~ 720 seconds 60

Command Description

START_TIME The online test start time. START_TIME - yyyy/ -
must be earlier than END_TIME. The time mm/
input format is YYYY/MM/DD_HH:MM. For dd_hh:
example, 2010/03/29_16:47. mm
END_TIME The online test end time. END_TIME must - yyyy/ -
be later than the current time and later than mm/
START_TIME. The time input format is dd_hh:
YYYY/MM/DD_HH:MM. For example, mm
2010/12/27_19:18.
START_NOTIF The notify flag for the online test start. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
Y flag is on, when the online test start time USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
(START_TIME) is reached and the sched- OFF
ule starts, the online test start notification
message is sent to the EMS
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
END_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test end. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
flag is on, when the online test end time USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
(END_TIME) is reached and the schedule OFF
ends, the online test end notification mes-
sage is sent to the EMS
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
SUCCESS_NO The notify flag for the online test success. If USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
TIFY this flag is on, when the online test result is USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
OK, the online test success notification OFF
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
FAIL_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test fail. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
flag is on, when the online test result is USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
NOK, the online test fail notification mes- OFF
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).

STATE The state of the online test scheduler.

- RUN_ONLINE: The scheduler is added to execute the test
- STOP_ONLINE: The scheduler is stopped. Schedules in
STOP_ONLINE state are not retrieved. The periodic tests are
also not performed.
TEST_ID The online test that can be performed on the system.

PERIOD The online test interval in seconds.
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)

Command Description
C0522 CHANGE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-EPING-INF: TI_ID, DST_IP_VER, [DST_IP_ADDR_V4], [DST_IP_ADDR_V6], [DSCP],
[PKT_SIZE], [PKT_PER_SEC], [TRY_SEC];
Command Description
Specifies or changes the specified content in the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the
external ping online test. The test item ID can set or change the information such as destination
IP version and address, DSCP, ping duration, packet count per second, which is used as a refer-
ence by the external ping command. Up to 10 test items can be added.
TIMEOUT 10

for online external ping tests. Up to 10 can
cution method of the external ping online
advance.
address.
PKT_SIZE The size of packets transmitted during the 56 ~ 1024 bytes 56
external ping test. 56 to 1024 bytes can be
entered. The default is 56 bytes.
PKT_PER_SEC The number of packets transmitted per sec- 1~5 packets/ 1
ond during the external ping test. 1 to 5 second
packets can be sent per second.


TRY_SEC The maximum duration of the external ping 1 ~ 10 seconds 1
test. The test can be performed for from 1
to 10 seconds.

ping tests.
DST_IP_VER The IP address version (IPV4/IPV6) of the external host to be

tested.



nal ping test.

Command Description
C0523 CHANGE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-IPING-INF: TI_ID, [UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Sets or changes the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the internal ping online test. The test
item ID can set or change the information such as target board type (UNIT_TYPE) and target
board ID (unit ID), which is used as a reference by the internal ping command. Up to 10 test
items can be added.
TIMEOUT 10

for online internal ping tests. Up to 10 can
cution method of the Internal ping online
advance.
UNIT_ID The ID of the target processor board 0 ~ 10 NONE 0
(UNIT_ID) on which the internal ping test is
to be performed.

ping tests.
UNIT_ID The ID of the target processor board on which the internal ping
test is to be performed.

C0525 CHANGE EXTERNAL PING TEST

THRESHOLD DATA
Command Format
CHG-TEST-THR: [RTT_THR], [RTT_JIT_THR], [PKT_LOS_THR];
Command Description
Sets or changes the thresholds for delay average, jitter and packet loss ratio measured during the
external ping test to determine the test result (OK or NOK). The thresholds applied in external
ping tests are as follows.
- Packet Loss Threshold: The threshold for packets received over total packets transmitted (0-
100%).
- Round Trip Time Threshold: The threshold for RTT (round trip time) of ICMP packets (1-1000
msec).
- RTT Jitter Threshold: The threshold for RTT jitter of ICMP packets (1-1000 msec).
TIMEOUT 10

RTT_THR The threshold for round trip time (delay 1 ~ 1000 NONE 100
average for each packet) during the exter-
nal ping test in milliseconds.
RTT_JIT_THR The threshold for round trip jitter (delay 1 ~ 1000 NONE 100
standard deviation for each packet) during
the external ping test in milliseconds.
PKT_LOS_THR The threshold for the packet loss ratio dur- 0 ~ 100 NONE 1
ing the external ping test in %.

RTT_THR The threshold for round trip time (delay average for each
packet) during the external ping test.
RTT_JIT_THR The threshold for round trip jitter (delay standard deviation for
each packet) during the external ping test.
PKT_LOS_THR The threshold for the packet loss ratio during the external ping

Command Description
test.

C0529 RETRIEVE ETHERNET OAM CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-ETHOAM-CONF: [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the PLD ETHOAM CONFIGURATION information. EtherOAM provides Ethernet
link monitoring according to the standard defined in IEEE 802.3ah. It uses the OAMPDU
(Ethernet OAM Protocol Data Unit) to perform discovery, remote fault indication, link monitor-
ing and remote loopback for maintenance of geographically remote Ethernet network elements.
This command is used for retrieving the EFM parameter information changed by the CHG-ETH-
OAM-CONF command.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link on which the 0~5 NONE 0
Ethernet loopback is to be performed.

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link on which the Ethernet loopback
is performed.
ETH_OAM_ADMIN_STATE The administrator state of the EFM (Ethernet in the First Mile).
ETH_OAM_LAYER_STATE The layer state of the EFM.

- Active: Discovery is performed through the external link and
the Ethernet loopback command is also available for execution.
- Passive: Cannot be triggered directly by the eNB. It only
responds to the EFM packets transmitted through the external
port.
ETH_OAM_PDU_MAX_RATE The maximum OAMPDU count transmitted per second on the

OAM layer. Any OAMPDUs exceeding this value are dropped.

Command Description
ETH_OAM_PDU_MIN_RATE The minimum OAMPDU count transmitted per second on the

OAM layer.
ETH_OAM_CLIENT_TIMEOUT The timeout for determining disconnection from the remote sta-
tion. The remote station is determined as disconnected if the
OAMPDU is not received within the time specified.
ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_WINDOW The frame window size set for link fault processing by the
OAM layer (this value multiplied by 1000 is the actual window
size).
ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_HI High threshold for the frames with errors.
ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_LO Low threshold for the frames with errors.

C0530 CHANGE ETHERNET OAM CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-ETHOAM-CONF: PORT_ID, [ETH_OAM_ADMIN_STATE], [ETH_OAM_LAYER_STATE],
[ETH_OAM_PDU_MAX_RATE], [ETH_OAM_PDU_MIN_RATE], [ETH_OAM_CLIENT_TIMEOUT],
[ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_WINDOW], [ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_HI],
[ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_LO];
Command Description
Changes the PLD EtherOAM CONFIGURATION information. EtherOAM provides Ethernet
link monitoring according to the standard defined in IEEE 802.3ah. It uses the OAMPDU
(Ethernet OAM Protocol Data Unit) to perform discovery, remote fault indication, link monitor-
ing and remote loopback for maintenance of geographically remote Ethernet network elements.
Sets or changes parameters for providing the EFM function.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link on which 0~5 NONE 0
ETH_OAM_AD The administrator state of the EFM. Admin- DOT3_ENABLE/ NONE DOT3_
MIN_STATE State can be entered as Enable or Disable. DOT3_DISABLE/ DIS-
- Enable: The 802.3ah function is avail- ABLE
able.
- Disable: The 802.3ah function is unavail-
able.
ETH_OAM_LAY The layer state of the EFM. The OAM layer DOT3_PASSIVE/ NONE DOT3_
ER_STATE state can be entered as Active or Passive. DOT3_ACTIVE/ PAS-
- Active: Discovery is performed through SIVE
the external link and the Ethernet loopback
command is also available for execution.
- Passive: Cannot be triggered directly by
the eNB. It only responds to the EFM pack-
ets transmitted through the external port.
ETH_OAM_PD The maximum OAMPDU count transmitted 1 ~ 10 OAMPD 10
U_MAX_RATE per second on the OAM layer. Any OAMP- U(s)
DUs exceeding the maximum value are
dropped.
ETH_OAM_PD The minimum OAMPDU count transmitted 1 ~ 10 OAMPD 1
U_MIN_RATE per second on the OAM layer. U(s)

Command Description

ETH_OAM_CLI The timeout for determining disconnection 2 ~ 30 seconds 5
ENT_TIMEOUT from the remote station. The remote station
is determined as disconnected if the
OAMPDU is not received within the time
specified.
ERR_FRAME_ The frame window size set for link fault pro- 1 ~ 65535 1000 1000
PERIOD_WIND cessing by the OAM layer. This value multi- Frames
OW plied by 1000 is the actual window size.
ERR_FRAME_ High threshold for the frames with errors. 0 0 ~ 65535 Frames 0
PERIOD_THR_ indicates Disable and a value between 1
HI and 65535 can be entered for Enable state.
ERR_FRAME_ Low threshold for the frames with errors. If 0 ~ 65535 Frames 1
PERIOD_THR_ ErrFramePeriodThrHi is enabled, this value
LO must be smaller than the high threshold.

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link on which the Ethernet loopback
is performed.
ETH_OAM_ADMIN_STATE The administrator state of the EFM.
ETH_OAM_LAYER_STATE The layer state of the EFM.

- Active: Discovery is performed through the external link and
the Ethernet loopback command is also available for execution.
- Passive: Cannot be triggered directly by the eNB. It only
responds to the EFM packets transmitted through the external
port.
ETH_OAM_PDU_MAX_RATE The maximum OAMPDU count transmitted per second on the

OAM layer. Any OAMPDUs exceeding this value are dropped.
ETH_OAM_PDU_MIN_RATE The minimum OAMPDU count transmitted per second on the

OAM layer.
ETH_OAM_CLIENT_TIMEOUT The timeout for determining disconnection from the remote sta-
tion. The remote station is determined as disconnected if the
OAMPDU is not received within the time specified.
ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_WINDOW The frame window size set for link fault processing by the
OAM layer (this value multiplied by 1000 is the actual window
size).
ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_HI High threshold for the frames with errors.

ERR_FRAME_PERIOD_THR_LO Low threshold for the frames with errors.

Command Description
C0531 EXECUTE ETHERNET LOOPBACK TEST
Command Format
TEST-ETH-LB: PORT_ID, DURATION;
Command Description
Performs the loopback test on the EFM function defined in the IEEE 802.3ah standard. During
the process this command, the backhaul link can not receive any packet except OAMPDU for
testing. Therefore the connection to the LSM will be disconnected for a while. The EFM is
responsible for testing the inter-station link directly connected to the eNB. To execute the Ether-
net loopback command, the discovery must be performed. The command can only be triggered
in EFM active mode. If discovery fails or the EFM is in passive mode, this command returns
NOK and does not perform the loopback test.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID of the backhaul port on which 0~5 NONE 0
DURATION The duration of the Ethernet loopback test. 1 ~ 10 NONE 1
Since performing a loopback test on the
external link results in disconnection of the
external communication, the test duration
must be specified so that the link is auto-
matically restored after the specified dura-
tion. The duration is in seconds.


C0534 CREATE ONLINE TEST LIST
Command Format
CRTE-TEST-LIST: OT_ID, [STATE], [TEST_ID], [TI_ID], [PERIOD], START_TIME,
END_TIME, [START_NOTIFY], [END_NOTIFY], [SUCCESS_NOTIFY], [FAIL_NOTIFY];
Command Description
Crteate Online Test List Relation. Adds schedules for a specific command for performing online
tests. Up to 50 online tests can be added in the schedule. The additions are stored in the PLD so
that the tests are performed even when the system restarts.
TIMEOUT 10

OT_ID The ID of the online test schedule. Up to 50 0 ~ 49 NONE 0
can be added.
STATE The state of the online test scheduler. The RUN_ONLINE/ NONE STOP_
scheduler is enabled and the test is per- STOP_ONLINE/ ONLINE
formed at the specified interval only when
the state is RUN_ONLINE.
- RUN_ONLINE: The scheduler is enabled
to execute the test command at the speci-
fied interval.
- STOP_ONLINE: The scheduler is
stopped. Schedules in STOP_ONLINE
state are not performed the periodic tests
either.
TEST_ID The following online tests can be performed EXT_PING_TEST/ NONE EXT_PI
in the target system. For example, if the INT_PING_TEST/ NG_TE
user wish to perform Tx power online test, TRC_ROUTE_TEST/ ST
the CHG-TXPWR-INF command can be TX_POWER_TEST/
used to specify the target for the Tx power
test and enter TX_POWER_TEST for the
test ID parameter of the CHG-TEST-LIST
command to have the online test performed
at the specified time.
for online tests. Up to 10 can be added.
TI_ID defines the detailed execution
method of the online test (TEST_ID). This
PERIOD The online test interval in seconds. 60 ~ 720 seconds 60

Command Description

START_TIME The online test start time. START_TIME - yyyy/ -
must be earlier than END_TIME. The time mm/
input format is YYYY/MM/ dd_hh:
DD_HH:MM.('YYYY' value can not exceed mm
2037.) For example, 2010/03/29_16:47
END_TIME The online test end time. END_TIME must - yyyy/ -
be later than the current time and later than mm/
START_TIME. The time input format is dd_hh:
YYYY/MM/DD_HH:MM.('YYYY' value can mm
not exceed 2037). If START_TIME and
END_TIME are equal, the END_TIME will
be set 6 hours later by START_TIME. For
example, 2010/12/27_19:18
START_NOTIF The notify flag for the online test start. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
Y flag is on, when the online test start time USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
(START_TIME) is reached and the sched- OFF
ule starts, the online test start notification
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
END_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test end. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
flag is on, when the online test end time USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
(END_TIME) is reached and the schedule OFF
ends, the online test end notification mes-
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
SUCCESS_NO The notify flag for the online test success. If USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
TIFY this flag is on, when the online test result is USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
OK, the online test success notification OFF
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).
FAIL_NOTIFY The notify flag for the online test fail. If this USED_FLAG_OFF/ NONE USED_
flag is on, when the online test result is USED_FLAG_ON/ FLAG_
NOK, the online test fail notification mes- OFF
(USED_FLAG_ON:1,
USED_FLAG_OFF:0).

STATE The state of the online test scheduler.

- RUN_ONLINE: The scheduler is added to execute the test
- STOP_ONLINE: The scheduler is stopped. The periodic tests
are not performed either.
TEST_ID The online test that can be performed on the system.

PERIOD[seconds] The online test interval in seconds.
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)
USED_FLAG_OFF)

Command Description
C0535 DELETE ONLINE TEST LIST
Command Format
DLT-TEST-LIST: OT_ID;
Command Description
Delate schedules for a specific online test command.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
OT_ID The Online Test schedule ID will be 0 ~ 49 NONE 0
deleted.


C0536 CHANGE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-TRC-ROUTE: TI_ID, DST_IP_VER, [DST_IP_ADDR_V4], [DST_IP_ADDR_V6], [DSCP];
Command Description
Specifies or changes the specified content in the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the trace
route online test. The test item ID can set or change the information such as destination IP ver-
sion, address and DSCP which is used as a reference by the trace route command. Up to 10 test
items can be added.
TIMEOUT 10

for online trace route tests. Up to 10 can be
added. TI_ID defines the detailed execution
method of the trace route online test
(TEST_ID). This is set by the user in
advance.
address.

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for online trace
route tests. Up to 10 can be added. TI_ID defines the detailed
execution method of the trace route online test (TEST_ID). This

Command Description
DST_IP_VER The IP address version of the external host to be tested. Select

IPV4 if the host uses an IPv4 address; IPV6 if the host uses an
IPv6 address.




C0537 RETRIEVE TRACE ROUTE ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-TRC-ROUTE: [TI_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the trace route online test. The test item ID
provides the information such as destination IP version, address and DSCP which is used as a
reference by the trace route command. Entering a TI_ID value displays the information corre-
sponding to TI_ID. If none is entered, information for all (10) test items is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
added for online trace route tests. Up to
detailed execution method of the trace
route online test (TEST_ID). This is set by

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for online trace
route tests. Up to 10 can be added. TI_ID defines the detailed
execution method of the trace route online test (TEST_ID). This
DST_IP_VER The IP address version of the external host to be tested. Select

IPV4 if the host uses an IPv4 address; IPV6 if the host uses an
IPv6 address.


Command Description



C0550 START CELL TRAFFIC TRACE
Command Format
START-TRC: MCC, MNC, TRACE_ID, [LIST_OF_INTERFACES], DEPTH, CELL_NUM, IP_VER,
[TCE_IPV4], [TCE_IPV6];
Command Description
Registers signaling trace for all active calls within the specified cell. Only one cell per eNB can
be specified for this command. For example, to trace Cell #2 while tracing Cell #1, the user must
delete the trace of Cell #1 and then add the trace of Cell #2. Once added, a trace cannot be
changed. If a change is necessary, the user must delete (STOP-TRC) the existing trace and then
add it again. This command can be executed in the following order. 1. Select Performance at the
top of the main screen. 2. Select Call Trace. 3. Select the target eNB. 4. Select the Register but-
ton and enter parameters.
TIMEOUT 10

MCC Mobile country code. A unique code for 3 NONE -
each country, which is used for trace refer-
ence configuration. For example, Korea:
450, USA: 310 - 316
MNC Mobile network code. A unique code for 3 NONE -
each network, which is used for trace refer-
ence configuration. For example, SK: 05,
SPRINT: 120
TRACE_ID The trace ID which is unique within the net- 0 ~ 16777215 NONE NONE
work. It is used along with MCC and MNC
for configuring the trace reference.
LIST_OF_INTE The interface for which the signaling trace S1MME/X2/ NONE -
RFACES data is to be collected. If no interface is S1MME_X2/Uu/
entered, signaling trace data is collected for S1MME_Uu/X2_Uu/
all interfaces. The interfaces available for S1MME_X2_Uu/
data collection include S1MME, X2, and
Uu.

Command Description

DEPTH The detail level of the data to be collected. ci_minimum/ NONE NONE
Minimum, Medium, MinimumWithoutVen- ci_medium/
dorSpecificExtension, and MediumWithout- ci_maximum/
VendorSpecificExtension show the trace ci_woVendorSpecificMi
detail data in the XML decoding format. nimum/
Maximum and MaximumWithoutVendor- ci_woVendorSpecificMe
SpecificExtension show the trace detail dium/
data in the XML encoding format. ci_woVendorSpecificMa
ximum/
CELL_NUM The cell number for which trace is to be 0~5 NONE 0
activated.
IP_VER The TCE IP version. IPV4/IPV6/ NONE NONE
TCE_IPV4 The TCE IP address in the IPv4 format. IPv4 Address NONE -
TCE_IPV6 The TCE IP address in the IPv6 format. IPv6 Address NONE -


C0551 STOP CELL TRAFFIC TRACE
Command Format
STOP-TRC: MCC, MNC, TRACE_ID, CELL_NUM;
Command Description
Deletes the trace registered for cells. When the command is executed, collection of the signaling
trace data for active calls in the specified cell is stopped. This command can be executed in the
following order. 1. Select Performance at the top of the main screen. 2. Select Call Trace. 3.
Select the target eNB 4. Select the Delete button.
TIMEOUT 10

MCC Mobile country code. A unique code for 3 NONE -
each country, which is used for trace refer-
ence configuration. For example, Korea:
450, USA: 310 - 316
MNC Mobile network code. A unique code for 3 NONE -
each network, which is used for trace refer-
ence configuration. For example, SK: 05,
SPRINT: 120
TRACE_ID The trace ID which is unique within the net- 0 ~ 16777215 NONE NONE
work. It is used along with MCC and MNC
for configuring the trace reference.
CELL_NUM The cell number for which trace is to be 0~5 NONE 0
activated.


Command Description
C0552 CHANGE CSL INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CSL-INF: [IP_VER], [CSL_IPV4], [CSL_IPV6], [BUFFERING_TIME];
Command Description
Changes the information related to CSL data transmission. The following parameters are avail-
able for change.
- CSL server IP version.
- CSL server IP.
- CSL buffering time. When the user changes any of the parameters above, the eNB immediately
applies the changes to the CSL data and transmits it. The CLS server's IP address supports both
IPV4 and IPV6. The default is eNB-LSM (TruceCall server for MPCS). Multiple CSL servers
cannot be used. The CSL data is transmitted when:
- the buffering time elapses after data is created.
- the number of data entries buffered reaches 10. When any of the conditions above are met, the
eNB transmits the CSL data to the server. The default CSL buffering timer is 5 (sec).
TIMEOUT 10

IP_VER The type of the IP address of the server for IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
which CSL data (IPV4 or IPV6) is to be col-
lected.
CSL_IPV4 The CSL server's IP address in the IPv4 IPv4 Address NONE -
format.
CSL_IPV6 The CSL server's IP address in the IPv6 IPv6 Address NONE -
format.
BUFFERING_T The eNB stores the CSL data in the eNB 5 ~ 60 NONE 5
IME memory during the buffering time to reduce
the network load. If the buffering time is set
to 10, all of the CSL data stored in the
memory is sent to the CLS server 10 sec-
onds after the data is created. Note that the
CSL data is also transmitted to the CSL
server when the number of CSL data
entries stored reaches 10 even within 10
seconds of data creation.


IP_VER The type of the IP address of the server for which CSL data
(IPV4 or IPV6) is to be collected.
CSL_IPV4 The CSL server's IP address in the IPv4 format.
BUFFERING_TIME The eNB stores the CSL data in the eNB memory during the
buffering time to reduce the network load. If the buffering time
is set to 10, all of the CSL data stored in the memory is sent to
the CLS server 10 seconds after the data is created. Note that
the CSL data is also transmitted to the CSL server when the
number of CSL data entries stored reaches 10 even within 10

Command Description
C0553 RETRIEVE TRACE JOB LIST
Command Format
RTRV-TRC;
Command Description
Retrieves the trace information of each cell. This command can also be executed in the following
order. 1) Select Performance at the top of the main screen. 2) Select Call Trace 3) Select the tar-
get eNB 4) If the list is not displayed, select the Refresh button.
TIMEOUT 30

No input parameter.

ID It is a dynamic table index.
TYPE Trace Type 0: Management based Trace(Cell Traffic Trace) 1:

Signaling based Trace
MCC Mobile country code. A unique code for each country, which is
used for trace reference configuration. For example, Korea:
450, USA: 310 - 316
MNC Mobile network code. A unique code for each network, which
is used for trace reference configuration. For example, SK: 05,
SPRINT: 120
TRACE_ID The trace ID which is unique within the network. It is used

along with MCC and MNC for configuring the trace reference.
REFERENCE A value constituting MCC, MNC and traceId, which is used for
identifying traces for calls or cells. It is the key information for
identifying the trace and unique within the network.
LIST_OF_INTERFACES The interface for which the signaling trace data is to be col-

lected. If no interface is entered, signaling trace data is collected

for all interfaces. The interfaces available for data collection
include S1MME, X2, and Uu.
DEPTH The detail level of the data to be collected. Minimum,

Medium, MinimumWithoutVendorSpecificExtension, and
MediumWithoutVendorSpecificExtension show the trace
detail data in the XML decoding format. Maximum and
MaximumWithoutVendorSpecificExtension show the trace
detail data in the XML encoding format.
CELL_NUM The cell number for which trace is to be activated.
IP_VER The type of the IP address (IPV4 or IPV6) of the TCE (trace
collection entity). The TCE is the server in which the signaling
trace data is to be collected.
TCE_IPV4 The TCE IP address in the IPv4 format.
TCE_IPV6 The TCE IP address in the IPv6 format.

Command Description
C0554 RETRIEVE CSL INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-CSL-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the settings related to CSL data transmission. The following parameters are available
for retrieval.
- CSL Server IP Version.
- CSL Server IP.
- CSL Buffering Time. The CSL data is transmitted when:
- the buffering time elapses after data is created.
- the number of data entries buffered reaches 10. When any of the conditions above are met, the
eNB transmits the CSL data to the server. The default CSL buffering timer is 5 (sec).
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

IP_VER The type of the IP address of the server for which CSL data
(IPV4 or IPV6) is to be collected.
BUFFERING_TIME The eNB stores the CSL data in the eNB memory during the
buffering time to reduce the network load. If the buffering time
is set to 10, all of the CSL data stored in the memory is sent to
the CLS server 10 seconds after the data is created. Note that
the CSL data is also transmitted to the CSL server when the
number of CSL data entries stored reaches 10 even within 10

C0650 ADD SUBSCRIPTION
Command Format
ADD-SBSC: MGR_REF, TIME_TICK, NOTIFICATION_CATEGORY, LOG_FLAG,
LOG_FTP_REFERENCE;
Command Description
Generates information for the notification manager which receives notifications generated in the
system. This command also forwards the notifications generated in the system according to the
subscription information of the registered notification managers. To create a subscription, the
user must enter the manager reference parameters including the network information for the
notification manager such as the IP address and the port, and the parameters for category infor-
mation of the notifications to receive, log collection setting for the notifications, and notification
transmission duration. Multiple subscriptions can be created for each notification manager by
using different notification category settings.
TIMEOUT 10

MGR_REF The network information for the notification 64 NONE x.x.x.x:y
manager. It is entered in the x.x.x.x:yyyy yyy
format, where 'x.x.x.x' represents the IP
address of the manager and 'yyyy' repre-
sents the port of the IP address of the man-
ager. The IP address of the manager also
supports the IPv6 format.
TIME_TICK The timer value for keep receiving notifica- 0 ~ 44640 NONE 0
tions from the time the subscription is regis-
tered for the notification manager. If 0, the
timer is not used and the subscription is
maintained until deleted. The value is in
minutes. The value less than 15 is changed
to 15 except for 0.

Command Description

NOTIFICATION The category of notifications. NTF_CATEGORY_ALL NONE NTF_C
_CATEGORY - NTF_CATEGORY_ALL: All notification / ATEGO
categories. NTF_CATEGORY_ALA RY_ALL
- NTF_CATEGORY_ALARM_IRP: Alarm RM_IRP/
IRP notification category. NTF_CATEGORY_TM_
IRP/
- NTF_CATEGORY_TM_IRP: TM IRP
NTF_CATEGORY_NL
notification category.
M_IRP/
- NTF_CATEGORY_NLM_IRP: NLM IRP
NTF_CATEGORY_FT
notification category. M_IRP/
- NTF_CATEGORY_FTM_IRP: FTM IRP NTF_CATEGORY_PM
notification category. _IRP/
- NTF_CATEGORY_PM_IRP: PM IRP NTF_CATEGORY_TR
- NTF_CATEGORY_TRM_IRP: TRM IRP NTF_CATEGORY_SW
- NTF_CATEGORY_SWM_IRP: SWM IRP NTF_CATEGORY_BUL
notification category. K_CM_IRP/
- NTF_CATEGORY_BULK_CM_IRP: Bulk NTF_CATEGORY_KE
CM IRP notification category. RNEL_CM_IRP/
NTF_CATEGORY_SO
- NTF_CATEGORY_KERNEL_CM_IRP:
N_IRP/
Kernel CM IRP notification category.
LOG_FLAG Whether to enable the notification log col- LOG_DISABLED/ NONE LOG_E
lection function when registering the notifi- LOG_ENABLED/ NABLE
cation manager to NE. D
- LOG_ENABLED: The notification log col-
lection function is enabled according to the
notification category value.
- LOG_DISABLED: The notification log
collection function is disabled.
LOG_FTP_REF FTP information for transmitting the notifi- 256 NONE use-
ERENCE cation log collected in the NE to the notifi- rid:pass
cation manager. This value needs only wd:/log/
when LogFlag is set to LOG_ENABLED. It system/
is entered in the applog
'ftp_username:ftp_password:ftp_path:sftp'
format. Enter the user name of the ftp
account in ftp_username, the password of
the ftp account in ftp_password, the log file
upload path in ftp_path, and the sftp proto-
col in sftp.

SBSC_ID The subscription ID for the notification manager registered in
the notification management system.

C0651 DELETE SUBSCRIPTION
Command Format
DLT-SBSC: MGR_REF;
Command Description
Deletes subscriptions for the notification manager information created for receiving the notifica-
tions generated in the system. To delete a subscription, the user must enter the MGR_REF
parameter which includes the IP address and the port information of the notification manager
and the SBSC_ID which is the ID for the registered subscription. Since multiple subscriptions
can be created for each notification manager, if the user wants to delete all registered subscrip-
tions for the a notification manager, only MGR_REF needs to be entered for the registered noti-
fication manager. Deleting a registered subscription also deletes the notification log function
registered for the subscription.
TIMEOUT 10

MGR_REF The network information for the notification 64 NONE x.x.x.x:y
manager. It is entered in the x.x.x.x:yyyy yyy
format, where 'x.x.x.x' represents the IP
address of the manager and 'yyyy' repre-
sents the port of the IP address of the man-
ager. The IP address of the manager also
supports the IPv6 format.


Command Description
C0654 RESUME SUBSCRIPTION
Command Format
START-SBSC;
Command Description
Starts the suspended notification services for registered notification managers. To execute the
command, the user must enter the subscription ID information of the notification manager for
which the notification service will be started. The command has no effect on services registered
for other notification categories for the same notification manager. If the TIME_TICK value for
the subscription is not 0, the timer also starts when the subscription is started.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


C0655 SUSPEND SUBSCRIPTION
Command Format
STOP-SBSC;
Command Description
Stops notification services for registered notification managers. To execute the command, the
user must enter the subscription ID information of the notification manager for which the notifi-
cation service will be stopped. Notification transmission continues for services registered for
other notification categories for the same notification manager. If the TIME_TICK value for the
subscription is not 0, the timer value is reset when the subscription is stopped, and the timer will
start again when the service starts. The command for stopping notification services can only be
executed for subscriptions with active notification services.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


Command Description
C0656 RETRIEVE SUBSCRIPTION
Command Format
RTRV-SBSC;
Command Description
Retrieves the subscription information for notification managers registered for receiving the
notifications generated in the system. This command displays the notification manager's network
information (IP address and port information), time tick setting, notification log collection func-
tion flag, and FTP information for notification log transmission. The user can also retrieve a spe-
cific subscription by entering a subscription ID for a registered notification manager.
TIMEOUT 30

No input parameter.

NTF_MANAGER_REFERENCE The network information for the notification manager.
NTF_SUBSCRIPTION_STATE Whether to provide notification for the registered subscription.

- NTF_SUB_STATE_SUSPENDED: Notification is not pro-
vided.
- NTF_SUB_STATE_NOTSUSPENDED: Notification is pro-
vided.
NTF_TIME_TICK The timer value for keep receiving notifications from the time
the subscription is registered for the notification manager.
NTF_NOTIFICATION_CATEGORYThe category of notifications.
NTF_LOG_FLAG Whether to enable the notification log function when register-

ing notification manager (LOG_ENABLED/
LOG_DISABLED)
NTF_LOG_FTP_REFERENCE It is used only when LogFlag is set to LOG_ENABLED. FTP

information for transmitting the notification logs collected from

the eNB to the notification manager.

Command Description
C0657 EXPORT NOTIFICATION LOG RECORDS
Command Format
UPLD-NOTI-LOG;
Command Description
Records the notification logs collected for the notification category set for the registered notifi-
cation manager in a file and sends it to the notification manager. Whenever a notification is gen-
erated, the notification log data is saved in the system, which is used for generating a notification
log file at the time of user request according to the registered notification category. Then, this file
is transmitted over FTP. The FTP transmission is performed by referencing the
FTP_REFERENCE information entered at the time of subscription registration for the FTP login
account information and the log file upload path. The name of the notification log file is
NLIRP_XML_Notification.xml and the maximum size is 4MB.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


C0661 CHANGE EMS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-EMS-CONF: [IPV4_ADDR], [IPV6_ADDR];
Command Description
Change EMS IP Address.
TIMEOUT 10

IPV4_ADDR EMS IPv4 Address. IPv4 Address NONE --
IPV6_ADDR EMS IPv6 Address. IPv6 Address NONE -

IPV4_ADDR EMS IPv4 Address.

Command Description
C0662 RETRIEVE EMS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-EMS-CONF;
Command Description
EMS IP Address Display.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.


C0700 RETRIEVE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGU-

RATION
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-INH: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID], [ALARM_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieves the alarm inhibition information. The user can use this command to retrieve the list of
alarms inhibited from being displayed on the operator screen. If certain alarms are not generated
when faults occur during operation, the user can execute this command to check whether the
alarms are inhibited.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates the Unit type. UMP/ECP/GPSR/SYS/ NONE UMP
UNIT_ID This field indicates the Unit ID. 0~2 NONE 0

Command Description

ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm type that can MME_COMMUNICATION_ NONE CLOCK
be inhibited. FAIL/SERVICE_OFF/ _FAIL
NTP_UPDATE_ERROR/
FAN_FAIL/UDA/
BOARD_DELETION/
POWER_FAIL/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
COMMUNICATION_FAIL/
CLOCK_FAIL/
MEMORY_FAIL/DSP_FAIL/
DSP_RESTART/SFN_FAIL/
OVERLOAD/DISK_FULL/
MEMORY_FULL/
PORT_DOWN/CPRI_FAIL/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_R
X_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_T
X_FAULT/
CPU_TEMPERATURE_HI
GH/ANTENNA_FAIL/
HOLDOVER_24H/
LOCKING_FAIL/
TOD_MSG_MISSED/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPUT_F
AIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY_DI
SCHARGE/
RECTIFIER_COMMUNICA
TION_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE_FAI
L/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VO
LTAGE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VO
LTAGE_LOW/
SLEEPING_CELL_DETEC
TION/PROCESS_DOWN/

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates the Unit type.
UNIT_ID This field indicates the Unit ID.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm type that can be inhibited.
ALARM_CODE This field indicates an alarm code that can be inhibited.
INHIBIT_STATUS This field indicates a status inhibited of an alarm.

C0701 CHANGE ALARM INHIBITION CONFIGU-

RATION
Command Format
CHG-ALM-INH: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID], [ALARM_TYPE], INHIBIT_STATUS;
Command Description
Changes the alarm inhibition information. The user can use this command to change the existing
alarm inhibition information. The alarms inhibited by the user are not displayed on the screen
and are not recorded in the alarm history. If certain alarms are not generated when faults occur
during operation, the user can execute this command to check whether the alarms are inhibited.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates the Unit type to which UMP/ECP/GPSR/SYS/ NONE UMP
an alarm inhibition will be applied.
UNIT_ID This field indicates the Unit ID to which an 0~2 NONE 0
alarm inhibition will be applied.

Command Description

ALARM_TYPE This field describes an alarm type that can MME_COMMUNICATI NONE CLOCK
be inhibited. ON_FAIL/ _FAIL
SERVICE_OFF/
NTP_UPDATE_ERRO
R/FAN_FAIL/UDA/
BOARD_DELETION/
POWER_FAIL/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
COMMUNICATION_FA
IL/CLOCK_FAIL/
MEMORY_FAIL/
DSP_FAIL/
DSP_RESTART/
SFN_FAIL/OVER-
LOAD/DISK_FULL/
MEMORY_FULL/
PORT_DOWN/
CPRI_FAIL/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE
R_RX_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE
R_TX_FAULT/
CPU_TEMPERATURE
_HIGH/
ANTENNA_FAIL/
HOLDOVER_24H/
LOCKING_FAIL/
TOD_MSG_MISSED/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH
/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPU
T_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY
_DISCHARGE/
RECTIFIER_COMMUN
ICATION_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE
_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_LOW/
SLEEPING_CELL_DET
ECTION/
PROCESS_DOWN/
INHIBIT_STAT This field describes a status inhibited of an ALLOW/INHIBIT/ NONE ALLOW
US alarm.


C0704 RETRIEVE ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGU-

RATION
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-SEV: [UNIT_TYPE], [ALARM_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieves the alarm severity state of the NE. The user can use this command to retrieve the alarm
severity state information set by the CHG-ALM-SEV command. When the alarm severity state
is set by the CHG-ALM-SEV command, the severity state is overwritten.
TIMEOUT 10

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates a unit type. UMP/ECP/RRH/GPSR/PSU/SYS/ NONE UMP

Command Description

ALARM_TY This field indicates an alarm MME_COMMUNICATION_FAIL/ NONE CLOCK
PE type. SERVICE_OFF/ _FAIL
NTP_UPDATE_ERROR/FAN_FAIL/
BOARD_DELETION/POWER_FAIL/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
COMMUNICATION_FAIL/CLOCK_FAIL/
MEMORY_FAIL/DSP_FAIL/
DSP_RESTART/SFN_FAIL/
PORT_DOWN/CPRI_FAIL/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_RX_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_TX_FAULT/
CPU_TEMPERATURE_HIGH/
DC_INPUT_FAIL/DISABLED/LNA_FAIL/
LOW_GAIN/LOW_POWER/
OVER_POWER/VSWR_FAIL/
RSSI_HIGH/RSSI_LOW/
ANTENNA_FAIL/HOLDOVER_24H/
LOCKING_FAIL/TOD_MSG_MISSED/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPUT_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY_DISCHARGE/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY_DISCONNECT/
RECTIFIER_COMMUNICATION_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_DC_OVER_CURRENT/
RECTIFIER_DOOR_OPEN/
RECTIFIER_HEATER_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_HIG
H/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_LOW
/SLEEPING_CELL_DETECTION/
PROCESS_DOWN/
HW_TYPE_MISMATCH/

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates a unit type.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm type.
SEVERITY This field indiccates the status severity of an alarm.
ALARM_CODE This field indicates an alarm code.

C0705 CHANGE ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-ALM-SEV: [UNIT_TYPE], [ALARM_TYPE], SEVERITY;
Command Description
Changes the alarm severity state. You can use this command to change the existing alarm sever-
ity state information. When an alarm occurs, the alarm severity state information changed by the
CHG-ALM-SEV command is displayed on the operator screen. The changed alarm severity
state can be retrieved by the RTRV-ALM-SEV command.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE This is a unit type to which an UMP/ECP/RRH/GPSR/PSU/SYS/ NONE UMP
alarm severity will be changed.

Command Description

ALARM_TY This field indicates an alarm. MME_COMMUNICATION_FAIL/ NONE CLOCK
PE SERVICE_OFF/ _FAIL
NTP_UPDATE_ERROR/FAN_FAIL/
BOARD_DELETION/POWER_FAIL/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
COMMUNICATION_FAIL/
CLOCK_FAIL/MEMORY_FAIL/
DSP_FAIL/DSP_RESTART/
SFN_FAIL/PORT_DOWN/
CPRI_FAIL/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_RX_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVER_TX_FAULT/
CPU_TEMPERATURE_HIGH/
DC_INPUT_FAIL/DISABLED/
LNA_FAIL/LOW_GAIN/
LOW_POWER/OVER_POWER/
VSWR_FAIL/RSSI_HIGH/
RSSI_LOW/ANTENNA_FAIL/
HOLDOVER_24H/LOCKING_FAIL/
TOD_MSG_MISSED/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPUT_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY_DISCHARG
E/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY_DISCONNE
CT/
RECTIFIER_COMMUNICATION_FA
IL/
RECTIFIER_DC_OVER_CURRENT/
RECTIFIER_DOOR_OPEN/
RECTIFIER_HEATER_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_H
IGH/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_VOLTAGE_L
OW/
SLEEPING_CELL_DETECTION/
PROCESS_DOWN/
HW_TYPE_MISMATCH/
SEVERITY This field indicates the severity of critical/major/minor/warning/ NONE major
an alarm.


C0706 RETRIEVE ALARM THRESHOLD CONFIG-

URATION
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-THR: [UNIT_TYPE], [ALARM_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieve the alarm Threshold configuration information
TIMEOUT 10

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates a unit type to which an UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
alarm Threshold will be applied.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm type. OVERLOAD/ NONE OVER-
DISK_FULL/ LOAD
MEMORY_FULL/

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates a unit type to which an alarm Threshold will
be applied.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm type.
ALARM_CODE This field indicates an alarm code.
THR_CRI_DEC Critical level threshold for Alarm Declare. ThresholdCriti-

calDeclare value must be greater than the value of Threshold-
MajorDeclare. ThresholdCriticalDeclare value must be greater
than or equal to the value of ThresholdCriticalClear.
THR_MAJ_DEC Major level threshold for Alarm Declare. ThresholdMajorDe-

clare value must be greater than the value of ThresholdMinor-
Declare. ThresholdMajorlDeclare value must be greater than or
equal to the value of ThresholdMajorClear.

Command Description
THR_MIN_DEC Minor level threshold for Alarm Declare. ThresholdMinorDe-

clare value must be greater than or equal to the value of Thresh-
oldMinorClear.
THR_CRI_CLR Critical level threshold for Alarm Clear. ThresholdCriticalClear

value must be greater than the value of ThresholdMajorClear.
ThresholdCriticalDeclare value must be greater than or equal to
the value of ThresholdCriticalClear.
THR_MAJ_CLR Major level threshold for Alarm Clear. ThresholdMajorClear

value must be greater than the value of ThresholdMinorClear.
ThresholdMajorlDeclare value must be greater than or equal to
the value of ThresholdMajorClear.
THR_MIN_CLR Minor level threshold for Alarm Clear. ThresholdMinorDeclare

value must be greater than or equal to the value of Threshold-
MinorClear.

C0707 CHANGE ALARM THRESHOLD CONFIGU-

RATION
Command Format
CHG-ALM-THR: [UNIT_TYPE], [ALARM_TYPE], [THR_CRI_DEC], [THR_MAJ_DEC],
[THR_MIN_DEC], [THR_CRI_CLR], [THR_MAJ_CLR], [THR_MIN_CLR];
Command Description
Changes the alarm threshold. The user can use this command to change the existing alarm
threshold. When a Threshold alarm occurs and if the alarm exceeds the level threshold changed
by the CHG-ALM-THR command, the corresponding alarm level is displayed on the operator
screen. The changed alarm threshold can be retrieved by the RTRV-ALM-THR command.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE This is a unit type to which an alarm sever- UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
ity will be changed.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates an alarm. OVERLOAD/ NONE OVER-
DISK_FULL/ LOAD
MEMORY_FULL/
THR_CRI_DEC Critical level threshold for Alarm Declare. 1 ~ 100 NONE 95
ThresholdCriticalDeclare value must be
greater than the value of ThresholdMajor-
Declare. ThresholdCriticalDeclare value
must be greater than or equal to the value
of ThresholdCriticalClear.
THR_MAJ_DE Major level threshold for Alarm Declare. 1 ~ 100 NONE 90
C ThresholdMajorDeclare value must be
greater than the value of ThresholdMinor-
Declare. ThresholdMajorlDeclare value
must be greater than or equal to the value
of ThresholdMajorClear.
THR_MIN_DEC Minor level threshold for Alarm Declare. 1 ~ 100 NONE 85
ThresholdMinorDeclare value must be
greater than or equal to the value of
ThresholdMinorClear.
THR_CRI_CLR Critical level threshold for Alarm Clear. 1 ~ 100 NONE 95
ThresholdCriticalClear value must be
greater than the value of ThresholdMajor-
Clear. ThresholdCriticalDeclare value must
be greater than or equal to the value of
ThresholdCriticalClear.

Command Description

THR_MAJ_CLR Major level threshold for Alarm Clear. 1 ~ 100 NONE 90
ThresholdMajorClear value must be
greater than the value of ThresholdMinor-
Clear. ThresholdMajorlDeclare value must
be greater than or equal to the value of
ThresholdMajorClear.
THR_MIN_CLR Minor level threshold for Alarm Clear. 1 ~ 100 NONE 85
ThresholdMinorDeclare value must be
greater than or equal to the value of
ThresholdMinorClear.


C0708 RETRIEVE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA
Command Format
RTRV-UDA-DATA: [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the UDA data. The user can install an external device and connect it to the UDA port
of the system to monitor and manage faults on the external device.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
PORT_ID The port ID for which the UDA data is to 0~8 NONE 0
be retrieved. If no port ID is entered, all
UDA data is retrieved.

PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm
STATUS The equip status of input port. The input port can be unequipped
or equipped.
ALARM_NAME User-defined alarm name
SEVERITY Alarm severity of UDA.

Command Description
C0709 CHANGE USER DEFINED ALARM DATA
Command Format
CHG-UDA-DATA: PORT_ID, [STATUS], [ALARM_NAME], [SEVERITY];
Command Description
Changes the UDA data. The user can install an external device and connect it to the UDA port of
the system to monitor and manage faults on the external device. When an alarm has occurred on
the UDA port, use the CHG-UDA-DATA command to change STATUS to N_EQUIP to clear the
alarm, change ALARM_NAME to clear the alarm of the previous name and have another alarm
occur using the new name, or change severity to clear the alarm of the previous severity level
and have another alarm occur using the new severity level.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID for which the UDA data is to be 0~8 NONE 0
changed.
STATUS Whether to use the UDA port. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
- EQUIP: The UDA port is used. P
- N_EQUIP: The UDA port is not used.
When N_EQUIP is entered, the user is not
notified even when an alarm occurs on the
UDA port.
ALARM_NAME The name of the alarm detected on the 64 NONE -
UDA port.
SEVERITY The severity of the alarm detected on the critical/major/minor/ NONE major
UDA port. warning/

PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm
or equipped.

SEVERITY Alarm severity of UDA.

Command Description
C0710 RETRIEVE USER DEFINED CONTROL

DATA
Command Format
RTRV-UDA-CTRL: [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieve the User defined control port configuration.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
PORT_ID User defined control port ID to display. 0~1 NONE 0

PORT_ID User defined control port ID to display.
STATUS The equip status of port.
NAME The Control configuration name of port
TYPE Control type of User defined control port. Supported control

types are on and off.
DURATION Minimum control duration in seconds. Valid range is from 1

second to 60 seconds.

C0711 CHANGE USER DEFINED CONTROL DATA
Command Format
CHG-UDA-CTRL: PORT_ID, [STATUS], [NAME], [TYPE], [DURATION];
Command Description
Change the User defined control port configuration.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID User defined control port ID to display. 0~1 NONE 0
STATUS The equip status of port. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
P
NAME The Control configuration name of port 64 NONE -
TYPE Control type of User defined control port. OFF/ON/ NONE ON
Supported control types are on and off.
DURATION Minimum control duration in seconds. Valid 1 ~ 60 NONE 1
range is from 1 second to 60 seconds.

PORT_ID User defined control port ID to display.
STATUS The equip status of port.
NAME The Control configuration name of port
TYPE Control type of User defined control port. Supported control

types are on and off.
DURATION Minimum control duration in seconds. Valid range is from 1

second to 60 seconds.

Command Description
C0712 RETRIEVE ACTIVE ALARMS
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-LIST: [UNIT_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieves the list of alarms currently active in the NE. This command retrieves alarm time, alarm
group information, cause information, alarm severity, detailed alarm type, thresholds, and occur-
rence location. It does not retrieve any alarms previously occurred and cleared or alarms inhib-
ited by user. Only the alarms not inhibited are displayed.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type UMP/ECP/RRH/GPSR/ NONE UMP
PSU/SYS/

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type
LOCATION It is provided with the alarm location information using Xpath

expression.
ALARM_TYPE One probableCause can be mapped into several specificProb-

lem to represent more detailed information.
RAISED_TIME Alarm occurrence time.
ALARM_GROUP Alarm group.
PROBABLE_CAUSE Refer to Annex.A of 3GPP TS 32.111-3.
SEVERITY The severity of alarm
ALARM_CODE AlarmCode.

INFO It is provided with the alarm information.(if it is threshold

alarm, it is provided threshold and current value)
SEQUENCE_ID The sequence ID of the alarm.

Command Description
C0713 RETRIEVE ALARM LOGS
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-LOG;
Command Description
Retrieves the alarm history in the NE. Up to 100 recent alarms are retrieved. This command
retrieves alarm occurrence time, alarm cleared time, alarm group, cause, detailed alarm type, and
occurrence location. If the alarm has not yet been cleared after its occurrence, the cleared time is
retrieved as '-' in the alarm log.
TIMEOUT 30

No input parameter.

LOG_NO Table index
UNIT_TYPE It is unit type
ALARM_TYPE One probableCause can be mapped into several specificProb-

lem to represent more detailed information.
LOCATION It is provided with the alarm location information.
RAISED_TIME Alarm occurrence time.
ALARM_GROUP Alarm group.
PROBABLE_CAUSE Refer to Annex.A of 3GPP TS 32.111-3.Some alarm has Sam-

sungs specific probableCause.
ALARM_CODE This field indicates an alarm code that can be inhibited.


Command Description
C0714 RETRIEVE ALARM INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-ALM-INF: [UNIT_TYPE];
Command Description
This operation is response of the list of available alarm information.
TIMEOUT 30
Defaul
t
UNIT_TYPE It is unit type. UMP/ECP/RRH/ NONE UMP
GPSR/PSU/SYS/

UNIT_TYPE It is the unit type.
ALARM_TYPE It is a alarm Type.
ALARM_GROUP Alarm Event Type
PROBABLE_CAUSE Probable Cause defined TS32.111-3 ANNEX-A.
ALARM_CODE Alarm Code


C0750 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-PRC-STS: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Inquire unit status of system.
TIMEOUT 10

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type. UMP/ECP/ NONE UMP
UNIT_ID It is unit ID. 0 ~ 10 NONE 0

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type.
UNIT_ID It is unit ID.
RACK_ID It is rack ID.
SHELF_ID It is shelf ID.
SLOT_ID It is slot ID.
DUAL_STATUS It is dual status of the unit.
OPERATIONAL_STATE It is operational state of the unit.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the processor.
TEMPERATURE It is Temperature of the unit.

Command Description
C0751 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL LINK STATE/STA-

TUS
Command Format
RTRV-ELINK-STS: [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Inquire external link status.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID It is port ID. 0~5 NONE 0

PORT_ID It is port ID.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE It is administrative state of link.
OPERATIONAL_STATE It is operational state of link.
INTERFACE_NAME It is the interface name.
RX_UTIL It is rx utilization.
TX_UTIL It is tx utilization.

C0752 RETRIEVE CPU UTILIZATION
Command Format
RTRV-CPU-UTIL: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves CPU utilization of the processor. Available processor types are UMP (main board) and
ECP (channel card). Displays the processor board type, processor ID, shelf ID, slot ID, and CPU
load value. The CPU load value is periodically updated. It indicates the CPU utilization as a per-
centage of total availability.
The processor type and processor ID represent the logical location of the processor while the
shelf ID and slot ID represent the physical location of the processor.
TIMEOUT 10


CPU_LOAD It is CPU load.

Command Description
C0753 RETRIEVE MEMORY UTILIZATION
Command Format
RTRV-MEM-UTIL: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Inquire memory utilization.
TIMEOUT 10


TOT_SIZE It is total memory size in KB.
USED_SIZE It is used memory size in KB.
FREE_SIZE It is free memory size in KB.
USED_RATE It is used rate of memory.

C0754 RETRIEVE DISK UTILIZATION
Command Format
RTRV-DISK-UTIL: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID];
Command Description
Inquire disk utilization.
TIMEOUT 10


S_DISK_TYPE it is String Disk Type.
TOT_SIZE It is total disk size in KB.
USED_SIZE It is used disk size in KB.
FREE_SIZE It is free disk size in KB.
USED_RATE It is used rate of disk.

Command Description
C0850 RETRIEVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-SYS-CONF;
Command Description
Retrieves the system configuration information. It includes the system ID, status (EQUIP/
N_EQUIP), administrative state (locked, shutting down, unlocked), the type of grown system
and the system version.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

SYS_ID The system ID configured by the user when growing the system
STATUS The system status.

- EQUIP: Grown - N_EQUIP: Degrown
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the system configured by the user.

- locked: A transitional state in the system grow/degrow pro-
cess. In this state, resources are grown in the PLD but no call
- unlocked: The system resource growth is complete. The
locked state.
TYPE The type of the network element (LTE eNB is set to eNB).

SYS_TYPE The system type set by the user when growing the system. This
includes system information such as indoor/outdoor and inte-
grated/standalone.
USER_LABEL An additional system name given by the user.
SW_VERSION The software version running in the system.
LATITUDE The latitude of the system location. A BBB:CC:DD.DDD

- A : hemisphere. 'N' or 'S'.
-BBB : degree. 0~90.
-CC : minutes. 0~59.
-DD.DDD : seconds. 00.000~59.999
LONGITUDE The longitude of the system location. A BBB:CC:DD.DDD.

-A : hemisphere. 'E' or 'W'.
-BBB : degree. 0~180.
-CC : minutes. 0~59.
-DD.DDD : seconds. 00.000~59.999
HEIGHT The altitude of the system location. AAAA.AAm.

-AAAA.AA : water elevation.
-9999.99m ~ 9999.99m unit 'm' must be added. ex) '53.85m'
AC_COMM_FAIL_TX_FLAG Whether to give the output off command to the RF unit when
the Access Control Communication Fail alarm occurs.

Command Description
C0851 RETRIEVE SYSTEM PHYSICAL

RESOURCE(BOARD,UNIT) CONFIGURA-
TION
Command Format
RTRV-UNIT-CONF: [UNIT_TYPE], [UNIT_ID], [SIDE];
Command Description
Retrieves the type, ID, mounting status in the PLD, board type, and mounting location for each
unit of the system.
TIMEOUT 10

UNIT_TYPE The unit type. UMP/ECP/ECM/REC- NONE UMP
TIFIER/
UNIT_ID The ID of each unit; a unique value within 0 ~ 10 NONE 0
UnitType.
SIDE The side information of each unit; Single, SINGLE/ NONE SINGLE
A_Side, B_Side

UNIT_TYPE The unit type.
UNIT_ID The ID of each unit; a unique value within UnitType.
SIDE The side information of each unit; Single, A_Side, B_Side
STATUS The mounting status in the PLD for the UnitType and UnitID.
- EQUIP: Indicates that the unit is mounted on the PLD and
available in the system. The unit is also available for loading the
software.
- N_EQUIP: Indicates that the unit is unmounted on the PLD
and unavailable in the system. The unit is also unavailable for
loading the software.

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the system unit configured by the

user.
- locked: A transitional state in the system unit grow/degrow
process. In this state, resources are grown in the PLD but no call
- unlocked: The system unit resource growth is complete. The
locked state.
BOARD_TYPE The board type of the UnitType and UnitID. For the hardware
type of the unit, the same UnitType can have different types of
boards.
RACK_ID The ID of the rack where the UnitType and UnitId are located.
SHELF_ID The ID of the shelf where the UnitType and UnitId are located.
SLOT_ID The ID of the slot where the UnitType and UnitId are located.

Command Description
C0853 RETRIEVE DB VERSION
Command Format
RTRV-DB-VER;
Command Description
Retrieves the version information of the PLD database in the system. This includes the database
schema version and the database data version. It also shows the time of the last database update.
The database schema version is the same as the software version, and the database data version
increments by 1 each time the database is updated.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

DB_SCHEMA_VERSION The version information is changed when the PLD database in
the system is changed structurally. It is the same as the software
version.
DB_DATA_VERSION The version information of the PLD database in the system.
DB_UPDATED_TIME The last update time of the PLD database in the system.

C0859 RETRIEVE CELL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration information of the cells provided by the system. The user can enter
CELL_NUM to select a cell to be retrieved. If no cell is selected, configuration information for
all cells is displayed. The user can retrieve the cell's status, administrative state, sector informa-
tion.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
exceed the maximum number of cells
supported by the system. It is determined
by FA/Sector. For example, if the maxi-
mum capacity provided to the carrier per
system is 1 FA/3 Sector, up to 3 cells are
supported.

ported.
STATUS The status information of the cell.

- EQUIP: Indicates that the cell is grown and available in the
system. In the EQUIP state, the user can change the cell status
to locked, unlocked, or shuttingDown.
- N_EQUIP: Indicates that the cell is degrown and unavailable
in the system.

Command Description
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the cell configured by the user. The
initial value is locked when growing the system. This can be
state.
SECTOR_ID The ID of the sector to which the cell belongs (in the range from
0 to 2 in a system supporting 3 sectors).
FA_ID The ID of the FA to which the cell belongs.
CC_ID The ID of the channel card supporting the cell (unique within
the system).
DSP_ID The DSP ID within the channel card supporting the cell (unique
within the channel card).

C0860 RETRIEVE NTP CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-NTP-CONF: [SVR_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieve NTP Server IP Information.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
SVR_TYPE NTP Configuration Table Index. PRIMARY_NTP_SER NONE PRIMA
VER/ RY_NT
SECONDARY_NTP_S P_SER
ERVER/ VER

SVR_TYPE NTP Configuration Table Index.
IP_VER NTP Server IP Version
NTP_IPV4 NTP Server V4 IP Address

Command Description
C0861 CHANGE NTP CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-NTP-CONFIGURATION: SVR_TYPE, [IP_VER], [NTP_IPV4], [NTP_IPV6];
Command Description
Change NTP Server IP Information.
TIMEOUT 10

SVR_TYPE NTP Configuration Table Index. PRIMARY_NTP_SERV NONE PRIMA
ER/ RY_NT
SECONDARY_NTP_S P_SER
ERVER/ VER
IP_VER NTP Server IP Version IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
NTP_IPV4 NTP Server V4 IP Address IPv4 Address NONE -
NTP_IPV6 NTP Server V6 IP Address IPv6 Address NONE -

SVR_TYPE NTP Configuration Table Index.
IP_VER NTP Server IP Version

C1743 CREATE VLAN CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-VLAN-CONF: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [VLAN_ID], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE],
[DESCRIPTION];
Command Description
This command is to activate VLAN interface.
TIMEOUT 10

DB_INDEX Index for the VLAN interface. 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
IF_NAME The name of the GE interface connected to 24 NONE -
the VLAN interface (e.g. ge_0_0_0). The
VLAN interface is created as a combination
of the GE interface name and VLAN_ID.
VLAN_ID The ID of the VLAN interface (for example, 1 ~ 4094 NONE 1
to create ge_0_0_0.100, VLAN_ID is 100).
ADMINISTRATI The administrative state for determining linkLocked/linkUn- NONE linkUn-
VE_STATE usage of the VLAN interface. locked/ locked
- linkLocked: The port is disabled.
- linkUnlocked: The port is enabled.
DESCRIPTION The description of the VLAN interface 32 NONE -

usage. Up to 32 characters can be entered.

DB_INDEX Index for the VLAN interface.
IF_NAME The name of the GE interface connected to the VLAN interface

(e.g. ge_0_0_0). The VLAN interface is created as a combina-
tion of the GE interface name and VLAN_ID.
VLAN_ID The ID of the VLAN interface (for example, to create

ge_0_0_0.100, VLAN_ID is 100).
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state for determining usage of the VLAN

Command Description
interface.
DESCRIPTION The description of the VLAN interface usage. Up to 32 charac-

ters can be entered.

C1744 DELETE VLAN CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-VLAN-CONF: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
This command is to deactivate VLAN interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


Command Description
C1745 CHANGE VLAN CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-VLAN-CONF: DB_INDEX, [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE];
Command Description
This command is to change VLAN interface
TIMEOUT 10

ADMINISTRATI The administrative state for determining linkLocked/linkUn- NONE lin-
VE_STATE usage of the VLAN interface. locked/ kLocked


interface.

C1746 RETRIEVE VLAN CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-VLAN-CONF: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
This command is to retrieve VLAN interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

IF_NAME The name of the GE interface connected to the VLAN interface

(e.g. ge_0_0_0). The VLAN interface is created as a combina-
tion of the GE interface name and VLAN_ID.
VLAN_ID The ID of the VLAN interface (for example, to create

ge_0_0_0.100, VLAN_ID is 100).

interface.
DESCRIPTION The description of the VLAN interface usage. Up to 32 charac-

ters can be entered.

Command Description
C1747 CHANGE EXTERNAL LINK CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-ELINK-CONF: PORT_ID, [STATUS], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE], [CONNECT_TYPE],
[SPEED_DUPLEX], [MTU], [FLOW_CONTROL], [LAG_ID], [DESCRIPTION];
Command Description
Changes the configuration information of the external link for communication outside the sys-
tem. The user can specify the unit type, unit ID, or port ID and change the status of the port to
grow or degrow it. To prevent communication interruption, the last link cannot be degrown or
locked.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link. 0~5 NONE 0
STATUS The EQUIP information for the backhaul N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
interface port. P
- EQUIP: Indicates that the unit is mounted
on the PLD and available in the system.
- N_EQUIP: Indicates that the unit is
unmounted on the PLD and unavailable in
the system.
ADMINISTRATI The administrative state. linkLocked/linkUn- NONE linkUn-
VE_STATE - linkLocked: The port is disabled. locked/ locked
CONNECT_TY The connect type of the external link. Backhaul/UDE/ NONE Back-
PE haul
SPEED_DUPL The speed and duplex of the backhaul port. AUTO/S10_HALF/ NONE AUTO
EX - AUTO: The speed is determined by auto- S10_FULL/
negotiation. S100_HALF/
- S10_HALF: A speed of 10 Mbps, half- S100_FULL/
duplex mode. S1000_FULL/
S10G_FULL/
- S10_FULL: A speed 10 Mbps, full-duplex
mode.
- S100_HALF: A speed of 100 Mbps, half-
duplex mode.
- S100_FULL: A speed of 100 Mbps, full-
duplex mode.
- S1000_FULL: A speed of 1000 Mbps,
full-duplex mode.


MTU The maximum transmission unit of the 68 ~ 8270 NONE 1500
external link. The default is 1500 (bytes).
FLOW_CONTR Whether flow control of the external link is False/True/ NONE False
OL enabled.
- False: Flow control is disabled.
- True: Flow control is enabled.
LAG_ID The link aggregation ID (0 means it is not 0~2 NONE 0

link aggregation).
DESCRIPTION Describes the use of the external link. Up to 32 NONE -
32 characters are allowed.

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link.
STATUS The EQUIP information for the backhaul interface port.

available in the system.
and unavailable in the system.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state.

CONNECT_TYPE The connect type of the external link.
SPEED_DUPLEX The speed and duplex of the backhaul port.

- AUTO: The speed is determined by auto-negotiation.
- S10_HALF: A speed of 10 Mbps, half-duplex mode.
- S10_FULL: A speed 10 Mbps, full-duplex mode.
- S100_FULL: A speed of 100 Mbps, full-duplex mode.
MTU The maximum transmission unit of the external link. The

default is 1500 (bytes).
FLOW_CONTROL Whether flow control of the external link is enabled.


Command Description
LAG_ID The link aggregation ID (0 means it is not link aggregation).
MEDIA_TYPE The media type of the external link, which is set automatically.
DESCRIPTION Describes the use of the external link. Up to 32 characters are

allowed.

C1748 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL LINK CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-ELINK-CONF: [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the external link settings. If Port ID is not specified, all external link settings are
retrieved. This command can retrieve settings such as EQUIP of link, lock status, media type,
MTU, speed, duplex, and flow control.
TIMEOUT 10

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link. 0~5 NONE 0

PORT_ID The port ID of the external link.
STATUS The EQUIP information for the backhaul interface port.

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state.

CONNECT_TYPE The connect type of the external link.
SPEED_DUPLEX The speed and duplex of the backhaul port.

- AUTO: The speed is determined by auto-negotiation.

Command Description
- S10_FULL: A speed 10 Mbps, full-duplex mode.

MTU The maximum transmission unit of the external link. The

default is 1500 (bytes).
FLOW_CONTROL Whether flow control of the external link is enabled.

LAG_ID The link aggregation ID (0 means it is not link aggregation).
MEDIA_TYPE The media type of the external link, which is set automatically.
DESCRIPTION Describes the use of the external link. Up to 32 characters are

allowed.

C1749 CREATE LAG CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-LAG-CONF: DB_INDEX, [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE], [LAG_ID], [DESCRIPTION];
Command Description
This command is to activate LINK AGGREGATION.
TIMEOUT 10

DB_INDEX This field indicates dbIndex 0~1 NONE 0
ADMINISTRATI The administrative state for determining linkLocked/linkUn- NONE linkUn-
VE_STATE usage of the LAG interface. locked/ locked
LAG_ID This field indicates Link aggregation Inter- 1~2 NONE 1

face ID
DESCRIPTION The description of the LAG interface usage. 32 NONE -
Up to 32 characters can be entered.

DB_INDEX This field indicates dbIndex
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state for determining usage of the LAG

interface.
LAG_ID This field indicates Link aggregation Interface ID
DESCRIPTION The description of the LAG interface usage. Up to 32 characters

can be entered.

Command Description
C1750 DELETE LAG CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-LAG-CONF: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
This command is to deactivate LINK AGGREGATION.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1751 CHANGE LAG CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-LAG-CONF: DB_INDEX, [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE];
Command Description
This command is to change LINK AGGREGATION
TIMEOUT 10

ADMINISTRATI The administrative state for determining linkLocked/linkUn- NONE lin-
VE_STATE usage of the LAG interface. locked/ kLocked


interface.

Command Description
C1752 RETRIEVE LAG CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-LAG-CONF: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
This command is to retrieve LINK AGGREGATION.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


interface.
LAG_ID This field indicates Link aggregation Interface ID
DESCRIPTION The description of the LAG interface usage. Up to 32 characters

can be entered.

C1905 RETRIEVE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-IP-ADDR: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the IP address set for interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index for setting the IP address. 0 ~ 29 NONE 0

DB_INDEX Index for setting the IP address.
IF_NAME The name of the interface to be set with the IP address. Enter
the name of the interface grown. For example, enter ge_0_0_0
for the GE interface, ge_0_0_1.100 for the VLAN interface, or
sa1 for the LAG interface.
IP_ADDR The IP address to be set.
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP address determining the network

mask. If the network mask is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
OAM Attribute of the IP address, whether to use the IP address

entered for OAM.
- False: The IP address is not used for OAM.
- True: The IP address is used for OAM.
LTE_SIGNAL_S1 Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use the IP address

entered for S1 signals.
- False: The IP address is not used for S1 signals.

Command Description
- True: The IP address is used for S1 signals.
LTE_SIGNAL_X2 Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use the IP address

entered for X2 signals.
- False: The IP address is not used for X2 signals.
- True: The IP address is used for X2 signals.
LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use the IP address

entered for bearer.
- False: The IP address is not used for bearer.
- True: The IP address is used for bearer.

C1906 CREATE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-IP-ADDR: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [IP_ADDR], [IP_PFX_LEN], [OAM],
[LTE_SIGNAL_S1], [LTE_SIGNAL_X2], [LTE_BEARER];
Command Description
Sets the IP address for an interface. The interface must be grown before setting the IP address.
TIMEOUT 10

IF_NAME The name of the interface to be set with the 24 NONE -
IP address. Enter the name of the interface
grown. For example, enter ge_0_0_0 for
the GE interface, ge_0_0_1.100 for the
VLAN interface, or sa1 for the LAG inter-
face.
IP_ADDR The IP address to be set. IPv4 Address NONE -
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP address deter- 1 ~ 30 NONE 24
mining the network mask. If the network
mask is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
OAM Attribute of the IP address, whether to use False/True/ NONE True
the IP address entered for OAM.
- False: The IP address is not used for
OAM.
LTE_SIGNAL_ Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use False/True/ NONE True

S1 the IP address entered for S1 signals.
- False: The IP address is not used for S1
signals.
- True: The IP address is used for S1 sig-
nals.
X2 the IP address entered for X2 signals.
- False: The IP address is not used for X2
signals.
- True: The IP address is used for X2 sig-
nals.

Command Description

LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use False/True/ NONE True
the IP address entered for bearer.
bearer.



entered for OAM.



entered for bearer.

C1907 DELETE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-IP-ADDR: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Deletes the IP address set for an interface. Once the IP address is deleted, the IP communication
is no longer provided with the outside using the IP address.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


Command Description
C1908 RETRIEVE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-IPV6-ADDR: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the IPv6 address set for interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index for setting the IPv6 address. 0 ~ 29 NONE 0

DB_INDEX Index for setting the IPv6 address.
IF_NAME The name of the interface to be set with the IPv6 address. Enter
IPV6_ADDR The IPv6 address to be set.
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 address.
OAM Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to use the IPv6 address
set for OAM.
LTE_SIGNAL_S1 Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to use the IPv6 address
set for S1 signals.

LTE_SIGNAL_X2 Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to use the IPv6 address
set for X2 signals.
LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to use the IPv6 address
set for bearer.

Command Description
C1909 CREATE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CRTE-IPV6-ADDR: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [IPV6_ADDR], [IPV6_PFX_LEN], [OAM],
Command Description
Sets the IPv6 address for the interface. The interface must be grown before setting the IPv6
address.
TIMEOUT 10

IPv6 address. Enter the name of the inter-
face grown. For example, enter ge_0_0_0
for the GE interface, ge_0_0_1.100 for the
face.
IPV6_ADDR The IPv6 address to be set. IPv6 Address NONE -
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 address. 1 ~ 127 NONE 64
OAM Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to False/True/ NONE True
use the IPv6 address set for OAM.
OAM.
LTE_SIGNAL_ Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to False/True/ NONE True

S1 use the IPv6 address set for S1 signals.
signals.
nals.
X2 use the IPv6 address set for X2 signals.
signals.
nals.


LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to False/True/ NONE True
use the IPv6 address set for bearer.
bearer.

set for OAM.
set for S1 signals.
set for X2 signals.
set for bearer.

Command Description
C1910 DELETE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
DLT-IPV6-ADDR: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Deletes the IPv6 address set for an interface. Once the IPv6 address is deleted, the IPv6 commu-
nication is no longer provided with the outside using the IP address.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1911 RETRIEVE IPV4 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY

CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-IPV4-PRIOR: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves configured IP priority for each IP attribute which is OAM and Signal.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of the IP attribute for which IP prior- 0~2 NONE 0
ity is to be changed.

DB_INDEX Index of the IP attribute for which IP priority is to be changed.
ATTRIBUTE IP Attribute Type.
PRI_IPV4_ADDR Primary IPv4 Address.
SEC_IPV4_ADDR Secondary IPv4 Address.

Command Description
C1912 CHANGE IPV4 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY

CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-IPV4-PRIOR: DB_INDEX, [PRI_IPV4_ADDR], [SEC_IPV4_ADDR];
Command Description
Changes configuration of IP priority for each IP attribute which is OAM and Signal.
TIMEOUT 10

DB_INDEX Index of the IP attribute for which IP priority 0~2 NONE 0
is to be changed.
PRI_IPV4_ADD Primary IPv4 Address. IPv4 Address NONE -
R
SEC_IPV4_AD Secondary IPv4 Address. IPv4 Address NONE -
DR

DB_INDEX Index of the IP attribute for which IP priority is to be changed.
ATTRIBUTE IP Attribute Type.

C1913 RETRIEVE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-IP-ROUTE: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves static IP routes set by the user. If the DB_INDEX parameter is entered, only the corre-
sponding IP route is retrieved. If not, all IP routes are retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index for the IP route. 0 ~ 127 NONE 0

DB_INDEX Index for the IP route.
IP_PREFIX IP route to be created.
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP route determining the network mask.
If the network mask is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
IP_GW The nexthop IP (or gateway IP) address of the IP route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IP route. Entered between 1 and 255. The
default is 1. Smaller the distance value, the higher the priority
of the route becomes.

Command Description
C1914 CREATE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-IP-ROUTE: DB_INDEX, [IP_PREFIX], [IP_PFX_LEN], [IP_GW], [DISTANCE];
Command Description
Creates static IP route.
TIMEOUT 10

IP_PREFIX IP route to be created. IPv4 Address NONE -
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP route determin- 0 ~ 32 NONE 0
ing the network mask. If the network mask
is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
IP_GW The nexthop IP (or gateway IP) address of IPv4 Address NONE -
the IP route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IP route. Entered 1 ~ 255 NONE 1
between 1 and 255. The default is 1.
Smaller the distance value, the higher the
priority of the route becomes.

DB_INDEX Index for the IP route.
IP_PREFIX IP route to be created.
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP route determining the network mask.
If the network mask is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
IP_GW The nexthop IP (or gateway IP) address of the IP route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IP route. Entered between 1 and 255. The

C1915 DELETE IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-IP-ROUTE: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Deletes static IP route.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


Command Description
C1916 RETRIEVE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-IPV6-ROUTE: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves static IPv6 routes set by the user. If the DB_INDEX parameter is entered, only the cor-
responding IPv6 route is retrieved. If not, all IPv6 routes are retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index for the IPv6 route. 0 ~ 127 NONE 0

DB_INDEX Index for the IPv6 route.
IPV6_PREFIX IPv6 route to be created.
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 route determining the network
mask.
IPV6_GW The nexthop IPv6 (or gateway IPv6) address of the IPv6 route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IPv6 route. Entered between 1 and 255. The

C1917 CREATE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-IPV6-ROUTE: DB_INDEX, [IPV6_PREFIX], [IPV6_PFX_LEN], [IPV6_GW], [DIS-
TANCE];
Command Description
Creates static IPv6 route.
TIMEOUT 10

IPV6_PREFIX IPv6 route to be created. IPv6 Address NONE -
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 route deter- 0 ~ 128 NONE 0
mining the network mask.
IPV6_GW The nexthop IPv6 (or gateway IPv6) IPv6 Address NONE -
address of the IPv6 route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IPv6 route. Entered 1 ~ 255 NONE 1
between 1 and 255. The default is 1.
Smaller the distance value, the higher the
priority of the route becomes.

DB_INDEX Index for the IPv6 route.
IPV6_PREFIX IPv6 route to be created.
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 route determining the network
mask.
IPV6_GW The nexthop IPv6 (or gateway IPv6) address of the IPv6 route.
DISTANCE The distance of the IPv6 route. Entered between 1 and 255. The

Command Description
C1918 DELETE IPV6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-IPV6-ROUTE: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Deletes static IPv6 route.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1919 CHANGE IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-IP-ADDR: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [IP_ADDR], [IP_PFX_LEN], [OAM],
Command Description
Changes the IP address for an interface. The changes made to the IP addresses are applied to the
system immediately. Therefore, the user must check that the new IP address conforms to the net-
work IP configuration to avoid IP communication problems after making changes.
TIMEOUT 10

IP address. Enter the name of the interface
grown. For example, enter ge_0_0_0 for
the GE interface, ge_0_0_1.100 for the
face.
IP_ADDR The IP address to be set. IPv4 Address NONE -
IP_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IP address deter- 1 ~ 30 NONE 24
mining the network mask. If the network
mask is 255.255.255.0, the length is 24.
OAM Attribute of the IP address, whether to use False/True/ NONE True
the IP address entered for OAM.
OAM.

S1 the IP address entered for S1 signals.
signals.
nals.
X2 the IP address entered for X2 signals.
signals.
nals.

Command Description

LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IP address. Whether to use False/True/ NONE True
the IP address entered for bearer.
bearer.



entered for OAM.



entered for bearer.

C1920 CHANGE IPV6 ADDRESS CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-IPV6-ADDR: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [IPV6_ADDR], [IPV6_PFX_LEN], [OAM],
Command Description
Changes the IPv6 address set for an interface. To change an IPv6 address, an interface with an
IPv6 address must exist. Enter the new address in the DB_INDEX parameter. Since any changes
to IPv6 addresses are applied in the system immediately, the user must check that the new IPv6
address conforms to the external network configuration in order to avoid communication inter-
ruptions after changing the address.
TIMEOUT 10

IPv6 address. Enter the name of the inter-
face grown. For example, enter ge_0_0_0
for the GE interface, ge_0_0_1.100 for the
face.
IPV6_ADDR The IPv6 address to be set. IPv6 Address NONE -
IPV6_PFX_LEN The prefix length of the IPv6 address. 1 ~ 127 NONE 64
OAM Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to False/True/ NONE True
use the IPv6 address set for OAM.
OAM.

S1 use the IPv6 address set for S1 signals.
signals.
nals.

Command Description

X2 use the IPv6 address set for X2 signals.
signals.
nals.
LTE_BEARER Attribute of the IPv6 address, whether to False/True/ NONE True
use the IPv6 address set for bearer.
bearer.

set for OAM.
set for S1 signals.
set for X2 signals.
set for bearer.


Command Description
C1921 RETRIEVE IPV6 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY

CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-IPV6-PRIOR: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves configured IPv6 priority for each IPv6 attribute which is OAM and Signal.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of the IPv6 attribute for which IPv6 0~2 NONE 0
priority is to be changed.

DB_INDEX Index of the IPv6 attribute for which IPv6 priority is to be
changed.
ATTRIBUTE IPv6 Attribute Type.

C1922 CHANGE IPV6 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY

CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-IPV6-PRIOR: DB_INDEX, [PRI_IPV6_ADDR], [SEC_IPV6_ADDR];
Command Description
Changes configuration of IPv6 priority for each IPv6 attribute which is OAM and Signal.
TIMEOUT 10

DB_INDEX Index of the IPv6 attribute for which IPv6 0~2 NONE 0
priority is to be changed.
PRI_IPV6_ADD Primary IPv6 Address. IPv6 Address NONE -
R
SEC_IPV6_AD Secondary IPv6 Address. IPv6 Address NONE -
DR

DB_INDEX Index of the IPv6 attribute for which IPv6 priority is to be
changed.
ATTRIBUTE IPv6 Attribute Type.

Command Description
C1946 CHANGE PAT MAP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-PAT-MAP: MAP_INDEX, [IP_VER], [MON_SERVER_IPV4], [MON_SERVER_IPV6],
[EXT_DEV_IPV4], [EXT_DEV_IPV6], [MON_SERVER_PORT], [EXT_DEV_PORT];
Command Description
Changes information on the static Port Address Translation (PAT) settings. The mapping infor-
mation between the IP/UDP port of the server, which monitors auxiliary devices, and the IP/
UDP port of an auxiliary device can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

MAP_INDEX Static PAT Map index. 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
IP_VER The version of the IP address. IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
MON_SERVER The IPv4 address of the monitoring server IPv4 Address NONE -
_IPV4 to be communicated with the ancillary
device.
MON_SERVER The IPv6 address of the monitoring server IPv6 Address NONE -
_IPV6 to be communicated with the ancillary
device.
EXT_DEV_IPV The IPv4 address of the ancillary device. IPv4 Address NONE -
4
EXT_DEV_IPV The IPv6 address of the ancillary device. IPv6 Address NONE -
6
MON_SERVER Information on the UDP port of the monitor- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
_PORT ing server to be communicated with ancil-
lary devices.
EXT_DEV_PO Information on the UDP port of the ancillary 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
RT device to be used to communicate with the
monitoring server.

MAP_INDEX Static PAT Map index.
IP_VER The version of the IP address.

MON_SERVER_IPV4 The IPv4 address of the monitoring server to be communicated

with the ancillary device.

EXT_DEV_IPV4 The IPv4 address of the ancillary device.
MON_SERVER_PORT Information on the UDP port of the monitoring server to be

communicated with ancillary devices.
EXT_DEV_PORT Information on the UDP port of the ancillary device to be used

to communicate with the monitoring server.

Command Description
C1970 RETRIEVE ACL RULE
Command Format
RTRV-ACL-RULE: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve created rules in the ACL(Access Control List)
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of ACL rule for create, delete and 0 ~ 511 NONE 0
retrieve.

DB_INDEX Index of ACL rule for create, delete and retrieve.
IP_VERSION Set the IP version of ACL rule. ACL can has ACL rules with
same IP version.
- IPV4 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to IPv4.
-IPV6 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to IPv6
SEQ_NO Set the priority of rule in the ACL. This parameter of rules in
the same ACL can't be duplicated.
ACL_NAME Set the name of ACL. This parameter is used for inserting a rule
in the ACL or attaching the ACL on the interface.
ACTION Set the action of the packet that satisfy all condition of this rule.
- DENY: Discard the packet.
- PERMIT: Transmit the packet.
PROTOCOL Set the protocol number condition of this rule.

- any: Skip checking protocol number of the packet. (Any pro-

tocol number of the packet satisfy this condition).

- 0~255: If the packet protocol number and this parameter are
the same, this condition is satisfied.
- tcp: If TCP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- udp: If UDP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- ip: If IP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- icmp: If ICMP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- icmpv6: If IPv6 ICMP packet, this condition is satisfied.
SRC_HOST_TYPE Set whether to check source IP address of the packet.

- ANY: Skip checking source IP address of the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check source IP address of the packet and
source IP condition of this rule are the same.
SRC_IPV4_ADDR Set the IPv4 source IP address condition of this rule. If

SRC_HOST_TYPE parameter is ANY or IP_VERSION
parameter is IPV6, this paramter is not available.
SRC_IPV4_PFX_LEN Set the prefix length of IPv4 source IP address condition of thie
rule.

rule.
SRC_PORT Set the source port number condition of this rule. If PROTO-
COL parameter is not any, tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter is
not available.
- any: Skip checking source port number of the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet source port number and this parameter
are the same, this condition is satisfied.

- MIN-MAX: If the packet source port number is between MIN
and MAX, this condition is satisfied.
DST_HOST_TYPE Set whether to check destination IP address of the packet.

- ANY: Skip checking destination IP address of the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check destination IP address of the packet
and destination IP condition of this rule are the same.

Command Description
DST_IPV4_ADDR Set the IPv4 destination IP address condition of this rule. If

DST_HOST_TYPE parameter is ANY or IP_VERSION
DST_IPV4_PFX_LEN Set the prefix length of IPv4 destination IP address condition of

thie rule.

DST_HOST_TYPE is ANY parameter or IP_VERSION

thie rule.
DST_PORT Set the destination port number condition of this rule. If PRO-
TOCOL parameter is not any, tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter
is not available.
- any: Skip checking destination port number of the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet destination port number and this
parameter are the same, this condition is satisfied.
- MIN-MAX: If the packet destination port number is between
MIN and MAX, this condition is satisfied.
DSCP_TYPE Set whether to check DSCP number of the packet.

- NONE: Skip checking DSCP number of the packet.
- DSCP: Check DSCP number of the packet and
DSCP_NUMBER parameter are the same.
DSCP_NUMBER Set the DSCP number condition fo this rule. If DSCP_TYPE

parameter is NONE, this parameter is not available.

C1971 CREATE ACL RULE
Command Format
CRTE-ACL-RULE: DB_INDEX, [IP_VERSION], [SEQ_NO], [ACL_NAME], [ACTION], [PROTO-
COL], [SRC_HOST_TYPE], [SRC_IPV4_ADDR], [SRC_IPV4_PFX_LEN], [SRC_IPV6_ADDR],
[SRC_IPV6_PFX_LEN], [SRC_PORT], [DST_HOST_TYPE], [DST_IPV4_ADDR],
[DST_IPV4_PFX_LEN], [DST_IPV6_ADDR], [DST_IPV6_PFX_LEN], [DST_PORT],
[DSCP_TYPE], [DSCP_NUMBER];
Command Description
Create a new rule and insert in the ACL(Acess Control List). ACL rule has 6 tuple(Protocol
Number/Source IP/Destination IP/Source Port/Destination Port/DSCP) condition and set the
action(permit/deny) of an incoming or outgoing packet that satisfy all conditions. When a new
rule is inserted in the ACL, it can be selected by ACL_NAME parameter. Multiple rules can be
inserted in the ACL and priority of a rule in the ACL can be set by SEQ_NO parameter. A new
rule can't be inserted in the ACL that is attached on the interface.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieve.
IP_VERSION Set the IP version of ACL rule. ACL can IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
has ACL rules with same IP version.
- IPV4 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to
IPv4.
-IPV6 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to
IPv6
SEQ_NO Set the priority of rule in the ACL. This 1 ~ 127 NONE 1
parameter of rules in the same ACL can't
be duplicated.
ACL_NAME Set the name of ACL. This parameter is 32 NONE -
used for inserting a rule in the ACL or
attaching the ACL on the interface.
ACTION Set the action of the packet that satisfy all DENY/PERMIT/ NONE DENY
condition of this rule.

Command Description

PROTOCOL Set the protocol number condition of this 16 NONE any
rule.
- any: Skip checking protocol number of
the packet. (Any protocol number of the
packet satisfy this condition).
- 0~255: If the packet protocol number and
this parameter are the same, this condition
is satisfied.
- tcp: If TCP packet, this condition is satis-
fied.
- udp: If UDP packet, this condition is satis-
fied.
- icmp: If ICMP packet, this condition is
satisfied.
- icmpv6: If IPv6 ICMP packet, this condi-
tion is satisfied.
SRC_HOST_T Set whether to check source IP address of ANY/IP_ADDRESS/ NONE ANY
YPE the packet.
- ANY: Skip checking source IP address of
the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check source IP address
of the packet and source IP condition of this
rule are the same.
SRC_IPV4_AD Set the IPv4 source IP address condition of IPv4 Address NONE -
DR this rule. If SRC_HOST_TYPE parameter
is ANY or IP_VERSION parameter is IPV6,
this paramter is not available.
SRC_IPV4_PF Set the prefix length of IPv4 source IP 0 ~ 32 NONE 0
X_LEN address condition of thie rule.
SRC_IPV6_AD Set the IPv6 source IP address condition of IPv6 Address NONE -
DR this rule. If SRC_HOST_TYPE parameter
is ANY or IP_VERSION parameter is IPV4,
this paramter is not available.
SRC_IPV6_PF Set the prefix length of IPv6 source IP 0 ~ 128 NONE 0
SRC_PORT Set the source port number condition of this 16 NONE any
rule. If PROTOCOL parameter is not any,
tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter is not
available.
- any: Skip checking source port number of
the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet source port num-
ber and this parameter are the same, this
condition is satisfied.
- MIN-MAX: If the packet source port num-
ber is between MIN and MAX, this condi-
tion is satisfied.


DST_HOST_TY Set whether to check destination IP ANY/IP_ADDRESS/ NONE ANY
PE address of the packet.
- ANY: Skip checking destination IP
address of the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check destination IP
address of the packet and destination IP
condition of this rule are the same.
DST_IPV4_AD Set the IPv4 destination IP address condi- IPv4 Address NONE -
DR tion of this rule. If DST_HOST_TYPE
parameter is ANY or IP_VERSION param-
eter is IPV6, this paramter is not available.
DST_IPV4_PF Set the prefix length of IPv4 destination IP 0 ~ 32 NONE 0
DST_IPV6_AD Set the IPv6 destination IP address condi- IPv6 Address NONE -
DR tion of this rule. If DST_HOST_TYPE is
ANY parameter or IP_VERSION parameter
is IPV4, this paramter is not available.
DST_IPV6_PF Set the prefix length of IPv6 destination IP 0 ~ 128 NONE 0
DST_PORT Set the destination port number condition 16 NONE any
of this rule. If PROTOCOL parameter is not
any, tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter is not
available.
- any: Skip checking destination port num-
ber of the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet destination port
number and this parameter are the same,
this condition is satisfied.
- MIN-MAX: If the packet destination port
number is between MIN and MAX, this con-
dition is satisfied.
DSCP_TYPE Set whether to check DSCP number of the NONE/DSCP/ NONE NONE
packet.
- NONE: Skip checking DSCP number of
the packet.
- DSCP: Check DSCP number of the
packet and DSCP_NUMBER parameter
are the same.
DSCP_NUMBE Set the DSCP number condition fo this rule. 0 ~ 63 NONE 0
R If DSCP_TYPE parameter is NONE, this
parameter is not available.

DB_INDEX Index of ACL rule for create, delete and retrieve.
IP_VERSION Set the IP version of ACL rule. ACL can has ACL rules with
same IP version.
- IPV4 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to IPv4.
-IPV6 : Set the IP version of ACL rule to IPv6

Command Description
SEQ_NO Set the priority of rule in the ACL. This parameter of rules in
the same ACL can't be duplicated.
ACL_NAME Set the name of ACL. This parameter is used for inserting a rule
in the ACL or attaching the ACL on the interface.
ACTION Set the action of the packet that satisfy all condition of this rule.
PROTOCOL Set the protocol number condition of this rule.

- any: Skip checking protocol number of the packet. (Any pro-
tocol number of the packet satisfy this condition).
- 0~255: If the packet protocol number and this parameter are
the same, this condition is satisfied.
- tcp: If TCP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- udp: If UDP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- icmp: If ICMP packet, this condition is satisfied.
- icmpv6: If IPv6 ICMP packet, this condition is satisfied.
SRC_HOST_TYPE Set whether to check source IP address of the packet.

- ANY: Skip checking source IP address of the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check source IP address of the packet and
source IP condition of this rule are the same.

rule.

rule.
SRC_PORT Set the source port number condition of this rule. If PROTO-
COL parameter is not any, tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter is

not available.
- any: Skip checking source port number of the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet source port number and this parameter
are the same, this condition is satisfied.

- MIN-MAX: If the packet source port number is between MIN
and MAX, this condition is satisfied.
DST_HOST_TYPE Set whether to check destination IP address of the packet.

- ANY: Skip checking destination IP address of the packet.
- IP_ADDRESS: Check destination IP address of the packet
and destination IP condition of this rule are the same.

DST_HOST_TYPE parameter is ANY or IP_VERSION

thie rule.

DST_HOST_TYPE is ANY parameter or IP_VERSION

thie rule.
DST_PORT Set the destination port number condition of this rule. If PRO-
TOCOL parameter is not any, tcp(6) or udp(17), this parameter
is not available.
- any: Skip checking destination port number of the packet.
- 0~65535: If the packet destination port number and this
parameter are the same, this condition is satisfied.
- MIN-MAX: If the packet destination port number is between
MIN and MAX, this condition is satisfied.
DSCP_TYPE Set whether to check DSCP number of the packet.

- NONE: Skip checking DSCP number of the packet.
- DSCP: Check DSCP number of the packet and
DSCP_NUMBER parameter are the same.
DSCP_NUMBER Set the DSCP number condition fo this rule. If DSCP_TYPE

parameter is NONE, this parameter is not available.

Command Description
C1972 DELETE ACL RULE
Command Format
DLT-ACL-RULE: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete created rule from ACL(Access Control List). Rule of the ACL that is attached on the
interface, can't be deleted.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieve.


C1973 RETRIEVE ACL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-ACL-CONF: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve attached ACL(Access Control List) on the interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of ACL for attach, delete and 0 ~ 39 NONE 0
retrieve.

DB_INDEX Index of ACL for attach, delete and retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the interface name that will be attached ACL
ACL_NAME Set the ACL name for attaching on a direction of the interface.
DIRECTION Set the direction of the interface that will be attached ACL.
-IN: Apply ACL on inbound packet of the interface.
-OUT: Apply ACL on outgoing packet of the interface

Command Description
C1974 CREATE ACL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-ACL-CONF: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [ACL_NAME], [DIRECTION];
Command Description
Attach ACL(Access Control List) on a direction(in/out) of the interface. ACL is selected by
ACL_NAME parameter of CRTE-ACL-RULE command. An incoming or outgoing packet is
compared with rules of the ACL and handled by the action(permit/deny) of the matched rule. If
the packet is not matched with every rules of the ACL, it is discarded.
TIMEOUT 10

DB_INDEX Index of ACL for attach, delete and retrieve. 0 ~ 39 NONE 0
IF_NAME Set the interface name that will be attached 24 NONE -
ACL
ACL_NAME Set the ACL name for attaching on a direc- 32 NONE -
tion of the interface.
DIRECTION Set the direction of the interface that will be IN/OUT/ NONE IN
attached ACL.
-IN: Apply ACL on inbound packet of the
interface.
-OUT: Apply ACL on outgoing packet of
the interface

DB_INDEX Index of ACL for attach, delete and retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the interface name that will be attached ACL
ACL_NAME Set the ACL name for attaching on a direction of the interface.
DIRECTION Set the direction of the interface that will be attached ACL.
-IN: Apply ACL on inbound packet of the interface.
-OUT: Apply ACL on outgoing packet of the interface

C1975 DELETE ACL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-ACL-CONF: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete attached ACL(Access Control List) from the interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of ACL for attach, delete and 0 ~ 39 NONE 0
retrieve.


Command Description
C1976 RETRIEVE QoS CLASS
Command Format
RTRV-QOS-CLASS: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve configuration of DSCP mapping to the Class.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of DSCP mapping to Class for add, 0 ~ 511 NONE 0
delete and retrieve.

DB_INDEX Index of DSCP mapping to Class for add, delete and retrieve.
CLASS_NAME Set the Class name for adding a new DSCP mapping. This
parameter is used for adding multiple DSCP number to the
Class or including in the Policy.
DSCP_NUMBER Set the DSCP number for adding to the Class. A Class can have
multiple DSCP mapping.

C1977 CREATE QoS CLASS
Command Format
CRTE-QOS-CLASS: DB_INDEX, [CLASS_NAME], [DSCP_NUMBER];
Command Description
Add a new DSCP mapping to the Class. Packets that are transmitted through the backhaul inter-
face are classified to Class by IP header DSCP value. This Class is included in a Policy with QoS
policy configuration. Class is selected by Class Name and a Class can have multiple DSCP map-
ping. A new DSCP mapping can't be added to the Class that is included in Policy.
TIMEOUT 10

CLASS_NAME Set the Class name for adding a new 32 NONE -
DSCP mapping. This parameter is used for
adding multiple DSCP number to the Class
or including in the Policy.
DSCP_NUMBE Set the DSCP number for adding to the 0 ~ 63 NONE 0
R Class. A Class can have multiple DSCP
mapping.

DB_INDEX Index of DSCP mapping to Class for add, delete and retrieve.
CLASS_NAME Set the Class name for adding a new DSCP mapping. This
parameter is used for adding multiple DSCP number to the
Class or including in the Policy.
DSCP_NUMBER Set the DSCP number for adding to the Class. A Class can have
multiple DSCP mapping.

Command Description
C1978 DELETE QoS CLASS
Command Format
DLT-QOS-CLASS: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete DSCP mapping from the Class. DSCP mapping can't be deleted from the Class that is
included in Policy.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1979 RETRIEVE QoS POLICY
Command Format
RTRV-QOS-POLICY: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve Policy including Class with QoS policy configuration.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of Policy including Class for add, 0 ~ 319 NONE 0

DB_INDEX Index of Policy including Class for add, delete and retrieve.
POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for adding a new Class. This parameter is
used for attaching the Policy on the interface.
CLASS_NAME Set the Class name that will be added to the Policy.
SCHEDULER_TYPE Set the scheduler type of the Class(Queue).

- NONE: This Class is not used for scheduler configuration.
- SPQ: Strict Priority Queue. Packet in the SPQs is sent out
according to the priority of Class(Queue) that is set by
QUEUE_PRIORITY paramter.
- DRR: Deficit Round Robin. Packet in the DRR Classes is sent
out over percentage of bandwidth that is set by

BW_PERCENTAGE at least.
QUEUE_PRIORITY Set the priority of SPQ in the Policy. If SCHEDULER_TYPE

parameter is not SPQ, this parameter is not available.

Command Description
BW_PERCENTAGE Set the minimum guaranteed bandwidth percentage of DRR

Class. If SCHEDULER_TYPE parameter is not DRR, this
QUEUE_RATE Set the bandwidth limitation rate of the Class(Queue). If this

class traffic rate is over QUEUE_RATE, it is shaped. This
parameter should be multiples of 128 and range is 1024 ~
999936 kbps.

C1980 RETRIEVE SYSTEM IP SELECTION
Command Format
RTRV-SYSIP-SEL;
Command Description
Retrieves selected system IP addresses for each attribute.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

OAM_IPVER The IP version for OAM.
SIG_IPVER The IP version for Signal.
OAM_IPV4_ADDR The IPv4 address for OAM.
S1_PRI_IPV4_ADDR The primary IPv4 address for S1 signal.
S1_SEC_IPV4_ADDR The secondary IPv4 address for S1 signal.
X2_PRI_IPV4_ADDR The primary IPv4 address for X2 signal.
X2_SEC_IPV4_ADDR The secondary IPv4 address for X2 signal.

Command Description
C1981 CHANGE SYSTEM IP SELECTION
Command Format
CHG-SYSIP-SEL: [SIG_IPVER];
Command Description
Change system IP version.
TIMEOUT 10

SIG_IPVER The IP version for Signal. IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4

OAM_IPVER The IP version for OAM.
SIG_IPVER The IP version for Signal.


Command Description
C1982 RETRIEVE BH QOS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-BHQOS-CONF: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve the Policy attached on the backhaul interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of Policy of backhaul interface for 0 ~ 39 NONE 0
attach, delete and retrieve.

DB_INDEX Index of Policy of backhaul interface for attach, delete and
retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for attaching a new Policy.
POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for attaching on the backhaul interface.

C1983 CREATE BH QOS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-BHQOS-CONF: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [POLICY_NAME];
Command Description
Attach the Policy on the backhaul interface. The Policy is selected by POLICY_NAME parame-
ter of CRTE-QOS-POLICY command. Packets that are transmitted through the backhaul inter-
face are classified to Class of the Policy by IP header DSCP value and handled by QoS Policy of
each Class.
TIMEOUT 10

IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for attach- 24 NONE -
ing a new Policy.
POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for attaching on the 32 NONE -
backhaul interface.

DB_INDEX Index of Policy of backhaul interface for attach, delete and
retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for attaching a new Policy.
POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for attaching on the backhaul interface.

Command Description
C1984 DELETE BH QOS CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-BHQOS-CONF: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete the Policy from the backhaul interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1985 RETRIEVE BH RATE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-BHRATE-CONF: [DB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieve the bandwidth limitaion rate of the backhaul interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_INDEX Index of the bandwidth limitation rate of 0~3 NONE 0
backhaul interface for set, delete and
retrieve.

DB_INDEX Index of the bandwidth limitation rate of backhaul interface for
set, delete and retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for setting bandwidth limitation
rate.
PORT_RATE Set the rate of bandwidth limitation. This parameter should be

multiples of 128 and range is 1024 ~ 999936 kbps.

Command Description
C1986 CREATE BH RATE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CRTE-BHRATE-CONF: DB_INDEX, [IF_NAME], [PORT_RATE];
Command Description
Set the bandwidth limitation rate of the backhaul interface. If this backhaul interface traffic rate
is over PORT_RATE, it is shaped.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for setting 24 NONE -
bandwidth limitation rate.
PORT_RATE Set the rate of bandwidth limitation. This 1024 ~ 999936 kbps 999936
parameter should be multiples of 128 and
range is 1024 ~ 999936 kbps.

DB_INDEX Index of the bandwidth limitation rate of backhaul interface for
set, delete and retrieve.
IF_NAME Set the backhaul interface name for setting bandwidth limita-
tion rate.
PORT_RATE Set the rate of bandwidth limitation. This parameter should be

multiples of 128 and range is 1024 ~ 999936 kbps.

C1987 DELETE BH RATE CONFIGURATION
Command Format
DLT-BHRATE-CONF: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete the bandwidth limitaion rate of the backhaul interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieve.


Command Description
C1990 CREATE QoS POLICY
Command Format
CRTE-QOS-POLICY: DB_INDEX, [POLICY_NAME], [CLASS_NAME], [SCHEDULER_TYPE],
[QUEUE_PRIORITY], [BW_PERCENTAGE], [QUEUE_RATE];
Command Description
Add a new Class to the Policy and set the QoS policy of the Class. Class is selected by
CLASS_NAME parameter of CRTE-QOS-CLASS command. Policy can include up to 7 Classes
and a new Class can't be added to the Policy that is attached on the interface.
TIMEOUT 10

POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for adding a new 32 NONE -
Class. This parameter is used for attaching
the Policy on the interface.
CLASS_NAME Set the Class name that will be added to 32 NONE -
the Policy.
SCHEDULER_ Set the scheduler type of the NONE/SPQ/DRR/ NONE NONE
TYPE Class(Queue).
- NONE: This Class is not used for sched-
uler configuration.
- SPQ: Strict Priority Queue. Packet in the
SPQs is sent out according to the priority of
Class(Queue) that is set by
- DRR: Deficit Round Robin. Packet in the
DRR Classes is sent out over percentage
of bandwidth that is set by
QUEUE_PRIO Set the priority of SPQ in the Policy. If 0~6 NONE 0
RITY SCHEDULER_TYPE parameter is not
SPQ, this parameter is not available.
BW_PERCENT Set the minimum guaranteed bandwidth 1 ~ 99 % 1
AGE percentage of DRR Class. If
SCHEDULER_TYPE parameter is not
DRR, this parameter is not available.


QUEUE_RATE Set the bandwidth limitation rate of the 1024 ~ 999936 kbps 999936
Class(Queue). If this class traffic rate is
over QUEUE_RATE, it is shaped. This
parameter should be multiples of 128 and
range is 1024 ~ 999936 kbps.

DB_INDEX Index of Policy including Class for add, delete and retrieve.
POLICY_NAME Set the Policy name for adding a new Class. This parameter is
used for attaching the Policy on the interface.
CLASS_NAME Set the Class name that will be added to the Policy.
SCHEDULER_TYPE Set the scheduler type of the Class(Queue).

- NONE: This Class is not used for scheduler configuration.
- SPQ: Strict Priority Queue. Packet in the SPQs is sent out
according to the priority of Class(Queue) that is set by
- DRR: Deficit Round Robin. Packet in the DRR Classes is sent
out over percentage of bandwidth that is set by

QUEUE_PRIORITY Set the priority of SPQ in the Policy. If SCHEDULER_TYPE

parameter is not SPQ, this parameter is not available.
BW_PERCENTAGE Set the minimum guaranteed bandwidth percentage of DRR

Class. If SCHEDULER_TYPE parameter is not DRR, this
QUEUE_RATE Set the bandwidth limitation rate of the Class(Queue). If this

class traffic rate is over QUEUE_RATE, it is shaped. This
parameter should be multiples of 128 and range is 1024 ~
999936 kbps.

Command Description
C1991 DELETE QoS POLICY
Command Format
DLT-QOS-POLICY: DB_INDEX;
Command Description
Delete a Class from the Policy. A Class can't be deleted from the Policy that is attached on the
interface.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C1992 RETRIEVE SYSDSCP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SYSDSCP-DATA: [CLASS_ID];
Command Description
Retrieve the DSCP mapping information with control and management traffic type. If
CLASS_ID parameter is inserted, DSCP value of the system traffic corresponding to the param-
eter is displayed. If CLASS_ID parameter is blank, DSCP values of all system traffic type are
displayed.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CLASS_ID The index defined to set the DSCP map- 0~6 NONE 0
ping information with control and manage-
ment traffic type. 7 traffic types are
defined as follows depending on the Clas-
sID.
- 0: SNMP.
-1: SSH.
-2: sftp/ftp.
-3: OAM traffic, CSL, Trace.
-4: ICMP (Ping).
- 5: Network control traffic.
-6: IEEE 1588 traffic

CLASS_ID The index defined to set the DSCP mapping information with
control and management traffic type. 7 traffic types are defined
as follows depending on the ClassID.
- 0: SNMP.
-1: SSH.
-2: sftp/ftp.
-4: ICMP (Ping).

Command Description
DSCP The DSCP value that will be mapped with the specified control
and management traffic type.

C1993 CHANGE SYSDSCP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SYSDSCP-DATA: CLASS_ID, [DSCP];
Command Description
Change the DSCP mapping information with control and management traffic type. The system
traffic type can be selected by CLASS_ID parameter and the value of DSCP parameter is
mapped to the system traffic type.
TIMEOUT 10

CLASS_ID The index defined to set the DSCP map- 0~6 NONE 0
ping information with control and manage-
ment traffic type. 7 traffic types are defined
- 0: SNMP.
-1: SSH.
-2: sftp/ftp.
-4: ICMP (Ping).
DSCP The DSCP value that will be mapped with 0 ~ 63 NONE 26

the specified control and management traf-
fic type.

CLASS_ID The index defined to set the DSCP mapping information with
control and management traffic type. 7 traffic types are defined
- 0: SNMP.
-1: SSH.
-2: sftp/ftp.
-4: ICMP (Ping).

Command Description
DSCP The DSCP value that will be mapped with the specified control
and management traffic type.

C1996 RETRIEVE PAT CONFIGURATION INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-PAT-INF: [CONF_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves information on static Port Address Translation (PAT) settings. Mapping information
between the backhaul port of eNBs and the IP/UDP port of the UDE port can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CONF_INDEX The index for identifying the configuration 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
information.

CONF_INDEX The index for identifying the configuration information.
MATCHINGMODE The Port Address Translation (PAT) search mode. It determines

either to compare either the Source IP/Port or the Destination
IP/Port of the received packet. (0: Source IP/Port, 1: Destina-
tion IP/Port)
PUBLIC_IPV4 The public IPv4 address of the eNB interface connected to the
monitoring server.
monitoring server.
PRIVATE_IPV4 The private IPv4 address of the eNB interface connected to the
monitoring server.

Command Description
monitoring server.
PUBLIC_PORT The public UDP port of the eNB which receives packets from
the monitoring server.
PRIVATE_PORT The private UDP port of the eNB which receives packets from
an ancillary device.

C1997 CHANGE PAT CONFIGURATION INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-PAT-INF: CONF_INDEX, [MATCHINGMODE], [IP_VER], [PUBLIC_IPV4],
[PUBLIC_IPV6], [PRIVATE_IPV4], [PRIVATE_IPV6], [PUBLIC_PORT], [PRIVATE_PORT];
Command Description
Changes the static Port Address Translation (PAT) settings. The IP/UDP port mapping between
eNB's backhaul port and UDE port can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

CONF_INDEX The index for identifying the configuration 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
information.
MATCHING- The Port Address Translation (PAT) search 0~1 NONE 0
MODE mode. It determines either to compare
either the Source IP/Port or the Destination
IP/Port of the received packet. (0: Source
IP/Port, 1: Destination IP/Port)
IP_VER The version of the IP address. IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
PUBLIC_IPV4 The public IPv4 address of the eNB inter- IPv4 Address NONE -
face connected to the monitoring server.
PUBLIC_IPV6 The public IPv6 address of the eNB inter- IPv6 Address NONE -
PRIVATE_IPV4 The private IPv4 address of the eNB inter- IPv4 Address NONE -
PRIVATE_IPV6 The private IPv6 address of the eNB inter- IPv6 Address NONE -
PUBLIC_PORT The public UDP port of the eNB which 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
receives packets from the monitoring
server.
PRIVATE_POR The private UDP port of the eNB which 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
T receives packets from an ancillary device.

CONF_INDEX The index for identifying the configuration information.

Command Description
MATCHINGMODE The Port Address Translation (PAT) search mode. It determines

either to compare either the Source IP/Port or the Destination
IP/Port of the received packet. (0: Source IP/Port, 1: Destina-
tion IP/Port)
monitoring server.
monitoring server.
monitoring server.
monitoring server.
PUBLIC_PORT The public UDP port of the eNB which receives packets from
the monitoring server.
PRIVATE_PORT The private UDP port of the eNB which receives packets from
an ancillary device.

C1998 RETRIEVE PAT MAP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-PAT-MAP: [MAP_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves information on the static Port Address Translation (PAT) mapping. Mapping informa-
tion between the IP/UDP port of the server, which monitors auxiliary devices, and the IP/UDP
port of an auxiliary device can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
MAP_INDEX Static PAT Map index. 0 ~ 255 NONE 0

MAP_INDEX Static PAT Map index.


MON_SERVER_PORT Information on the UDP port of the monitoring server to be

communicated with ancillary devices.
EXT_DEV_PORT Information on the UDP port of the ancillary device to be used

to communicate with the monitoring server.

Command Description
C2000 CHANGE RIM CONTROL
Command Format
CHG-RIM-CONTROL: [STATUS], [RNC_ID];
Command Description
Changes the RIM Status required to operate a RIM. This command can change the RIM Status
information by entering the RIM_STATUS_DB Index.
TIMEOUT 10

STATUS Information of Change RIM Connection. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
P
RNC_ID RNC ID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the 0 ~ 4095 NONE 0
eNB.

STATUS Information of Change RIM Connection.
RNC_ID RNC ID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.

C2002 RETRIEVE TIMER INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-TIMER-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the timer values used by the ECCB blocks in the eNB. The user can retrieve the timer
value used for exchanging messages with the UE, MME and Naver eNB, and by other ECCB
blocks when a call is set up.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionSetupCom-
plete message after sending the RrcConnectionSetup message
from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_CONNECTION_RECONFIG The time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionRecofigura-

tionComplete message after sending the RrcConnectionRecofig
message from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_CONNECTION_RE_ESTABLISHThe time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionRees-

tablishmentComplete message after sending the RrcConnec-
tionReestablishment message from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_SECURITY_MODE_COMMANDThe time to wait for reception of the SecurityModeCom-

plete message after sending the SecurityModeCommand mes-
sage from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_UE_CAPABILITY_ENQUIRYThe time to wait for reception of the UeCapabilityInformation

message after sending the UeCapabilityEnquiry message from
the eNB to the UE.
RRC_CONNECTION_RELEASE The time to wait for reception of the message from the PDCB

Command Description
block confirming that the RrcConnectionRelease message was

successfully sent after sending it from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_HANDOVER_PREPARATIONThe time to wait for reception of the RrcULHandoverPrepara-

tionTransfer message after sending the RrcHandoverFromEU-
TRAPreparationRequest message from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_UE_INFORMATION_REQUESTThe time to wait for reception of the InformationResponse

message after sending the InformationRequest message from
the eNB to the UE.
S1_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the S1SetupResponse message

or the S1SetupFailure message after sending the
S1SetupRequest from the eNB to the MME.
S1_UPDATE The time to wait for reception of the EnbConfigurationUp-

dateAcknowledge message or the EnbConfigurationUpdate-
Failure message after sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate
from the eNB to the MME.
S1_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT The retry count for the eNB configuration update procedure
when the eNBConfigurationUpdateFailure message is received
from the MME or when time out occurs after sending the eNB-
ConfigurationUpdate message from the eNB.
S1_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in MMEConfigurationUpdate-

Failure transmission.
S1_INITIAL_CONTEXT_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the InitialContextSetupRe-

quest message after sending the InitilUE from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_ERAB_RELEASE_INDICATIONThe time to wait for reception of the ERABReleaseCommand

message after sending the E_RABReleaseIndication from the
eNB to the MME.
S1_UE_CONTEXT_RELEASE The time to wait for reception of the UEContextReleaseCom-

mand message after sending the UEContextReleaseRequest
S1_PATH_SWITCH The time to wait for reception of the PathSwitchRequestAc-

knowledge message after sending the PathSwitchReques from

the eNB to the MME.
S1_HANDOVER_PREPARATION The time to wait for reception of the HandoverCommand mes-

sage after sending the HandoverRequired from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_RELOC_OVERALL The time to wait for the UEContextReleaseCommand message

from the MME after the HandoverCommand message from the
eNB is received by the MME and handover is complete.
S1_HANDOVER_CANCEL The time to wait for reception of the HandoverCancelAcknowl-

edge message after sending the HandoverCancel from the eNB
to the MME.
X2_SETUP The time to wait for the X2SetupResponse message or the

X2SetupFailure message after sending the X2SetupRequest
from the eNB to another eNB.
X2_SETUP_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in the X2SetupFailure message

sent by the eNB which received an X2SetupRequest message.
X2_UPDATE The time to wait for the EnbConfigurationUpdateAcknowledge

message or the EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure message after
sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate from the eNB to another
eNB set as a neighbor.
X2_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT The retry count for the X2 eNB configuration update procedure
from the MME or when time out occurs after sending the X2
eNBConfigurationUpdate message from the eNB.
X2_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in ENBConfigurationUpdate-

Failure transmission (The default is 5 seconds).
X2_HANDOVER_PREPARATION The time to wait for the HandoverRequestAcknowledge mes-

sage after sending the HandoverRequest message from the
source eNB to the target eNB.
X2_RELOC_OVERALL The time to wait for the UEContextRelease message from the
target eNB after receiving the HandoverRequestAcknowledge
message from the target eNB and handover is complete.

Command Description
X2_STORE_UE_CONTEXT The time during which to determine whether the Handover

Report message is sent when the RLF Indication message is
received by the SON MRO (Mobility Robustness Optimization)
function.
INTERNAL_RESOURCE_SETUP The time to wait for a response after sending the setup message
to internal entities (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for setting up
resources inside the eNB.
INTERNAL_RESOURCE_RELEASEThe time to wait for a response after sending the release mes-
sage to internal entities (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for releasing
INTERNAL_SECURITY_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending the control mes-
sage to the PDCP entity for security control inside the eNB.
INTERNAL_RRC_DATA_TRANSFERThe time to wait for reception of the data transfer confirm

message from the PDCP entity after sending RrcConnectionRe-
configuration to the UE at intra-cell handover.
INTERNAL_FORWARDING_PATH_SETUPThe time to wait for a response after sending the setup

message to the GTP entity for unlink and downlink path setup
at handover.
INTERNAL_REESTALISH_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending the control

message for controlling the entities inside the eNB at reestab-
lish.
INTERNAL_BUFFER_FLUSH The time between buffer flush message transmission and recep-
tion of its response. The flush message is sent to flush the buffer
of the PDCP entity after receiving UEContextRelease (X2) and
UEContextReleaseCommand (S1) at handover.
INTERNAL_DATA_TRANSFER_STARTThe time to wait for a response after sending the control

message notifying HandoverComplete to the target PDCP entity
after the X2, S1 handover.
INTERNAL_DATA_FORWARD_END_INDThe time to wait for reception of DataForwardEndInd

from the PDCP entity indicating that data forwarding is com-
plete after transmitting UEContextRelease to X2 and Handover-
Notify to S1.

INTERNAL_REESTABLSH_TIME_TO_WAITThe time to wait for reception of RrcReestablishRe-

quest from the UE after RLF is received from MACB or Max
Retransmission Ind is received from RLCB.
INTERNAL_USER_INACTIVITY The user inactivity time triggered by MAC because there is no

traffic at the UE attached for a certain period of time.
INTERNAL_SIGNALING_INACTIVITYThe signaling inactivity time triggered when enb has no

signaling message for a certain period of time.
INTERNAL_NO_WAIT_RETRY The time to wait for resending the message to S1 or X2 when

the failure message received from S1 or X2 (S1SetupFailure,
X2SetupFailure, S1EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure,
X2EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure) does not contain timer
information.
INTERNAL_RRC_RESET The time to wait for multiple UEs to be released after sending
the RrcConnectionRelease to the UEs at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_ENB_RESET The time to wait for a response after sending the CallDelete
message to the internal entities for releasing the entities inside
the eNB at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_SOLICIT_MEASUREMENT_REPORTThe time to wait for reception of the Measure-

ment Report message from the UE according to the Solicit
Measurement Report procedure.
INTERNAL_RTDINFO_REQ The time to wait for reception of the RTDInfoCnf message after
sending RTDInfoReq to MAC for obtaining the RTD informa-
tion.
RIM_RIR The time to wait for a response after sending MME Direct
Information Transfer (RAN-INFORMATION-REQUEST) to
the MME.
RIM_RIAE The time to wait for a response after sending MME Direct
Information Transfer (RAN-INFORMATION-APPLICATION-
ERROR) to the MME.
INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_CHANGEThe time to wait for a response after sending msgCmacPhySub-

CellChangeCnf to MAC. Only Sub Cell Type Applicable

Command Description
INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_PDCP_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending msgCpd-

cpControl to PDCB. Only Sub Cell Type Applicable

C2004 RETRIEVE EUTRAN CELL CONFIGURA-

TION IDLE
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) cell information
in the eNB. The parameters defined in this PLD include the essential information for operating
E-UTRAN cells.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed or 0~8 NONE 0
retrieved.

CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed or retrieved.
CELL_IDENTITY This parameter defines cell Identity.
PHY_CELL_ID Physical cell ID. It is used for UE to distinguish the cell in a

wireless network, and is also used to recover cell-specific refer-
ence signals. It should be assigned to avoid conflicts between
neighboring cells.
CELL_TYPE Type of cell operation.

- macroCell: Operates multiple common cells.
- openCell: Operates a single common cell.
- hybridCell: Operates closed subscriber group (CSG) cells as
well as common ones.
- csgCell: Operates CSG cells only.

Command Description
DUPLEX_TYPE Communication method for cell operation.

- ci_FDD: Frequency division duplex.
- ci_TDD: Time division duplex.
DL_ANT_COUNT Tx antenna count used by the active cell.

- ci_n1TxAntCnt: 1 Tx antenna is used.
- ci_n2TxAntCnt: 2 Tx antennas are used.
UL_ANT_COUNT The Rx antenna count used by the active cell.

- ci_n2RxAntCnt: 2 Rx antennas are used.
EARFCN_DL Downlink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Num-

ber) used by the EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial
Radio Access Network) system in the active cell. The center
frequency should be changed to E-UTRA Absolute Radio Fre-
quency Channel Number (EARFCN). See 5.7.3 in 3GPP TS
36.101.
EARFCN_UL Uplink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number)

used by the EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network) system in the active cell. The center fre-
quency should be changed to EARFCN. See 5.7.3 in 3GPP TS
36.101.
DL_BANDWIDTH Downlink bandwidth used by the active cell.

- ci_SystemBandwidth_n6: 1.4MHz bandwidth that uses 6
physical resource blocks.
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n15: 3MHz bandwidth that uses 15
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n25: 5 MHz bandwidth using 25 physi-
cal RBs.
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n50: 10 MHz bandwidth using 50
physical RBs.
physical RBs.


physical RBs.
UL_BANDWIDTH Uplink bandwidth used by the active cell.

cal RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.
FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATORFrequency band indicator including the frequency of the active

cell. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
GROUP_ID This parameter defines Carrier groupId for the cell
FORCED_MODE This parameter defines forced mode for changed value.

Command Description
C2008 RETRIEVE BLACK LISTED CELL INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-BLACK-LIST: [CELL_NUM], [BLACK_LIST_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieves the blacklist cell information for each cell in the eNB. The blacklist cell information
for each cell in the eNB is transmitted to the UE when performing basic call actions.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed. 0~8 NONE 0
BLACK_LIST_I Index for the blacklist cell. 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
DX

CELL_NUM The cell number to be changed.
BLACK_LIST_IDX Index for the blacklist cell.
STATUS Whether tuple information is valid ID.

- N_EQUIP: Invalid ID
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
PCI_TYPE Physical cell ID type of the blacklist cell.

- ci_singlePci: Single PCI.
- ci_rangedPci: PCI range.
START_PCI The starting physical cell ID for the blacklist cell.
PCI_RANGE Range from the starting physical cell ID of the blacklist cell.
Not used if it is a single physical cell ID type.

EARFCN_UL Uplink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Chan-

nel Number) of the blacklist cell.
EARFCN_DL Downlink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number) of the blacklist cell.

Command Description
C2009 RETRIEVE CELL ACCESS INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-ACS: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the cell access information in the eNB. This information is broadcast to the UE
through SIB (System Information Block) 1.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

CELL_BARRED Whether the cell is barred.

- ci_barred: The cell is barred.
- ci_notBarred: The cell is not barred. When the cell status
turns to Shutdown, or the operator sets this parameter value to
ci_barred, the cellBarred value of SIB1 is broadcast as
ci_barred.
INTRA_FREQ_CELL_RESELECT The reselection status of the intra-frequency cell if the cell

selected by the UE is barred.
- ci_intraFreqReselect_allowed: An intra-frequency cell is
reselected.
- ci_intraFreqReselect_notAllowed: An intra-frequency cell is
considered barred.
BARRING_CTR_USAGE Whether barring control type is applied when setting the ac-
BarringInfo for SIB2.

- barringOff : Not assigns the ac-BarringInfo parameter.

-manualCtrl : using manual barring control.
-cpuStatusCtrl : using auto barring control according to CPU
Overlad.

Command Description
C2010 RETRIEVE CELL RESELECT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-RSEL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the cell reselection information in the eNB. This information is broadcast to the UE
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

Q_HYST Offset value added to the current serving cell from the cell rese-
lection reference. ci_q_Hyst_dB1 indicates 1dB, and
ci_q_Hyst_dB2 2dB.
Q_HYST_SFMEDIUM The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst added to the current
serving cell is Medium in the cell reselection condition. This
parameter, in order to apply to change,
SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAGE of CHG-
MOBIL-STA is set to CI_use.
Q_HYST_SFHIGH The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst added to the current
serving cell is High in the cell reselection condition.
ci_Q_HystSF_dB_6 indicates -6dB, and ci_Q_HystSF_dB_4 -
4dB. This parameter, in order to apply to change,


Command Description
C2011 RETRIEVE CELL SELECT INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-SEL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the cell selection information in the eNB. This information is broadcast to the UE
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

Q_RXLEV_MIN The threshold added to the current measured cell in the cell
selection condition.
Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the cell selection condi-
tion.
- CI_no_use: qRxlevminoffset value is not added to qRxlev-
min.
- CI_use: qRxlevminoffset value is added to qRxlevmin.
Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the cell selection condi-
tion. The range is 1-8, where 1 indicates 2dB, and 8 indicates
16dB (IE value*2[dB]).
P_MAX_USAGE Whether UE can use the maximum power for uplink transmis-
sion in cells.
- CI_no_use: UE uses the maximum power according to its

capability.
- CI_use: UE uses the maximum power set in pMax.
P_MAX The value used for limiting uplink transmission power and cal-
culating the compensation (see 5.2.3.2 of 3GPP TS 36.304)
parameter.
REL9_SEL_INFO_USAGE Whether to use Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter of the cell in the

eNB.
- CI_no_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter is not used.
- CI_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter is used.
Q_QUAL_MIN The threshold added to the current measured cell in the cell
selection condition. The value is in dB.
Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE Whether to set the offset value added to qQualMin based on the
cell selection condition.
- CI_no_use: The qQualMinOffset value is not added to qQual-
Min.
- CI_use: The qQualMinOffset value is added to qQualMin.
Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET The offset value added to qQualMin in the cell selection condi-
tion. The value is in dB.

Command Description
C2012 RETRIEVE CSG PCI IDLE INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-CSGPCI-IDLE: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the PCI related to CSG (close subscriber group) of the cell. If the cell type is set to
CSG, the PCI value or the PCI range of the CSG is included in the SIB for transmission. Also, if
the cell type is set to Macro, whether to include SIB is determined by the usage.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
FA_INDEX EUTRA frequency index. Up to 8 FAs can 0~7 NONE 0
be assigned per cell.

FA_INDEX EUTRA frequency index. Up to 8 FAs can be assigned per cell.
CSG_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the CSG cell.

- CI_no_use: The PCI range is not used.
- CI_use: The PCI range is used.
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of a CSG cell. Determines whether to use CSG
PCI as a range or single.
- ci_singlePci: CSG PCI is used as a single.
- ci_rangedPci: CSG PCI is used as a range.
CSG_PCISTART The PCI start value of the CSG cell.
CSG_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the CSG cell. The range includes the start
value.


Command Description
C2013 RETRIEVE SIB SCHEDULING INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-SIB-INF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the SIB period of the cell. SIB2-SIB12 is sent as an SI (System Information) message
and the mapping information for SIB and SI messages of SIB2-SIB12 is included in schedul-
ingInfoList of SIB1. Each SIB is included in its own SI message and SIBs of the same period are
mapped to the same SI message. Multiple SI messages may also be transmitted in the same
period. SIB2 is always mapped to the first SI message in the SI message list of schedulingInfo-
List.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

SIB2_PERIOD The transmission period for the system information block type
2 of the cell in the eNB.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_not_used: SIB2 is not sent.

- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.

Command Description
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.

- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms. ci_not_used: SIB8 is not sent.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.

- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.

- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
SI_WINDOW The system information window size of the cell in the eNB.
Each SI message is related with one SI window, and does not
overlap with SI windows of other SI messages. I.e, one SI is
sent in each SI window. All SI messages have the same window
size. Corresponding SI messages within the SI window are sent
repeatedly. The range is as follows:.
-ci_si_WindowLength_ms1: 1 ms.
- ci_si_WindowLength_ms2: 2 ms.

Command Description
WARNING_MSG_TYPE This is the value of Warning Message Type

C2014 RETRIEVE MOBILITY STATE INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-MOBIL-STA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the mobility state information. If the CELL_NUM parameter is entered, the informa-
tion only for the corresponding mobility state is retrieved. If not, the information for all mobility
states are retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

SPEED_STATE_RE_SEL_PARS_USAGEWhether to use the speedStateReselectonPars field of the

cell in the eNB.
- CI_no_use: The speedStateReselectonPars field is not used.
- CI_use: The speedStateReselectonPars field is used.
T_EVALULATION The evaluation time of the cell in the eNB.
T_HYST_NORMAL The hyst normal time of the cell in the eNB.
N_CELL_CHANGE_MEDIUM The number of cell change in medium mobility state of the cell
in the eNB.
N_CELL_CHANGE_HIGH The number of cell change in high mobility state of the cell in
the eNB.

Command Description
C2015 RETRIEVE UE TIMER CONSTANTS

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-TIME-INF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the UE timer constant in the eNB. This information includes the UE-timers and con-
stants broadcasted to SIB2 and the UE-specific timer information. The timer values broadcasted
to SIB are t300, t301, t310, n310, and n311. All other values are UE-specific timer values which
are included in the RRC message.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

T300 Timer t300 of the cell in the eNB. The UE starts the t300 timer
after sending RRC Connection Request. When it receives the
RRC Connection Setup message or the RRC Connection Reject
message, the timer is cleared. When the t300 timer terminates,
UE resets the MAC, clears the MAC configuration, and re-
establishes the RLC. The default is 200 ms, and can be changed
by the operator.
- ci_t_300_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms1000: 1000 ms.

- ci_t_300_ms1500: 1500 ms.

- ci_t_300_ms2000: 2000 ms.
after sending RRC Connection Reestablishment Request. When
it receives the RRC Connection Reestablishment message or the
RRC Connection Reestablishment message, the timer is
cleared. When the t301 timer terminates, UE becomes idle. The
default is 200 ms, and can be changed by the operator.
- ci_t_301_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1500: 1500 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T302 The timer value which starts after the UE receives the RRC
Connection Reject message. The timer terminates when UE sta-
tus becomes RRC_Connect or a cell is reselected. When the
timer is cleared, the UE treats the cell as barred and performs
cell reselection. The default is 8 seconds, and can be changed
by the operator.
- ci_t_302_s1: 1 second.
- ci_t_302_s2: 2 seconds.

Command Description
T304 The timer started by UE after receiving RRC Connection

Reconfiguration message during the handover. The timer termi-
nates when the handover to EUTRA succeeds. The default is
200 ms, and can be changed by the operator.
- ci_t_304_ms50: 50 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms150: 150 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.
CCO_T304 The timer started by UE after receiving Mobility From EUTRA

Command message during the handover. The timer terminates
when the command to change the cell to inter-RAT succeeds.
The default is 200 ms, and can be changed by the operator.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms4000: 4000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms8000: 8000 ms.
T310 The timer value which starts after the UE continuously receives
out-of-syncIndication as much as N310. Cleared if in-sync indi-
cation is received continuously as much as N311, if handover is
triggered, or if the reestablishment procedure is triggered.
- ci_t_310_ms0: 0 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms50: 50 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T311 The timer started by UE when initiating a reestablishment pro-

cedure. The timer is cleared if a suitable EUTRA cell or an
inter-RAT cell is found. If the timer is cleared without finding a
suitable cell, it enters RRC_IDLE state. The default is
10000ms, and can be changed by the operator.

- ci_t_311_ms1000: 1000 ms.

-ci_t_311_ms3000: 3000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms5000: 5000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms10000: 10000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms15000: 15000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms20000. 20000ms.
-ci_t_311_ms30000: 30000 ms.
T320 The timer started by UE when receiving a t320 timer value. It

also starts when cell reselection occurs from another RAT to
EUTRA, and terminates when UE status becomes
RRC_CONNECTED. The default is 30 minutes, and can be
changed by the operator.
- ci_t_320_min5: 5 minutes.
N310 The maximum count of out-of-syncIndication the UE receives

from lower-layer. The default is 10, and can be changed by the
operator.
- ci_n_310_n1: 1.
- ci_n_310_n2: 2.
- ci_n_310_n3: 3.
- ci_n_310_n4: 4.
- ci_n_310_n6: 6.
- ci_n_310_n8: 8.
- ci_n_310_n10: 10.
- ci_n_310_n20: 20.
N311 The maximum count of In-syncIndication the UE receives from

lower-layer. The default is 1, and can be changed by the opera-
tor.
- ci_n_311_n1: 1.
- ci_n_311_n2: 2.
- ci_n_311_n3: 3.
- ci_n_311_n4: 4.
- ci_n_311_n5: 5.

Command Description
- ci_n_311_n6: 6.
- ci_n_311_n8: 8.
- ci_n_311_n10: 10.

C2025 RETRIEVE CELL ACCESS IDLE INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-CAS-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the CSG cell ID. The parameters retrieved are broadcasted to the UE through SIB
(System Information Block) 1.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

CSG_IDENTITY The ID of the cell. This is available only if it is a Closed Sub-

scriber Group (CSG) cell.

Command Description
C2027 RETRIEVE SIB SCHEDULING IDLE INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-SIB-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the max size of the packed SI for transmission in the cell. The size for SIB information
transmission is determined by considering downlink bandwidth, DCI formation type, SIB recep-
tion time at cell edge, and payload size.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

MAX_PACKED_SI_SIZE The maximum size of the packed SI for transmission in the cell.
This value takes into account the DL RB count by bandwidth,
maximum RB count allocated to each SI message, PDSCH RE
count for each RB, payload size of DCI Format 1A, max aggre-
gation level and PDCCH coderate. Recommend values are 9 for
1.4 MB (i.e., mega bytes); 26 for 3 MB; 49 for 5 MB; 97 for 10
MB; 141 for 15 MB; 217 for 20 MB.

C2028 RETRIEVE CELL CAC FUNCTION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-CAC: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the CAC (call admission control) parameter information of the cells operating within
the eNB. As cell-level CACs, backhaul based CAC, call count based CAC, DRB count based
CAC, and QoS based CAC are performed. Retrieves threshold, CAC option, and preemption sta-
tus for performing CAC at the cell level.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

CELL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the call count-based CAC function, which

is one of the capacity-based Call Admission Control (CAC)
functions per cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is not
performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is per-
formed.
MAX_CALL_COUNT The call count limit in the capacity based CAC (call admission
control) at the cell level. The number of calls that can be
allowed by the cell.
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMALThe percentage of the allowable calls to the total normal

calls. When a normal call is requested, if the number of con-

Command Description
nected calls exceeds MAX_CALL_COUNT *

CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL, the Capacity-based
CAC Fail is generated.
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HOEmergency call availability of total handover calls in per-

centage. When a normal call is requested, if the number of con-
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO, the Capacity-based
DRB_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer (E-

RAB)-based CAC function, which is one of the capacity-based
Call Admission Control (CAC) functions per cell.
- CI_no_use: The E-RAB count-based CAC function per cell is
not executed.
- CI_use: The E-RAB count-based CAC function per cell is
executed.
MAX_DRB_COUNT The limit for the E-RAB (E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer)
count in capacity based CAC (call admission control) at the cell
level. The number of E-RABs (E-Utran Radio Access Bearers)
allowed in the cell.
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMALThe percentage of the allowable calls to the total normal

nected calls exceeds 'MAX_DRB_COUNT *
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL', the Capacity-based
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HOEmergency call availability of total handover calls in per-

DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO', the Capacity-based
QOS_CAC_OPTION The policy of the QoS (Quality of Service) based CAC (call
admission control) at the cell level.
- QoSCAC_option0: The QoS based CAC function at the cell
level is not used.
- QoSCAC_option1: The QoS-based CAC function per cell is
used.

QOS_POLICY_OPTION The policy used when executing the Quality of Service (QoS)-
based Call Admission Control (CAC) function per cell.
- QoSPolicy_option0: For a GBR bearer newly requested, the
PRB usage is calculated based on the resource type (GBR or
non-GBR) of the QCI. Then CAC is executed based on the cal-
culated PRB usage. Non-GBRs are always allowed.
PRB usage is calculated based on the priority of the QCI. Then
CAC is executed based on the calculated PRB usage. Non-
GBRs are always allowed.
PRB_REPORT_PERIOD PRB (Physical Resource Block) report period for QoS CAC at
the cell level.
ESTIMATION_OPT The policy of the Expected PRB usage calculation. (0: auto,
1:manual).
- EstimationOption_auto(0) : The PRB Usage is automatically
calculated.
- EstimationOption_manual(1) : The PRB Usage is manually
calculated.
PREEMPTION_FLAG Whether to use preemption at the cell level.

- CI_no_use: The Preemption function per cell is disabled.
- CI_use: The Preemption function per cell is enabled.
BH_BW_CAC_USAGE Whether to use backhaul bandwidth based CAC at the cell

level.
- CI_no_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based CAC function per
cell is not used.
- CI_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based CAC function per cell is
used.
BH_BW_CAC_OPTION The policy used when executing the Backhaul-based Call

Admission Control (CAC) function per cell.
- bhBwCac_QCI_only: QoS-based CAC.
- bhBwCac_ServiceGroup_only: Service group-based CAC.
- bhBwCac_Both_QCI_ServiceGroup: QoS amp; Service
group-based CAC.

Command Description
C2029 RETRIEVE ENB CAC FUNCTION
Command Format
RTRV-ENB-CAC;
Command Description
Retrieves the capacity based CAC (call admission control) parameter information of the eNBs in
the BS. This command performs call count based CAC at the eNB level. It also retrieves the
threshold information and the MAX call count information required for CAC at the eNB level.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

CALL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the Capacity-based Call Admission Control
(CAC) function per cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base sta-
tion is not performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is
performed.
MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT The limit for capacity based CAC (call admission control) at the
eNB level. The number of calls that can be allowed by the eNB.

nected calls exceeds MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT *


CHECK_UE_ID_USAGE Whether to execute the SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identi-

fier (S-TMSI) Duplication Check function for a new call.
- CI_no_use: The S-TMSI Duplication Check function is not
performed.
- CI_use: The S-TMSI Duplication Check function is per-
formed. If a call is found as a duplicate, the existing call is
released and the new call is accommodated.

Command Description
C2030 RETRIEVE QOS CAC PARAMETER FUNC-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-QCAC-PARA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the active QoS (Quality of Service) CAC (call admission control) parameter in the
eNB. QoS CAC is performed at the cell level, for QCI of each GBR bearer. Retrieves the thresh-
old by QCI for performing QoS CAC and retrieves the threshold for determining congestion
state of the active cell.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of downlink calls that can be assigned per cell.

It is used when a new call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB
percentage'. When a new call is requested, if the downlink GBR
PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is
generated.
DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of downlink Handover calls that can be assigned

per cell. It is used when a Handover call is requested. It is calcu-
lated as 'PRB percentage. When a Handover call is requested, if
the downlink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the
QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of uplink calls that can be assigned per cell. It

is used when a new call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB

percentage'. When a new call is requested, if the uplink GBR
generated.
UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of uplink Handover calls that can be assigned per
cell. It is used when a Handover call is requested. It is calcu-
lated as 'PRB percentage'. When a Handover call is requested, if
the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the

Command Description
C2031 RETRIEVE SON ANR PARAMETERS
Command Format
RTRV-SON-ANR;
Command Description
Retrieves the parameter information for the SON ANR function.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

MAX_NRTSIZE The maximum size of Neighbor Relation Table (NRT) per cell.
ANR manages the ranking of NRs that are within this size. If an
added NR exceeds the size, ANR adds the existing NR of the
lowest rank to the blacklist to limit the number of NRs to
MAX_NRTSIZE.
LSM_USAGE_FLAG Whether to use the ECGI and IP processing procedures in the

LSM during operation.
- FALSE (0): The procedures are not executed through the
LSM but are executed through UE.
- TRUE (1): The procedures are executed through the LSM or
UE.
DEFAULT_WEIGHT The default weight for a new neighbor relation (NR). A neigh-
boring cell newly added has a disadvantage in both of the han-
dover attempt rate and the handover success rate, when
determining its priority. Therefore, the default weight specified
by this parameter value is given to the newly added neighboring
cells during the specified period of time (DEFAULT_PERIOD).
DEFAULT_PERIOD A period of time for which the default priority is applied to a

new Neighbor Relation (NR) in a unit of day. During this period
of time, the default weight (DEFAULT_WEIGHT) is given to

the newly added NRs and they are handled so that they are not
added to the blacklist.
HO_ATTEMPT_WEIGHT The weight given to a handover attempt rate when calculating

the NR ranking. The NR ranking is determined by default in
consideration of handover success and failure rates of each
neighboring cell with attempt rates weighted.
HO_SUCCESS_WEIGHT The weight given to the handover success rate when calculating
neighboring cell with success rates weighted.
LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE The lowest attempt rate that applies the handover blacklist. NRs
that fail to meet HO KPI are added to the HO blacklist to pre-
vent a handover to the neighboring cell. The NRs whose
attempt rate is lower than this parameter value, and whose suc-
cess rate is lower than LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI are
included in the handover blacklist.
LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI The lowest success rate that applies the handover blacklist. NRs
vent a handover to the neighboring cell. The NRs whose suc-
cess rate is lower than the HO KPI multiplied by this parameter
value, and whose attempt rate is lower than
LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE are included in the handover
blacklist.
UPPER_HO_TO_BLACK_RATE The upper limit of the handover attempt rate to the black cell to
be deleted from the blacklist. During handover from cell A to
cell B, if the handover to wrong cell event occurs and the fre-
quency of reconnecting to neighboring cells managed by the
blacklist exceeds this parameter, the NR is returned to NRT
from the blacklist.

Command Description
C2033 RETRIEVE SRB RLC INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SRB-RLC: [SRB_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the parameters required to operate the RLC protocol. The number of AMD PDU
retransmissions per SRB ID. PollByte and PollPDU for poll triggering, the poll retransmission
timer, the loss detection timer, and the STATUS_PDU prohibit timer can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
SRB_ID The ID of SRB to retrieve. 1~2 NONE 1
- 1: Information on SRB1.

SRB_ID The ID of SRB to retrieve.
TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT The timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
MAX_RETRANSMISSION_THRESHOLDThe threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU

retransmission in a transmitting AM_RLC entity.
TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.

TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT The timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a

receiving AM_RLC entity.

Command Description
C2034 RETRIEVE QCI DSCP MAP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-QCIDSCP-MAP: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping by QCI.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
QCI QCI(Qos Class Identifier) value for which 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
the DSCP mapping information will be
set.

QCI QCI(Qos Class Identifier) value for which the DSCP mapping
information will be set.
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the specified traffic type (QCI).

C2035 RETRIEVE DSCP COS MAP INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-DSCPCOS-MAP: [DSCP];
Command Description
Retrieves the COS mapping information by Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). The
COS value mapped to a DSCP value is marked as VLAN TAG.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DSCP DSCP value for which the COS mapping 0 ~ 63 NONE 0

DSCP DSCP value for which the COS mapping information will be
set.
COS The CoS value that will be set for the specified DSCP value.

Command Description
C2038 RETRIEVE QCI VALUE INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-QCI-VAL: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The information is used by the
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) in the eNB. The configuration
parameters of each QCI consist of Status, Resource Type, Priority, Packet Delay Budget (PDB),
Packet Error Loss Rate (PELR), and Backhaul Service Group.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
QCI QCI index. The range is from 0 to 255. 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
The standard QCIs defined in the stan-
dard documents is 1 to 9. The user can
use QCI values 0 and 10-255.

STATUS Whether the QoS Class Identifier (QCI) is used.

- EQUIP: The QCI is used in the eNB.
- N_EQUIP: The QCI is not used in the eNB.
RESOURCE_TYPE The resource type of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI).

- ci_NonGBR: The resource type of the QCI is set to non-GBR
(Guaranteed Bit Rate).

- ci_GBR: The resource type of the QCI is set to GBR (Guaran-
teed Bit Rate).
PRIORITY The priority of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is

between 1 and 16. 1 indicates the highest priority.
PDB Packet Delay Budget (PDB) of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI).
- ci_pdb50msec: PDB of the QCI to 50 msec.
PELR Packet Error Loss Rate (PLER) of the QoS Class Identifier
(QCI).
- ci_pler10_2: The PLER's QCI is 10^-2.
BH_SERVICE_GROUP The service group of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The
entered parameter values is used in the backhaul Call Admis-
sion Control (CAC).
- voipService: The QCI uses the Voice of Internet Protocol
(VoIP) service.
- videoService: The QCI uses the video service.
SCHEDULING_TYPE The schedulin type of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The
entered parameter values is used in scheduling by MAC Layer.
- Dynamic_scheduling: The QCI uses the Dynamic scheduling.
- SPS_scheduling: The QCI uses SPS scheduling.

Command Description
C2039 RETRIEVE LOGICAL CH INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-LOCH-INF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate logical channels.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
QCI QCI (QoS Class Identifier) index. The 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
range is from 0 to 255. The standard QCIs
defined in the standard documents is 1 to
9. The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-
255.

QCI QCI (QoS Class Identifier) index. The range is from 0 to 255.
The standard QCIs defined in the standard documents is 1 to 9.
The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-255.
PRIORITIZED_BIT_RATE The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It is

a minimum transmission rate that must be secured per logical
channel. The parameter by which UE increases the bucket for
each logical channel.
- ci_kBps0: Prioritized Bit Rate of the QCI is 0 kBps.
- ci_prioritizedBitRate_infinity: Prioritized Bit Rate of the QCI
is infinity.

BUCKET_SIZE_DURATION The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It

determines the maximum length of a bucket per UE's logical
channel.
- ci_bucketSizeDuration_ms50: Bucket Size Duration of the
QCI is 50 ms.
QCI is 100 ms.
QCI is 150 ms.
QCI is 300 ms.
QCI is 500 ms.
QCI is 1000 ms.
LOGICAL_CHANNEL_PRIORITY The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It

determines an allocation order per logical channel. The range is
from 1 to 16.
NON_GBRPFWEIGHT The non-GBR bearer's proportional fairness weight per QCI.

The threshold that is not applied to a GBR bearer. The range is
from 0 to 15.

Command Description
C2040 RETRIEVE RLC INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-RLC-INF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate the RLC protocol. The RLC mode per QCI, number of
the AMD PDU retransmission in the eNB and UE, the PollByte and PollPDU settings for poll
triggering, the poll retransmission timer, the loss detection timer, and the STATUS_PDU prohibit
timer settings can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
defined in the standard documents is 1 to
9. The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-
255.

RLC_MODE The mode information (AM/UM) on RLC.
ENB_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMITThe timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
ENB_POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
ENB_POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
ENB_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD The threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU

ENB_TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.
ENB_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBITThe timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a

UE_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT The timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
UE_POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
UE_POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
UE_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD The threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU
UE_TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.
UE_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT The timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a

SN_FIELD_LENGTH The field size of UM sequence number.

Command Description
C2041 RETRIEVE PDCP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-PDCP-INF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves information of the PDCP. The PDCP information to be retrieved are the UM SN size
by QoS class, discard timer, and forward end timer. If a QoS class is not specified, the entire
information on 256 QoS classes is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

UM_SN_SIZE The size of PDCP Sequence Number (SN) in RLC UM mode.

- ci_len7bits: Uses the size of 7 bits (0 to 127).
- ci_len12bits: The size of 12 bits (0 to 4095) is used (Default).
DISCARD_TIMER The Discard timer value for a packet buffer managed per RB in
RLC AM mode. If ACK is not received from the RLC within a
specified period of time, the packet is discarded.
- ci_discardTimer_ms50: 50 msec.


- ci_discardTimer_infinity: The discard timer is disabled.
(default).
FWD_END_TIMER A period of time when PDCP of target eNB waits for end
marker upon receiving a HO_COMPLETE message. in milli-
seconds.
STATUS_REPORT_REQUIRED This value determines whether or not to send SN Status Report.

Command Description
C2042 RETRIEVE GTP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-GTP-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves information of the GTP. This command can retrieve whether to use keep alive, the
timeout interval, and the sequence number. If KeepAlive is set, the GTP ECHO-REQ message is
sent to S-GW at a specified interval (T3_TIMER_LONG). If the GTP ECHO-RESP message is
not received from S-GW until the next message is sent, transmission is repeated for
N3_REQUEST times at T3_TIMER interval.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

T3_TMR The interval at which transmission of the ECHO-REQ message
is repeated if a response message to ECHO-REQ, which is sent
for Keep Alive, is not received. The range is between 0 and
60000 msec. The default is 5000 (5 seconds). This timer runs
only if KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
T3_TMR_LONG The interval at which the ECHO-REQ message is sent for peri-
odic Keep Alive. The range is between 60000 and 600000
msec. The default is 60000 (60 seconds). This timer runs only if
KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
N3_REQUEST The maximum retransmission number of the GTP ECHO-REQ

message. This timer runs only if KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
KEEP_ALIVE Whether the GTP ECHO-REQ message at specified intervals

(Keep Alive) is sent.
- 0: The ECHO-REQ message is not sent.
- 1: The ECHO-REQ message is sent(default).

SNN Whether the GTP sequence number is used.

- 0: The GTP sequence number in the eNB is not used.
- 1: The GTP sequence number in the eNB is used.
ECN Whether the Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) function is

used.
- 0: The ECN function in the eNB is not used.
- 1: The ECN function in the eNB is used.

Command Description
C2043 RETRIEVE PCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-PCCH-CONF;
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Paging Control Channel (PCCH) in the eNB. Paging is used
when initiating a mobile-terminating connection or triggering UE to re-obtain the system infor-
mation, as well as for sending the Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System (ETWS) indication.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

DEFAULT_PAGING_CYCLE[msec] When DRX is used, UE monitors a single paging occasion
per DRX cycle. If UE-specific DRX is not set by the upper
layer, defaultPagingCycle is applied as the default DRX
cycle.
N_B The parameter required to calculate the paging frame and pag-
ing occasion using the TS 36.304 method, which is a multiple
of defaultPagingCycle.

C2044 RETRIEVE PDSCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-PDSCH-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) in the eNB. The
power ratio between a Resource Element (RE) transmitting a reference signal and a RE transmit-
ting data can be set in PDSCH.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CELL_NUM The cell number for which the command 0~8 NONE 0
was executed.

CELL_NUM The cell number for which the command was executed.
DL_POWER_OPTION The power setting option. The power of the RS per resource
grid is set to a multiple of the power of the data per resource
grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Same: The power of the RS per resource grid is
the same as that of the data per resource grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_OneHalf: The power of the RS per resource grid
is one and a half times as much as that of the data per resource
grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Twice: The power of the RS per resource grid is
two times as much as that of the data per resource grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Half: The power of the RS per resource grid is a
half times as much as that of the data per resource grID.

Command Description
C2045 RETRIEVE PHICH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
RTRV-PHICH-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH) in the eNB.
This command can retrieve PHICH duration and resource settings.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

PHICH_DURATION The PHICH duration set in accordance with Table 6.9.3-1 of TS

36.211. It sets the lower limit of a control region size that is
passed to PCFICH.
PHICH_RESOURCE The parameter used to calculate the number of PHICH groups.

C2046 RETRIEVE PRACH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-PRACH-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) in the eNB. This
command can retrieve the high speed flag, the PRACH configuration index, the root sequence
index, and the zero correlation zone configuration.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

PRACH_CONFIG_INDEX Index for the preamble format, subframe sent by preamble, and
interval.
HIGH_SPEED_FLAG Whether to use unrestricted or restricted set. When this parame-

ter is set to TRUE, a restricted set is used. When set to FALSE,
an unrestricted set is used.
ZERO_CORREL_ZONE_CONFIG The zero correlation zone used to create a random preamble.
ROOT_SEQUENCE_INDEX The first logical root sequence index used to create a random
preamble. Different values should be assigned to neighboring
cells.
PRACH_POSITION Provides information about PRACH position between two pos-

sible positions adjacent to PUCCH. 0: low position, 1: high
position

Command Description
C2047 RETRIEVE PUSCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-PUSCH-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) in the eNB. This
command can retrieve whether to receive 64-QAM in the eNB and hopping settings.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

N_SB The number of sub-bands in Type 2 PUSCH hopping.
HOPPING_MODE Hopping mode.

- ci_interSubFrame: Inter-subframe hopping.
- ci_intraAndInterSubFrame: Intra and inter-subframe hopping.
ENABLE_SIX_FOUR_QAM Whether to support 64QAM. Only the category 5 UEs capable

of sending 64-QAM via the uplink are affected by this parame-
ter value.
- False: 64QAM is not applied.
- True: 64QAM when the eNB receives data is applied.
GROUP_HOPPING_ENABLED Whether to support group hopping.

- False: Group hopping is not supported.
- True: Group hopping is supported.
GROUP_ASSIGNMENT_PUSCH The group assignment value in the PUSCH.

SEQUENCE_HOPPING_ENABLEDWhether to support sequence hopping.

- False: Sequence hopping is not supported.
- True: Sequence hopping is supported.

Command Description
C2048 RETRIEVE RACH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-RACH-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration information on the Random Access Channel (RACH) in the eNB.
The information retrieved includes the backoff indicator, number of times to transmit Msg3
HARQ, the number of non-dedicated/dedicated preambles, the power ramping step and the max-
imum number of transmission, and the number of preamble group A/B.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

NUMBER_OF_RAPREAMBLES The number of non-dedicated preambles.
SIZE_OF_RAPREAMBLES_GROUP_AThe number of PreamblesGroup A.
MESSAGE_SIZE_GROUP_A Standard for message size to select PreamblesGroup A.
MESSAGE_POWER_OFFSET_GROUP_BStandard for power offset to select PreambleGroup B.
POWER_RAMPING_STEP Power ramping steps when sending a preamble.
PREAMBLE_INIT_RCV_TARGET_POWERThe threshold used to set an initial-target receiving

power of preambles.
PREAMBLE_TRANS_MAX The maximum number of times to transmit a preamble.

CONTENTION_RESOLUTION_TIMERContention resolution timer.
BACKOFF_INDICATOR_SETUP Whether to use the backoff indicator.

- ci_Config_Release: release.
- ci_Config_Setup: setup.
BACKOFF_INDICATOR The backoff parameter.
MAX_HARQMSG3_TX The maximum number of transmission of HARQ Msg3.

Command Description
C2049 RETRIEVE TIME ALIGNMENT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-TIME-ALIGN: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of a time alignment of UE. If TimeAlignmentTimer is not infinity,
the UE determines that the uplink timing is maintained by receiving the timing advance com-
mand within the timer value. Otherwise, the UE releases the PUCCH and SRS resources.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

TIME_ALIGNMENT_TIMER_COMMONThe parameter used to adjust a period of time during

which UE decides that the uplink timing is correct.

C2050 RETRIEVE SOUNDING RS UPLINK CON-

FIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-SNDRS-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the UL Sounding Reference Signal in the eNB. This command
can retrieve whether simultaneous transmission of ACK/NACK or SR, and SRS is supported,
whether SRS is used in the cell, and SRS MaxUpPts.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

SRS_USAGE Whether to use SRS.

- CI_no_use: SRS is not used.
- CI_use: SRS is used.
ACK_NACK_SRS_SIMUL_TRANSMISSIONWhether simultaneous transmission of ACK/NACK

or SR, and Sounding RS is supported.
- False: Sounding RS is not transmitted.
- True: Sounding RS is transmitted.

Command Description
C2051 RETRIEVE UPLINK POWER CONTROL

PARAMETER
Command Format
RTRV-PWR-PARA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration information on the Uplink Power Control in the eNB. The informa-
tion retrieved includes the alpha value used in PUSCH Power Control, transmission power set-
tings by PUCCH format, settings for the p0_nominal_PUCCH and p0_nominal_PUSCH, and
UL IOT target value.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

P0_NOMINAL_PUSCH p0NominalPUSCH.
ALPHA Assign alpha (0,0.4,0.5~0.9,1)
P0_NOMINAL_PUCCH p0Nominal PUCCH.
DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT1 The difference in the transmission power between PUCCH

format1a and PUCCH format1.
DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT1_B The difference in the transmission power between PUCCH

format1a and PUCCH format1b.


DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT2_A The difference in the transmission power between PUCCH

format1a and PUCCH format2a.

DELTA_PREAMBLE_MSG3 deltaPreambleMsg3.
UL_TARGET_IOT The UL IOT target value for all ICIC types.
UL_IOI_THRESHOLD_STEP The difference between high and low thresholds to generate UL

IOI for all ICIC types and the Target IoT. The threshold scaled
up 4 times in dB area.

Command Description
C2052 RETRIEVE BCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-BCCH-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) in the eNB. This com-
mand can retrieve the ModificationPeriodCoeff value used to determine an interval for changing
system information.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

MODIFICATION_PERIOD_COEFFThe number of times to determine whether the system informa-

tion saved is valid ID.

C2053 RETRIEVE PUSCH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
RTRV-PUSCH-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) in the eNB. The
n(1)_DMRS value used to determine the cyclic shift value of a PUSCH Reference Signal can be
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

CYCLIC_SHIFT The n(1)_DMRS value by cell. The cyclic shift value of the
PUSCH reference signal is determined by this value and the
n(2)_DMRS value set in DCI format 0.

Command Description
C2054 RETRIEVE RACH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
RTRV-RACH-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of the Random Access Channel (RACH) in the eNB. The raRespon-
seWindowSize value that is the period of time during which UE waits for RA Response can be
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

RA_RESPONSE_WINDOW_SIZE The period of time during which UE waits for RA Response.

C2055 RETRIEVE CQI REPORTING INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-CQI-REP: [TRANSMISSION_MODE];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate the CQI reporting. This command can retrieve whether
Wideband CQI or both Wideband CQI and Subband CQI are run by the DL transmission mode.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
TRANSMISSION_ Transmission mode. ci_tm1/ci_tm2/ci_tm3/ NONE ci_tm1
MODE - ci_tm1: Single-antenna port (port 0), ci_tm4/ci_tm5/ci_tm6/
DCI format 1 or 1A is used. ci_tm7/ci_tm8/
- ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1
or 1A is used.
- ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing,
DCI format 2A or 1A is used.
- ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplex-
ing, DCI format 2 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A
is used.
- ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding,
DCI format 1B or 1A is used.
- ci_tm7: Single-antenna port (port 5),
DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port
8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used.

TRANSMISSION_MODE Transmission mode.
- ci_tm1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI format 1 or 1A is
used.
- ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A
is used.

Command Description
- ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A
is used.
- ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used.
- ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A
is used.
used.
- ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or
1A is used.
WIDE_SUBBAND_SELECT Selects a Wideband/Subband CQI option.

- ci_WideBand: wideband CQI only.
- ci_SubBand: wideband CQI + subband CQI.

C2056 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY PUSCH

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-DPHY-PUSCH: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate dedicated PUSCH. This command can retrieve
betaOffsetACK, betaOffsetCQI, and betaOffsetRI, which determine the degree of resources in
PUSCH to be used in transmitting UCI if it needs to be sent to the uplink in the same subframe
as PUSCH.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

BETA_OFFSET_ACKINDEX The threshold used to multiplex ACK/NACK and PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET_RIINDEX The threshold used to multiplex RI with PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET_CQIINDEX The threshold used to multiplex CQI with PUSCH.

Command Description
C2057 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY SPS INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-DPHY-SPS: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate dedicated semiPersistScheduling. This command can
retrieve UL power settings for SPS and whether to use the two-interval SPS pattern.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

P0_NOMINAL_PUSCHPERSISTENTSPS P0 value used in power control. The value is dBm.
P0_UEPUSCHPERSISTENT SPS P0 value used in power control, which is determined per

UE. The value is in dB.
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_DL Provide information about the combinations of the allocated

number of RB, MCS and TBS size for DL SPS
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_UL Provide information about the combinations of the allocated

number of RB, MCS and TBS size for UL SPS
TWO_INTERVALS_CONFIG Whether to use the two-interval SPS pattern in UL.

- ci_false: Two-interval SPS pattern is not used.
- ci_true: Two-interval SPS pattern is used.
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_DLProvide informations about the maximum

allowable number of PRBs for DL SPS
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_ULProvide informations about the maximum

allowable number of PRBs for UL SPS

Command Description
C2058 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY SR INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-DPHY-SR: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate dedicated SchedulingRequest. This command can
retrieve the maximum number of times to send a scheduling request of UE.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

DSR_TRANS_MAX The maximum number of scheduling requests that can be sent

until PUSCH resources are assigned to UE.

C2059 RETRIEVE DEDICATED UL PWR CTRL

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-ULPWR-CTRL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate dedicated Uplink Power Control. The information
retrieved includes p0 value per UE for PUSCH/PUCCH, information on whether the accumula-
tion mode is used by TPC, power offsets of PUSCH and SRS, and the L3 filtering coefficient
value used by UE to calculate path.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

P0_UE_PUSCH The non-persistent scheduling P0 value used in PUSCH power

control, which is determined per UE.
DELTA_MCSENABLED Whether to use a power offset against other MCSs.

- ci_en0: 0.
- ci_en1: 1.25. Refer to 5.1 of TS 36.213.
ACCUMULATION_ENABLED Whether to use the accumulation mode and absolute mode in

the TPC.
- 0: Accumulation mode is not used.
- 1: Accumulation mode is used.
P0_UE_PUCCH P0 value used in PUCCH power control, which is determined

Command Description
per UE.
P_SRSOFFSET The power offset value between PUSCH and SRS.
FILTER_COEFFICIENT Filtering coefficient used to measure RSRP in order to calculate

a path loss.

C2060 RETRIEVE DEDICATED PHY UL SRS

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-DPHY-ULSRS: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate dedicated Uplink Sounding RS. The hopping band-
width and the transmission duration of SRS can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

SRS_HOPPING_BANDWIDTH The area where Sounding RS is hopped.
DURATION The transmission duration of Sounding RS.

- 0: Sounding RS is transmitted only once.
- 1: Sounding RS is transmitted repeatedly until it is disabled.

Command Description
C2061 RETRIEVE DPHY RLF INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-DPHY-RLF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves the dedicated PHY RLF. Parameters used to determine RLF can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DEDICATED_RLFSETUP Whether the dedicated RLF is used.

- ci_Config_Release: The RLF function is not used.
- ci_Config_Setup: The RLF function is used.
T301 Timer t301 of a cell in the eNB.
N310 N310 value of a cell in the eNB.

C2062 RETRIEVE DRX INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-DRX-INF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate DRX. Information on whether DRX , longDRX cycle
is used, whether shortDRX is used, and shortDRX cycle can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DRX_CONFIG_SETUP Whether to use the DRX.

- ci_Config_Release: DRX is not used.
- ci_Config_Setup: normal DRX profile is used in normal sta-
tus and reportCGI DRX profile is used in reportCGI status.
- ci_Config_reportCGI: DRX is not used in normal status and
reportCGI DRX profile is used in reportCGI status.
ON_DURATION_TIMER_NORMALTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in normal status. (5.7

in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for
1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub-frames and so on
(6.3.2 in TS 36.331) {psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8,
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, psf80, psf100, psf200}
Available values are greater than or equal to 10ms.

Command Description
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_NORMALTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in normal status.

(5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames:
psf1 for 1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub-frames
and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) {psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5,
psf6, psf8, psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, psf80,
psf100, psf200, psf300, psf500, psf750, psf1280, psf1920,
psf2560, spare10, spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5,
spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1} Available Value is greater than
or equal to 10ms
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_NORMALThe timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in

normal status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, psf6, psf8, psf16, psf24, psf33}
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_NORMALThe long DRX cycle and drx start offset

values to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in normal status.
The unit of the long DRX cycle is a sub-frame. If the short
DRX-Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is set to a multiple
of the short DRX-Cycle. The DRX start offset is set to an inte-
ger. For the TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-frame can be set.
{sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320,
sf512, sf640, sf1024, sf1280, sf2048, sf2560} Available Value:
multiple of 10ms
SHORT_DRXCONFIG_SETUP Short DRX mode.

- ci_Config_Release: Short DRX is not used.
- ci_Config_Setup: Short DRX is used.
SHORT_DRXCYCLE_NORMAL The short DRX cycle to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in

normal status. {sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64,
sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640} Available Value:
multiple of 10ms
DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_NORMALThe timer used to enter long DRX mode in normal sta-

tus.
DRX_SELECTION_ORDER Selection order per QCI to select DRX profile.
ON_DURATION_TIMER_REPORT_CGITimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in reportCGI sta-

tus. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames:


psf100, psf200} Available values are greater than or equal to
10ms.
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_REPORT_CGITimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in reportCGI

status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-
frames: psf1 for 1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub-
frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) {psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4,
psf5, psf6, psf8, psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, psf80,
or equal to 10ms
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_REPORT_CGIThe timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX

mode in reportCGI status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, psf6, psf8, psf16,
psf24, psf33}
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_REPORT_CGIThe long DRX cycle and drx start

offset values to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in
reportCGI status. The unit of the long DRX cycle is a sub-
frame. If the short DRX-Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is
set to a multiple of the short DRX-Cycle. The DRX start offset
is set to an integer. For the TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-
frame can be set. {sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, sf128,
sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640, sf1024, sf1280, sf2048,
sf2560} Available Value: multiple of 10ms
SHORT_DRXCYCLE_REPORT_CGIThe short DRX cycle to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode

in reportCGI status. {sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40,
sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640} Available
Value: multiple of 10ms
DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_REPORT_CGIThe timer used to enter long DRX mode in

reportCGI status.

Command Description
C2063 RETRIEVE DL SCHEDULER INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-DL-SCHED: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of downlink scheduling for the MAC layer in the eNB. The informa-
tion retrieved includes fairness, channel quality, and priority-related scheduler values (alpha,
beta, and gamma).
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

DL_MIMO_MODE DL MIMO parameters. 0(SM/MU-MIMO disable), 1(SM

enable), 2(MU_MIMO enable), 3(Test Mode: CL-SM default
mode), 4(Test Mode: CL-Rank1-Precoding default mode),
5(Test Mode: OL-TxD default mode), 6(Test Mode: OL-SM
default mode), 7(Test Mode: Dual-layer transmission default
mode), 8(Beamforming enable), 9(Dual-layer beamforming
enable), 10(reserved)
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler.
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler.
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler.

C2064 RETRIEVE UL SCHEDULER INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UL-SCHED: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration of uplink scheduling for the MAC layer in the eNB. The information
retrieved includes fairness, channel quality, and priority-related scheduler values (alpha, beta,
and gamma).
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.


Command Description
C2065 RETRIEVE TRANSPORT CH BSR INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-TRCH-BSR: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate transport channels. BST-related timer value can be
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

PERIODIC_BSRTIMER The Periodic BSR Timer type in accordance with the PDB per
QCI. For multiple bearers, the PDB with the smallest value is
used.
RETX_BSRTIMER The Retx BSR Timer type in accordance with the PDB per QCI.
For multiple bearers, the PDB with the smallest value is used.

C2066 RETRIEVE TRANSPORT CH INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-TRCH-INF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required to operate transport channels. The maximum number of times to
re-transmit UL HARQ, whether ttiBundling is used and its band, PHR transmission interval, and
dlPathlossChange value can be retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

MAX_HARQTX The max HARQ Tx per cell. The UE executes PUSCH retrans-
mission in accordance with this parameter value.
TTI_BUNDLING Whether to use TTI bundling.

- False: ttiBundling is not used.
- True: ttiBundling is used.
TTI_BUNDLING_BAND The maximum number of RBs per cell to which the users for
whom TTI_BUNDLING is set to true can be assigned.
PERIODIC_PHRTIMER periodicPHRTimer per cell.
DL_PATHLOSS_CHANGE The dLPathloss Change value per cell.
MAX_HARQTX_BUNDLING The maximum HARQ transmission count in sub_frame bun-

Command Description
dling mode.

C2067 RETRIEVE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-EUTRA-FA: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves parameters required to operate priority information on EUTRA FA. If the Cell Num
parameter is entered, the EUTRA FA registered to the corresponding cell is retrieved. If not, the
EUTRA FA information registered to all cells is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10


STATUS Whether the EUTRA FA is valid ID.

- EQUIP: Valid ID.
EARFCN_UL Uplink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number.
EARFCN_DL Downlink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Num-

ber.
PRIORITY Priority of EUTRA FA.
Q_RX_LEV_MIN The minimum RX level required in a cell in dBm units.

Command Description
P_MAX_USAGE Whether to use pMax.

- CI_no_use: pMax value is not used.
- CI_use: pMax value is used.
P_MAX The maximum TX power level in the UE.
T_RESELECTION Reselection timer value.
SF_USAGE Whether to use scaling factors.

- CI_no_use: T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are not used.
- CI_use: T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are used.
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM The medium timer value of the reselection scaling factors.
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH The high timer value of the reselection scaling factors.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE Whether to use sIntraSearch.

- CI_no_use: sIntraSearch is not used.
- CI_use: sIntraSearch is used.
S_INTRA_SEARCH The threshold for intra-frequency measurement.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE Whether to use sNonIntraSearch.

- CI_no_use: sNonIntraSearch is not used.
- CI_use: sNonIntraSearch is used.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH The threshold for inter-RAT and intra-frequency measurement.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW The low threshold for serving frequency during reselection

evaluation.
THRESH_XHIGH The threshold used in the UE to reselect a frequency whose pri-

ority is higher than the current camped frequency.
THRESH_XLOW The threshold used to reselect low-priority frequency from

high-priority frequency.
MESA_BANDWIDTH_USAGE Whether to use measurementBandwidth.

- CI_no_use: measurementBandwidth is not used.
- CI_use: measurementBandwidth is used.

MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH The maximum measurement bandwidth allowed for carrier fre-

quency.
PRESENCE_ANT_PORT1 Whether Antenna Port1 exists.

- False: Antenna Port1 does not exist.
- True: Antenna Port1 exists.
NEIGH_CELL_CONFIG The neighboring cell settings.
Q_OFFSET_FREQ Frequency offset value applied to q-OffsetFreq in SIB5.
OFFSET_FREQ Frequency offset value applied to offsetFreq in RRC Connec-

tion Reconfiguration.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGEWhether to use the sIntraSearch for Rel-9.

S_INTRA_SEARCH_P The threshold P for an intra-frequency measurement in Rel-9.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q The threshold Q for an intra-frequency measurement in Rel-9.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGEWhether to use sNonIntraSearch for Rel-9.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P The threshold P for inter-RAT and an intra-frequency measure-

ment.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q The threshold Q for inter-RAT and an intra-frequency measure-

ment.
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9_USAGE Whether to use the qQualMin for Rel-9.

- CI_no_use: SqQualMin is not used.
- CI_use: qQualMin is used.
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9 qQualMin value for Rel-9.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9_USAGEWhether to use the threshServingLowQ for Rel-9.

- CI_no_use: threshServingLowQ is not used.
- CI_use: threshServingLowQ is used.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9threshServingLowQ value for Rel-9.

Command Description
THRESH_XHIGH_QREL9 The threshold used in the UE to reselect a frequency whose pri-

ority is higher than the current camped frequency in Rel-9.
THRESH_XLOW_QREL9 The threshold used to reselect low-priority frequency from

high-priority frequency in Rel-9.
MCC0 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that comprises Public Land

Mobile Network (PLMN). FA have the Preference of
Preference0 for PLMN#0
MNC0 MNC that comprises PLMN.FA have the Preference of

PREFERENCE0 Preference of PLMN #0 for FA.












Command Description
C2068 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-MEAS-FUNC: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves measurements set for each cell in the eNB. If the Cell Num parameter is entered, the
measurement information registered to the corresponding cell is retrieved. If not, all measure-
ment information is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

S_MEASURE The quality threshold of the serving cell used by the UE to con-
trol measurement for the intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and
inter-RAT neighboring cells.

- CI_no_use: Scaling factor is not used.
- CI_use: Scaling factor is used.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_MEDIUMSpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the parameter values that

control mobility when the UE is at a medium speed.
- ci_oDot25: 0.25 is used for the medium timer.
- ci_1Dot0: 1.0 is used for the medium timer.

TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_HIGH SpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the parameter values that

control mobility when the UE is at a high speed.
- ci_oDot25: 0.25 is used for the high timer.
- ci_1Dot0: 1.0 is used for the high timer.

Command Description
C2069 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT GAP INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-MSGAP-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the measurement gap set for each cell in the eNB. The measurement gap retrieved is
necessary to measure SON ANR, inter-FA, and inter-RAT.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_FA Measurement gap pattern used for inter-frequency measure-
ment. The default is gapPattern0.
- gapPattern0: 0-39.
GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_RATThe measurement gap pattern used for inter-RAT measure-

GAP_USE_FOR_ANR Whether the measurement gap is used for the SON ANR func-
tion. The default is False.
- False: Measurement gap is not used.
- True: Measurement gap is used.
GAP_PATTERN_FOR_ANR The measurement gap pattern used for SON ANR. The default
is gapPattern0.

C2070 RETRIEVE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-FA: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves priority of UTRA FA. If the CELL_NUM and FA_INDEX parameters are entered, the
information only for the UTRAN FA object registered to the corresponding E-UTRAN served
cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN FA objects is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10



- EQUIP: Valid ID.
DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex mode information on a cell. Enter either FDD or

TDD.
UARFCN_UL Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number.
UARFCN_DL Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number.

Command Description
PRIORITY Priority information on the UTRA FA.


P_MAX_UTRA The maximum RF output power in the UE.
Q_QUAL_MIN The minimum quality level required in UTRA FDD cells.
OFFSET_FREQ The offset applied to UTRA carrier frequency.



C2073 RETRIEVE EUTRA A1CRITERIA INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-EUTRA-A1CNF: [CELL_NUM], [PURPOSE];
Command Description
Retrieves the EUTRA A1 criteria. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameters are entered,
the information only for the EUTRAN A1 event report registered to the corresponding E-
UTRAN served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all EUTRAN A1 event reports are
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A1. It is cur- ci_A1PurposeMeasGap NONE ci_A1Pu
rently used to deactivate measurement Deact/ rpose-
gap. ci_A1PurposeSpare_1/ Meas-
- ci_A1PurposeMeasGapDeat. : Deacti- ci_A1PurposeSpare_2/ GapDea
vates the gap. ct
- ci_A1PurposeSpare_1: Reserved.

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A1. It is currently used to deacti-
vate measurement gap.
- ci_A1PurposeMeasGapDeat. : Deactivates the gap.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use Event A1.

- Inactive: Event A1 is not used.
- Active: Event A1 is used.

Command Description
A1_THRESHOLD_RSRP RSRP threshold used in the EUTRA measurement report trig-

gering condition for Event A1.
A1_THRESHOLD_RSRQ RSRQ threshold used in the EUTRA measurement report trig-

HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave condition of Event A1.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for Event A1. The timeToTrigger value is

the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger a mea-
surement report.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering condition

for Event A1. Either RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.
REPORT_QUANTITY The quantity information included in a measurement report for

Event A1. It can be the same value as the trigger quantity or be
set to include both of the RSRP and RSRQ values.
MAX_REPORT_CELL The maximum number of cells included in a measurement

report for Event A1.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for Event A1.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for Event A1.


MATION
Command Format
Command Description
UTRAN served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all EUTRAN A2 event reports is
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

rently used to activate measurement gap Act/ rpose-
and PS-redirection. ci_A2PurposeRedirecti Meas-
- ci_A2PurposeMeasGapAct: Activates on/ GapAct
gap. ci_A2PurposeSpare_1/
- ci_A2PurposeRedirection: PS Redirecd- ci_A2PurposeSpare_2/
tion.
-ci_A2PurposeSpare_1: Reserved.

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A2. It is currently used to activate
measurement gap and PS-redirection.
- ci_A2PurposeMeasGapAct: Activates gap.
- ci_A2PurposeRedirection: PS Redirecdtion.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use the Event A2.

Command Description




surement report.





MATION
Command Format
Command Description
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A3. It is cur- ci_A3PurposeIntraLteH NONE ci_A3Pu
rently used for intra-LTE handover and the andover/ rposeIn-
SON ANR function. ci_A3PurposeReportStr traLte-
- ci_A3PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra- ongestCells/ Handov
LTE handover. ci_A3PurposeSpare_2/ er
- ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells:
ICIC.

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A3. It is currently used for intra-
LTE handover and the SON ANR function.
- ci_A3PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra-LTE handover.
- ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.


Command Description
A3_OFFSET RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement

A3_REPORT_ON_LEAVE Indicates whether or not the UE shall initiate the measurement

reporting procedure when the leaving condition is met.
- False: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is set to FALSE and UE is
not report when the leaving condition is met (default).

- True: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is set to TRUE and UE
shall report when the leaving condition is met.

surement report.





MATION
Command Format
Command Description
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A4. It is cur- ci_A4PurposeANR_Spe NONE ci_A4Pu
rently used for intra-LTE handover and the cific/ rposeA
SON ANR function. ci_A4PurposeSpare_1/ NR_Spe
- ci_A4PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR. ci_A4PurposeSpare_2/ cific

- ci_A4PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR.


Command Description



surement report.





MATION
Command Format
Command Description
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in cur- ci_A5PurposeIntraLteH NONE ci_A5Pu
rent use. The definition is made for later andover/ rposeIn-
use. ci_A5PurposeSpare_1/ traLte-
- ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra- ci_A5PurposeSpare_2/ Handov
LTE handover. er

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The defini-
tion is made for later use.


Command Description
A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP RSRP threshold1 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement


A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRQ RSRQ threshold1 used for triggering the EUTRA measurement



surement report.




C2078 RETRIEVE EUTRA PERIOD CRITERIA

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-EUTRA-PRD: [CELL_NUM], [PURPOSE];
Command Description
Retrieves the EUTRA periodic criteria. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameters are
entered, the information only for the EUTRAN periodic report registered to the corresponding
E-UTRAN served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all EUTRAN periodic reports is
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the EUTRA periodic ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp NONE ci_Eutra
report. It is currently used for ReportStron- oseReportStrongest- Periodi-
gestCells(ICIC) and ReportCGI functions. Cells/ calPur-
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp poseRe
ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongest oseReportCGI/ port-
Cells: ICIC. ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp Stron-
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportCGI: oseSpare_1/ gestCell
Report CGI. s
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeSpare_1:
Reserved.

PURPOSE The purpose for using the EUTRA periodic report. It is cur-
rently used for ReportStrongestCells(ICIC) and ReportCGI
functions.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportCGI: Report CGI.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeSpare_1: Reserved.

Command Description
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use the EUTRA periodic report.

- Inactive: The EUTRA periodic report is not used.
- Active: The EUTRA periodic report is used.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY The quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering con-

dition for the EUTRA periodic report. Either RSRP or RSRQ is
assigned.

the EUTRA periodic report. It can be the same value as the trig-
ger quantity or be set to include both of the RSRP and RSRQ
values.

report for the EUTRA periodic report.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for the EUTRA

periodic report.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the EUTRA periodic

report.

C2079 RETRIEVE UTRAB1 CRITERIA INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-B1CNF: [CELL_NUM], [PURPOSE];
Command Description
Retrieves the UTRA B1 criteria. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameters are entered, the
information only for the UTRAN B1 event report registered to the corresponding E-UTRAN
served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN B1 event reports is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using UTRA Event B1 ci_B1PurposeANR_Spe NONE ci_B1Pu
information. It is currently used for the SON cific/ rposeA
ANR function. ci_B1PurposeSpare_1/ NR_Spe
- ci_B1PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR. ci_B1PurposeSpare_2/ cific
- ci_B1PurposeSpare_1: Reserved.

PURPOSE The purpose for using UTRA Event B1 information. It is cur-

rently used for the SON ANR function.
- ci_B1PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR.
ACTIVE_STATE Whether to use UTRA Event B1.

- Inactive: UTRA Event B1 is not used.
- Active: UTRA Event B1 is used.
B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_RSCP UTRA RSCP threshold used in the Inter-RAT measurement

Command Description
report triggering condition for the UTRA Event B1.
B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_EC_NO UTRA EcNO threshold used in the Inter-RAT measurement

HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave condition of UTRA Event

B1.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for UTRA Event B1. The timeToTrigger

value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger
a measurement report.

report for UTRA Event B1.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for UTRA

Event B1.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for UTRA Event B1.

C2080 RETRIEVE UTRAB2 CRITERIA INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-B2CNF: [CELL_NUM], [PURPOSE];
Command Description
Retrieves the UTRA B2 criteria. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameters are entered, the
information only for the UTRAN B2 event report registered to the corresponding E-UTRAN
served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN B2 event reports is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA Event B2 ci_B2PurposeInterRatH NONE ci_B2Pu
information. It is currently used for the Inter- andover/ rposeIn-
RAT handover function. ci_B2PurposeSpare_1/ ter-
- ci_B2PurposeInterRatHandover: For ci_B2PurposeSpare_2/ RatHan
inter-RAT handover. dover

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA Event B2 information. It is

currently used for the Inter-RAT handover function.
- ci_B2PurposeInterRatHandover: For inter-RAT handover.


Command Description
B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRP RSRP threshold1 value used in the EUTRA measurement

B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRQ RSRQ threshold1 value used in the EUTRA measurement

B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_RSCP UTRA RSCP threshold2 value used in the Inter-RAT measure-

ment report triggering condition for the Event B2.
B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_EC_NO UTRA EcNO threshold2 value used in the Inter-RAT measure-

HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave condition of the UTRA

Event B2.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for the UTRA Event B2. The timeToTrig-
ger value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to
trigger a measurement report.

report for the UTRA Event B2.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for the UTRA

Event B2.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the UTRA Event B2.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY_EUTRA The EUTRA quantity used to calculate a triggering condition

for the UTRA Event B2.
- ci_rsrp: RSRP.
- ci_rsrq: RSRQ.

C2081 RETRIEVE UTRA PERIOD CRITERIA

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-PRD: [CELL_NUM], [PURPOSE];
Command Description
Retrieves the UTRA periodic criteria. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameters are
entered, the information only for the UTRAN periodic report registered to the corresponding E-
UTRAN served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN periodic reports is
retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA periodic ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos NONE ci_RatP
report. It is currently used for ReportStron- eReportStrongestCells/ eriodi-
gestCells(ICIC), ReportStrongestCellsFor- ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos calPur-
SON and ReportCGI functions. eReportStrongestCells- poseRe
- ForSON/ port-
ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestC ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos Stron-
ells: ICIC. eReportCGI/ gestCell
- s
ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestC
ellsForSON: SON.
- ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportCGI: CGI.

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA periodic report. It is currently
used for ReportStrongestCells(ICIC), ReportStrongestCellsFor-
SON and ReportCGI functions.
- ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.
- ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCellsForSON: SON.

Command Description

- Inactive: The UTRA periodic report is not used.
- Active: The UTRA periodic report is used.

report for the UTRA periodic report.

periodic report.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the UTRA periodic

report.

C2088 RETRIEVE QUANTITY CONFIG EUTRA
Command Format
RTRV-QUANT-EUTRA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves quantity settings for EUTRA measurement. The eNB sends coefficient values to be
used in EUTRA measurement to UE, which, in turn, applies the values for EUTRA cell mea-
surement.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

RSRP_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA RSRP.
RSRQ_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA RSRQ.

Command Description
C2089 RETRIEVE QUANTITY CONFIG UTRA
Command Format
RTRV-QUANT-UTRA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves quantity settings for UTRA FDD/TDD measurement. The eNB sends coefficient val-
ues to be used in UTRA measurement to UE, which, in turn, applies the values for UTRA TDD/
FDD cell measurement.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_FDD The measurement quantity information used for UTRA FDD

measurement. Enter this parameter to either cpich_RSCP or
cpich_EcN0.
MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_TDD The measurement quantity information used for UTRA FDD

measurement. This parameter can have only one value:
pccpch_RSCP.
UTRA_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA.

C2095 RETRIEVE UTRA RESELECT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-RESEL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the UTRAN FA reselection information. If the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parame-
ters are entered, the information only for the UTRAN FA reselection registered to the corre-
sponding E-UTRAN served cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN FA
reselections is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

T_RESELECTION UTRAN FA Reselection timer value. The duration is in sec-

onds.
SF_USAGE Whether to use the scaling factors related to UTRAN FA rese-

lection.
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM The medium timer value of the scaling factors related to

UTRAN FA reselection.

Command Description
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH The high timer value of the scaling factors related to UTRAN
FA reselection.

C2097 RETRIEVE ROHC INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-ROHC-INF: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves the Robust Header Compression (ROHC) protocol. The information retrieved includes
whether ROHC is run for each QoS class and the supported profile types. If a QoS class is not
specified, the entire information on 256 QoS classes is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

ROHC_SUPPORT Whether to support the ROHC.

- False: ROHC is not used (default).
- True: ROHC is used.
MAX_CONTEXT_SESSION The maximum number of ROHC context sessions supported per

call.
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs2: Up to 2 sessions per call are
supported.
supported.
supported.

Command Description
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs12: Supports up to 12 sessions per
call are supported.

supported (default).
supported.
supported.
supported.
supported.
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs128: Up to 128 sessions per call
are supported.
are supported.
are supported.
are supported.
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs16384: Up to 16384 sessions per
call are supported.
PROFILE0001 Whether to support the profile0001 (RTP/UDP/IP).

- False: The profile0001 is not supported.
- True: The profile0001 is supported (default).
PROFILE0002 Whether to support the profile0002 (UDP/IP).

- False: The profile0002 is not supported (default).
- True: The profile0002 is supported.
PROFILE0003 Whether to support the profile0003 (ESP/IP).

PROFILE0004 Whether to support the profile0004 (IP).

PROFILE0006 Whether to support the profile0006 (TCP/IP).







Command Description
C2098 RETRIEVE SECURITY INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SECU-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the current preferred integrity protection and the ciphering algorithm of the eNB.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

INTEGRITY_EA_PRIOR The integrity protection algorithm supported by the eNB.
- EIA0: NULL.
- EIA1: SNOW 3G.
- EIA2: AES.
CIPHER_EA_PRIOR The ciphering algorithm supported by the eNB.

- EEA0: NULL.
- EEA1: SNOW 3G.
- EEA2: AES.

C2100 RETRIEVE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-NBR-ENB: [NBR_ENB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves information on the neighboring eNB to the eNB. If the index parameter of the neigh-
boring eNB is entered, the information for a certain neighboring eNB is retrieved, If not, the
information for all neighboring eNBs is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
NBR_ENB_INDEX Index of the neighboring eNB. The value 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
entered when registering the neighboring
eNB is used.

NBR_ENB_INDEX Index of the neighboring eNB. The value entered when register-
ing the neighboring eNB is used.
STATUS The validity of the neighboring eNB information.

- EQUIP: Valid ID.
NO_X2 Whether to make X2 connection to the neighboring eNB.

- False: X2 connection with the neighboring eNB is made.
- True: X2 connection to the neighboring eNB is not made.
NO_HO Whether to perform handover to the neighboring eNB.

- False: Handover to the neighboring eNB is performed.
- True: Handover to the neighboring eNB is not performed.

Command Description
ENB_ID The eNB ID represents the neighboring eNB. If the enbType

value is macro eNB, 20 bit of the value is eNB ID. If the enb-
Type value is home eNB, 28 bit of the value is eNB ID.
ENB_TYPE eNB type of the neighboring eNB.

- ci_Macro_eNB: Indicates the macro eNB.
- ci_Home_eNB: Indicates the home eNB.
ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) that represents the neighboring

eNB. It is a three-digit number with each digit being from 0 to
9.
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) that represents the neighboring

eNB. It is a three-digit or two-digit number with each digit
being from 0 to 9.
IP_VER The IP version, which is the IP address of the neighboring eNB.
NBR_ENB_IPV4 Enter the IP address of the neighboring eNB in the IP version 4

format.

format.
SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_IPV4 Enter the secondary IP address of the neighboring eNB in the IP

version 4 format.

version 6 format.
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE This parameter defines Neighbor eNB Link Status
OWNER_TYPE This parameter defines how NRT is updated, This filed can be
classfied Initial NRT / ANR by Server/ ANR by UE / Created
by User Command/CreatedByUserUI.
REMOTE_FLAG This parameter defines the target eNB is managed local EMS or
other EMS

C2102 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-NBR-UTRAN: [CELL_NUM], [RELATION_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieves information on UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. If the CELL_NUM and
RELATION_INDEX parameters are entered, the information for a certain UTRAN neighboring
cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN neighboring cells is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

RELATION_IDX Database index of UTRAN neighboring 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
cell.

RELATION_IDX Database index of UTRAN neighboring cell.
STATUS The validity of the UTRAN neighboring cell information.

- N_EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell information is invalid
ID.
- EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell information is valid ID.
C_ID CID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
LAC The location area code of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
RAC The routing area code of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.

Command Description
MCC0 The broadcast PLMN list information (MCC) of UTRAN

neighboring cell to the eNB. It is a three-digit number with each
digit being from 0 to 9.
MNC0 The broadcast PLMN list information (MNC) of UTRAN

neighboring cell to the eNB. It is a three-digit or two-digit num-
ber with each digit being from 0 to 9.











DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex type of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.

P_SCM_CODE The primary scramble code of UTRAN neighboring cell to the

eNB, which needs only for FDD.
CELL_PARA_ID The cell parameter ID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB,

which needs only for TDD.
ARFCN_UL The uplink absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN)

of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
ARFCN_DL The downlink absolute radio frequency channel number

(ARFCN) of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
IS_REMOVE_ALLOWED Whether to delete a certain neighboring cell to the eNB using

the ANR (Automatic Neighbor Relation) function.
- True: The neighboring cell can be deleted.
- False: The neighboring cell cannot be deleted.
IS_HOALLOWED Whether to perform handover to UTRAN neighboring cell.

- True: Handover is allowed.
- False: Handover is not allowed.
RIM_STATUS This parameter shown RIM Association Status
VOIP_INCAPABLE Whether to support VoIp of UTRAN neighboring cell.

- True: VoIP is support.
- False: VoIP is not supported.
RIM_SUPPORT Whether to support RIM Procedure of UTRAN neighbor cell.

- False : RIM is not support.
- True : RIM is support.

Command Description

HIGH_PRIORITY_FOR_CSFB Whether to decide CSFB_Hysteresis application availability

about CSFB with PS HO

C2105 RETRIEVE MME CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-MME-CONF: [MME_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves MME-related parameters. The information retrieved includes MME Equip, active
State indicating whether S1 is used, MME IP, and secondary MME IP.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
Since there are a total of 16 MMEs that
can be connected to an eNB, the index
range is 0 to 15.

MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. Since there are a total
of 16 MMEs that can be connected to an eNB, the index range
is 0 to 15.
STATUS The EQUIP status information on the MME.

- N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist (default).
- EQUIP: The MME to connect exists.
ACTIVE_STATE The state information on the specified MME in operation. Of

the MMEs for which the S1 Setup is established, if there is an
undesired MME, this parameter value must be changed to Inac-
tive. The default is active. If the STATUS parameter is set to
Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to inactive.
- Active: MME (S1 assigned) is used.
- Inactive: MME (S1 assigned) is not used.
IP_VER The IP address version of the MME. Either IPv4 or IPv6 is

Command Description
assigned.
MME_IPV4 Information on the IPV4 address of the MME. This parameter

value is valid only if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4. It is
not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6.
MME_IPV6 Information on the IPV6 address of the eNB. This parameter

ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The status of the MME link.

- locked: A state where active calls connected to the MME are
all dropped, and new call connections are not possible.
- unlocked: Connection to the MME is normal.
- shutting down: A state where active calls connected to the
MME are maintained, but new call connections are not possi-
ble.
SECONDARY_MME_IPV4 The secondary IP address of the IPv4 type set in the MME node
to support the SCTP Multi Homing function. It is valid only if
the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4.

C2106 RETRIEVE SON FUNCTION CELL CON-

TROL FLAGS
Command Format
RTRV-SONFN-CELL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the flag for the SON function controlled by the cell. There can be 3 operation modes,
which are Function Off, Manual Apply and Auto Apply or 2 operation modes, which are Func-
tion Off and Auto Apply.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

ANR_ENABLE Controls SON ANR in 3 modes.

- sonFuncOff: The ANR function is disabled except for the NR
deletion (X2-based).
- sonManualApply: The NR adding and NR ranking are per-
formed automatically. The management of HO Black List and
NR deletion are performed manually.
- sonAutoApply: The NR adding and NR ranking, managing
HO Black List, NR deleting, and NR adding are performed
automatically.
INTER_RAT_ANR_ENABLE_UTRANControls SON Inter-RAT ANR for URTAN (WCDMA).

- sonFuncOff: The Inter-RAT ANR function is disabled.
-sonManualApply: The NR Adding is performed automati-
cally.

Command Description
- sonAutoApply: The NR Adding is performed automatically.
MOBILITY_ROBUSTNESS_ENABLEWhether to enable the Mobility Robustness Optimized func-

tion (one of the SON functions).
- OFF: The function is turned off.
- Manual Apply: When the parameter value is changed by an
algorithm, this change is reported tot he the LSN and then the
operator determines manually whether to apply the changed
parameter value.
- Auto Apply: When the parameter value is changed by an
algorithm, this change is applied automatically.
MOBILITY_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Mobility-based Load Balance

function, (one of the SON functions).
BLANKING_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Blanking Load Balance function,

(one of the SON functions).
RACH_OPT_ENABLE Whether to enable the Rach Optimized function (one of the

SON functions).
parameter value.
PICO_SUBBAND_BLANKING_ENABLEWhether to enable the Pico Subband Load Balancing

IDLE_MODE_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Idle Mode Load Balancing func-

tion.
SON_SRS_FUNC_ENABLE Whether to enable the SRS SON function, (one of the SON
functions).

Command Description
C2107 RETRIEVE SON DL ICIC PARAMETERS
Command Format
RTRV-SON-DLICIC: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information on parameters related to Downlink Inter-Cell Interference Cancellation
(DL ICIC). It is defined as one of the scheduler functions of the eNB system. It is set as a sepa-
rate flag unlike other SON functions. Manual Apply is disabled.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CELL_NUM cell index (number) 0~8 NONE 0

CELL_NUM cell index (number)
DL_ICIC_TYPE The DL ICIC type is specified.

- sonIcicDlNone: The DL ICIC function is not performed. The
UE performs the power control function with fixed conditions.
- sonIcicDlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC function is per-
formed. The system calculates the conditions based on the UE
location for performing the power control function.

C2108 RETRIEVE SON UL ICIC PARAMETERS
Command Format
RTRV-SON-ULICIC: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information on parameters related to Uplink Inter-Cell Interference Cancellation (UL
ICIC). It is defined as one of the scheduler functions of the eNB system. It is set as a separate
flag unlike other SON functions. Manual Apply is disabled.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

UL_ICIC_TYPE The UL ICIC type is specified.

- sonIcicUlNone: The UL ICIC function is not performed. The
UE performs the power control function with the specified con-
ditions.
- sonIcicUlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC function is per-
formed. The system suggests various conditions based on the
UE location. Then, the UE uses the suggested conditions for
performing the power control function.

Command Description
C2112 RETRIEVE SON MRO
Command Format
RTRV-SON-MRO;
Command Description
Retrieves the parameters used in the SON MRO (Mobility Robustness Optimization) function.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. The timer (a unit of
one_day/one_week, by default/one_month) used to trigger the
handover parameter control.
- one_day: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 day.
- one_week: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 week.

- one_month: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics
collected for 1 month.
T_PERIOD_TEMP The period of fallback statistics monitoring. This value

(one_hour/one_day/one_week, default=one_week) is used for
checking a fault where HandoverSuccessKPI is not temporarily
met after the RACH parameter is changed.
- one_hour: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics
collected for 1 hour.
- one_day: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics
collected for 1 day.
- one_week: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics
collected for 1 week.
HANDOVER_SUCCESS_KPI The threshold related to the handover success KPI to trigger

MRO algorithm. The MRO algorithm is triggered if the hando-

ver success rate is lower than this threshold.
N_HANDOVER_THRESH The threshold to the number of handover attempts to trigger

MRO algorithm. The MRO algorithm is triggered if the number
of handover attempts collected during the statistics period is
lower than this threshold.
OFFSET_MAX The maximum value allowable for HO margin which is equal to

A3Offset - CIO. If and only if the value of A3Offset - CIO is
lower than this maximum value, it is valid ID.
OFFSET_MIN The minimum value allowable for HO margin which is equal to

higher than this minimum value, it is valid ID.

Command Description
C2113 RETRIEVE CLOCK CONTROL INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-CLOCK-CTRL: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves information required for Modem/DSP clock settings (advance/retard). A period of
time for the eNB to transmit/receive DU signals changes according to the value entered in the
clock advance/retard parameter. The value for UL timing advance in UE decreases if increasing
the clock advance/retard without changing the RU setting.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

CLOCK_ADVANCE The clock advance value in ns.
CLOCK_RETARD The clock retard value in ns.

C2114 RETRIEVE QCI BH BW INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-BHBW-QCI: [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves parameter information for backhaul Call Admission Control (CAC) per QoS Class
Identifier (QCI) enabled in the eNB. Backhaul-based CAC is enabled per QCI or service group
on GBR bearers. Retrieves thresholds to enable backhaul-based CAC per QCI.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_NORMALThe total backhaul bandwidth in percent that can be

assigned to the downlink per QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for
normal calls. When a normal call is requested, if the downlink
usage exceeds the input parameter value, the Backhaul Band-
width CAC Fail is generated.
BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HOThe total backhaul bandwidth in percent that can be

urgent and handover calls. When emergency and handover calls
are requested, if the downlink usage exceeds the input parame-
ter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

Command Description
BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_NORMALThe total backhaul bandwidth in percent that can be

assigned to the uplink per QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for nor-
mal calls. When a normal call is requested, if the uplink usage
exceeds the input parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth
BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HOThe total backhaul bandwidth in percent that can be

assigned to the uplink per QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for urgent
and handover calls. When emergency and handover calls are
requested, if the uplink usage exceeds the input parameter
value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.
OVER_BOOKING_RATIO The ratio of over-booking with downlink and uplink thresholds

when executing backhaul-based CAC per QoS Class Identifier
(QCI).

C2115 RETRIEVE SCTP PARAMETER
Command Format
RTRV-SCTP-PARA;
Command Description
Retrieves SCTP-related parameters. The retrieved information is necessary for SCTP to estab-
lish/maintain connections with a peer.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

MME_FAILOVER_TIMER The timer to maintain the call connected to the MME if the
SCTP returns to normal within a specified time (mmeFailover-
Timer) after the MME SCTP is disconnected in seconds.
HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL The transmission interval of the HeartBeat message to be sent

to verify the normality of the SCTP Link in milliseconds.
NUM_PATH_RE_TX The number of times to re-send heartbeat messages in order to

check whether the SCTP link is normal. The SCTP link is dis-
connected if responses to the heartbeats are not received during
specified (numPathReTx) attempts.
RTO_INITIAL The threshold used to calculate the SCTP round-trip time

(RTT). It is an initial value of Retransmission Time-Out used
before the RTT by packet transmission is measured.
RTO_MIN The minimum value of Retransmission Time-Out used to calcu-

late the SCTP RTT.
RTO_MAX The maximum value of Retransmission Time-Out used to cal-

culate the SCTP RTT.

Command Description
CONNECT_INTERVAL The timer to establish connections periodically when the SCTP

link is not currently established while the peer node is EQUIP
in PLD in seconds.

C2116 RETRIEVE SVC GRP BH BW INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-BHBW-SVCGR: [SERVICE_GROUP];
Command Description
Retrieves parameter information for backhaul Call Admission Control (CAC) per service group
enabled in the eNB. Backhaul-based CAC is enabled per QCI or service group on GBR bearers.
Retrieves thresholds to enable backhaul-based CAC per service group.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
SERVICE_GROU Service group. voipService/videoSer- NONE voipSer
P - voipService: Service group that uses vice/ vice
the Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
service.
- videoService: Service group that uses
the video service.

SERVICE_GROUP Service group.
- voipService: Service group that uses the Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) service.
- videoService: Service group that uses the video service.

assigned to the downlink per service group for normal calls.
When a normal call is requested, if the downlink usage exceeds
the input parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is
generated.

assigned to the downlink per service group for urgent and han-

Command Description
dover calls. When emergency and handover calls are requested,

if the downlink usage exceeds the input parameter value, the
Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

assigned to the uplink per service group for normal calls. When
a normal call is requested, if the uplink usage exceeds the input
parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is gener-
ated.

assigned to the uplink per service group for urgent and hando-
ver calls. When emergency and handover calls are requested, if
the uplink usage exceeds the input parameter value, the Back-
haul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

when operating backhaul-based CAC per service group.

C2117 RETRIEVE SON SELF OPTIMIZATION

PARAMETERS
Command Format
RTRV-SON-SO;
Command Description
Retrieves parameter information on the SON self-optimization. The following functions are
related to the parameters that can be retrieved:.
-RRH Optic Delay Compensation measures RRH-specific optical delay when initially installing
RRH or if an optical delay change occurs and calculates Tx and Rx time buffer by a formula.
The calculated time buffer is sent to the RRH for RRH delay compensation. The TX_TBMAX
and RX_TBMAX values that can be changed by using this command are necessary to calculate
the time buffer.
- Related commands The operation of RRH optic delay compensation is determined by the
DELAY_COMPENSATION_ENABLE parameter value of the CHG-SONFN-ENB command.
If the value is sonFuncOff, compensation is disabled. If the value is sonAutoApply, compensa-
tion is enabled. The TX_TBMAX and RX_TBMAX parameters can be changed with CHG-
SON-SO command.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

TX_TBMAX Tx Time Buffer Maximum value. The value that can be set by
using the maximum delay that occurs from DU to RRH.
Assuming the maximum distanced between DU and RRH is
d_max (km), the maximum DL CPRI hopping delay is h_max
(ns), the maximum number of RRHs that can be cascaded is
N_max, and the maximum Tx processing delay is PD_max,
TX_TBMAX can be calculated using the following formula.
However, this formula is based on the basic concept of Max
Timer buffer, and thus can be changed due to various factors in
an actual network design. TX_TBMAX (ns) = 5000 * d_max +
(N_max-1) * h_max + PD_max

Command Description
RX_TBMAX The maximum Tx Time Buffer value. The value that can be set
by using the maximum delay that occurs from DU to RRH.
d_max (km), the maximum UL CPRI hopping delay is h_max
an actual network design. RX_TBMAX (ns) = 5000 * d_max +

C2120 CHANGE ENB INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-ENB-INF: [BH_LINK_CAPACITY], [DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT];
Command Description
Changes the eNB's default information. Defaults except the backhaul capacity and SCTP Port
cannot be changed during operation since they are entered when the eNB is established.
TIMEOUT 10

BH_LINK_CAP Total backhaul link capacity of the eNB (in 0 ~ 10000000 Kbps 100000
ACITY Kbps, 0-10G, default 1G). 0
DL_CRS_POR This parameter defines Downlink CRS Port ci_n1CrsPortCnt/ NONE ci_n2Cr
T_COUNT Count ci_n2CrsPortCnt/ sPort-
ci_n4CrsPortCnt/ Cnt

ENB_TYPE This parameter defines eNB Type ( Macro eNB(0). Home
eNB(1) )
ENB_MCC This parameter defines the Representative PMNN's MCC infor-

mation
ENB_MNC This parameter defines the Representative PMNN's MNC infor-

mation
ENB_ID This parameter defines eNB ID ( Macro eNB : BIT

STRING(20), Home eNB : BIT STRING(28) )
SCTP_PORT_NUM_S1 The port number to be used in SCTP association configuration

for S1AP with the MME. (The port number is fixed at 36412.
SCTP association is possible only when the port value is the
same as SCTP of the MME.)

Command Description
SCTP_PORT_NUM_X2 The port number to be used in SCTP association configuration

for X2AP with the neighbor eNB. (The port number is fixed at
36422. SCTP association is possible only when the port value is
the same as SCTP of the neighbor eNB.)
BH_LINK_CAPACITY Total backhaul link capacity of the eNB (in Kbps, 0-10G,
default 1G).
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter defines Downlink CRS Port Count

C2121 CHANGE HANDOVER OPTION INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-HO-OPT: [ERAB_INTERACTION], [USED_NBR_LIST], [UPLINK_FORWARD],
[NUM_OF_ENB], [RIM_ENABLE], [MME_SELECT_FACTOR_FOR_RIM];
Command Description
Changes handover information. The user can retrieve the E-RAB iteration method set in the
eNB, whether to include neighboring cell list (NCL), and whether to forward uplink data in the
target eNB.
TIMEOUT 10

ERAB_INTERA Prioritization information when contention 0~1 NONE 1
CTION occurs between E-RAB and handover pro-
cedures.
- 0: Performs handover first (Handover
Prior).
- 1: Performs E-RAB procedures (ERAB
Prior).
USED_NBR_LI The method for providing the neighboring 0~1 NONE 0
ST cell list included in MeasObjectEUTRA of
the RRC Connection Reconfiguration mes-
sage.
- 0: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is
not dB0 are only included in the list (by
algorithm).
- 1: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is
dB0 are also included in the list (force-
used).
UPLINK_FORW Whether to forward uplink data in the target 0~1 NONE 1
ARD base station during handover.
- 0: Uplink data forwarding is disabled.
- 1: Uplink data forwarding is enabled.
NUM_OF_ENB The number of target base stations for 1~4 NONE 1

multi-target preparation during handover.
The maximum of 4 eNBs can be prepared.
If the value entered is 1, the multi-target
preparation is not executed.
RIM_ENABLE Whether to RIM procedure decision. False/True/ NONE False

Command Description

MME_SELECT This parameter is MME Selection Factor for 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
_FACTOR_FO RIM Procedure.
R_RIM

ERAB_INTERACTION Prioritization information when contention occurs between E-
RAB and handover procedures.
- 0: Performs handover first (Handover Prior).
- 1: Performs E-RAB procedures (ERAB Prior).
USED_NBR_LIST The method for providing the neighboring cell list included in
MeasObjectEUTRA of the RRC Connection Reconfiguration
message.
- 0: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is not dB0 are only
included in the list (by algorithm).
- 1: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is dB0 are also
included in the list (force-used).
UPLINK_FORWARD Whether to forward uplink data in the target base station during
handover.
NUM_OF_ENB The number of target base stations for multi-target preparation

during handover. The maximum of 4 eNBs can be prepared. If
the value entered is 1, the multi-target preparation is not exe-
cuted.
RIM_ENABLE Whether to RIM procedure decision.
MME_SELECT_FACTOR_FOR_RIMThis parameter is MME Selection Factor for RIM Procedure.

C2122 CHANGE TIMER INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-TIMER-INF: [RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP], [RRC_CONNECTION_RECONFIG],
[RRC_CONNECTION_RE_ESTABLISH], [RRC_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND],
[RRC_UE_CAPABILITY_ENQUIRY], [RRC_CONNECTION_RELEASE],
[RRC_HANDOVER_PREPARATION], [RRC_UE_INFORMATION_REQUEST], [S1_SETUP],
[S1_UPDATE], [S1_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT], [S1_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT],
[S1_INITIAL_CONTEXT_SETUP], [S1_ERAB_RELEASE_INDICATION],
[S1_UE_CONTEXT_RELEASE], [S1_PATH_SWITCH], [S1_HANDOVER_PREPARATION],
[S1_RELOC_OVERALL], [S1_HANDOVER_CANCEL], [X2_SETUP], [X2_SETUP_TIME_TO_WAIT],
[X2_UPDATE], [X2_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT], [X2_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT],
[X2_HANDOVER_PREPARATION], [X2_RELOC_OVERALL], [X2_STORE_UE_CONTEXT],
[INTERNAL_RESOURCE_SETUP], [INTERNAL_RESOURCE_RELEASE],
[INTERNAL_SECURITY_CONTROL], [INTERNAL_RRC_DATA_TRANSFER],
[INTERNAL_FORWARDING_PATH_SETUP], [INTERNAL_REESTALISH_CONTROL],
[INTERNAL_BUFFER_FLUSH], [INTERNAL_DATA_TRANSFER_START],
[INTERNAL_DATA_FORWARD_END_IND], [INTERNAL_REESTABLSH_TIME_TO_WAIT],
[INTERNAL_USER_INACTIVITY], [INTERNAL_SIGNALING_INACTIVITY],
[INTERNAL_NO_WAIT_RETRY], [INTERNAL_RRC_RESET], [INTERNAL_ENB_RESET],
[INTERNAL_SOLICIT_MEASUREMENT_REPORT], [INTERNAL_RTDINFO_REQ], [RIM_RIR],
[RIM_RIAE], [INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_CHANGE], [INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_PDCP_CONTROL];
Command Description
Changes the timer values used by the ECCB blocks in the eNB. The user can change the timer
value used for exchanging messages with the UE, MME and Naver eNB, and by other ECCB
blocks when a call is set up.
TIMEOUT 10

RRC_CONNEC The time to wait for reception of the RrcCo- 10 ~ 65535 msec 1000
TION_SETUP nnectionSetupComplete message after
sending the RrcConnectionSetup mes-
TION_RECONF nnectionRecofigurationComplete message
IG after sending the RrcConnectionRecofig
TION_RE_EST nnectionReestablishmentComplete mes-
ABLISH sage after sending the
RrcConnectionReestablishment message

Command Description

RRC_SECURIT The time to wait for reception of the Securi- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
Y_MODE_COM tyModeComplete message after sending
MAND the SecurityModeCommand message from
the eNB to the UE.
RRC_UE_CAP The time to wait for reception of the UeCa- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
ABILITY_ENQU pabilityInformation message after sending
IRY the UeCapabilityEnquiry message from the
eNB to the UE.
RRC_CONNEC The time to wait for reception of the mes- 10 ~ 65535 msec 500
TION_RELEAS sage from the PDCB block confirming that
E the RrcConnectionRelease message was
successfully sent after sending it from the
eNB to the UE.
RRC_HANDOV The time to wait for reception of the RrcUL- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
ER_PREPARAT HandoverPreparationTransfer message
ION after sending the RrcHandoverFromEU-
TRAPreparationRequest message from the
eNB to the UE.
RRC_UE_INFO The time to wait for reception of the Infor- 10 ~ 65535 msec 300
RMATION_RE mationResponse message after sending
QUEST the InformationRequest message from the
eNB to the UE.
S1_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
S1SetupResponse message or the
S1SetupFailure message after sending the
S1SetupRequest from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_UPDATE The time to wait for reception of the Enb- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
ConfigurationUpdateAcknowledge mes-
sage or the
EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure message
after sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate
S1_UPDATE_R The retry count for the eNB configuration ci_CountZero/ count ci_Coun
ETRY_COUNT update procedure when the eNBConfigura- ci_CountOne/ tThree
tionUpdateFailure message is received ci_CountTwo/
from the MME or when time out occurs ci_CountThree/
after sending the eNBConfigurationUpdate ci_CountTen/
message from the eNB. ci_CountInfinity/
S1_UPDATE_TI The TimetoWait value included in MME- ci_v1s/ci_v2s/ci_v5s/ sec ci_v5s
ME_TO_WAIT ConfigurationUpdateFailure transmission. ci_v10s/ci_v20s/
ci_v60s/
S1_INITIAL_C The time to wait for reception of the Initial- 10 ~ 65535 msec 10000
ONTEXT_SET ContextSetupRequest message after send-
UP ing the InitilUE from the eNB to the MME.
S1_ERAB_REL The time to wait for reception of the ERA- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
EASE_INDICAT BReleaseCommand message after send-
ION ing the E_RABReleaseIndication from the
eNB to the MME.
S1_UE_CONT The time to wait for reception of the 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
EXT_RELEASE UEContextReleaseCommand message
after sending the UEContextReleaseRe-
quest from the eNB to the MME.


S1_PATH_SWI The time to wait for reception of the Path- 10 ~ 65535 msec 3000
TCH SwitchRequestAcknowledge message after
sending the PathSwitchReques from the
eNB to the MME.
S1_HANDOVE The time to wait for reception of the Hando- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
R_PREPARATI verCommand message after sending the
ON HandoverRequired from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_RELOC_O The time to wait for the UEContextRe- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
VERALL leaseCommand message from the MME
after the HandoverCommand message
from the eNB is received by the MME and
handover is complete.
S1_HANDOVE The time to wait for reception of the Hando- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
R_CANCEL verCancelAcknowledge message after
sending the HandoverCancel from the eNB
to the MME.
X2_SETUP The time to wait for the X2SetupResponse 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
message or the X2SetupFailure message
after sending the X2SetupRequest from the
eNB to another eNB.
X2_SETUP_TI The TimetoWait value included in the ci_v1s/ci_v2s/ci_v5s/ sec ci_v5s
ME_TO_WAIT X2SetupFailure message sent by the eNB ci_v10s/ci_v20s/
which received an X2SetupRequest mes- ci_v60s/
sage.
X2_UPDATE The time to wait for the EnbConfigura- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
tionUpdateAcknowledge message or the
EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure message
after sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate
from the eNB to another eNB set as a
neighbor.
X2_UPDATE_R The retry count for the X2 eNB configura- ci_CountZero/ count ci_Coun
ETRY_COUNT tion update procedure when the eNBCon- ci_CountOne/ tThree
figurationUpdateFailure message is ci_CountTwo/
received from the MME or when time out ci_CountThree/
occurs after sending the X2 eNBConfigura- ci_CountTen/
tionUpdate message from the eNB. ci_CountInfinity/
X2_UPDATE_TI The TimetoWait value included in ENBCon- ci_v1s/ci_v2s/ci_v5s/ sec ci_v5s
ME_TO_WAIT figurationUpdateFailure transmission (The ci_v10s/ci_v20s/
default is 5 seconds). ci_v60s/
X2_HANDOVE The time to wait for the HandoverRequest- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
R_PREPARATI Acknowledge message after sending the
ON HandoverRequest message from the
X2_RELOC_O The time to wait for the UEContextRelease 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
VERALL message from the target eNB after receiv-
ing the HandoverRequestAcknowledge
message from the target eNB and hando-
ver is complete.

Command Description

X2_STORE_UE The time during which to determine 10 ~ 65535 msec 10000
_CONTEXT whether the Handover Report message is
sent when the RLF Indication message is
received by the SON MRO (Mobility
Robustness Optimization) function.
INTERNAL_RE The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
SOURCE_SET ing the setup message to internal entities
UP (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for setting up
SOURCE_REL ing the release message to internal entities
EASE (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for releasing
INTERNAL_SE The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
CURITY_CONT ing the control message to the PDCP entity
ROL for security control inside the eNB.
INTERNAL_RR The time to wait for reception of the data 10 ~ 65535 msec 40
C_DATA_TRAN transfer confirm message from the PDCP
SFER entity after sending RrcConnectionRecon-
figuration to the UE at intra-cell handover.
INTERNAL_FO The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
RWARDING_P ing the setup message to the GTP entity for
ATH_SETUP unlink and downlink path setup at hando-
ver.
ESTALISH_CO ing the control message for controlling the
NTROL entities inside the eNB at reestablish.
INTERNAL_BU The time between buffer flush message 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
FFER_FLUSH transmission and reception of its response.
The flush message is sent to flush the buf-
fer of the PDCP entity after receiving
UEContextRelease (X2) and UEContex-
tReleaseCommand (S1) at handover.
INTERNAL_DA The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
TA_TRANSFER ing the control message notifying Hando-
_START verComplete to the target PDCP entity after
the X2, S1 handover.
INTERNAL_DA The time to wait for reception of DataFor- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
TA_FORWARD wardEndInd from the PDCP entity indicat-
_END_IND ing that data forwarding is complete after
transmitting UEContextRelease to X2 and
HandoverNotify to S1.
INTERNAL_RE The time to wait for reception of RrcRees- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
ESTABLSH_TI tablishRequest from the UE after RLF is
ME_TO_WAIT received from MACB or Max Retransmis-
sion Ind is received from RLCB.
INTERNAL_US The user inactivity time triggered by MAC 0 ~ 65535 sec 10
ER_INACTIVIT because there is no traffic at the UE
Y attached for a certain period of time.
INTERNAL_SI The signaling inactivity time triggered when 0 ~ 65535 sec 10
GNALING_INA enb has no signaling message for a certain
CTIVITY period of time.


INTERNAL_NO The time to wait for resending the message 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
_WAIT_RETRY to S1 or X2 when the failure message
received from S1 or X2 (S1SetupFailure,
X2SetupFailure,
S1EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure,
X2EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure) does
not contain timer information.
INTERNAL_RR The time to wait for multiple UEs to be 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
C_RESET released after sending the RrcConnection-
Release to the UEs at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_EN The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 2000
B_RESET ing the CallDelete message to the internal
entities for releasing the entities inside the
eNB at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_SO The time to wait for reception of the Mea- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
LICIT_MEASU surement Report message from the UE
REMENT_REP according to the Solicit Measurement
ORT Report procedure.
INTERNAL_RT The time to wait for reception of the RTDIn- 10 ~ 65535 msec 100
DINFO_REQ foCnf message after sending RTDInfoReq
to MAC for obtaining the RTD information.
RIM_RIR The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
ing MME Direct Information Transfer (RAN-
INFORMATION-REQUEST) to the MME.
RIM_RIAE The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 5000
ing MME Direct Information Transfer (RAN-
INFORMATION-APPLICATION-ERROR) to
the MME.
INTERNAL_SU The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 1000
B_CELL_CHAN ing msgCmacPhySubCellChangeCnf to
GE MAC. Only Sub Cell Type Applicable
INTERNAL_SU The time to wait for a response after send- 10 ~ 65535 msec 1000
B_CELL_PDCP ing msgCpdcpControl to PDCB. Only Sub
_CONTROL Cell Type Applicable

RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionSetupCom-
plete message after sending the RrcConnectionSetup message
RRC_CONNECTION_RECONFIG The time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionRecofigura-

tionComplete message after sending the RrcConnectionRecofig
RRC_CONNECTION_RE_ESTABLISHThe time to wait for reception of the RrcConnectionRees-

tablishmentComplete message after sending the RrcConnec-
tionReestablishment message from the eNB to the UE.

Command Description
RRC_SECURITY_MODE_COMMANDThe time to wait for reception of the SecurityModeCom-

plete message after sending the SecurityModeCommand mes-
RRC_UE_CAPABILITY_ENQUIRYThe time to wait for reception of the UeCapabilityInformation

message after sending the UeCapabilityEnquiry message from
the eNB to the UE.
RRC_CONNECTION_RELEASE The time to wait for reception of the message from the PDCB
block confirming that the RrcConnectionRelease message was
successfully sent after sending it from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_HANDOVER_PREPARATIONThe time to wait for reception of the RrcULHandoverPrepara-

tionTransfer message after sending the RrcHandoverFromEU-
TRAPreparationRequest message from the eNB to the UE.
RRC_UE_INFORMATION_REQUESTThe time to wait for reception of the InformationResponse

message after sending the InformationRequest message from
the eNB to the UE.
S1_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the S1SetupResponse message

or the S1SetupFailure message after sending the
S1SetupRequest from the eNB to the MME.
S1_UPDATE The time to wait for reception of the EnbConfigurationUp-

dateAcknowledge message or the EnbConfigurationUpdate-
Failure message after sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate
S1_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT The retry count for the eNB configuration update procedure
from the MME or when time out occurs after sending the eNB-
ConfigurationUpdate message from the eNB.
S1_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in MMEConfigurationUpdate-

Failure transmission.
S1_INITIAL_CONTEXT_SETUP The time to wait for reception of the InitialContextSetupRe-

quest message after sending the InitilUE from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_ERAB_RELEASE_INDICATIONThe time to wait for reception of the ERABReleaseCommand

message after sending the E_RABReleaseIndication from the

eNB to the MME.
S1_UE_CONTEXT_RELEASE The time to wait for reception of the UEContextReleaseCom-

mand message after sending the UEContextReleaseRequest
S1_PATH_SWITCH The time to wait for reception of the PathSwitchRequestAc-

knowledge message after sending the PathSwitchReques from
the eNB to the MME.
S1_HANDOVER_PREPARATION The time to wait for reception of the HandoverCommand mes-

sage after sending the HandoverRequired from the eNB to the
MME.
S1_RELOC_OVERALL The time to wait for the UEContextReleaseCommand message

from the MME after the HandoverCommand message from the
eNB is received by the MME and handover is complete.
S1_HANDOVER_CANCEL The time to wait for reception of the HandoverCancelAcknowl-

edge message after sending the HandoverCancel from the eNB
to the MME.
X2_SETUP The time to wait for the X2SetupResponse message or the

X2SetupFailure message after sending the X2SetupRequest
from the eNB to another eNB.
X2_SETUP_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in the X2SetupFailure message

sent by the eNB which received an X2SetupRequest message.
X2_UPDATE The time to wait for the EnbConfigurationUpdateAcknowledge

message or the EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure message after
sending the EnbConfigurationUpdate from the eNB to another
eNB set as a neighbor.
X2_UPDATE_RETRY_COUNT The retry count for the X2 eNB configuration update procedure
from the MME or when time out occurs after sending the X2
eNBConfigurationUpdate message from the eNB.
X2_UPDATE_TIME_TO_WAIT The TimetoWait value included in ENBConfigurationUpdate-

Failure transmission (The default is 5 seconds).

Command Description
X2_HANDOVER_PREPARATION The time to wait for the HandoverRequestAcknowledge mes-

sage after sending the HandoverRequest message from the
X2_RELOC_OVERALL The time to wait for the UEContextRelease message from the
target eNB after receiving the HandoverRequestAcknowledge
message from the target eNB and handover is complete.
X2_STORE_UE_CONTEXT The time during which to determine whether the Handover

Report message is sent when the RLF Indication message is
received by the SON MRO (Mobility Robustness Optimization)
function.
INTERNAL_RESOURCE_SETUP The time to wait for a response after sending the setup message
to internal entities (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for setting up
INTERNAL_RESOURCE_RELEASEThe time to wait for a response after sending the release mes-
sage to internal entities (PDCB, MACB, RLCB) for releasing
INTERNAL_SECURITY_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending the control mes-
sage to the PDCP entity for security control inside the eNB.
INTERNAL_RRC_DATA_TRANSFERThe time to wait for reception of the data transfer confirm

message from the PDCP entity after sending RrcConnectionRe-
configuration to the UE at intra-cell handover.
INTERNAL_FORWARDING_PATH_SETUPThe time to wait for a response after sending the setup

message to the GTP entity for unlink and downlink path setup
at handover.
INTERNAL_REESTALISH_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending the control

message for controlling the entities inside the eNB at reestab-
lish.
INTERNAL_BUFFER_FLUSH The time between buffer flush message transmission and recep-
tion of its response. The flush message is sent to flush the buffer
of the PDCP entity after receiving UEContextRelease (X2) and
UEContextReleaseCommand (S1) at handover.
INTERNAL_DATA_TRANSFER_STARTThe time to wait for a response after sending the control

message notifying HandoverComplete to the target PDCP entity

after the X2, S1 handover.
INTERNAL_DATA_FORWARD_END_INDThe time to wait for reception of DataForwardEndInd

from the PDCP entity indicating that data forwarding is com-
plete after transmitting UEContextRelease to X2 and Handover-
Notify to S1.
INTERNAL_REESTABLSH_TIME_TO_WAITThe time to wait for reception of RrcReestablishRe-

quest from the UE after RLF is received from MACB or Max
Retransmission Ind is received from RLCB.
INTERNAL_USER_INACTIVITY The user inactivity time triggered by MAC because there is no

traffic at the UE attached for a certain period of time.
INTERNAL_SIGNALING_INACTIVITYThe signaling inactivity time triggered when enb has no

signaling message for a certain period of time.
INTERNAL_NO_WAIT_RETRY The time to wait for resending the message to S1 or X2 when

the failure message received from S1 or X2 (S1SetupFailure,
X2SetupFailure, S1EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure,
X2EnbConfigurationUpdateFailure) does not contain timer
information.
INTERNAL_RRC_RESET The time to wait for multiple UEs to be released after sending
the RrcConnectionRelease to the UEs at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_ENB_RESET The time to wait for a response after sending the CallDelete
message to the internal entities for releasing the entities inside
the eNB at eNB reset.
INTERNAL_SOLICIT_MEASUREMENT_REPORTThe time to wait for reception of the Measure-

ment Report message from the UE according to the Solicit
Measurement Report procedure.
INTERNAL_RTDINFO_REQ The time to wait for reception of the RTDInfoCnf message after
sending RTDInfoReq to MAC for obtaining the RTD informa-
tion.
RIM_RIR The time to wait for a response after sending MME Direct
Information Transfer (RAN-INFORMATION-REQUEST) to
the MME.

Command Description
RIM_RIAE The time to wait for a response after sending MME Direct
Information Transfer (RAN-INFORMATION-APPLICATION-
ERROR) to the MME.
INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_CHANGEThe time to wait for a response after sending msgCmacPhySub-

CellChangeCnf to MAC. Only Sub Cell Type Applicable
INTERNAL_SUB_CELL_PDCP_CONTROLThe time to wait for a response after sending msgCpd-

cpControl to PDCB. Only Sub Cell Type Applicable

C2124 CHANGE EUTRAN CELL CONFIGURA-

TION IDLE
Command Format
CHG-CELL-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [PHY_CELL_ID], [CELL_TYPE], [DUPLEX_TYPE],
[DL_ANT_COUNT], [UL_ANT_COUNT], [EARFCN_DL], [EARFCN_UL], [DL_BANDWIDTH],
[UL_BANDWIDTH], [FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATOR], [GROUP_ID], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Change cell information This parameter, in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or forced-
ModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
PHY_CELL_ID Physical cell ID. It is used for UE to distin- 0 ~ 503 NONE 0
guish the cell in a wireless network, and is
also used to recover cell-specific reference
signals. It should be assigned to avoid con-
flicts between neighboring cells.
CELL_TYPE Type of cell operation. macroCell/openCell/ NONE macro-
- macroCell: Operates multiple common hybridCell/csgCell/ Cell
cells.
- openCell: Operates a single common
cell.
- hybridCell: Operates closed subscriber
group (CSG) cells as well as common
ones.
DUPLEX_TYPE Communication method for cell operation. ci_FDD/ci_TDD/ NONE ci_FDD

DL_ANT_COU Tx antenna count used by the active cell. ci_n1TxAntCnt/ NONE ci_n2Tx
NT - ci_n1TxAntCnt: 1 Tx antenna is used. ci_n2TxAntCnt/ AntCnt
- ci_n2TxAntCnt: 2 Tx antennas are used. ci_n4TxAntCnt/

Command Description

UL_ANT_COU The Rx antenna count used by the active ci_n2RxAntCnt/ NONE ci_n4Rx
NT cell. ci_n4RxAntCnt/ AntCnt
- ci_n2RxAntCnt: 2 Rx antennas are used. ci_n6RxAntCnt/
- ci_n10RxAntCnt: 10 Rx antennas are
used.
- ci_n12RxAntCnt: 12 Rx antennas are
used.
EARFCN_DL Downlink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Fre- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
quency Channel Number) used by the
EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial
Radio Access Network) system in the
active cell. The center frequency should be
changed to E-UTRA Absolute Radio Fre-
quency Channel Number (EARFCN). See
5.7.3 in 3GPP TS 36.101.
EARFCN_UL Uplink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600
Channel Number) used by the EUTRAN
(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network) system in the active cell.
The center frequency should be changed to
EARFCN. See 5.7.3 in 3GPP TS 36.101.
DL_BANDWIDT Downlink bandwidth used by the active cell. ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
H - ci_SystemBandwidth_n6: 1.4MHz band- 6/ mBand
width that uses 6 physical resource blocks. ci_SystemBandwidth_n width_n
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n15: 3MHz band- 15/ 50
width that uses 15 physical resource ci_SystemBandwidth_n
blocks. 25/
ci_SystemBandwidth_n
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n25: 5 MHz band-
50/
width using 25 physical RBs.
75/
width using 50 physical RBs. ci_SystemBandwidth_n
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n75: 15 MHz band- 100/
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n100: 20 MHz
bandwidth using 100 physical RBs.
UL_BANDWIDT Uplink bandwidth used by the active cell. ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
H - ci_SystemBandwidth_n6: 1.4MHz band- 6/ mBand
width that uses 6 physical resource blocks. ci_SystemBandwidth_n width_n
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n15: 3MHz band- 15/ 50
width that uses 15 physical resource ci_SystemBandwidth_n
blocks. 25/
50/
75/
width using 50 physical RBs. ci_SystemBandwidth_n
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n75: 15 MHz band- 100/
- ci_SystemBandwidth_n100: 20 MHz
bandwidth using 100 physical RBs.


FREQUENCY_ Frequency band indicator including the fre- 1 ~ 64 NONE 3
BAND_INDICA quency of the active cell. This information is
TOR broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
GROUP_ID This parameter defines Carrier groupId for 0 ~ 10 NONE 0
the cell
FORCED_MOD This parameter defines forced mode for False/True/ NONE False
E changed value.

PHY_CELL_ID Physical cell ID. It is used for UE to distinguish the cell in a

wireless network, and is also used to recover cell-specific refer-
ence signals. It should be assigned to avoid conflicts between
neighboring cells.
CELL_TYPE Type of cell operation.

- macroCell: Operates multiple common cells.
- openCell: Operates a single common cell.
- hybridCell: Operates closed subscriber group (CSG) cells as
well as common ones.
DUPLEX_TYPE Communication method for cell operation.

DL_ANT_COUNT Tx antenna count used by the active cell.

- ci_n1TxAntCnt: 1 Tx antenna is used.
UL_ANT_COUNT The Rx antenna count used by the active cell.


Command Description

ber) used by the EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial
Radio Access Network) system in the active cell. The center
frequency should be changed to E-UTRA Absolute Radio Fre-
quency Channel Number (EARFCN). See 5.7.3 in 3GPP TS
36.101.
EARFCN_UL Uplink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number)

used by the EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network) system in the active cell. The center fre-
quency should be changed to EARFCN. See 5.7.3 in 3GPP TS
36.101.
DL_BANDWIDTH Downlink bandwidth used by the active cell.

cal RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.
UL_BANDWIDTH Uplink bandwidth used by the active cell.

cal RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.
physical RBs.

FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATORFrequency band indicator including the frequency of the active

cell. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
GROUP_ID This parameter defines Carrier groupId for the cell

Command Description
C2128 CHANGE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-BLACK-LIST: CELL_NUM, BLACK_LIST_IDX, [STATUS], [PCI_TYPE], [START_PCI],
[PCI_RANGE], [EARFCN_UL], [EARFCN_DL];
Command Description
Changes the blacklist cell information for each cell in the eNB. This command can change the
information on the blacklist, which is registered in the cell by entering the cell number and
blacklist index.
TIMEOUT 10

DX
STATUS Whether tuple information is valid ID. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
- N_EQUIP: Invalid ID P
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
PCI_TYPE Physical cell ID type of the blacklist cell. ci_singlePci/ NONE ci_singl
- ci_singlePci: Single PCI. ci_rangedPci/ ePci
START_PCI The starting physical cell ID for the blacklist 0 ~ 503 NONE 0
cell.
PCI_RANGE Range from the starting physical cell ID of ci_rangePCI_n4/ NONE ci_rang
the blacklist cell. Not used if it is a single ci_rangePCI_n8/ ePCI_n
physical cell ID type. ci_rangePCI_n12/ 4
ci_rangePCI_n16/
ci_rangePCI_n24/
ci_rangePCI_n32/
ci_rangePCI_n48/
ci_rangePCI_n64/
ci_rangePCI_n84/
ci_rangePCI_n96/
ci_rangePCI_n128/
ci_rangePCI_n168/
ci_rangePCI_n252/
ci_rangePCI_n504/


EARFCN_UL Uplink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute Radio 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600
Frequency Channel Number) of the black-
list cell.
EARFCN_DL Downlink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
Radio Frequency Channel Number) of the
blacklist cell.


- EQUIP: Valid ID.




Command Description
C2129 CHANGE CELL ACCESS INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-ACS: CELL_NUM, [CELL_BARRED], [INTRA_FREQ_CELL_RESELECT],
[BARRING_CTR_USAGE];
Command Description
Changes the cell access parameters in the eNB. This information is broadcast to the UE through
SIB (System Information Block) 1.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
CELL_BARRE Whether the cell is barred. ci_barred/ci_notBarred/ NONE ci_notB
D - ci_barred: The cell is barred. arred
- ci_notBarred: The cell is not barred.
When the cell status turns to Shutdown, or
the operator sets this parameter value to
ci_barred, the cellBarred value of SIB1 is
broadcast as ci_barred.
INTRA_FREQ_ The reselection status of the intra-fre- ci_intraFreqReselect_al NONE ci_intra
CELL_RESELE quency cell if the cell selected by the UE is lowed/ FreqRe
CT barred. ci_intraFreqReselect_n select_n
- ci_intraFreqReselect_allowed: An intra- otAllowed/ otAl-
frequency cell is reselected. lowed
- ci_intraFreqReselect_notAllowed: An
intra-frequency cell is considered barred.
BARRING_CTR Whether barring control type is applied barringOff/manualCtrl/ NONE cpuSta-
_USAGE when setting the ac-BarringInfo for SIB2. cpuStatusCtrl/ tusCtrl
- barringOff : Not assigns the ac-Barring-
Info parameter.
-cpuStatusCtrl : using auto barring control
according to CPU Overlad.

CELL_BARRED Whether the cell is barred.

- ci_barred: The cell is barred.

- ci_notBarred: The cell is not barred. When the cell status
turns to Shutdown, or the operator sets this parameter value to
ci_barred, the cellBarred value of SIB1 is broadcast as
ci_barred.
INTRA_FREQ_CELL_RESELECT The reselection status of the intra-frequency cell if the cell

selected by the UE is barred.
- ci_intraFreqReselect_allowed: An intra-frequency cell is rese-
lected.
- ci_intraFreqReselect_notAllowed: An intra-frequency cell is
considered barred.
BARRING_CTR_USAGE Whether barring control type is applied when setting the ac-
BarringInfo for SIB2.
- barringOff : Not assigns the ac-BarringInfo parameter.
-cpuStatusCtrl : using auto barring control according to CPU
Overlad.

Command Description
C2130 CHANGE CELL RESELECT INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-RSEL: CELL_NUM, [Q_HYST], [Q_HYST_SFMEDIUM], [Q_HYST_SFHIGH];
Command Description
Changes information on the cell reselection parameters in the eNB. This information is broad-
cast to the UE through SIB (System Information Block) 3.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
Q_HYST Offset value added to the current serving ci_q_Hyst_dB0/ dB ci_q_Hy
cell from the cell reselection reference. ci_q_Hyst_dB1/ st_dB0
ci_q_Hyst_dB1 indicates 1dB, and ci_q_Hyst_dB2/
ci_q_Hyst_dB2 2dB. ci_q_Hyst_dB3/
ci_q_Hyst_dB4/
ci_q_Hyst_dB5/
ci_q_Hyst_dB6/
ci_q_Hyst_dB8/
ci_q_Hyst_dB10/
ci_q_Hyst_dB12/
ci_q_Hyst_dB14/
ci_q_Hyst_dB16/
ci_q_Hyst_dB18/
ci_q_Hyst_dB20/
ci_q_Hyst_dB22/
ci_q_Hyst_dB24/
Q_HYST_SFM The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst ci_Q_HystSF_dB-6/ dB ci_Q_H
EDIUM added to the current serving cell is Medium ci_Q_HystSF_dB-4/ ystSF_d
in the cell reselection condition. This ci_Q_HystSF_dB-2/ B-6
parameter, in order to apply to change, ci_Q_HystSF_dB0/
SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG
E of CHG-MOBIL-STA is set to CI_use.
Q_HYST_SFHI The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst ci_Q_HystSF_dB-6/ dB ci_Q_H
GH added to the current serving cell is High in ci_Q_HystSF_dB-4/ ystSF_d
the cell reselection condition. ci_Q_HystSF_dB-2/ B-6
ci_Q_HystSF_dB_6 indicates -6dB, and ci_Q_HystSF_dB0/
ci_Q_HystSF_dB_4 -4dB. This parameter,
in order to apply to change,
SPEED_STATE_RESEL_PARAMS_USAG
E of CHG-MOBIL-STA is set to CI_use.


Q_HYST Offset value added to the current serving cell from the cell rese-
lection reference. ci_q_Hyst_dB1 indicates 1dB, and
ci_q_Hyst_dB2 2dB.
Q_HYST_SFMEDIUM The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst added to the current
serving cell is Medium in the cell reselection condition. This
parameter, in order to apply to change,
Q_HYST_SFHIGH The value added if the UE speed in Qhyst added to the current
serving cell is High in the cell reselection condition.
ci_Q_HystSF_dB_6 indicates -6dB, and ci_Q_HystSF_dB_4 -
4dB. This parameter, in order to apply to change,

Command Description
C2131 CHANGE CELL SELECT INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-SEL: CELL_NUM, [Q_RXLEV_MIN], [Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE],
[Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET], [P_MAX_USAGE], [P_MAX], [REL9_SEL_INFO_USAGE],
[Q_QUAL_MIN], [Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE], [Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET];
Command Description
Changes the cell selection parameter in the eNB. This information is broadcast to the UE
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
Q_RXLEV_MIN The threshold added to the current mea- -70 ~ -22 dBm -64
sured cell in the cell selection condition.
Q_RXLEV_MIN The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
_OFFSET_USA cell selection condition. se
GE - CI_no_use: qRxlevminoffset value is not
added to qRxlevmin.
- CI_use: qRxlevminoffset value is added
to qRxlevmin.
Q_RXLEV_MIN The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the 1~8 NONE 3
_OFFSET cell selection condition. The range is 1-8,
where 1 indicates 2dB, and 8 indicates
P_MAX_USAG Whether UE can use the maximum power CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
E for uplink transmission in cells. se
- CI_no_use: UE uses the maximum power
according to its capability.
- CI_use: UE uses the maximum power set
in pMax.
P_MAX The value used for limiting uplink transmis- -30 ~ 33 NONE 0
sion power and calculating the compensa-
tion (see 5.2.3.2 of 3GPP TS 36.304)
parameter.


REL9_SEL_INF Whether to use Rel. 9 selectionInfo param- CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
O_USAGE eter of the cell in the eNB. se
- CI_no_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parame-
ter is not used.
- CI_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter is
used.
Q_QUAL_MIN The threshold added to the current mea- -34 ~ -3 NONE -16
sured cell in the cell selection condition.
The value is in dB.
Q_QUAL_MIN_ Whether to set the offset value added to CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
OFFSET_USA qQualMin based on the cell selection con- se
GE dition.
- CI_no_use: The qQualMinOffset value is
not added to qQualMin.
- CI_use: The qQualMinOffset value is
added to qQualMin.
Q_QUAL_MIN_ The offset value added to qQualMin in the 1~8 NONE 3
OFFSET cell selection condition. The value is in dB.

Q_RXLEV_MIN The threshold added to the current measured cell in the cell
selection condition.
Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the cell selection condi-
tion.
- CI_no_use: qRxlevminoffset value is not added to qRxlev-
min.
- CI_use: qRxlevminoffset value is added to qRxlevmin.
Q_RXLEV_MIN_OFFSET The offset value added to qRxlevmin in the cell selection condi-
tion. The range is 1-8, where 1 indicates 2dB, and 8 indicates
P_MAX_USAGE Whether UE can use the maximum power for uplink transmis-
sion in cells.
- CI_no_use: UE uses the maximum power according to its
capability.
- CI_use: UE uses the maximum power set in pMax.
P_MAX The value used for limiting uplink transmission power and cal-
culating the compensation (see 5.2.3.2 of 3GPP TS 36.304)

Command Description
parameter.
REL9_SEL_INFO_USAGE Whether to use Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter of the cell in the

eNB.
- CI_no_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter is not used.
- CI_use: Rel. 9 selectionInfo parameter is used.
Q_QUAL_MIN The threshold added to the current measured cell in the cell
selection condition. The value is in dB.
Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET_USAGE Whether to set the offset value added to qQualMin based on the
cell selection condition.
- CI_no_use: The qQualMinOffset value is not added to qQual-
Min.
- CI_use: The qQualMinOffset value is added to qQualMin.
Q_QUAL_MIN_OFFSET The offset value added to qQualMin in the cell selection condi-
tion. The value is in dB.

C2132 CHANGE CSG PCI IDLE INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CSGPCI-IDLE: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [CSG_PCIRANGE_USAGE], [PCI_TYPE],
[CSG_PCISTART], [CSG_PCIRANGE], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the PCI related to CSG (close subscriber group) of the cell. If the cell type is set to
CSG, the PCI value or the PCI range of the CSG is included in the SIB for transmission. Also, if
the cell type is set to Macro, whether to include SIB is determined by the usage. This parameter,
in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or forcedModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
CSG_PCIRAN Whether to use PCI range of the CSG cell. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
GE_USAGE - CI_no_use: The PCI range is not used. se
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of a CSG cell. Determines ci_singlePci/ NONE ci_rang
whether to use CSG PCI as a range or sin- ci_rangedPci/ edPci
gle.
- ci_singlePci: CSG PCI is used as a sin-
gle.
- ci_rangedPci: CSG PCI is used as a
range.
CSG_PCISTAR The PCI start value of the CSG cell. 0 ~ 503 NONE 420
T

Command Description

CSG_PCIRAN The PCI range of the CSG cell. The range ci_rangePCI_n4/ NONE ci_rang
GE includes the start value. ci_rangePCI_n8/ ePCI_n
ci_rangePCI_n12/ 84
ci_rangePCI_n16/
ci_rangePCI_n24/
ci_rangePCI_n32/
ci_rangePCI_n48/
ci_rangePCI_n64/
ci_rangePCI_n84/
ci_rangePCI_n96/
ci_rangePCI_n128/
ci_rangePCI_n168/
ci_rangePCI_n252/
ci_rangePCI_n504/
E changed value.

CSG_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the CSG cell.

- CI_no_use: The PCI range is not used.
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of a CSG cell. Determines whether to use CSG
PCI as a range or single.
- ci_singlePci: CSG PCI is used as a single.
- ci_rangedPci: CSG PCI is used as a range.
CSG_PCISTART The PCI start value of the CSG cell.
CSG_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the CSG cell. The range includes the start
value.

C2133 CHANGE SIB SCHEDULING INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-SIB-INF: CELL_NUM, [SIB2_PERIOD], [SIB3_PERIOD], [SIB4_PERIOD],
[SIB5_PERIOD], [SIB6_PERIOD], [SIB7_PERIOD], [SIB8_PERIOD], [SIB9_PERIOD],
[SIB10_PERIOD], [SIB11_PERIOD], [SIB12_PERIOD], [SI_WINDOW],
[WARNING_MSG_TYPE];
Command Description
Changes the System Information Block (SIB) interval of cells. SIB2-SIB12 is sent as an SI (Sys-
tem Information) message and the mapping information for SIB and SI messages of SIB2-SIB12
is included in schedulingInfoList of SIB1. Each SIB is included in its own SI message and SIBs
of the same period are mapped to the same SI message. Multiple SI messages may also be trans-
mitted in the same period. SIB2 is always mapped to the first SI message in the SI message list
of schedulingInfoList.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
SIB2_PERIOD The transmission period for the system ci_rf8/ci_rf16/ci_rf32/ NONE ci_rf16
information block type 2 of the cell in the ci_rf64/ci_rf128/
eNB. ci_rf256/ci_rf512/
- ci_rf8: 80 ms. ci_not_used/
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.

Command Description

- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
SIB5_PERIOD The transmission period for the system ci_rf8/ci_rf16/ci_rf32/ NONE ci_not_u
information block type 5 of the cell in the ci_rf64/ci_rf128/ sed
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.


- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms. ci_not_used: SIB8 is
not sent.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.

Command Description

- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
SI_WINDOW The system information window size of the ci_si_WindowLength_m NONE ci_si_Wi
cell in the eNB. Each SI message is related s1/ ndowLe
with one SI window, and does not overlap ci_si_WindowLength_m ngth_m
with SI windows of other SI messages. I.e, s2/ s20
one SI is sent in each SI window. All SI ci_si_WindowLength_m
messages have the same window size. s5/
Corresponding SI messages within the SI ci_si_WindowLength_m
window are sent repeatedly. The range is s10/
as follows:. ci_si_WindowLength_m
-ci_si_WindowLength_ms1: 1 ms. s15/
- ci_si_WindowLength_ms2: 2 ms. ci_si_WindowLength_m
- ci_si_WindowLength_ms5: 5 ms. s20/
- ci_si_WindowLength_ms10: 10 ms. ci_si_WindowLength_m
s40/
WARNING_MS This is the value of Warning Message Type etws/cmas/ NONE etws
G_TYPE

- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.

- ci_rf64: 640 ms.

- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.

Command Description
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms. ci_not_used: SIB8 is not sent.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.

- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
- ci_rf8: 80 ms.
- ci_rf16: 160 ms.
- ci_rf32: 320 ms.
- ci_rf64: 640 ms.
- ci_rf128: 1280 ms.
- ci_rf256: 2560 ms.
- ci_rf512: 5120 ms.
SI_WINDOW The system information window size of the cell in the eNB.
Each SI message is related with one SI window, and does not
overlap with SI windows of other SI messages. I.e, one SI is
sent in each SI window. All SI messages have the same window
size. Corresponding SI messages within the SI window are sent
repeatedly. The range is as follows:.
-ci_si_WindowLength_ms1: 1 ms.

Command Description
WARNING_MSG_TYPE This is the value of Warning Message Type

C2134 CHANGE MOBILITY STATE INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-MOBIL-STA: CELL_NUM, [SPEED_STATE_RE_SEL_PARS_USAGE], [T_EVALULATION],
[T_HYST_NORMAL], [N_CELL_CHANGE_MEDIUM], [N_CELL_CHANGE_HIGH];
Command Description
Changes the mobility state information. Mobility state information is changed by entering a
CELL_NUM parameter value. The following parameters are used when changing the mobility
states: speedStaeReSelParsUsage, tEvalulation, tHystNormal, nCellChangeMedium and nCell-
ChangeHigh.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
SPEED_STATE Whether to use the speedStateReselecton- CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
_RE_SEL_PAR Pars field of the cell in the eNB. se
S_USAGE - CI_no_use: The speedStateReselecton-
Pars field is not used.
- CI_use: The speedStateReselectonPars
field is used.
T_EVALULATIO The evaluation time of the cell in the eNB. ci_T_Evalulation_s30/ sec ci_T_Ev
N ci_T_Evalulation_s60/ alulation
ci_T_Evalulation_s120/ _s30
ci_T_Evalulation_s180/
ci_T_Evalulation_s240/
T_HYST_NOR The hyst normal time of the cell in the eNB. ci_T_HystNormal_s30/ sec ci_T_Hy
MAL ci_T_HystNormal_s60/ stNorma
ci_T_HystNormal_s120 l_s30
/
ci_T_HystNormal_s180
/
ci_T_HystNormal_s240
/
N_CELL_CHAN The number of cell change in medium 1 ~ 16 NONE 5
GE_MEDIUM mobility state of the cell in the eNB.
N_CELL_CHAN The number of cell change in high mobility 1 ~ 16 NONE 10
GE_HIGH state of the cell in the eNB.

Command Description

SPEED_STATE_RE_SEL_PARS_USAGEWhether to use the speedStateReselectonPars field of the

cell in the eNB.
- CI_no_use: The speedStateReselectonPars field is not used.
- CI_use: The speedStateReselectonPars field is used.
T_EVALULATION The evaluation time of the cell in the eNB.
T_HYST_NORMAL The hyst normal time of the cell in the eNB.
N_CELL_CHANGE_MEDIUM The number of cell change in medium mobility state of the cell
in the eNB.
N_CELL_CHANGE_HIGH The number of cell change in high mobility state of the cell in
the eNB.

C2135 CHANGE UE TIMER CONSTANTS INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-TIME-INF: CELL_NUM, [T300], [T301], [T302], [T304], [CCO_T304], [T310],
[T311], [T320], [N310], [N311];
Command Description
Changes the UE timer constant in the eNB. This information includes the UE-timers and con-
stants broadcasted to SIB2 and the UE-specific timer information. The timer values broadcasted
to SIB are t300, t301, t310, n310, and n311. All other values are UE-specific timer values which
are included in the RRC message.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
T300 Timer t300 of the cell in the eNB. The UE ci_t_300_ms100/ NONE ci_t_300
starts the t300 timer after sending RRC ci_t_300_ms200/ _ms200
Connection Request. When it receives the ci_t_300_ms300/
RRC Connection Setup message or the ci_t_300_ms400/
RRC Connection Reject message, the ci_t_300_ms600/
timer is cleared. When the t300 timer termi- ci_t_300_ms1000/
nates, UE resets the MAC, clears the MAC ci_t_300_ms1500/
configuration, and re-establishes the RLC. ci_t_300_ms2000/
The default is 200 ms, and can be changed
by the operator.
- ci_t_300_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms1500: 1500 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms2000: 2000 ms.

Command Description

T301 Timer t301 of the cell in the eNB. The UE ci_t_301_ms100/ NONE ci_t_301
starts the t301 timer after sending RRC ci_t_301_ms200/ _ms200
Connection Reestablishment Request. ci_t_301_ms300/
When it receives the RRC Connection ci_t_301_ms400/
Reestablishment message or the RRC ci_t_301_ms600/
Connection Reestablishment message, the ci_t_301_ms1000/
timer is cleared. When the t301 timer termi- ci_t_301_ms1500/
nates, UE becomes idle. The default is 200 ci_t_301_ms2000/
ms, and can be changed by the operator.
- ci_t_301_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1500: 1500 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T302 The timer value which starts after the UE ci_t_302_s1/ NONE ci_t_302
receives the RRC Connection Reject mes- ci_t_302_s2/ _s8
sage. The timer terminates when UE status ci_t_302_s3/
becomes RRC_Connect or a cell is rese- ci_t_302_s4/
lected. When the timer is cleared, the UE ci_t_302_s5/
treats the cell as barred and performs cell ci_t_302_s6/
reselection. The default is 8 seconds, and ci_t_302_s7/
can be changed by the operator. ci_t_302_s8/
- ci_t_302_s1: 1 second. ci_t_302_s9/
- ci_t_302_s2: 2 seconds. ci_t_302_s10/
ci_t_302_s13/
ci_t_302_s14/
ci_t_302_s15/
ci_t_302_s16/
T304 The timer started by UE after receiving ci_t_304_ms50/ NONE ci_t_304

RRC Connection Reconfiguration message ci_t_304_ms100/ _ms200
during the handover. The timer terminates ci_t_304_ms150/
when the handover to EUTRA succeeds. ci_t_304_ms200/
The default is 200 ms, and can be changed ci_t_304_ms500/
by the operator. ci_t_304_ms1000/
- ci_t_304_ms50: 50 ms. ci_t_304_ms2000/
- ci_t_304_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms150: 150 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.


CCO_T304 The timer started by UE after receiving ci_cco_t_304_ms100/ NONE ci_cco_t
Mobility From EUTRA Command message ci_cco_t_304_ms200/ _304_m
during the handover. The timer terminates ci_cco_t_304_ms500/ s1000
when the command to change the cell to ci_cco_t_304_ms1000/
inter-RAT succeeds. ci_cco_t_304_ms2000/
- ci_cco_t_304_ms100: 100 ms. ci_cco_t_304_ms4000/
- ci_cco_t_304_ms200: 200 ms. ci_cco_t_304_ms8000/
- ci_cco_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms4000: 4000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms8000: 8000 ms.
T310 The timer value which starts after the UE ci_t_310_ms0/ NONE ci_t_310
continuously receives out-of-syncIndica- ci_t_310_ms50/ _ms100
tion as much as N310. Cleared if in-sync ci_t_310_ms100/ 0
indication is received continuously as much ci_t_310_ms200/
as N311, if handover is triggered, or if the ci_t_310_ms500/
reestablishment procedure is triggered. ci_t_310_ms1000/
- ci_t_310_ms0: 0 ms. ci_t_310_ms2000/
- ci_t_310_ms50: 50 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T311 The timer started by UE when initiating a ci_t_311_ms1000/ NONE ci_t_311

reestablishment procedure. The timer is ci_t_311_ms3000/ _ms300
cleared if a suitable EUTRA cell or an inter- ci_t_311_ms5000/ 0
RAT cell is found. If the timer is cleared ci_t_311_ms10000/
without finding a suitable cell, it enters ci_t_311_ms15000/
RRC_IDLE state. ci_t_311_ms20000/
- ci_t_311_ms1000: 1000 ms. ci_t_311_ms30000/
-ci_t_311_ms3000: 3000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms5000: 5000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms10000: 10000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms15000: 15000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms20000. 20000ms.
-ci_t_311_ms30000: 30000 ms.
T320 The timer started by UE when receiving a ci_t_320_min5/ NONE ci_t_320

t320 timer value. It also starts when cell ci_t_320_min10/ _min30
reselection occurs from another RAT to ci_t_320_min20/
EUTRA, and terminates when UE status ci_t_320_min30/
becomes RRC_CONNECTED. The default ci_t_320_min60/
is 30 minutes, and can be changed by the ci_t_320_min120/
operator. ci_t_320_min180/

Command Description

N310 The maximum count of out-of-syncIndica- ci_n_310_n1/ NONE ci_n_31
tion the UE receives from lower-layer. The ci_n_310_n2/ 0_n10
default is 10, and can be changed by the ci_n_310_n3/
operator. ci_n_310_n4/
- ci_n_310_n1: 1. ci_n_310_n6/
- ci_n_310_n2: 2. ci_n_310_n8/
- ci_n_310_n3: 3. ci_n_310_n10/
- ci_n_310_n4: 4. ci_n_310_n20/
- ci_n_310_n6: 6.
- ci_n_310_n8: 8.
- ci_n_310_n10: 10.
- ci_n_310_n20: 20.
N311 The maximum count of In-syncIndication ci_n_311_n1/ NONE ci_n_31

the UE receives from lower-layer. The ci_n_311_n2/ 1_n1
default is 1, and can be changed by the ci_n_311_n3/
operator. ci_n_311_n4/
- ci_n_311_n1: 1. ci_n_311_n5/
- ci_n_311_n2: 2. ci_n_311_n6/
- ci_n_311_n3: 3. ci_n_311_n8/
- ci_n_311_n4: 4. ci_n_311_n10/
- ci_n_311_n5: 5.
- ci_n_311_n6: 6.
- ci_n_311_n8: 8.
- ci_n_311_n10: 10.

after sending RRC Connection Request. When it receives the
RRC Connection Setup message or the RRC Connection Reject
message, the timer is cleared. When the t300 timer terminates,
UE resets the MAC, clears the MAC configuration, and re-
establishes the RLC. The default is 200 ms, and can be changed
by the operator.
- ci_t_300_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms1500: 1500 ms.
- ci_t_300_ms2000: 2000 ms.

after sending RRC Connection Reestablishment Request. When

it receives the RRC Connection Reestablishment message or the
RRC Connection Reestablishment message, the timer is
cleared. When the t301 timer terminates, UE becomes idle. The
default is 200 ms, and can be changed by the operator.
- ci_t_301_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms300: 300 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms400: 400 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms600: 600 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms1500: 1500 ms.
- ci_t_301_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T302 The timer value which starts after the UE receives the RRC
Connection Reject message. The timer terminates when UE sta-
tus becomes RRC_Connect or a cell is reselected. When the
timer is cleared, the UE treats the cell as barred and performs
cell reselection. The default is 8 seconds, and can be changed
by the operator.
- ci_t_302_s1: 1 second.
T304 The timer started by UE after receiving RRC Connection

Reconfiguration message during the handover. The timer termi-
nates when the handover to EUTRA succeeds. The default is
200 ms, and can be changed by the operator.

Command Description
- ci_t_304_ms50: 50 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms150: 150 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.
CCO_T304 The timer started by UE after receiving Mobility From EUTRA

Command message during the handover. The timer terminates
when the command to change the cell to inter-RAT succeeds.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms2000: 2000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms4000: 4000 ms.
- ci_cco_t_304_ms8000: 8000 ms.
T310 The timer value which starts after the UE continuously receives
out-of-syncIndication as much as N310. Cleared if in-sync indi-
cation is received continuously as much as N311, if handover is
triggered, or if the reestablishment procedure is triggered.
- ci_t_310_ms0: 0 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms50: 50 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms100: 100 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms200: 200 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms500: 500 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms1000: 1000 ms.
- ci_t_310_ms2000: 2000 ms.
T311 The timer started by UE when initiating a reestablishment pro-

cedure. The timer is cleared if a suitable EUTRA cell or an
inter-RAT cell is found. If the timer is cleared without finding a
suitable cell, it enters RRC_IDLE state.
- ci_t_311_ms1000: 1000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms3000: 3000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms5000: 5000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms10000: 10000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms15000: 15000 ms.
-ci_t_311_ms20000. 20000ms.

-ci_t_311_ms30000: 30000 ms.
T320 The timer started by UE when receiving a t320 timer value. It

also starts when cell reselection occurs from another RAT to
EUTRA, and terminates when UE status becomes
RRC_CONNECTED. The default is 30 minutes, and can be
changed by the operator.
N310 The maximum count of out-of-syncIndication the UE receives

from lower-layer. The default is 10, and can be changed by the
operator.
- ci_n_310_n1: 1.
- ci_n_310_n2: 2.
- ci_n_310_n3: 3.
- ci_n_310_n4: 4.
- ci_n_310_n6: 6.
- ci_n_310_n8: 8.
- ci_n_310_n10: 10.
- ci_n_310_n20: 20.
N311 The maximum count of In-syncIndication the UE receives from

lower-layer. The default is 1, and can be changed by the opera-
tor.
- ci_n_311_n1: 1.
- ci_n_311_n2: 2.
- ci_n_311_n3: 3.
- ci_n_311_n4: 4.
- ci_n_311_n5: 5.
- ci_n_311_n6: 6.
- ci_n_311_n8: 8.
- ci_n_311_n10: 10.

Command Description
C2145 CHANGE CELL ACCESS IDLE INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-CAS-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [CSG_IDENTITY], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the CSG cell ID. This information is broadcast to the UE through SIB (System Infor-
mation Block) 1. This parameter, in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or forcedMo-
deFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
CSG_IDENTIT The ID of the cell. This is available only if it 0 ~ 134217727 NONE 0
Y is a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) cell.
E changed value.

CSG_IDENTITY The ID of the cell. This is available only if it is a Closed Sub-

scriber Group (CSG) cell.

C2147 CHANGE SIB SCHEDULING IDLE INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-SIB-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [MAX_PACKED_SI_SIZE], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the maximum size of the packed SI that can be sent by the cell. It can be changed only
when the cell is in the idle state. This parameter, in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or
forcedModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
MAX_PACKED The maximum size of the packed SI for 0 ~ 217 NONE 217
_SI_SIZE transmission in the cell. This value takes
into account the DL RB count by band-
width, maximum RB count allocated to
each SI message, PDSCH RE count for
each RB, payload size of DCI Format 1A,
max aggregation level and PDCCH coder-
ate. Recommend values are 9 for 1.4 MB
(i.e., mega bytes); 26 for 3 MB; 49 for 5
MB; 97 for 10 MB; 141 for 15 MB; 217 for
20 MB.
E changed value.

MAX_PACKED_SI_SIZE The maximum size of the packed SI for transmission in the cell.
This value takes into account the DL RB count by bandwidth,
maximum RB count allocated to each SI message, PDSCH RE
count for each RB, payload size of DCI Format 1A, max aggre-
gation level and PDCCH coderate. Recommend values are 9 for

Command Description
1.4 MB (i.e., mega bytes); 26 for 3 MB; 49 for 5 MB; 97 for 10

MB; 141 for 15 MB; 217 for 20 MB.

C2148 CHANGE CELL CAC FUNCTION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-CAC: CELL_NUM, [CELL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE], [MAX_CALL_COUNT],
[CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL], [CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO],
[DRB_COUNT_CAC_USAGE], [MAX_DRB_COUNT], [DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL],
[DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO], [QOS_CAC_OPTION], [QOS_POLICY_OPTION],
[PRB_REPORT_PERIOD], [ESTIMATION_OPT], [PREEMPTION_FLAG], [BH_BW_CAC_USAGE],
[BH_BW_CAC_OPTION];
Command Description
Changes the CAC (call admission control) parameter information of the cells operating within
the eNB. As cell-level CACs, backhaul based CAC, call count based CAC, DRB count based
CAC, and QoS based CAC are performed. Changes threshold, CAC option, and preemption sta-
tus for performing CAC at the cell level.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
CELL_COUNT_ Whether to execute the call count-based CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
CAC_USAGE CAC function, which is one of the capacity-
based Call Admission Control (CAC) func-
tions per cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC
function per cell is not performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC func-
tion per cell is performed.
MAX_CALL_C The call count limit in the capacity based 0 ~ 2000 NONE 2000
OUNT CAC (call admission control) at the cell
level. The number of calls that can be
CALL_CAC_TH The percentage of the allowable calls to the 0 ~ 100 % 90
RESH_FOR_N total normal calls. When a normal call is
ORMAL requested, if the number of connected calls
exceeds MAX_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL,
the Capacity-based CAC Fail is generated.

Command Description

CALL_CAC_TH Emergency call availability of total hando- 0 ~ 100 % 100
RESH_FOR_E ver calls in percentage. When a normal call
MER_HO is requested, if the number of connected
calls exceeds MAX_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO,
DRB_COUNT_ Whether to execute the E-UTRAN Radio CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
CAC_USAGE Access Bearer (E-RAB)-based CAC func-
tion, which is one of the capacity-based
Call Admission Control (CAC) functions per
cell.
- CI_no_use: The E-RAB count-based
CAC function per cell is not executed.
- CI_use: The E-RAB count-based CAC
function per cell is executed.
MAX_DRB_CO The limit for the E-RAB (E-UTRAN Radio 0 ~ 4000 NONE 4000
UNT Access Bearer) count in capacity based
CAC (call admission control) at the cell
level. The number of E-RABs (E-Utran
Radio Access Bearers) allowed in the cell.
DRB_CAC_TH The percentage of the allowable calls to the 0 ~ 100 % 90
exceeds 'MAX_DRB_COUNT *
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL', the
Capacity-based CAC Fail is generated.
DRB_CAC_TH Emergency call availability of total hando- 0 ~ 100 % 100
calls exceeds 'MAX_DRB_COUNT *
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO',
QOS_CAC_OP The policy of the QoS (Quality of Service) QoSCAC_option0/ NONE QoSCA
TION based CAC (call admission control) at the QoSCAC_option1/ C_optio
cell level. n1
- QoSCAC_option0: The QoS based CAC
function at the cell level is not used.
- QoSCAC_option1: The QoS-based CAC
function per cell is used.
QOS_POLICY_ The policy used when executing the Quality QoSPolicy_option0/ NONE QoSPoli
OPTION of Service (QoS)-based Call Admission QoSPolicy_option1/ cy_optio
Control (CAC) function per cell. n1
- QoSPolicy_option0: For a GBR bearer
newly requested, the PRB usage is calcu-
lated based on the resource type (GBR or
non-GBR) of the QCI. Then CAC is exe-
cuted based on the calculated PRB usage.
Non-GBRs are always allowed.
- QoSPolicy_option1: For a GBR bearer
newly requested, the PRB usage is calcu-
lated based on the priority of the QCI. Then
CAC is executed based on the calculated
PRB usage. Non-GBRs are always
allowed.


PRB_REPORT PRB (Physical Resource Block) report 1~5 sec 2
_PERIOD period for QoS CAC at the cell level.
ESTIMATION_ The policy of the Expected PRB usage cal- EstimationOption_auto/ NONE Estima-
OPT culation. (0: auto, 1:manual). EstimationOption_man tionOpti
- EstimationOption_auto(0) : The PRB ual/ on_auto
Usage is automatically calculated.
- EstimationOption_manual(1) : The PRB
Usage is manually calculated.
PREEMPTION_ Whether to use preemption at the cell level. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
FLAG - CI_no_use: The Preemption function per
cell is disabled.
- CI_use: The Preemption function per cell
is enabled.
BH_BW_CAC_ Whether to use backhaul bandwidth based CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
USAGE CAC at the cell level.
- CI_no_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based
CAC function per cell is not used.
- CI_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based CAC
function per cell is used.
BH_BW_CAC_ The policy used when executing the Back- bhBwCac_QCI_only/ NONE bhBwCa
OPTION haul-based Call Admission Control (CAC) bhBwCac_ServiceGrou c_Servi
function per cell. p_only/ ceGrou
- bhBwCac_QCI_only: QoS-based CAC. bhBwCac_Both_QCI_S p_only
- bhBwCac_ServiceGroup_only: Service erviceGroup/
group-based CAC.
- bhBwCac_Both_QCI_ServiceGroup:
QoS amp; Service group-based CAC.

CELL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the call count-based CAC function, which

is one of the capacity-based Call Admission Control (CAC)
functions per cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is not
performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC function per cell is per-
formed.
MAX_CALL_COUNT The call count limit in the capacity based CAC (call admission
control) at the cell level. The number of calls that can be


Command Description


DRB_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer (E-

RAB)-based CAC function, which is one of the capacity-based
Call Admission Control (CAC) functions per cell.
- CI_no_use: The E-RAB count-based CAC function per cell is
not executed.
- CI_use: The E-RAB count-based CAC function per cell is
executed.
MAX_DRB_COUNT The limit for the E-RAB (E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer)
count in capacity based CAC (call admission control) at the cell
level. The number of E-RABs (E-Utran Radio Access Bearers)
allowed in the cell.
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMALThe percentage of the allowable calls to the total normal

DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL', the Capacity-based
DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HOEmergency call availability of total handover calls in per-

DRB_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO', the Capacity-based
QOS_CAC_OPTION The policy of the QoS (Quality of Service) based CAC (call
admission control) at the cell level.
- QoSCAC_option0: The QoS based CAC function at the cell
level is not used.
- QoSCAC_option1: The QoS-based CAC function per cell is
used.

QOS_POLICY_OPTION The policy used when executing the Quality of Service (QoS)-
based Call Admission Control (CAC) function per cell.
PRB usage is calculated based on the resource type (GBR or
non-GBR) of the QCI. Then CAC is executed based on the cal-
culated PRB usage. Non-GBRs are always allowed.
PRB usage is calculated based on the priority of the QCI. Then
CAC is executed based on the calculated PRB usage. Non-
GBRs are always allowed.
PRB_REPORT_PERIOD PRB (Physical Resource Block) report period for QoS CAC at
the cell level.
ESTIMATION_OPT The policy of the Expected PRB usage calculation. (0: auto,
1:manual).
- EstimationOption_auto(0) : The PRB Usage is automatically
calculated.
- EstimationOption_manual(1) : The PRB Usage is manually
calculated.
PREEMPTION_FLAG Whether to use preemption at the cell level.

- CI_no_use: The Preemption function per cell is disabled.
- CI_use: The Preemption function per cell is enabled.
BH_BW_CAC_USAGE Whether to use backhaul bandwidth based CAC at the cell

level.
- CI_no_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based CAC function per
cell is not used.
- CI_use: Backhaul Bandwidth-based CAC function per cell is
used.
BH_BW_CAC_OPTION The policy used when executing the Backhaul-based Call

Admission Control (CAC) function per cell.
- bhBwCac_QCI_only: QoS-based CAC.
- bhBwCac_ServiceGroup_only: Service group-based CAC.
- bhBwCac_Both_QCI_ServiceGroup: QoS amp; Service
group-based CAC.

Command Description
C2149 CHANGE ENB FUNCTION
Command Format
CHG-ENB-CAC: [CALL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE], [MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT],
[CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL], [CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO],
[CHECK_UE_ID_USAGE];
Command Description
Changes the capacity based CAC (call admission control) parameter information of the eNBs in
the BS. This command performs call count based CAC at the eNB level. It also changes the
threshold information and the MAX call count information required for CAC at the eNB level.
TIMEOUT 10

CALL_COUNT_ Whether to execute the Capacity-based CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
CAC_USAGE Call Admission Control (CAC) function per
cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC
function per base station is not performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC func-
tion per base station is performed.
MAX_ENB_CA The limit for capacity based CAC (call 0 ~ 4500 NONE 4500
LL_COUNT admission control) at the eNB level. The
number of calls that can be allowed by the
eNB.
CALL_CAC_TH The percentage of the allowable calls to the 0 ~ 100 % 90
exceeds MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL,
CALL_CAC_TH Emergency call availability of total hando- 0 ~ 100 % 100
calls exceeds MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT *
CALL_CAC_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO,


CHECK_UE_ID Whether to execute the SAE Temporary CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
_USAGE Mobile Station Identifier (S-TMSI) Duplica-
tion Check function for a new call.
- CI_no_use: The S-TMSI Duplication
Check function is not performed.
- CI_use: The S-TMSI Duplication Check
function is performed. If a call is found as a
duplicate, the existing call is released and
the new call is accommodated.

CALL_COUNT_CAC_USAGE Whether to execute the Capacity-based Call Admission Control
(CAC) function per cell.
- CI_no_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base sta-
tion is not performed.
- CI_use: The capacity-based CAC function per base station is
performed.
MAX_ENB_CALL_COUNT The limit for capacity based CAC (call admission control) at the
eNB level. The number of calls that can be allowed by the eNB.


CHECK_UE_ID_USAGE Whether to execute the SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identi-

fier (S-TMSI) Duplication Check function for a new call.
- CI_no_use: The S-TMSI Duplication Check function is not
performed.
- CI_use: The S-TMSI Duplication Check function is per-
formed. If a call is found as a duplicate, the existing call is
released and the new call is accommodated.

Command Description
C2150 CHANGE QOS CAC PARAMETER FUNC-

TION
Command Format
CHG-QCAC-PARA: CELL_NUM, [DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMAL], [DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO],
[UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMAL], [UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO];
Command Description
Changes the active QoS (Quality of Service) CAC (call admission control) parameter in the
eNB. QoS CAC is performed at the cell level, for QCI of each GBR bearer. Changes the thresh-
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
DL_GBRUSAG The threshold of downlink calls that can be 0 ~ 100 % 80
E_THRESH_N assigned per cell. It is used when a new
ORMAL call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB
percentage'. When a new call is requested,
if the downlink GBR PRB usage exceeds
this parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is
generated.
DL_GBRUSAG The threshold of downlink Handover calls 0 ~ 100 % 100
E_THRESH_H that can be assigned per cell. It is used
O when a Handover call is requested. It is cal-
culated as 'PRB percentage. When a Han-
dover call is requested, if the downlink GBR
PRB usage exceeds this parameter value,
the QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UL_GBRUSAG The threshold of uplink calls that can be 0 ~ 100 % 80
E_THRESH_N assigned per cell. It is used when a new
ORMAL call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB
percentage'. When a new call is requested,
if the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this
parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is gen-
erated.


UL_GBRUSAG The threshold of uplink Handover calls that 0 ~ 100 % 100
E_THRESH_H can be assigned per cell. It is used when a
O Handover call is requested. It is calculated
as 'PRB percentage'. When a Handover
call is requested, if the uplink GBR PRB
usage exceeds this parameter value, the

DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of downlink calls that can be assigned per cell.

It is used when a new call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB
percentage'. When a new call is requested, if the downlink GBR
generated.
DL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of downlink Handover calls that can be assigned

per cell. It is used when a Handover call is requested. It is calcu-
lated as 'PRB percentage. When a Handover call is requested, if
the downlink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the
UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of uplink calls that can be assigned per cell. It

is used when a new call is requested. It is calculated as 'PRB
percentage'. When a new call is requested, if the uplink GBR
generated.
UL_GBRUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of uplink Handover calls that can be assigned per
cell. It is used when a Handover call is requested. It is calcu-
lated as 'PRB percentage'. When a Handover call is requested, if
the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the

Command Description
C2151 CHANGE SON ANR PARAMETERS
Command Format
CHG-SON-ANR: [MAX_NRTSIZE], [LSM_USAGE_FLAG], [DEFAULT_WEIGHT],
[DEFAULT_PERIOD], [HO_ATTEMPT_WEIGHT], [HO_SUCCESS_WEIGHT],
[LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE], [LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI], [UPPER_HO_TO_BLACK_RATE];
Command Description
Changes the parameter information for the SON ANR function.
TIMEOUT 10

MAX_NRTSIZE The maximum size of Neighbor Relation 1 ~ 256 NONE 256
Table (NRT) per cell. ANR manages the
ranking of NRs that are within this size. If
an added NR exceeds the size, ANR adds
the existing NR of the lowest rank to the
blacklist to limit the number of NRs to
MAX_NRTSIZE.
LSM_USAGE_ Whether to use the ECGI and IP process- False/True/ NONE True
FLAG ing procedures in the LSM during opera-
tion.
- FALSE (0): The procedures are not exe-
cuted through the LSM but are executed
through UE.
- TRUE (1): The procedures are executed
through the LSM or UE.
DEFAULT_WEI The default weight for a new neighbor rela- 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.05
GHT tion (NR). A neighboring cell newly added
has a disadvantage in both of the handover
attempt rate and the handover success
rate, when determining its priority. There-
fore, the default weight specified by this
parameter value is given to the newly
added neighboring cells during the speci-
fied period of time (DEFAULT_PERIOD).
DEFAULT_PER A period of time for which the default prior- 1 ~ 30 day 7
IOD ity is applied to a new Neighbor Relation
(NR) in a unit of day. During this period of
time, the default weight
(DEFAULT_WEIGHT) is given to the newly
added NRs and they are handled so that
they are not added to the blacklist.


HO_ATTEMPT_ The weight given to a handover attempt 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 1.0
WEIGHT rate when calculating the NR ranking. The
NR ranking is determined by default in con-
sideration of handover success and failure
rates of each neighboring cell with attempt
rates weighted.
HO_SUCCESS The weight given to the handover success 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.0
_WEIGHT rate when calculating the NR ranking. The
NR ranking is determined by default in con-
sideration of handover success and failure
rates of each neighboring cell with success
rates weighted.
LOWER_HO_A The lowest attempt rate that applies the 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.0
TTEMPT_RATE handover blacklist. NRs that fail to meet
HO KPI are added to the HO blacklist to
prevent a handover to the neighboring cell.
The NRs whose attempt rate is lower than
this parameter value, and whose success
rate is lower than
LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI are
LOWER_HO_S The lowest success rate that applies the 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.0
UCCESS_TO_ handover blacklist. NRs that fail to meet
KPI HO KPI are added to the HO blacklist to
prevent a handover to the neighboring cell.
The NRs whose success rate is lower than
the HO KPI multiplied by this parameter
LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE are
UPPER_HO_T The upper limit of the handover attempt 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.1
O_BLACK_RAT rate to the black cell to be deleted from the
E blacklist. During handover from cell A to
cell B, if the handover to wrong cell event
occurs and the frequency of reconnecting
to neighboring cells managed by the black-
list exceeds this parameter, the NR is
returned to NRT from the blacklist.

MAX_NRTSIZE The maximum size of Neighbor Relation Table (NRT) per cell.
ANR manages the ranking of NRs that are within this size. If an
added NR exceeds the size, ANR adds the existing NR of the
lowest rank to the blacklist to limit the number of NRs to
MAX_NRTSIZE.
LSM_USAGE_FLAG Whether to use the ECGI and IP processing procedures in the

LSM during operation.
- FALSE (0): The procedures are not executed through the
LSM but are executed through UE.

Command Description
- TRUE (1): The procedures are executed through the LSM or

UE.
DEFAULT_WEIGHT The default weight for a new neighbor relation (NR). A neigh-
boring cell newly added has a disadvantage in both of the han-
dover attempt rate and the handover success rate, when
determining its priority. Therefore, the default weight specified
by this parameter value is given to the newly added neighboring
cells during the specified period of time (DEFAULT_PERIOD).
DEFAULT_PERIOD A period of time for which the default priority is applied to a

new Neighbor Relation (NR) in a unit of day. During this period
of time, the default weight (DEFAULT_WEIGHT) is given to
the newly added NRs and they are handled so that they are not
added to the blacklist.
HO_ATTEMPT_WEIGHT The weight given to a handover attempt rate when calculating

neighboring cell with attempt rates weighted.
HO_SUCCESS_WEIGHT The weight given to the handover success rate when calculating
neighboring cell with success rates weighted.
LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE The lowest attempt rate that applies the handover blacklist. NRs
vent a handover to the neighboring cell. The NRs whose
attempt rate is lower than this parameter value, and whose suc-
cess rate is lower than LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI are
LOWER_HO_SUCCESS_TO_KPI The lowest success rate that applies the handover blacklist. NRs
vent a handover to the neighboring cell. The NRs whose suc-
cess rate is lower than the HO KPI multiplied by this parameter
LOWER_HO_ATTEMPT_RATE are included in the handover
blacklist.

UPPER_HO_TO_BLACK_RATE The upper limit of the handover attempt rate to the black cell to
be deleted from the blacklist. During handover from cell A to
cell B, if the handover to wrong cell event occurs and the fre-
quency of reconnecting to neighboring cells managed by the
blacklist exceeds this parameter, the NR is returned to NRT
from the blacklist.

Command Description
C2153 CHANGE SRB RLC INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SRB-RLC: SRB_ID, [TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT], [POLL_PDU], [POLL_BYTE],
[MAX_RETRANSMISSION_THRESHOLD], [TIMER_REORDERING], [TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the RLC protocol. The AMD PDU retransmis-
sion count per SRB ID, Poll Byte and Poll PDU settings for poll triggering, Poll Retransmission
timer value, Loss Detection timer value, and STATUS_PDU Prohibit timer value can be
changed.
TIMEOUT 10

SRB_ID The ID of SRB to retrieve. 1~2 NONE 1


TIMER_PO The timer to retransmit poll in a ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms5/ NONE ci_T_Po
LL_RETRA transmitting AM RLC entity. ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms10/ llRetran
NSMIT ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms15/ smit_ms
ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms20/ 45
ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms25/
POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for ci_p4/ci_p8/ci_p16/ci_p32/ci_p64/ NONE ci_pInfin
pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC ci_p128/ci_p256/ci_pInfinity/ ity
entity.

Command Description

POLL_BYT The threshold used to trigger poll ci_kB25/ci_kB50/ci_kB75/ci_kB100/ NONE ci_kBinfi
E for pollByte bytes in an AM_RLC ci_kB125/ci_kB250/ci_kB375/ nity
entity. ci_kB500/ci_kB750/ci_kB1000/
ci_kB1250/ci_kB1500/ci_kB2000/
ci_kB3000/ci_kBinfinity/
MAX_RETR The threshold used to limit the num- ci_t1/ci_t2/ci_t3/ci_t4/ci_t6/ci_t8/ NONE ci_t32
ANSMISSI ber of the AMD PDU retransmission ci_t16/ci_t32/
ON_THRES in a transmitting AM_RLC entity.
HOLD
TIMER_RE The timer to detect the losses of ci_T_Reordering_ms0/ NONE ci_T_Re
ORDERING RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC ci_T_Reordering_ms5/ ordering
entity. ci_T_Reordering_ms10/ _ms35
ci_T_Reordering_ms15/


TIMER_ST The timer to prohibit the transmis- ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms0/ NONE ci_T_St
ATUS_PRO sion of STATUS_PDU in a receiving ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms5/ atusPro
HIBIT AM_RLC entity. ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms10/ hibit_ms
ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms15/ 0
ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms20/

Command Description

SRB_ID The ID of SRB to retrieve.
TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT The timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
MAX_RETRANSMISSION_THRESHOLDThe threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU

TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.
TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT The timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a


C2154 CHANGE QCI DSCP MAP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-QCIDSCP-MAP: QCI, [DSCP];
Command Description
Changes the configured Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping information per
QCI.
TIMEOUT 10

QCI QCI(Qos Class Identifier) value for which 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
the DSCP mapping information will be set.
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the speci- 0 ~ 63 NONE 0
fied traffic type (QCI).

QCI QCI(Qos Class Identifier) value for which the DSCP mapping
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the specified traffic type (QCI).

Command Description
C2155 CHANGE DSCP COS MAP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DSCPCOS-MAP: DSCP, [COS];
Command Description
Changes the COS mapping information per Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). The
COS value mapped to a DSCP value is marked as VLAN TAG.
TIMEOUT 10

DSCP DSCP value for which the COS mapping 0 ~ 63 NONE 0
COS The CoS value that will be set for the spec- 0~7 NONE 0
ified DSCP value.

DSCP DSCP value for which the COS mapping information will be
set.
COS The CoS value that will be set for the specified DSCP value.

C2158 CHANGE QCI VALUE INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-QCI-VAL: QCI, [STATUS], [RESOURCE_TYPE], [PRIORITY], [PDB], [PELR],
[BH_SERVICE_GROUP], [SCHEDULING_TYPE];
Command Description
Changes the configuration information per QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The information is used
by the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) in the eNB. The status,
resource type, priority, Packet Delay Budget (PDB), Packet Error Loss Rate (PLER) Backhaul
Service Group parameter values per QCI can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
STATUS Whether the QoS Class Identifier (QCI) is N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
used. P
- N_EQUIP: The QCI is not used in the
eNB.
RESOURCE_T The resource type of the QoS Class Identi- ci_NonGBR/ci_GBR/ NONE ci_Non
YPE fier (QCI). GBR
- ci_NonGBR: The resource type of the
QCI is set to non-GBR (Guaranteed Bit
Rate).
- ci_GBR: The resource type of the QCI is
set to GBR (Guaranteed Bit Rate).
PRIORITY The priority of the QoS Class Identifier 1 ~ 16 NONE 9
(QCI). The range is between 1 and 16. 1
indicates the highest priority.

Command Description

PDB Packet Delay Budget (PDB) of the QoS ci_pdb50msec/ NONE ci_pdb3
Class Identifier (QCI). ci_pdb100msec/ 00msec
- ci_pdb50msec: PDB of the QCI to 50 ci_pdb150msec/
msec. ci_pdb200msec/
- ci_pdb100msec: PDB of the QCI to 100 ci_pdb250msec/
msec. ci_pdb300msec/
ci_pdb350msec/
- ci_pdb150msec: PDB of the QCI to 150
ci_pdb400msec/
msec.
ci_pdb450msec/
ci_pdb500msec/
msec.
msec.
msec.
msec.
msec.
msec.
msec.
PELR Packet Error Loss Rate (PLER) of the QoS ci_pler10_2/ NONE ci_pler1
Class Identifier (QCI). ci_pler10_3/ 0_6
- ci_pler10_2: The PLER's QCI is 10^-2. ci_pler10_4/
ci_pler10_8/
ci_pler10_9/
BH_SERVICE_ The service group of the QoS Class Identi- voipService/videoSer- NONE voipSer-
GROUP fier (QCI). The entered parameter values is vice/ vice
used in the backhaul Call Admission Con-
trol (CAC).
- voipService: The QCI uses the Voice of
Internet Protocol (VoIP) service.
- videoService: The QCI uses the video
service.
SCHEDULING_ The schedulin type of the QoS Class Identi- Dynamic_scheduling/ NONE Dynami
TYPE fier (QCI). The entered parameter values is SPS_scheduling/ c_sched
used in scheduling by MAC Layer. uling
- Dynamic_scheduling: The QCI uses the
Dynamic scheduling.
- SPS_scheduling: The QCI uses SPS
scheduling.


STATUS Whether the QoS Class Identifier (QCI) is used.

- N_EQUIP: The QCI is not used in the eNB.
RESOURCE_TYPE The resource type of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI).

- ci_NonGBR: The resource type of the QCI is set to non-GBR
(Guaranteed Bit Rate).

- ci_GBR: The resource type of the QCI is set to GBR (Guaran-
teed Bit Rate).
PRIORITY The priority of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The range is
between 1 and 16. 1 indicates the highest priority.
PDB Packet Delay Budget (PDB) of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI).
PELR Packet Error Loss Rate (PLER) of the QoS Class Identifier
(QCI).
BH_SERVICE_GROUP The service group of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The
entered parameter values is used in the backhaul Call Admis-
sion Control (CAC).

Command Description
- voipService: The QCI uses the Voice of Internet Protocol

(VoIP) service.
- videoService: The QCI uses the video service.
SCHEDULING_TYPE The schedulin type of the QoS Class Identifier (QCI). The
entered parameter values is used in scheduling by MAC Layer.
- Dynamic_scheduling: The QCI uses the Dynamic scheduling.
- SPS_scheduling: The QCI uses SPS scheduling.

C2159 CHANGE LOGICAL CH INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-LOCH-INF: QCI, [PRIORITIZED_BIT_RATE], [BUCKET_SIZE_DURATION],
[LOGICAL_CHANNEL_PRIORITY], [NON_GBRPFWEIGHT];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values needed to operate a logical channel. The bucket size duration, log-
ical channel group ID, logical channel priority, non GBRPFWeight, prioritized bit rate for each
QCI can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

defined in the standard documents is 1 to 9.
The user can use QCI values 0 and 10-
255.
PRIORITIZED_ The parameter used for UE's logical chan- ci_kBps0/ci_kBps8/ NONE ci_kBps
BIT_RATE nel prioritization. It is a minimum transmis- ci_kBps16/ci_kBps32/ 8
sion rate that must be secured per logical ci_kBps64/ci_kBps128/
channel. The parameter by which UE ci_kBps256/
increases the bucket for each logical chan- ci_prioritizedBitRate_inf
nel. inity/
- ci_kBps0: Prioritized Bit Rate of the QCI
is 0 kBps.
is 8 kBps.
is 16 kBps.
is 32 kBps.
is 64 kBps.
- ci_kBps128: Prioritized Bit Rate of the
QCI is 128 kBps.
- ci_kBps256: Prioritized Bit Rate of the
QCI is 256 kBps.
- ci_prioritizedBitRate_infinity: Prioritized
Bit Rate of the QCI is infinity.

Command Description

BUCKET_SIZE The parameter used for UE's logical chan- ci_bucketSizeDuration_ NONE ci_buck
_DURATION nel prioritization. It determines the maxi- ms50/ etSizeD
mum length of a bucket per UE's logical ci_bucketSizeDuration_ uration_
channel. ms100/ ms300
- ci_bucketSizeDuration_ms50: Bucket ci_bucketSizeDuration_
Size Duration of the QCI is 50 ms. ms150/
- ci_bucketSizeDuration_ms100: Bucket ci_bucketSizeDuration_
Size Duration of the QCI is 100 ms. ms300/
ci_bucketSizeDuration_
- ci_bucketSizeDuration_ms150: Bucket
ms500/
Size Duration of the QCI is 150 ms.
ci_bucketSizeDuration_
ms1000/
LOGICAL_CHA The parameter used for UE's logical chan- 1 ~ 16 NONE 9
NNEL_PRIORI nel prioritization. It determines an allocation
TY order per logical channel. The range is from
1 to 16.
NON_GBRPFW The non-GBR bearer's proportional fair- 0 ~ 15 NONE 1
EIGHT ness weight per QCI. The threshold that is
not applied to a GBR bearer. The range is
from 0 to 15.

PRIORITIZED_BIT_RATE The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It is

a minimum transmission rate that must be secured per logical
channel. The parameter by which UE increases the bucket for
each logical channel.
- ci_prioritizedBitRate_infinity: Prioritized Bit Rate of the QCI
is infinity.
BUCKET_SIZE_DURATION The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It

determines the maximum length of a bucket per UE's logical

channel.
QCI is 50 ms.
QCI is 100 ms.
QCI is 150 ms.
QCI is 300 ms.
QCI is 500 ms.
QCI is 1000 ms.
LOGICAL_CHANNEL_PRIORITY The parameter used for UE's logical channel prioritization. It

determines an allocation order per logical channel. The range is
from 1 to 16.
NON_GBRPFWEIGHT The non-GBR bearer's proportional fairness weight per QCI.

The threshold that is not applied to a GBR bearer. The range is
from 0 to 15.

Command Description
C2160 CHANGE RLC INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-RLC-INF: QCI, [RLC_MODE], [ENB_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT], [ENB_POLL_PDU],
[ENB_POLL_BYTE], [ENB_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD], [ENB_TIMER_REORDERING],
[ENB_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT], [UE_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT], [UE_POLL_PDU],
[UE_POLL_BYTE], [UE_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD], [UE_TIMER_REORDERING],
[UE_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT], [SN_FIELD_LENGTH];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the RLC protocol. The RLC mode per QCI,
AMD PDU retransmission count in the eNB and UE, Poll Byte and Poll PDU settings for poll
triggering, Poll Retransmission timer value, Loss Detection timer value, and STATUS_PDU Pro-
hibit timer value can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

QCI QCI (QoS Class Identifier) 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
index. The range is from 0 to
255. The standard QCIs
defined in the standard docu-
ments is 1 to 9. The user can
use QCI values 0 and 10-
255.
RLC_MODE The mode information (AM/ AM_RLC/UM_BI_RLC/ NONE AM_RL
UM) on RLC. UM_UNI_DL_RLC/UM_UNI_UL_RLC/ C


ENB_TIME The timer to retransmit poll in ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms5/ NONE ci_T_Po
R_POLL_R a transmitting AM RLC entity. ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms10/ llRetran
ETRANS- ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms15/ smit_ms
MIT ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms20/ 50
ENB_POLL The threshold to trigger poll ci_p4/ci_p8/ci_p16/ci_p32/ci_p64/ NONE ci_p16
_PDU for pollPDU PDUs in an ci_p128/ci_p256/ci_pInfinity/
AM_RLC entity.

Command Description

ENB_POLL The threshold used to trigger ci_kB25/ci_kB50/ci_kB75/ci_kB100/ NONE ci_kB50
_BYTE poll for pollByte bytes in an ci_kB125/ci_kB250/ci_kB375/ci_kB500/
AM_RLC entity. ci_kB750/ci_kB1000/ci_kB1250/
ci_kBinfinity/
ENB_MAX_ The threshold used to limit ci_t1/ci_t2/ci_t3/ci_t4/ci_t6/ci_t8/ci_t16/ NONE ci_t32
RETX_THR the number of the AMD PDU ci_t32/
ESHOLD retransmission in a transmit-
ting AM_RLC entity.
ENB_TIME The timer to detect the losses ci_T_Reordering_ms0/ NONE ci_T_Re
R_REORDE of RLC PDUs in a receiving ci_T_Reordering_ms5/ ordering
RING RLC entity. ci_T_Reordering_ms10/ _ms40


ENB_TIME The timer to prohibit the ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms0/ NONE ci_T_St
R_STATUS_ transmission of ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms5/ atusPro
PROHIBIT STATUS_PDU in a receiving ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms10/ hibit_ms
AM_RLC entity. ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms15/ 50

Command Description

UE_TIMER_ The timer to retransmit poll in ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms5/ NONE ci_T_Po
POLL_RET a transmitting AM RLC entity. ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms10/ llRetran
RANSMIT ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms15/ smit_ms
ci_T_PollRetransmit_ms20/ 50
UE_POLL_ The threshold to trigger poll ci_p4/ci_p8/ci_p16/ci_p32/ci_p64/ NONE ci_p16
PDU for pollPDU PDUs in an ci_p128/ci_p256/ci_pInfinity/
AM_RLC entity.


UE_POLL_ The threshold used to trigger ci_kB25/ci_kB50/ci_kB75/ci_kB100/ NONE ci_kB50
BYTE poll for pollByte bytes in an ci_kB125/ci_kB250/ci_kB375/ci_kB500/
AM_RLC entity. ci_kB750/ci_kB1000/ci_kB1250/
ci_kBinfinity/
UE_MAX_R The threshold used to limit ci_t1/ci_t2/ci_t3/ci_t4/ci_t6/ci_t8/ci_t16/ NONE ci_t32
ETX_THRE the number of the AMD PDU ci_t32/
SHOLD retransmission in a transmit-
ting AM_RLC entity.
UE_TIMER_ The timer to detect the losses ci_T_Reordering_ms0/ NONE ci_T_Re
REORDER- of RLC PDUs in a receiving ci_T_Reordering_ms5/ ordering
ING RLC entity. ci_T_Reordering_ms10/ _ms40

Command Description

UE_TIMER_ The timer to prohibit the ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms0/ NONE ci_T_St
STATUS_P transmission of ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms5/ atusPro
ROHIBIT STATUS_PDU in a receiving ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms10/ hibit_ms
AM_RLC entity. ci_T_StatusProhibit_ms15/ 50
SN_FIELD_ The field size of UM ci_size5/ci_size10/ NONE ci_size1
LENGTH sequence number. 0


RLC_MODE The mode information (AM/UM) on RLC.
ENB_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMITThe timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
ENB_POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
ENB_POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
ENB_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD The threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU
ENB_TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.
ENB_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBITThe timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a

UE_TIMER_POLL_RETRANSMIT The timer to retransmit poll in a transmitting AM RLC entity.
UE_POLL_PDU The threshold to trigger poll for pollPDU PDUs in an AM_RLC

entity.
UE_POLL_BYTE The threshold used to trigger poll for pollByte bytes in an

AM_RLC entity.
UE_MAX_RETX_THRESHOLD The threshold used to limit the number of the AMD PDU
UE_TIMER_REORDERING The timer to detect the losses of RLC PDUs in a receiving RLC
entity.
UE_TIMER_STATUS_PROHIBIT The timer to prohibit the transmission of STATUS_PDU in a

SN_FIELD_LENGTH The field size of UM sequence number.

Command Description
C2161 CHANGE PDCP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-PDCP-INF: QCI, [UM_SN_SIZE], [DISCARD_TIMER], [FWD_END_TIMER],
[STATUS_REPORT_REQUIRED];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values of the PDCP protocol. This command can change the UM SN
size, discard timer value, forward end timer value for each of 256 QoS classes. The changes do
not affect the existing calls and are applied only to the new calls.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
UM_SN_SIZE The size of PDCP Sequence Number (SN) ci_len7bits/ci_len12bits/ NONE ci_len12
in RLC UM mode. bits
- ci_len7bits: Uses the size of 7 bits (0 to
127).
- ci_len12bits: The size of 12 bits (0 to
4095) is used (Default).
DISCARD_TIM The Discard timer value for a packet buffer ci_discardTimer_ms50/ NONE ci_disca
ER managed per RB in RLC AM mode. If ACK ci_discardTimer_ms100 rdTimer
is not received from the RLC within a spec- / _infinity
ified period of time, the packet is discarded. ci_discardTimer_ms150
- ci_discardTimer_ms50: 50 msec. /
- ci_discardTimer_ms100: 100 msec. ci_discardTimer_ms300
- ci_discardTimer_ms150: 150 msec. /
- ci_discardTimer_ms300: 300 msec. ci_discardTimer_ms500
/
ci_discardTimer_ms750
/
ci_discardTimer_ms150
- ci_discardTimer_infinity: The discard 0/
timer is disabled. (default). ci_discardTimer_infinity
/
FWD_END_TI A period of time when PDCP of target eNB 10 ~ 1000 msec 200
MER waits for end marker upon receiving a
HO_COMPLETE message. in milliseconds.
STATUS_REPO This value determines whether or not to False/True/ NONE True
RT_REQUIRED send SN Status Report.


UM_SN_SIZE The size of PDCP Sequence Number (SN) in RLC UM mode.

- ci_len7bits: Uses the size of 7 bits (0 to 127).
- ci_len12bits: The size of 12 bits (0 to 4095) is used (Default).
DISCARD_TIMER The Discard timer value for a packet buffer managed per RB in
RLC AM mode. If ACK is not received from the RLC within a
specified period of time, the packet is discarded.
- ci_discardTimer_infinity: The discard timer is disabled.
(default).
FWD_END_TIMER A period of time when PDCP of target eNB waits for end
marker upon receiving a HO_COMPLETE message. in milli-
seconds.
STATUS_REPORT_REQUIRED This value determines whether or not to send SN Status Report.

Command Description
C2162 CHANGE GTP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-GTP-INF: [T3_TMR], [T3_TMR_LONG], [N3_REQUEST], [KEEP_ALIVE], [SNN], [ECN];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values of the GTP protocol. The command can change use keep alive, the
timeout interval, and the sequence number. If KeepAlive is set, the GTP ECHO-REQ message is
sent to S-GW at a specified interval (T3_TIMER_LONG). If the GTP ECHO-RESP message is
not received from S-GW until the next message is sent, transmission is repeated for
N3_REQUEST times at T3_TIMER interval.
TIMEOUT 10

T3_TMR The interval at which transmission of the 0 ~ 60000 msec 5000
ECHO-REQ message is repeated if a
response message to ECHO-REQ, which
is sent for Keep Alive, is not received. The
range is between 0 and 60000 msec. The
default is 5000 (5 seconds). This timer runs
T3_TMR_LON The interval at which the ECHO-REQ mes- 60000 ~ 600000 msec 60000
G sage is sent for periodic Keep Alive. The
range is between 60000 and 600000 msec.
The default is 60000 (60 seconds). This
timer runs only if KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
N3_REQUEST The maximum retransmission number of 0 ~ 10 NONE 5
the GTP ECHO-REQ message. This timer
runs only if KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
KEEP_ALIVE Whether the GTP ECHO-REQ message at 0~1 NONE 1
specified intervals (Keep Alive) is sent.
- 1: The ECHO-REQ message is
sent(default).
SNN Whether the GTP sequence number is 0~1 NONE 1
used.
- 0: The GTP sequence number in the eNB
is not used.
- 1: The GTP sequence number in the eNB
is used.


ECN Whether the Explicit Congestion Notifica- 0~1 NONE 1
tion (ECN) function is used.
- 0: The ECN function in the eNB is not
used.

T3_TMR The interval at which transmission of the ECHO-REQ message
is repeated if a response message to ECHO-REQ, which is sent
for Keep Alive, is not received. The range is between 0 and
60000 msec. The default is 5000 (5 seconds). This timer runs
T3_TMR_LONG The interval at which the ECHO-REQ message is sent for peri-
odic Keep Alive. The range is between 60000 and 600000
msec. The default is 60000 (60 seconds). This timer runs only if
KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
N3_REQUEST The maximum retransmission number of the GTP ECHO-REQ

message. This timer runs only if KEEP_ALIVE is set to '1'.
KEEP_ALIVE Whether the GTP ECHO-REQ message at specified intervals

(Keep Alive) is sent.
- 1: The ECHO-REQ message is sent(default).
SNN Whether the GTP sequence number is used.

- 0: The GTP sequence number in the eNB is not used.
- 1: The GTP sequence number in the eNB is used.
ECN Whether the Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) function is

used.
- 0: The ECN function in the eNB is not used.

Command Description
C2163 CHANGE PCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-PCCH-CONF: [DEFAULT_PAGING_CYCLE], [N_B];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Paging Control Channel (PCCH) in the eNB. Paging is used
when initiating a mobile-terminating connection or triggering UE to re-obtain the system infor-
mation, as well as for sending the Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System (ETWS) indication.
TIMEOUT 10

DEFAULT_PAG When DRX is used, UE monitors a single ci_defaultPagingCycle_ msec ci_defau
ING_CYCLE paging occasion per DRX cycle. If UE-spe- rf32/ ltPaging
cific DRX is not set by the upper layer, ci_defaultPagingCycle_ Cycle_rf
defaultPagingCycle is applied as the rf64/ 256
default DRX cycle. ci_defaultPagingCycle_
rf128/
ci_defaultPagingCycle_
rf256/
N_B The parameter required to calculate the ci_fourT/ci_twoT/ NONE ci_oneE
paging frame and paging occasion using ci_oneT/ci_halfT/ ightT
the TS 36.304 method, which is a multiple ci_quarterT/
of defaultPagingCycle. ci_oneEightT/
ci_onSixteenthT/
ci_oneThirtySecondT/

DEFAULT_PAGING_CYCLE[msec] When DRX is used, UE monitors a single paging occasion
per DRX cycle. If UE-specific DRX is not set by the upper
layer, defaultPagingCycle is applied as the default DRX
cycle.
N_B The parameter required to calculate the paging frame and pag-
ing occasion using the TS 36.304 method, which is a multiple
of defaultPagingCycle.

C2164 CHANGE PDSCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-PDSCH-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [DL_POWER_OPTION], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) in the eNB. The
power ratio between a Resource Element (RE) transmitting a reference signal and a RE transmit-
ting data can be set in PDSCH. This parameter, in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or
forcedModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
DL_POWER_O The power setting option. The power of the ci_pwrOpt_Same/ NONE ci_pwrO
PTION RS per resource grid is set to a multiple of ci_pwrOpt_OneHalf/ pt_Half
the power of the data per resource grID. ci_pwrOpt_Twice/
- ci_pwrOpt_Same: The power of the RS ci_pwrOpt_Half/
per resource grid is the same as that of the ci_pwrOpt_FortyHundre
data per resource grID. dth/
- ci_pwrOpt_OneHalf: The power of the RS ci_pwrOpt_ThirtyThree
per resource grid is one and a half times as Hundredth/
much as that of the data per resource grID. ci_pwrOpt_ThirtyTwoH
undredth/
- ci_pwrOpt_Twice: The power of the RS
ci_pwrOpt_TwentyFive
per resource grid is two times as much as
Hundredth/
that of the data per resource grID.
ci_pwrOpt_TwentyHund
- ci_pwrOpt_Half: The power of the RS per
redth/
resource grid is a half times as much as
ci_pwrOpt_SixteenHun
that of the data per resource grID.
dredth/
ci_pwrOpt_ThirteenHun
dredth/
E changed value.

DL_POWER_OPTION The power setting option. The power of the RS per resource

Command Description
grid is set to a multiple of the power of the data per resource

grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Same: The power of the RS per resource grid is
the same as that of the data per resource grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_OneHalf: The power of the RS per resource grid
is one and a half times as much as that of the data per resource
grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Twice: The power of the RS per resource grid is
two times as much as that of the data per resource grID.
- ci_pwrOpt_Half: The power of the RS per resource grid is a
half times as much as that of the data per resource grID.

C2165 CHANGE PHICH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
CHG-PHICH-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [PHICH_DURATION], [PHICH_RESOURCE], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH) in the eNB.
This command can change PHICH duration and resource settings. This parameter, in order to
apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or forcedModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
PHICH_DURAT The PHICH duration set in accordance with ci_normal/ci_extended/ NONE ci_norm
ION Table 6.9.3-1 of TS 36.211. It sets the lower al
limit of a control region size that is passed
to PCFICH.
PHICH_RESO The parameter used to calculate the num- ci_oneSixth/ci_half/ NONE ci_one
URCE ber of PHICH groups. ci_one/ci_two/
E changed value.

PHICH_DURATION The PHICH duration set in accordance with Table 6.9.3-1 of TS

36.211. It sets the lower limit of a control region size that is
passed to PCFICH.
PHICH_RESOURCE The parameter used to calculate the number of PHICH groups.

Command Description
C2166 CHANGE PRACH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-PRACH-CONF: CELL_NUM, [PRACH_CONFIG_INDEX], [HIGH_SPEED_FLAG],
[ZERO_CORREL_ZONE_CONFIG], [ROOT_SEQUENCE_INDEX], [PRACH_POSITION];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) in the eNB. This
command can change the high speed flag, the PRACH configuration index, the root sequence
index, and the zero correlation zone configuration.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
PRACH_CONFI Index for the preamble format, subframe 0 ~ 63 NONE 3
G_INDEX sent by preamble, and interval.
HIGH_SPEED_ Whether to use unrestricted or restricted False/True/ NONE False
FLAG set. When this parameter is set to TRUE, a
restricted set is used. When set to FALSE,
ZERO_CORRE The zero correlation zone used to create a 0 ~ 15 NONE 12
L_ZONE_CON random preamble.
FIG
ROOT_SEQUE The first logical root sequence index used 0 ~ 837 NONE 0
NCE_INDEX to create a random preamble. Different val-
ues should be assigned to neighboring
cells.
PRACH_POSIT Provides information about PRACH posi- 0~1 NONE 0
ION tion between two possible positions adja-
cent to PUCCH. 0: low position, 1: high
position

PRACH_CONFIG_INDEX Index for the preamble format, subframe sent by preamble, and
interval.

HIGH_SPEED_FLAG Whether to use unrestricted or restricted set. When this parame-

ter is set to TRUE, a restricted set is used. When set to FALSE,
ZERO_CORREL_ZONE_CONFIG The zero correlation zone used to create a random preamble.
ROOT_SEQUENCE_INDEX The first logical root sequence index used to create a random
preamble. Different values should be assigned to neighboring
cells.
PRACH_POSITION Provides information about PRACH position between two pos-

sible positions adjacent to PUCCH. 0: low position, 1: high
position

Command Description
C2167 CHANGE PUSCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-PUSCH-CONF: CELL_NUM, [N_SB], [HOPPING_MODE], [ENABLE_SIX_FOUR_QAM],
[GROUP_HOPPING_ENABLED], [GROUP_ASSIGNMENT_PUSCH], [SEQUENCE_HOPPING_ENABLED];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) in the eNB. Infor-
mation on whether the eNB can receive 64-QAM, and the hopping settings can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
N_SB The number of sub-bands in Type 2 1~4 NONE 1
PUSCH hopping.
HOPPING_MO Hopping mode. ci_interSubFrame/ NONE ci_inter
DE - ci_interSubFrame: Inter-subframe hop- ci_intraAndInterSubFra Sub-
ping. me/ Frame
- ci_intraAndInterSubFrame: Intra and
inter-subframe hopping.
ENABLE_SIX_ Whether to support 64QAM. Only the cate- False/True/ NONE True
FOUR_QAM gory 5 UEs capable of sending 64-QAM via
the uplink are affected by this parameter
value.
- True: 64QAM when the eNB receives
data is applied.
GROUP_HOPP Whether to support group hopping. False/True/ NONE False
ING_ENABLED - False: Group hopping is not supported.
GROUP_ASSI The group assignment value in the 0 ~ 29 NONE 0

GNMENT_PUS PUSCH.
CH
SEQUENCE_H Whether to support sequence hopping. False/True/ NONE False
OPPING_ENAB - False: Sequence hopping is not sup-
LED ported.


N_SB The number of sub-bands in Type 2 PUSCH hopping.
HOPPING_MODE Hopping mode.

- ci_interSubFrame: Inter-subframe hopping.
- ci_intraAndInterSubFrame: Intra and inter-subframe hopping.
ENABLE_SIX_FOUR_QAM Whether to support 64QAM. Only the category 5 UEs capable

of sending 64-QAM via the uplink are affected by this parame-
ter value.
- True: 64QAM when the eNB receives data is applied.
GROUP_HOPPING_ENABLED Whether to support group hopping.

- False: Group hopping is not supported.
GROUP_ASSIGNMENT_PUSCH The group assignment value in the PUSCH.
SEQUENCE_HOPPING_ENABLEDWhether to support sequence hopping.

- False: Sequence hopping is not supported.

Command Description
C2168 CHANGE RACH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-RACH-CONF: CELL_NUM, [NUMBER_OF_RAPREAMBLES],
[SIZE_OF_RAPREAMBLES_GROUP_A], [MESSAGE_SIZE_GROUP_A],
[MESSAGE_POWER_OFFSET_GROUP_B], [POWER_RAMPING_STEP],
[PREAMBLE_INIT_RCV_TARGET_POWER], [PREAMBLE_TRANS_MAX],
[CONTENTION_RESOLUTION_TIMER], [BACKOFF_INDICATOR_SETUP], [BACKOFF_INDICATOR],
[MAX_HARQMSG3_TX];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Random Access Channel (RACH) in the eNB. The backoff
indicator, number of times to transmit Msg3 HARQ, the number of non-dedicated/dedicated pre-
ambles, the power ramping step and the maximum number of transmission, and the number of
preamble group A/B can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.


NUMBER_OF_ The number of non-dedicated preambles. ci_numberOfRA_Pream NONE ci_numb
RAPREAM- bles_n4/ erOfRA
BLES ci_numberOfRA_Pream _Pream
bles_n8/ bles_n6
ci_numberOfRA_Pream 0
bles_n12/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n16/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n20/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n24/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n28/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n32/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n36/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n40/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n44/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n48/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n52/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n56/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n60/
ci_numberOfRA_Pream
bles_n64/

Command Description

SIZE_OF_RAP The number of PreamblesGroup A. ci_sizeOfRAPreambles NONE ci_size
REAMBLES_G GroupA_n4/ OfRA-
ROUP_A ci_sizeOfRAPreambles Pream-
GroupA_n8/ blesGro
ci_sizeOfRAPreambles upA_n2
GroupA_n12/ 8
ci_sizeOfRAPreambles
GroupA_n16/
GroupA_n20/
GroupA_n24/
GroupA_n28/
GroupA_n32/
GroupA_n36/
GroupA_n40/
GroupA_n44/
GroupA_n48/
GroupA_n52/
GroupA_n56/
GroupA_n60/
MESSAGE_SIZ Standard for message size to select Pre- ci_messageSizeGroup NONE ci_mess
E_GROUP_A amblesGroup A. A_b56/ ageSize
ci_messageSizeGroup GroupA
A_b144/ _b56
ci_messageSizeGroup
A_b208/
ci_messageSizeGroup
A_b256/
MESSAGE_PO Standard for power offset to select Pream- ci_messagePowerOffse NONE ci_mess
WER_OFFSET bleGroup B. tGroupB_minusinfinity/ age-
_GROUP_B ci_messagePowerOffse Power-
tGroupB_dB0/ OffsetGr
ci_messagePowerOffse oupB_d
tGroupB_dB5/ B0
ci_messagePowerOffse
tGroupB_dB8/
tGroupB_dB10/
tGroupB_dB12/
tGroupB_dB15/
tGroupB_dB18/


POWER_RAM Power ramping steps when sending a pre- ci_powerRampingSetup NONE ci_powe
PING_STEP amble. _dB0/ rRampin
ci_powerRampingSetup gSetup_
_dB2/ dB2
ci_powerRampingSetup
_dB4/
ci_powerRampingSetup
_dB6/
PREAMBLE_IN The threshold used to set an initial-target ci_dBm-120/ci_dBm- NONE ci_dBm-
IT_RCV_TARG receiving power of preambles. 118/ci_dBm-116/ 108
ET_POWER ci_dBm-114/ci_dBm-
112/ci_dBm-110/
ci_dBm-108/ci_dBm-
106/ci_dBm-104/
ci_dBm-102/ci_dBm-
100/ci_dBm-98/
ci_dBm-96/ci_dBm-94/
ci_dBm-92/ci_dBm-90/
PREAMBLE_T The maximum number of times to transmit ci_PreambleTransMax_ NONE ci_Prea
RANS_MAX a preamble. n3/ mbleTra
ci_PreambleTransMax_ nsMax_
n4/ n10
ci_PreambleTransMax_
n5/
n6/
n7/
n8/
n10/
n20/
n50/
n100/
n200/
CONTENTION_ Contention resolution timer. ci_mac_ContentionRes NONE ci_mac_
RESOLUTION_ olutionTimer_sf8/ Conten-
TIMER ci_mac_ContentionRes tionRes-
olutionTimer_sf16/ olutionTi
ci_mac_ContentionRes mer_sf4
olutionTimer_sf24/ 8
ci_mac_ContentionRes
olutionTimer_sf32/
olutionTimer_sf40/
olutionTimer_sf48/
olutionTimer_sf56/
olutionTimer_sf64/

Command Description

BACKOFF_IND Whether to use the backoff indicator. ci_Config_Release/ NONE ci_Confi
ICATOR_SETU - ci_Config_Release: release. ci_Config_Setup/ g_Relea
P - ci_Config_Setup: setup. se
BACKOFF_IND The backoff parameter. 0 ~ 12 NONE 0

ICATOR
MAX_HARQMS The maximum number of transmission of 1~8 NONE 8
G3_TX HARQ Msg3.

NUMBER_OF_RAPREAMBLES The number of non-dedicated preambles.
SIZE_OF_RAPREAMBLES_GROUP_AThe number of PreamblesGroup A.
MESSAGE_SIZE_GROUP_A Standard for message size to select PreamblesGroup A.
MESSAGE_POWER_OFFSET_GROUP_BStandard for power offset to select PreambleGroup B.
POWER_RAMPING_STEP Power ramping steps when sending a preamble.
PREAMBLE_INIT_RCV_TARGET_POWERThe threshold used to set an initial-target receiving

power of preambles.
PREAMBLE_TRANS_MAX The maximum number of times to transmit a preamble.
CONTENTION_RESOLUTION_TIMERContention resolution timer.
BACKOFF_INDICATOR_SETUP Whether to use the backoff indicator.

- ci_Config_Release: release.
- ci_Config_Setup: setup.
BACKOFF_INDICATOR The backoff parameter.
MAX_HARQMSG3_TX The maximum number of transmission of HARQ Msg3.

C2169 CHANGE TIME ALIGNMENT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-TIME-ALIGN: CELL_NUM, [TIME_ALIGNMENT_TIMER_COMMON];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of a time alignment of UE. If TimeAlignmentTimer is not infinity, the
UE determines that the uplink timing is maintained by receiving the timing advance command
within the timer value. Otherwise, the UE releases the PUCCH and SRS resources.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
TIME_ALIGNM The parameter used to adjust a period of ci_timeAlignmentTimer NONE ci_time
ENT_TIMER_C time during which UE decides that the _sf500/ Alignme
OMMON uplink timing is correct. ci_timeAlignmentTimer ntTimer
_sf750/ _infinity
ci_timeAlignmentTimer
_sf1280/
_sf1920/
_sf2560/
_sf5120/
_sf10240/
_infinity/

TIME_ALIGNMENT_TIMER_COMMONThe parameter used to adjust a period of time during

which UE decides that the uplink timing is correct.

Command Description
C2170 CHANGE SOUNDING RS UPLINK CON-

FIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-SNDRS-CONF: CELL_NUM, [SRS_USAGE], [ACK_NACK_SRS_SIMUL_TRANSMISSION];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the UL Sounding Reference Signal in the eNB. This command can
change whether simultaneous transmission of ACK/NACK or SR, and SRS is supported,
whether SRS is used in the cell, and SRS MaxUpPts.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
SRS_USAGE Whether to use SRS. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
ACK_NACK_S Whether simultaneous transmission of False/True/ NONE True

RS_SIMUL_TR ACK/NACK or SR, and Sounding RS is
ANSMISSION supported.

SRS_USAGE Whether to use SRS.

ACK_NACK_SRS_SIMUL_TRANSMISSIONWhether simultaneous transmission of ACK/NACK

or SR, and Sounding RS is supported.

C2171 CHANGE UPLINK POWER CONTROL

PARAMETER
Command Format
CHG-PWR-PARA: CELL_NUM, [P0_NOMINAL_PUSCH], [ALPHA], [P0_NOMINAL_PUCCH],
[DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT1], [DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT1_B], [DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT2],
[DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT2_A], [DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT2_B], [DELTA_PREAMBLE_MSG3],
[UL_TARGET_IOT], [UL_IOI_THRESHOLD_STEP];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Uplink Power Control in the eNB. The alpha value used in
PUSCH Power Control, transmission power settings by PUCCH format, settings for the
p0_nominal_PUCCH and p0_nominal_PUSCH, and UL IOT target value can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
P0_NOMINAL_ p0NominalPUSCH. -126 ~ 24 NONE -80
PUSCH
ALPHA Assign alpha (0,0.4,0.5~0.9,1) ci_al0/ci_al04/ci_al05/ NONE ci_al08
ci_al06/ci_al07/ci_al08/
ci_al09/ci_al1/
P0_NOMINAL_ p0Nominal PUCCH. -127 ~ -96 NONE -112
PUCCH
DELTA_FPUCC The difference in the transmission power ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For NONE ci_delta
HFORMAT1 between PUCCH format1a and PUCCH mat1_deltaF-2/ F_PUC
format1. ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For CH_For
mat1_deltaF0/ mat1_d
ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For eltaF0
mat1_deltaF2/
HFORMAT1_B between PUCCH format1a and PUCCH mat1b_deltaF1/ F_PUC
format1b. ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For CH_For
mat1b_deltaF3/ mat1b_
ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For deltaF1
mat1b_deltaF5/

Command Description

HFORMAT2 between PUCCH format1a and PUCCH mat2_deltaF-2/ F_PUC
format2. ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For CH_For
mat2_deltaF0/ mat2_d
ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For eltaF2
mat2_deltaF1/
ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For
mat2_deltaF2/
HFORMAT2_A between PUCCH format1a and PUCCH mat2a_deltaF-2/ F_PUC
format2a. ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For CH_For
mat2a_deltaF0/ mat2a_
mat2a_deltaF2/
HFORMAT2_B between PUCCH format1a and PUCCH mat2b_deltaF-2/ F_PUC
format2b. ci_deltaF_PUCCH_For CH_For
mat2b_deltaF0/ mat2b_
mat2b_deltaF2/
DELTA_PREAM deltaPreambleMsg3. -1 ~ 6 NONE 2
BLE_MSG3
UL_TARGET_I The UL IOT target value for all ICIC types. 1 ~ 128 0.25dB 32
OT
UL_IOI_THRES The difference between high and low 1 ~ 128 0.25dB 2
HOLD_STEP thresholds to generate UL IOI for all ICIC
types and the Target IoT. The threshold
scaled up 4 times in dB area.

P0_NOMINAL_PUSCH p0NominalPUSCH.
ALPHA Assign alpha (0,0.4,0.5~0.9,1)
P0_NOMINAL_PUCCH p0Nominal PUCCH.




DELTA_FPUCCHFORMAT2_A The difference in the transmission power between PUCCH

format1a and PUCCH format2a.

DELTA_PREAMBLE_MSG3 deltaPreambleMsg3.
UL_TARGET_IOT The UL IOT target value for all ICIC types.
UL_IOI_THRESHOLD_STEP The difference between high and low thresholds to generate UL

IOI for all ICIC types and the Target IoT. The threshold scaled
up 4 times in dB area.

Command Description
C2172 CHANGE BCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-BCCH-CONF: CELL_NUM, [MODIFICATION_PERIOD_COEFF];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) in the eNB. This com-
mand can retrieve the ModificationPeriodCoeff value used to determine an interval for changing
system information.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
MODIFICATION The number of times to determine whether ci_modificationPeriodC NONE ci_modif
_PERIOD_COE the system information saved is valid ID. oeff_n2/ ication-
FF ci_modificationPeriodC PeriodC
oeff_n4/ oeff_n4
ci_modificationPeriodC
oeff_n8/
ci_modificationPeriodC
oeff_n16/

MODIFICATION_PERIOD_COEFFThe number of times to determine whether the system informa-

tion saved is valid ID.

C2173 CHANGE PUSCH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
CHG-PUSCH-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [CYCLIC_SHIFT], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes the configuration of the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) in the eNB. The
n(1)_DMRS value used to determine the cyclic shift value of a PUSCH Reference Signal can be
changed. This parameter, in order to apply the changes, CELL_LOCK or forcedModeFlag is set
to True.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
CYCLIC_SHIFT The n(1)_DMRS value by cell. The cyclic 0~7 NONE 0
shift value of the PUSCH reference signal
is determined by this value and the
E changed value.

CYCLIC_SHIFT The n(1)_DMRS value by cell. The cyclic shift value of the
PUSCH reference signal is determined by this value and the

Command Description
C2174 CHANGE RACH CONFIGURATION IDLE
Command Format
CHG-RACH-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [RA_RESPONSE_WINDOW_SIZE], [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Change RACH(Random Access Channel) Configuration. This parameter, in order to apply the
changes, CELL_LOCK or forcedModeFlag is set to True.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
RA_RESPONS The period of time during which UE waits ci_ra_ResponseWindo NONE ci_ra_R
E_WINDOW_SI for RA Response. wSize_sf2/ espon-
ZE ci_ra_ResponseWindo seWind
wSize_sf3/ owSize_
ci_ra_ResponseWindo sf7
wSize_sf4/
ci_ra_ResponseWindo
wSize_sf5/
ci_ra_ResponseWindo
wSize_sf6/
ci_ra_ResponseWindo
wSize_sf7/
ci_ra_ResponseWindo
wSize_sf8/
ci_ra_ResponseWindo
wSize_sf10/
E changed value.

RA_RESPONSE_WINDOW_SIZE The period of time during which UE waits for RA Response.

C2175 CHANGE CQI REPORTING INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CQI-REP: TRANSMISSION_MODE, [WIDE_SUBBAND_SELECT];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate CQI reporting. It can set whether to operate Wide-
band CQI or both of Wideband CQI and Subband CQI per DL transmission mode.
TIMEOUT 10

TRANSMISSIO Transmission mode. ci_tm1/ci_tm2/ci_tm3/ NONE ci_tm1
N_MODE - ci_tm1: Single-antenna port (port 0), DCI ci_tm4/ci_tm5/ci_tm6/
format 1 or 1A is used. ci_tm7/ci_tm8/
- ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1
or 1A is used.
- ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing,
DCI format 2A or 1A is used.
- ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing,
DCI format 2 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A
is used.
- ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding,
DCI format 1B or 1A is used.
- ci_tm7: Single-antenna port (port 5), DCI
format 1 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port
8), DCI format 2B or 1A is used.
WIDE_SUBBA Selects a Wideband/Subband CQI option. ci_WideBand/ NONE ci_Wide
ND_SELECT - ci_WideBand: wideband CQI only. ci_SubBand/ Band
- ci_SubBand: wideband CQI + subband
CQI.

TRANSMISSION_MODE Transmission mode.
used.
- ci_tm2: Transmit diversity, DCI format 1 or 1A is used.
- ci_tm3: Open-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2A or 1A

Command Description
is used.
- ci_tm4: Closed-loop spatial multiplexing, DCI format 2 or 1A
is used.
- ci_tm5: MU-MIMO, DCI format 1D or 1A is used.
- ci_tm6: Closed-loop rank-1 precoding, DCI format 1B or 1A
is used.
used.
- ci_tm8: Single-antenna port (port 7/port 8), DCI format 2B or
1A is used.
WIDE_SUBBAND_SELECT Selects a Wideband/Subband CQI option.

- ci_WideBand: wideband CQI only.
- ci_SubBand: wideband CQI + subband CQI.

C2176 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY PUSCH

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DPHY-PUSCH: CELL_NUM, [BETA_OFFSET_ACKINDEX], [BETA_OFFSET_RIINDEX],
[BETA_OFFSET_CQIINDEX];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate the dedicated PUSCH. This command can retrieve
betaOffsetACK, betaOffsetCQI, and betaOffsetRI, which determine the degree of resources in
PUSCH to be used in transmitting UCI if it needs to be sent to the uplink in the same subframe
as PUSCH.
TIMEOUT 10

BETA_OFFSET The threshold used to multiplex ACK/NACK 0 ~ 15 NONE 8
_ACKINDEX and PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET The threshold used to multiplex RI with 0 ~ 15 NONE 5
_RIINDEX PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET The threshold used to multiplex CQI with 0 ~ 15 NONE 11
_CQIINDEX PUSCH.

BETA_OFFSET_ACKINDEX The threshold used to multiplex ACK/NACK and PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET_RIINDEX The threshold used to multiplex RI with PUSCH.
BETA_OFFSET_CQIINDEX The threshold used to multiplex CQI with PUSCH.

Command Description
C2177 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY SPS INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-DPHY-SPS: CELL_NUM, [P0_NOMINAL_PUSCHPERSISTENT], [P0_UEPUSCHPERSISTENT],
[SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_DL], [SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_UL],
[TWO_INTERVALS_CONFIG], [SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_DL],
[SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_UL];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate the dedicated Semi Persist Scheduling (SPS). This
command can retrieve UL power settings for SPS and whether to use the two-interval SPS pat-
tern.
TIMEOUT 10

P0_NOMIN SPS P0 value used in power con- -126 ~ 24 NONE -80
AL_PUSCH trol. The value is dBm.
PERSIS-
TENT
P0_UEPUS SPS P0 value used in power con- -8 ~ 7 NONE 0
CHPERSIS- trol, which is determined per UE.
TENT The value is in dB.


SEMI_PER Provide information about the com- ci_semiPersistSchedTbsDL_120/ NONE ci_dl_rb
SIST_SCHE binations of the allocated number ci_semiPersistSchedTbsDL_136/ 2_tbs0
D_TBS_DL of RB, MCS and TBS size for DL ci_semiPersistSchedTbsDL_152/
SPS ci_semiPersistSchedTbsDL_176/
ci_semiPersistSchedTbsDL_208/

Command Description

SEMI_PER Provide information about the com- ci_semiPersistSchedTbsUL_120/ NONE ci_ul_rb
SIST_SCHE binations of the allocated number ci_semiPersistSchedTbsUL_136/ 2_tbs0
D_TBS_UL of RB, MCS and TBS size for UL ci_semiPersistSchedTbsUL_152/
SPS ci_semiPersistSchedTbsUL_176/
ci_semiPersistSchedTbsUL_208/
TWO_INTE Whether to use the two-interval ci_false/ci_true/ NONE ci_true
RVALS_CO SPS pattern in UL.
NFIG - ci_false: Two-interval SPS pat-
tern is not used.
- ci_true: Two-interval SPS pattern
is used.
SEMI_PER Provide informations about the 1 ~ 64 NONE 12
SIST_SCHE maximum allowable number of
D_MAXNU PRBs for DL SPS
MBER_OF_
RB_DL
SEMI_PER Provide informations about the 1 ~ 64 NONE 12
SIST_SCHE maximum allowable number of
D_MAXNU PRBs for UL SPS
MBER_OF_
RB_UL


P0_NOMINAL_PUSCHPERSISTENTSPS P0 value used in power control. The value is dBm.
P0_UEPUSCHPERSISTENT SPS P0 value used in power control, which is determined per

UE. The value is in dB.
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_DL Provide information about the combinations of the allocated

number of RB, MCS and TBS size for DL SPS
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_TBS_UL Provide information about the combinations of the allocated

number of RB, MCS and TBS size for UL SPS
TWO_INTERVALS_CONFIG Whether to use the two-interval SPS pattern in UL.

- ci_false: Two-interval SPS pattern is not used.
- ci_true: Two-interval SPS pattern is used.
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_DLProvide informations about the maximum

allowable number of PRBs for DL SPS
SEMI_PERSIST_SCHED_MAXNUMBER_OF_RB_ULProvide informations about the maximum

allowable number of PRBs for UL SPS

Command Description
C2178 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY SR INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-DPHY-SR: CELL_NUM, [DSR_TRANS_MAX];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate the dedicated Scheduling Request (SR). The UE's
maximum transmission number of a scheduling request can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
DSR_TRANS_ The maximum number of scheduling ci_dsr_TransMax_n4/ NONE ci_dsr_
MAX requests that can be sent until PUSCH ci_dsr_TransMax_n8/ TransM
resources are assigned to UE. ci_dsr_TransMax_n16/ ax_n64
ci_dsr_TransMax_n32/
ci_dsr_TransMax_n64/

DSR_TRANS_MAX The maximum number of scheduling requests that can be sent

until PUSCH resources are assigned to UE.

C2179 CHANGE DEDICATED UL PWR CTRL

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-ULPWR-CTRL: CELL_NUM, [P0_UE_PUSCH], [DELTA_MCSENABLED],
[ACCUMULATION_ENABLED], [P0_UE_PUCCH], [P_SRSOFFSET], [FILTER_COEFFICIENT];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate dedicated Uplink Power Control. The p0 value per
UE for PUSCH/PUCCH, whether the accumulation mode is used by TPC, the power offsets of
PUSCH and SRS, and the L3 filtering coefficient value used by the UE to calculate a path loss
can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
P0_UE_PUSC The non-persistent scheduling P0 value -8 ~ 7 NONE 0
H used in PUSCH power control, which is
determined per UE.
DELTA_MCSE Whether to use a power offset against ci_en0/ci_en1/ NONE ci_en0
NABLED other MCSs.
- ci_en0: 0.
ACCUMULATIO Whether to use the accumulation mode 0~1 NONE 1

N_ENABLED and absolute mode in the TPC.
P0_UE_PUCC P0 value used in PUCCH power control, -8 ~ 7 NONE 0

H which is determined per UE.
P_SRSOFFSE The power offset value between PUSCH 0 ~ 15 NONE 7
T and SRS.
FILTER_COEF Filtering coefficient used to measure RSRP ci_fc0/ci_fc1/ci_fc2/ NONE ci_fc4
FICIENT in order to calculate a path loss. ci_fc3/ci_fc4/ci_fc5/
ci_fc6/ci_fc7/ci_fc8/

Command Description

P0_UE_PUSCH The non-persistent scheduling P0 value used in PUSCH power

control, which is determined per UE.
DELTA_MCSENABLED Whether to use a power offset against other MCSs.

- ci_en0: 0.
ACCUMULATION_ENABLED Whether to use the accumulation mode and absolute mode in

the TPC.
P0_UE_PUCCH P0 value used in PUCCH power control, which is determined

per UE.
P_SRSOFFSET The power offset value between PUSCH and SRS.
FILTER_COEFFICIENT Filtering coefficient used to measure RSRP in order to calculate

a path loss.

C2180 CHANGE DEDICATED PHY UL SRS

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DPHY-ULSRS: CELL_NUM, [SRS_HOPPING_BANDWIDTH], [DURATION];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate dedicated Uplink Sounding RS. The hopping band-
width of the SRS and the transmission duration of the SRS can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
SRS_HOPPIN The area where Sounding RS is hopped. ci_hbw0/ci_hbw1/ NONE ci_hbw0
G_BANDWIDT ci_hbw2/ci_hbw3/
H
DURATION The transmission duration of Sounding RS. 0~1 NONE 1
- 1: Sounding RS is transmitted repeatedly
until it is disabled.

SRS_HOPPING_BANDWIDTH The area where Sounding RS is hopped.
DURATION The transmission duration of Sounding RS.

- 1: Sounding RS is transmitted repeatedly until it is disabled.

Command Description
C2181 CHANGE DPHY RLF INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DPHY-RLF: QCI, [DEDICATED_RLFSETUP], [T301], [T310], [N310], [T311],
[N311];
Command Description
Changes the information on the dedicated PHY RLF. The parameter value used to determine
RLF can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
DEDICATED_R Whether the dedicated RLF is used. ci_Config_Release/ NONE ci_Confi
LFSETUP - ci_Config_Release: The RLF function is ci_Config_Setup/ g_Relea
not used. se
- ci_Config_Setup: The RLF function is
used.
T301 Timer t301 of a cell in the eNB. ci_t_301_ms100/ NONE ci_t_301
ci_t_301_ms200/ _ms200
ci_t_301_ms300/ 0
ci_t_301_ms400/
ci_t_301_ms600/
ci_t_301_ms1000/
ci_t_301_ms1500/
ci_t_301_ms2000/
ci_t_310_ms50/ _ms200
ci_t_310_ms100/ 0
ci_t_310_ms200/
ci_t_310_ms500/
ci_t_310_ms1000/
ci_t_310_ms2000/
N310 N310 value of a cell in the eNB. ci_n_310_n1/ NONE ci_n_31
ci_n_310_n2/ 0_n10
ci_n_310_n3/
ci_n_310_n4/
ci_n_310_n6/
ci_n_310_n8/
ci_n_310_n10/
ci_n_310_n20/


ci_t_311_ms3000/ _ms100
ci_t_311_ms5000/ 0
ci_t_311_ms10000/
ci_t_311_ms15000/
ci_t_311_ms20000/
ci_t_311_ms30000/
N311 N311 value of a cell in the eNB. ci_n_311_n1/ NONE ci_n_31
ci_n_311_n2/ 1_n1
ci_n_311_n3/
ci_n_311_n4/
ci_n_311_n5/
ci_n_311_n6/
ci_n_311_n8/
ci_n_311_n10/

DEDICATED_RLFSETUP Whether the dedicated RLF is used.

- ci_Config_Release: The RLF function is not used.
- ci_Config_Setup: The RLF function is used.

Command Description
C2182 CHANGE DRX INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DRX-INF: QCI, [DRX_CONFIG_SETUP], [ON_DURATION_TIMER_NORMAL],
[DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_NORMAL], [DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_NORMAL],
[LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_NORMAL], [SHORT_DRXCONFIG_SETUP],
[SHORT_DRXCYCLE_NORMAL], [DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_NORMAL],
[DRX_SELECTION_ORDER], [ON_DURATION_TIMER_REPORT_CGI],
[DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_REPORT_CGI], [DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_REPORT_CGI],
[LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_REPORT_CGI], [SHORT_DRXCYCLE_REPORT_CGI],
[DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_REPORT_CGI];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the DRX. Information on whether to use the
DRX, the longDRX cycle, whether to use the short DRX, and the short DRX cycle can be
changed.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
DRX_CONFIG_ Whether to use the DRX. ci_Drx_Config_Release NONE ci_Drx_
SETUP - ci_Config_Release: DRX is not used. /ci_Drx_Config_Setup/ Config_
- ci_Config_Setup: normal DRX profile is ci_Drx_Config_reportC Release
used in normal status and reportCGI DRX GI/
profile is used in reportCGI status.
- ci_Config_reportCGI: DRX is not used in
normal status and reportCGI DRX profile is
used in reportCGI status.


ON_DURATION Timer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in ci_onDurationTimer_psf NONE ci_onDu
_TIMER_NOR normal status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in 1/ rationTi
MAL number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for 1 ci_onDurationTimer_psf mer_psf
PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub- 2/ 10
frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) ci_onDurationTimer_psf
{psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8, 3/
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, ci_onDurationTimer_psf
psf80, psf100, psf200} Available values are 4/
greater than or equal to 10ms. ci_onDurationTimer_psf
5/
ci_onDurationTimer_psf
6/
8/
10/
20/
30/
40/
50/
60/
80/
100/
200/

Command Description

DRX_INACTIVI Timer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in ci_drx_InactivityTimer_ NONE ci_drx_I
TY_TIMER_NO normal status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in psf1/ nactivity
RMAL number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for 1 ci_drx_InactivityTimer_ Timer_p
PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub- psf2/ sf100
frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
{psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8, psf3/
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
psf80, psf100, psf200, psf300, psf500, psf4/
psf750, psf1280, psf1920, psf2560, ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
spare10, spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, psf5/
spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1} ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
Available Value is greater than or equal to psf6/
10ms ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
psf8/
ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
psf10/
psf20/
psf30/
psf40/
psf50/
psf60/
psf80/
psf100/
psf200/
psf300/
psf500/
psf750/
psf1280/
psf1920/
psf2560/


DRX_RETRAN The timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX ci_drx_Retransmission NONE ci_drx_
SMISSION_TIM mode in normal status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, Timer_sf1/ Retrans
ER_NORMAL psf6, psf8, psf16, psf24, psf33} ci_drx_Retransmission mission
Timer_sf2/ Timer_s
ci_drx_Retransmission f16
Timer_sf4/
ci_drx_Retransmission
Timer_sf6/
Timer_sf8/
Timer_sf16/
Timer_sf24/
Timer_sf33/
LONG_DRXCY The long DRX cycle and drx start offset val- ci_sf10_chosen/ NONE ci_sf160
CLE_START_O ues to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode ci_sf20_chosen/ _chosen
FFSET_TYPE_ in normal status. The unit of the long DRX ci_sf32_chosen/
NORMAL cycle is a sub-frame. If the short DRX- ci_sf40_chosen/
Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is set ci_sf64_chosen/
to a multiple of the short DRX-Cycle. The ci_sf80_chosen/
DRX start offset is set to an integer. For the ci_sf128_chosen/
TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-frame can ci_sf160_chosen/
be set. {sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, ci_sf256_chosen/
sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640, ci_sf320_chosen/
sf1024, sf1280, sf2048, sf2560} Available ci_sf512_chosen/
Value: multiple of 10ms ci_sf640_chosen/
ci_sf1024_chosen/
ci_sf1280_chosen/
ci_sf2048_chosen/
ci_sf2560_chosen/
SHORT_DRXC Short DRX mode. ci_Config_Release/ NONE ci_Confi
ONFIG_SETUP - ci_Config_Release: Short DRX is not ci_Config_Setup/ g_Relea
used. se

Command Description

SHORT_DRXC The short DRX cycle to run onDuration- ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf2 NONE ci_short
YCLE_NORMA Timer in DRX mode in normal status. {sf2, / DRX_C
L sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf5 ycle_sf8
sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, / 0
sf640} Available Value: multiple of 10ms ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf8
/
ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf1
0/
6/
0/
2/
0/
4/
0/
28/
60/
56/
20/
12/
40/
DRX_SHORT_ The timer used to enter long DRX mode in 1 ~ 16 NONE 4
CYCLE_TIMER normal status.
_NORMAL
DRX_SELECTI Selection order per QCI to select DRX pro- 0 ~ 15 NONE 9
ON_ORDER file.


ON_DURATION Timer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in ci_onDurationTimer_psf NONE ci_onDu
_TIMER_REPO reportCGI status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value 1/ rationTi
RT_CGI in number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for ci_onDurationTimer_psf mer_psf
1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH 2/ 10
sub-frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) ci_onDurationTimer_psf
{psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8, 3/
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, ci_onDurationTimer_psf
psf80, psf100, psf200} Available values are 4/
greater than or equal to 10ms. ci_onDurationTimer_psf
5/
6/
8/
10/
20/
30/
40/
50/
60/
80/
100/
200/

Command Description

DRX_INACTIVI Timer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in ci_drx_InactivityTimer_ NONE ci_drx_I
TY_TIMER_RE reportCGI status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value psf1/ nactivity
PORT_CGI in number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for ci_drx_InactivityTimer_ Timer_p
1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH psf2/ sf100
sub-frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
{psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8, psf3/
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
psf80, psf100, psf200, psf300, psf500, psf4/
psf750, psf1280, psf1920, psf2560, ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
spare10, spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, psf5/
spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1} ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
Available Value is greater than or equal to psf6/
10ms ci_drx_InactivityTimer_
psf8/
psf10/
psf20/
psf30/
psf40/
psf50/
psf60/
psf80/
psf100/
psf200/
psf300/
psf500/
psf750/
psf1280/
psf1920/
psf2560/


DRX_RETRAN The timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX ci_drx_Retransmission NONE ci_drx_
SMISSION_TIM mode in reportCGI status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, Timer_sf1/ Retrans
ER_REPORT_ psf6, psf8, psf16, psf24, psf33} ci_drx_Retransmission mission
CGI Timer_sf2/ Timer_s
ci_drx_Retransmission f16
Timer_sf4/
Timer_sf6/
Timer_sf8/
Timer_sf16/
Timer_sf24/
Timer_sf33/
LONG_DRXCY The long DRX cycle and drx start offset val- ci_sf10_chosen/ NONE ci_sf160
CLE_START_O ues to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode ci_sf20_chosen/ _chosen
FFSET_TYPE_ in reportCGI status. The unit of the long ci_sf32_chosen/
REPORT_CGI DRX cycle is a sub-frame. If the short DRX- ci_sf40_chosen/
Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is set ci_sf64_chosen/
to a multiple of the short DRX-Cycle. The ci_sf80_chosen/
DRX start offset is set to an integer. For the ci_sf128_chosen/
TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-frame can ci_sf160_chosen/
be set. {sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, ci_sf256_chosen/
sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640, ci_sf320_chosen/
sf1024, sf1280, sf2048, sf2560} Available ci_sf512_chosen/
Value: multiple of 10ms ci_sf640_chosen/
ci_sf1024_chosen/
ci_sf1280_chosen/
ci_sf2048_chosen/
ci_sf2560_chosen/

Command Description

SHORT_DRXC The short DRX cycle to run onDuration- ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf2 NONE ci_short
YCLE_REPOR Timer in DRX mode in reportCGI status. / DRX_C
T_CGI {sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf5 ycle_sf8
sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, / 0
sf512, sf640} Available Value: multiple of ci_shortDRX_Cycle_sf8
10ms /
0/
6/
0/
2/
0/
4/
0/
28/
60/
56/
20/
12/
40/
DRX_SHORT_ The timer used to enter long DRX mode in 1 ~ 16 NONE 4
CYCLE_TIMER reportCGI status.
_REPORT_CGI

DRX_CONFIG_SETUP Whether to use the DRX.

- ci_Config_Release: DRX is not used.
- ci_Config_Setup: normal DRX profile is used in normal sta-
tus and reportCGI DRX profile is used in reportCGI status.
- ci_Config_reportCGI: DRX is not used in normal status and
reportCGI DRX profile is used in reportCGI status.
ON_DURATION_TIMER_NORMALTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in normal status. (5.7

in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames: psf1 for

1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub-frames and so on

(6.3.2 in TS 36.331) {psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6, psf8,
psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, psf80, psf100, psf200}
Available values are greater than or equal to 10ms.
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_NORMALTimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in normal status.

(5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames:
or equal to 10ms
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_NORMALThe timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in

normal status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, psf6, psf8, psf16, psf24, psf33}
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_NORMALThe long DRX cycle and drx start offset

values to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in normal status.
The unit of the long DRX cycle is a sub-frame. If the short
DRX-Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is set to a multiple
of the short DRX-Cycle. The DRX start offset is set to an inte-
ger. For the TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-frame can be set.
{sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320,
sf512, sf640, sf1024, sf1280, sf2048, sf2560} Available Value:
multiple of 10ms
SHORT_DRXCONFIG_SETUP Short DRX mode.

- ci_Config_Release: Short DRX is not used.
SHORT_DRXCYCLE_NORMAL The short DRX cycle to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in

normal status. {sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64,
sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640} Available Value:
multiple of 10ms
DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_NORMALThe timer used to enter long DRX mode in normal sta-

tus.
DRX_SELECTION_ORDER Selection order per QCI to select DRX profile.

Command Description
ON_DURATION_TIMER_REPORT_CGITimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in reportCGI sta-

tus. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames:
psf100, psf200} Available values are greater than or equal to
10ms.
DRX_INACTIVITY_TIMER_REPORT_CGITimer to monitor PDCCH in DRX mode in reportCGI

status. (5.7 in TS 36.321) Value in number of PDCCH sub-
frames: psf1 for 1 PDCCH subframe, psf2 for 2 PDCCH sub-
frames and so on (6.3.2 in TS 36.331) {psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4,
psf5, psf6, psf8, psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40, psf50, psf60, psf80,
or equal to 10ms
DRX_RETRANSMISSION_TIMER_REPORT_CGIThe timer used to monitor PDCCH in DRX

mode in reportCGI status. {psf1, psf2, psf4, psf6, psf8, psf16,
psf24, psf33}
LONG_DRXCYCLE_START_OFFSET_TYPE_REPORT_CGIThe long DRX cycle and drx start

offset values to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode in
reportCGI status. The unit of the long DRX cycle is a sub-
frame. If the short DRX-Cycle is set to a value, this parameter is
set to a multiple of the short DRX-Cycle. The DRX start offset
is set to an integer. For the TDD, DL sub-frame or UL sub-
frame can be set. {sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, sf128,
sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640, sf1024, sf1280, sf2048,
sf2560} Available Value: multiple of 10ms
SHORT_DRXCYCLE_REPORT_CGIThe short DRX cycle to run onDurationTimer in DRX mode

in reportCGI status. {sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40,
sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640} Available
Value: multiple of 10ms
DRX_SHORT_CYCLE_TIMER_REPORT_CGIThe timer used to enter long DRX mode in

reportCGI status.

C2183 CHANGE DL SCHEDULER INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-DL-SCHED: CELL_NUM, [DL_MIMO_MODE], [ALPHA], [BETA], [GAMMA];
Command Description
Changes the configuration information of downlink scheduling for the MAC layer in the eNB.
Fairness, channel quality, and priority-related scheduler values (alpha, beta, and gamma) can be
changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
DL_MIMO_MO DL MIMO parameters. 0(SM/MU-MIMO 0 ~ 10 NONE 9
DE disable), 1(SM enable), 2(MU_MIMO
enable), 3(Test Mode: CL-SM default
mode), 4(Test Mode: CL-Rank1-Precoding
default mode), 5(Test Mode: OL-TxD
default mode), 6(Test Mode: OL-SM default
mode), 7(Test Mode: Dual-layer transmis-
sion default mode), 8(Beamforming
enable), 9(Dual-layer beamforming
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 1
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 1
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 4

DL_MIMO_MODE DL MIMO parameters. 0(SM/MU-MIMO disable), 1(SM

enable), 2(MU_MIMO enable), 3(Test Mode: CL-SM default
mode), 4(Test Mode: CL-Rank1-Precoding default mode),
5(Test Mode: OL-TxD default mode), 6(Test Mode: OL-SM
default mode), 7(Test Mode: Dual-layer transmission default
mode), 8(Beamforming enable), 9(Dual-layer beamforming

Command Description

C2184 CHANGE UL SCHEDULER INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-UL-SCHED: CELL_NUM, [ALPHA], [BETA], [GAMMA];
Command Description
Changes the configuration information of uplink scheduling for the MAC layer in the eNB. Fair-
ness, channel quality, and priority-related scheduler values (alpha, beta, and gamma) can be
changed.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
ALPHA Fairness weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 1
BETA Channel quality weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 1
GAMMA Priority weight in PF scheduler. 0 ~ 15 NONE 4


Command Description
C2185 CHANGE TRANSPORT CH BSR INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-TRCH-BSR: QCI, [PERIODIC_BSRTIMER], [RETX_BSRTIMER];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the Transport Channel BSR. BSR-related
timer values can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.


PERIODIC_BS The Periodic BSR Timer type in accor- ci_periodicBSR_Timer_ NONE ci_perio
RTIMER dance with the PDB per QCI. For multiple sf5/ dicBSR
bearers, the PDB with the smallest value is ci_periodicBSR_Timer_ _Timer_
used. sf10/ sf5
ci_periodicBSR_Timer_
sf16/
sf20/
sf32/
sf40/
sf64/
sf80/
sf128/
sf160/
sf320/
sf640/
sf1280/
sf2560/
infinity/
RETX_BSRTIM The Retx BSR Timer type in accordance ci_retxBSR_Timer_sf32 NONE ci_retxB
ER with the PDB per QCI. For multiple bearers, 0/ SR_Tim
the PDB with the smallest value is used. ci_retxBSR_Timer_sf64 er_sf32
0/ 0
ci_retxBSR_Timer_sf12
80/
60/
20/
240/

PERIODIC_BSRTIMER The Periodic BSR Timer type in accordance with the PDB per
QCI. For multiple bearers, the PDB with the smallest value is
used.

Command Description
RETX_BSRTIMER The Retx BSR Timer type in accordance with the PDB per QCI.
For multiple bearers, the PDB with the smallest value is used.

C2186 CHANGE TRANSPORT CH INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-TRCH-INF: CELL_NUM, [MAX_HARQTX], [TTI_BUNDLING], [TTI_BUNDLING_BAND],
[PERIODIC_PHRTIMER], [DL_PATHLOSS_CHANGE], [MAX_HARQTX_BUNDLING];
Command Description
Changes the information required to operate transport channels. The maximum UL HARQ
retransmission count, whether to use TTI bundling, the TTI bundling band, the PHR transmis-
sion interval, and the dlPathlossChange value can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

MAX_HARQTX The max HARQ Tx per cell. The UE exe- ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n1/ NONE ci_max
cutes PUSCH retransmission in accor- ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n2/ HARQ_
dance with this parameter value. ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n3/ Tx_n5
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n4/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n5/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n6/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n7/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n8/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n10/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n12/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n16/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n20/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n24/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n28/
TTI_BUNDLIN Whether to use TTI bundling. False/True/ NONE False
G - False: ttiBundling is not used.
TTI_BUNDLIN The maximum number of RBs per cell to 0 ~ 100 NONE 100
G_BAND which the users for whom TTI_BUNDLING
is set to true can be assigned.

Command Description

PERIODIC_PH periodicPHRTimer per cell. ci_periodicPHR_Timer_ NONE ci_perio
RTIMER sf10/ dicPHR
ci_periodicPHR_Timer_ _Timer_
sf20/ sf100
ci_periodicPHR_Timer_
sf50/
sf100/
sf200/
sf500/
sf1000/
infinity/
DL_PATHLOSS The dLPathloss Change value per cell. ci_dl_PathlossChange_ NONE ci_dl_P
_CHANGE dB1/ athloss
ci_dl_PathlossChange_ Change
dB3/ _dB6
ci_dl_PathlossChange_
dB6/
ci_dl_PathlossChange_
infinity/
MAX_HARQTX The maximum HARQ transmission count in ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n1/ NONE ci_max
_BUNDLING sub_frame bundling mode. ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n2/ HARQ_
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n3/ Tx_n20
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n4/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n5/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n6/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n7/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n8/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n10/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n12/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n16/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n20/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n24/
ci_maxHARQ_Tx_n28/

MAX_HARQTX The max HARQ Tx per cell. The UE executes PUSCH retrans-
mission in accordance with this parameter value.
TTI_BUNDLING Whether to use TTI bundling.

- False: ttiBundling is not used.
TTI_BUNDLING_BAND The maximum number of RBs per cell to which the users for
whom TTI_BUNDLING is set to true can be assigned.

PERIODIC_PHRTIMER periodicPHRTimer per cell.
DL_PATHLOSS_CHANGE The dLPathloss Change value per cell.
MAX_HARQTX_BUNDLING The maximum HARQ transmission count in sub_frame bun-

dling mode.

Command Description
C2187 CHANGE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-FA: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [STATUS], [EARFCN_UL], [EARFCN_DL], [PRIOR-
ITY], [Q_RX_LEV_MIN], [P_MAX_USAGE], [P_MAX], [T_RESELECTION], [SF_USAGE],
[T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM], [T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH], [S_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE],
[S_INTRA_SEARCH], [S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE], [S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH],
[THRESH_SERVING_LOW], [THRESH_XHIGH], [THRESH_XLOW], [MESA_BANDWIDTH_USAGE],
[MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH], [PRESENCE_ANT_PORT1], [NEIGH_CELL_CONFIG],
[Q_OFFSET_FREQ], [OFFSET_FREQ], [S_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGE],
[S_INTRA_SEARCH_P], [S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q], [S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGE],
[S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P], [S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q], [Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9_USAGE],
[Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9], [THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9_USAGE],
[THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9], [THRESH_XHIGH_QREL9], [THRESH_XLOW_QREL9], [MCC0],
[MNC0], [PREFERENCE0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [PREFERENCE1], [MCC2], [MNC2],
[PREFERENCE2], [MCC3], [MNC3], [PREFERENCE3], [MCC4], [MNC4], [PREFERENCE4],
[MCC5], [MNC5], [PREFERENCE5];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the EUTRA FA Priority Information. When
the Cell Num and fa Index parameter values are set as input values, the EUTRA FA information
registered to the specified cell in the eNB can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

STATUS Whether the EUTRA FA is valid ID. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE EQUIP
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
EARFCN_UL Uplink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600

Channel Number.
EARFCN_DL Downlink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Fre- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
quency Channel Number.
PRIORITY Priority of EUTRA FA. 0~7 NONE 7
Q_RX_LEV_MI The minimum RX level required in a cell in -70 ~ -22 dBm -59
N dBm units.


P_MAX_USAG Whether to use pMax. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
E - CI_no_use: pMax value is not used.
P_MAX The maximum TX power level in the UE. -30 ~ 33 dBm 0

T_RESELECTI Reselection timer value. 0~7 sec 1
ON
SF_USAGE Whether to use scaling factors. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
- CI_no_use: se
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are
not used.
- CI_use:
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are
used.
T_RESELECTI The medium timer value of the reselection ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot
ON_SF_MEDIU scaling factors. ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
M
T_RESELECTI The high timer value of the reselection scal- ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot
ON_SF_HIGH ing factors. ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
S_INTRA_SEA Whether to use sIntraSearch. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
RCH_USAGE - CI_no_use: sIntraSearch is not used.
S_INTRA_SEA The threshold for intra-frequency measure- 0 ~ 31 dB 26

RCH ment.
S_NON_INTRA Whether to use sNonIntraSearch. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
_SEARCH_US - CI_no_use: sNonIntraSearch is not used.
AGE - CI_use: sNonIntraSearch is used.
S_NON_INTRA The threshold for inter-RAT and intra-fre- 0 ~ 31 dB 26

_SEARCH quency measurement.
THRESH_SER The low threshold for serving frequency 0 ~ 31 dB 1
VING_LOW during reselection evaluation.
THRESH_XHIG The threshold used in the UE to reselect a 0 ~ 31 dB 31
H frequency whose priority is higher than the
current camped frequency.
THRESH_XLO The threshold used to reselect low-priority 0 ~ 31 dB 31
W frequency from high-priority frequency.
MESA_BANDW Whether to use measurementBandwidth. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
IDTH_USAGE - CI_no_use: measurementBandwidth is
not used.
MEASUREMEN The maximum measurement bandwidth ci_mbw6/ci_mbw15/ NONE ci_mbw

T_BANDWIDT allowed for carrier frequency. ci_mbw25/ci_mbw50/ 6
H ci_mbw75/ci_mbw100/
PRESENCE_A Whether Antenna Port1 exists. False/True/ NONE 1
NT_PORT1 - False: Antenna Port1 does not exist.
NEIGH_CELL_ The neighboring cell settings. 0~3 NONE 1

CONFIG

Command Description

Q_OFFSET_FR Frequency offset value applied to q-Offset- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
EQ Freq in SIB5. ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
ci_dB-8/ci_dB-6/ci_dB-
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB0/ci_dB1/ci_dB2/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
OFFSET_FRE Frequency offset value applied to offset- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
Q Freq in RRC Connection Reconfiguration. ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
S_INTRA_SEA Whether to use the sIntraSearch for Rel-9. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
RCH_REL9_US - CI_no_use: sIntraSearch is not used. se
AGE - CI_use: sIntraSearch is used.
S_INTRA_SEA The threshold P for an intra-frequency 0 ~ 31 dB 31

RCH_P measurement in Rel-9.
S_INTRA_SEA The threshold Q for an intra-frequency 0 ~ 31 dB 31
RCH_Q measurement in Rel-9.
S_NON_INTRA Whether to use sNonIntraSearch for Rel-9. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
_SEARCH_RE - CI_no_use: sNonIntraSearch is not used. se
L9_USAGE - CI_use: sNonIntraSearch is used.
S_NON_INTRA The threshold P for inter-RAT and an intra- 0 ~ 31 dB 31

_SEARCH_P frequency measurement.
S_NON_INTRA The threshold Q for inter-RAT and an intra- 0 ~ 31 dB 31
_SEARCH_Q frequency measurement.
Q_QUAL_MIN_ Whether to use the qQualMin for Rel-9. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
REL9_USAGE - CI_no_use: SqQualMin is not used. se
Q_QUAL_MIN_ qQualMin value for Rel-9. -34 ~ -3 NONE -3

REL9
THRESH_SER Whether to use the threshServingLowQ for CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
VING_LOW_Q Rel-9. se
REL9_USAGE - CI_no_use: threshServingLowQ is not
used.


THRESH_SER threshServingLowQ value for Rel-9. 0 ~ 31 dB 31
VING_LOW_Q
REL9
H_QREL9 frequency whose priority is higher than the
current camped frequency in Rel-9.
W_QREL9 frequency from high-priority frequency in
Rel-9.
MCC0 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that com- 3 NONE 450
prises Public Land Mobile Network
(PLMN). FA have the Preference of
MNC0 MNC that comprises PLMN.FA have the 3 NONE 08
Preference of Preference0 for PLMN#0
PREFERENCE Preference of PLMN #0 for FA. not_allowed_prefer/ NONE preferre
0 allowed_prefer/ d_prefer
preferred_prefer/
MCC1 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that com- 3 NONE FFF
MNC1 MNC that comprises PLMN.FA have the 3 NONE FFF
PREFERENCE Preference of PLMN #1 for FA. not_allowed_prefer/ NONE not_allo
1 allowed_prefer/ wed_pr
preferred_prefer/ efer

Command Description



- EQUIP: Valid ID.
EARFCN_UL Uplink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number.
EARFCN_DL Downlink E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Num-

ber.
PRIORITY Priority of EUTRA FA.
P_MAX_USAGE Whether to use pMax.

- CI_no_use: pMax value is not used.
P_MAX The maximum TX power level in the UE.
T_RESELECTION Reselection timer value.

- CI_no_use: T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are not used.

- CI_use: T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM and

T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH values are used.
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM The medium timer value of the reselection scaling factors.
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH The high timer value of the reselection scaling factors.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE Whether to use sIntraSearch.

S_INTRA_SEARCH The threshold for intra-frequency measurement.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_USAGE Whether to use sNonIntraSearch.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH The threshold for inter-RAT and intra-frequency measurement.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW The low threshold for serving frequency during reselection

evaluation.


MESA_BANDWIDTH_USAGE Whether to use measurementBandwidth.

- CI_no_use: measurementBandwidth is not used.
MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH The maximum measurement bandwidth allowed for carrier fre-

quency.
PRESENCE_ANT_PORT1 Whether Antenna Port1 exists.

- False: Antenna Port1 does not exist.
NEIGH_CELL_CONFIG The neighboring cell settings.
Q_OFFSET_FREQ Frequency offset value applied to q-OffsetFreq in SIB5.

Command Description
OFFSET_FREQ Frequency offset value applied to offsetFreq in RRC Connec-

tion Reconfiguration.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGEWhether to use the sIntraSearch for Rel-9.

S_INTRA_SEARCH_P The threshold P for an intra-frequency measurement in Rel-9.
S_INTRA_SEARCH_Q The threshold Q for an intra-frequency measurement in Rel-9.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_REL9_USAGEWhether to use sNonIntraSearch for Rel-9.

S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_P The threshold P for inter-RAT and an intra-frequency measure-

ment.
S_NON_INTRA_SEARCH_Q The threshold Q for inter-RAT and an intra-frequency measure-

ment.
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9_USAGE Whether to use the qQualMin for Rel-9.

- CI_no_use: SqQualMin is not used.
Q_QUAL_MIN_REL9 qQualMin value for Rel-9.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9_USAGEWhether to use the threshServingLowQ for Rel-9.

- CI_no_use: threshServingLowQ is not used.
THRESH_SERVING_LOW_QREL9threshServingLowQ value for Rel-9.















Command Description


C2188 CHANGE MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-MEAS-FUNC: CELL_NUM, [S_MEASURE], [SF_USAGE], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_MEDIUM],
[TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_HIGH];
Command Description
Changes the measurement information registered in a cell in the eNB. When the Cell Num
parameter value is set as an input value, the Meas Config information for the specified cell can
be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

S_MEASURE The quality threshold of the serving cell 0 ~ 97 dBm 80
used by the UE to control measurement for
the intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and
SF_USAGE Whether to use scaling factors. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
- CI_no_use: Scaling factor is not used. se
TIME_TO_TRI SpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot

GGER_SF_ME parameter values that control mobility when ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
DIUM the UE is at a medium speed.
- ci_oDot25: 0.25 is used for the medium
timer.
timer.
timer.
- ci_1Dot0: 1.0 is used for the medium
timer.
TIME_TO_TRI SpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot
GGER_SF_HIG parameter values that control mobility when ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
H the UE is at a high speed.
- ci_oDot25: 0.25 is used for the high
timer.
timer.

Command Description

S_MEASURE The quality threshold of the serving cell used by the UE to con-
trol measurement for the intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and

TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_MEDIUMSpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the parameter values that

control mobility when the UE is at a medium speed.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER_SF_HIGH SpeedStateScaleFactors used to scale the parameter values that

control mobility when the UE is at a high speed.

C2189 CHANGE MEASUREMENT GAP INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CHG-MSGAP-INF: [GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_FA], [GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_RAT],
[GAP_USE_FOR_ANR], [GAP_PATTERN_FOR_ANR];
Command Description
Changes the measurement gap information registered in a cell in the eNB. When the DB Index
parameter value is entered as an input value, the gap patterns for Inter FA, Inter RAT, and ANR
for the specified DB can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

GAP_PATTERN Measurement gap pattern used for inter- gapPattern0/ NONE gapPatt
_FOR_INTER_ frequency measurement. The default is gapPattern1/ ern0
FA gapPattern0.
GAP_PATTERN The measurement gap pattern used for gapPattern0/ NONE gapPatt
_FOR_INTER_ inter-RAT measurement. The default is gapPattern1/ ern0
RAT gapPattern0.
GAP_USE_FO Whether the measurement gap is used for False/True/ NONE False
R_ANR the SON ANR function. The default is
False.
GAP_PATTERN The measurement gap pattern used for gapPattern0/ NONE gapPatt
_FOR_ANR SON ANR. The default is gapPattern0. gapPattern1/ ern0

GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_FA Measurement gap pattern used for inter-frequency measure-

Command Description
GAP_PATTERN_FOR_INTER_RATThe measurement gap pattern used for inter-RAT measure-

GAP_USE_FOR_ANR Whether the measurement gap is used for the SON ANR func-
tion. The default is False.
GAP_PATTERN_FOR_ANR The measurement gap pattern used for SON ANR. The default
is gapPattern0.

C2190 CHANGE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-FA: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [STATUS], [DUPLEX_TYPE], [UARFCN_UL],
[UARFCN_DL], [PRIORITY], [THRESH_XHIGH], [THRESH_XLOW], [Q_RX_LEV_MIN],
[P_MAX_UTRA], [Q_QUAL_MIN], [OFFSET_FREQ], [THRESH_XHIGH_QREL9],
[THRESH_XLOW_QREL9];
Command Description
Changes the UTRA FA priority information. When the Cell Num and fa Index parameter values
are set as input values, the UTRAN FA information registered to the specified cell in the eNB
can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

STATUS Whether the EUTRA FA is valid ID. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE EQUIP
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex mode information on a cell. ci_FDD/ci_TDD/ NONE ci_FDD

Enter either FDD or TDD.
UARFCN_UL Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency 0 ~ 16383 NONE 9862

Channel Number.
UARFCN_DL Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency 0 ~ 16383 NONE 10812
Channel Number.
PRIORITY Priority information on the UTRA FA. 0~7 NONE 4
Q_RX_LEV_MI The minimum RX level required in a cell in -60 ~ -13 dBm -54
N dBm units.
P_MAX_UTRA The maximum RF output power in the UE. -50 ~ 33 dBm 0

Command Description

Q_QUAL_MIN The minimum quality level required in -24 ~ 0 dB -20
UTRA FDD cells.
OFFSET_FRE The offset applied to UTRA carrier fre- -15 ~ 15 dBm 0
Q quency.
Rel-9.


- EQUIP: Valid ID.

TDD.
UARFCN_UL Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number.



OFFSET_FREQ The offset applied to UTRA carrier frequency.



Command Description
C2193 CHANGE EUTRA A1CRITERIA INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-A1CNF: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [A1_THRESHOLD_RSRP],
[A1_THRESHOLD_RSRQ], [HYSTERESIS], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER], [TRIGGER_QUANTITY],
[REPORT_QUANTITY], [MAX_REPORT_CELL], [REPORT_INTERVAL], [REPORT_AMOUNT];
Command Description
Changes the EUTRA A1 criteria information. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameter
values are set as input values, the EUTRAN A1 event report information registered to the speci-
fied E-UTRAN served cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

rently used to deactivate measurement Deact/ rpose-
gap. ci_A1PurposeSpare_1/ Meas-
- ci_A1PurposeMeasGapDeat. : Deacti- ci_A1PurposeSpare_2/ GapDea
vates the gap. ct
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use Event A1. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive

E - Inactive: Event A1 is not used.
A1_THRESHO RSRP threshold used in the EUTRA mea- 0 ~ 97 dBm 35

LD_RSRP surement report triggering condition for
Event A1.
A1_THRESHO RSRQ threshold used in the EUTRA mea- 0 ~ 34 dB 32
LD_RSRQ surement report triggering condition for
Event A1.
HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave con- 0 ~ 30 NONE 0
dition of Event A1.


TIME_TO_TRI timeToTrigger value for Event A1. The time- ci_TimeToTrigger_ms0/ ms ci_Time
GGER ToTrigger value is the period of time that ci_TimeToTrigger_ms4 ToTrigg
must be met for the UE to trigger a mea- 0/ er_ms4
surement report. ci_TimeToTrigger_ms6 80
4/
ci_TimeToTrigger_ms8
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
TRIGGER_QU Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a ci_rsrp/ci_rsrq/ NONE ci_rsrp
ANTITY triggering condition for Event A1. Either
RSRP or RSRQ is assigned.
REPORT_QUA The quantity information included in a mea- ci_sameAsTriggerQuan NONE ci_both
NTITY surement report for Event A1. It can be the tity/ci_both/
same value as the trigger quantity or be set
to include both of the RSRP and RSRQ val-
ues.
MAX_REPORT The maximum number of cells included in a 1~8 NONE 8
_CELL measurement report for Event A1.

Command Description

REPORT_INTE The reporting interval of a measurement ci_ReportInterval_ms12 ms ci_Repo
RVAL report for Event A1. 0/ rtInterva
ci_ReportInterval_ms24 l_ms240
0/
ci_ReportInterval_ms48
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
ci_ReportInterval_min1/
ci_ReportInterval_min1
2/
0/
0/
REPORT_AMO The number of measurement reports for ci_reportAmount_r1/ NONE ci_repor
UNT Event A1. ci_reportAmount_r2/ tAmount
ci_reportAmount_r4/ _r8
ci_reportAmount_r8/
ci_reportAmount_r16/
ci_reportAmount_infinit
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A1. It is currently used to deacti-
vate measurement gap.
- ci_A1PurposeMeasGapDeat. : Deactivates the gap.





surement report.




Command Description

TION
Command Format
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10

rently used to activate measurement gap Act/ rpose-
and PS-redirection. ci_A2PurposeRedirecti Meas-
- ci_A2PurposeMeasGapAct: Activates on/ GapAct
gap. ci_A2PurposeSpare_1/
- ci_A2PurposeRedirection: PS Redirecd- ci_A2PurposeSpare_2/
tion.
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use the Event A2. Inactive/Active/ NONE 1


Event A2.
Event A2.
dition of Event A2.


4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
ues.

Command Description

0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A2. It is currently used to activate
measurement gap and PS-redirection.
- ci_A2PurposeMeasGapAct: Activates gap.
- ci_A2PurposeRedirection: PS Redirecdtion.




surement report.




Command Description

TION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-A3CNF: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [A3_OFFSET],
[A3_REPORT_ON_LEAVE], [HYSTERESIS], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER], [TRIGGER_QUANTITY],
Command Description
Changes the EUTRA A3 criteria. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameter values are
set as input values, the EUTRAN A3 event report information registered to the specified E-
UTRAN served cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A3. It is cur- ci_A3PurposeIntraLteH NONE ci_A3Pu
rently used for intra-LTE handover and the andover/ rposeIn-
SON ANR function. ci_A3PurposeReportStr traLte-
- ci_A3PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra- ongestCells/ Handov
LTE handover. ci_A3PurposeSpare_2/ er
- ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells:
ICIC.
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use Event A3. Inactive/Active/ NONE Active

A3_OFFSET RSRP threshold used for triggering the -30 ~ 30 dB 6

EUTRA measurement report for Event A3.
A3_REPORT_ Indicates whether or not the UE shall initi- False/True/ NONE False
ON_LEAVE ate the measurement reporting procedure
when the leaving condition is met.
- False: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is
set to FALSE and UE is not report when the
leaving condition is met (default).
- True: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is set
to TRUE and UE shall report when the
leaving condition is met.
dition of Event A3.


4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
TRIGGER_QU Quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a ci_rsrp/ci_rsrq/ NONE ci_rsrq
REPORT_QUA The quantity information included in a mea- ci_sameAsTriggerQuan NONE ci_same
NTITY surement report for Event A3. It can be the tity/ci_both/ AsTrig-
same value as the trigger quantity or be set ger-
to include both of the RSRP and RSRQ val- Quantity
ues.

Command Description

0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

- ci_A3PurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.

A3_OFFSET RSRP threshold used for triggering the EUTRA measurement


A3_REPORT_ON_LEAVE Indicates whether or not the UE shall initiate the measurement

reporting procedure when the leaving condition is met.
- False: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is set to FALSE and UE is
not report when the leaving condition is met (default).

- True: a3ReportOnLeave parameter is set to TRUE and UE
shall report when the leaving condition is met.

surement report.




Command Description

TION
Command Format
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A4. It is cur- ci_A4PurposeANR_Spe NONE ci_A4Pu
rently used for intra-LTE handover and the cific/ rposeA
SON ANR function. ci_A4PurposeSpare_1/ NR_Spe
- ci_A4PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR. ci_A4PurposeSpare_2/ cific
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use Event A4. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive


Event A4.
Event A4.
dition of Event A4.


4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
ues.

Command Description

0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

- ci_A4PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR.





surement report.




Command Description

TION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-A5CNF: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRP],
[A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRP], [A5_THRESHOLD1_RSRQ], [A5_THRESHOLD2_RSRQ], [HYSTERE-
SIS], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER], [TRIGGER_QUANTITY], [REPORT_QUANTITY],
[MAX_REPORT_CELL], [REPORT_INTERVAL], [REPORT_AMOUNT];
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in cur- ci_A5PurposeIntraLteH NONE ci_A5Pu
rent use. The definition is made for later andover/ rposeIn-
use. ci_A5PurposeSpare_1/ traLte-
- ci_A5PurposeIntraLteHandover: Intra- ci_A5PurposeSpare_2/ Handov
LTE handover. er
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use the Event A5. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive

A5_THRESHO RSRP threshold1 used for triggering the 0 ~ 97 dBm 35

LD1_RSRP EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.
A5_THRESHO RSRP threshold2 used for triggering the 0 ~ 97 dBm 35
LD2_RSRP EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.
A5_THRESHO RSRQ threshold1 used for triggering the 0 ~ 34 dB 32
LD1_RSRQ EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.
A5_THRESHO RSRQ threshold2 used for triggering the 0 ~ 34 dB 32
LD2_RSRQ EUTRA measurement report for Event A5.
dition of Event A5.


4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
ues.

Command Description

0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using Event A5. Not in current use. The defini-
tion is made for later use.







surement report.




Command Description
C2198 CHANGE EUTRA PERIOD CRITERIA

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-PRD: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [TRIGGER_QUANTITY],
Command Description
Changes the EUTRA periodic criteria. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameter values
are set as input values, the EUTRAN Periodic Report information registered to the specified E-
UTRAN served cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the EUTRA periodic ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp NONE ci_Eutra
report. It is currently used for ReportStron- oseReportStrongest- Periodi-
gestCells(ICIC) and ReportCGI functions. Cells/ calPur-
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp poseRe
ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongest oseReportCGI/ port-
Cells: ICIC. ci_EutraPeriodicalPurp Stron-
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportCGI: oseSpare_1/ gestCell
Report CGI. s
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeSpare_1:
Reserved.
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use the EUTRA periodic report. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive
E - Inactive: The EUTRA periodic report is
not used.
- Active: The EUTRA periodic report is
used.
TRIGGER_QU The quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calcu- ci_rsrp/ci_rsrq/ NONE ci_rsrp
ANTITY late a triggering condition for the EUTRA
periodic report. Either RSRP or RSRQ is
assigned.
REPORT_QUA The quantity information included in a mea- ci_sameAsTriggerQuan NONE ci_same
NTITY surement report for the EUTRA periodic tity/ci_both/ AsTrig-
report. It can be the same value as the trigger-
ger quantity or be set to include both of the Quantity
RSRP and RSRQ values.


_CELL measurement report for the EUTRA peri-
odic report.
REPORT_INTE The reporting interval of a measurement ci_ReportInterval_ms12 NONE ci_Repo
RVAL report for the EUTRA periodic report. 0/ rtInterva
0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
UNT the EUTRA periodic report. ci_reportAmount_r2/ tAmount
ci_reportAmount_r4/ _infinity
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using the EUTRA periodic report. It is cur-
rently used for ReportStrongestCells(ICIC) and ReportCGI
functions.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeReportCGI: Report CGI.
- ci_EutraPeriodicalPurposeSpare_1: Reserved.

- Inactive: The EUTRA periodic report is not used.
- Active: The EUTRA periodic report is used.

Command Description
TRIGGER_QUANTITY The quantity (RSRP/RSRQ) used to calculate a triggering con-

dition for the EUTRA periodic report. Either RSRP or RSRQ is
assigned.

the EUTRA periodic report. It can be the same value as the trig-
ger quantity or be set to include both of the RSRP and RSRQ
values.

report for the EUTRA periodic report.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for the EUTRA

periodic report.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the EUTRA periodic

report.

C2199 CHANGE UTRAB1 CRITERIA INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-B1CNF: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_RSCP],
[B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_EC_NO], [HYSTERESIS], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER], [MAX_REPORT_CELL],
[REPORT_INTERVAL], [REPORT_AMOUNT];
Command Description
Changes the UTRA B1 criteria information. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameter
values are set as input values, the UTRAN B1 event report information registered to the speci-
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using UTRA Event B1 ci_B1PurposeANR_Spe NONE ci_B1Pu
information. It is currently used for the SON cific/ rposeA
ANR function. ci_B1PurposeSpare_1/ NR_Spe
- ci_B1PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR. ci_B1PurposeSpare_2/ cific
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use UTRA Event B1. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive

E - Inactive: UTRA Event B1 is not used.
B1_THRESHO UTRA RSCP threshold used in the Inter- -5 ~ 91 NONE 80

LD_UTRA_RS RAT measurement report triggering condi-
CP tion for the UTRA Event B1.
B1_THRESHO UTRA EcNO threshold used in the Inter- 0 ~ 49 NONE 20
LD_UTRA_EC_ RAT measurement report triggering condi-
NO tion for the UTRA Event B1.
dition of UTRA Event B1.

Command Description

TIME_TO_TRI timeToTrigger value for UTRA Event B1. ci_TimeToTrigger_ms0/ NONE ci_Time
GGER The timeToTrigger value is the period of ci_TimeToTrigger_ms4 ToTrigg
time that must be met for the UE to trigger 0/ er_ms8
a measurement report. ci_TimeToTrigger_ms6 0
4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
_CELL measurement report for UTRA Event B1.
RVAL report for UTRA Event B1. 0/ rtInterva
0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/


UNT UTRA Event B1. ci_reportAmount_r2/ tAmount
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using UTRA Event B1 information. It is cur-

rently used for the SON ANR function.
- ci_B1PurposeANR_Specific: For ANR.

B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_RSCP UTRA RSCP threshold used in the Inter-RAT measurement

B1_THRESHOLD_UTRA_EC_NO UTRA EcNO threshold used in the Inter-RAT measurement

HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave condition of UTRA Event

B1.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for UTRA Event B1. The timeToTrigger

value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to trigger
a measurement report.

report for UTRA Event B1.
REPORT_INTERVAL The reporting interval of a measurement report for UTRA Event

B1.

Command Description
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for UTRA Event B1.

C2200 CHANGE UTRAB2 CRITERIA INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-B2CNF: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRP],
[B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRQ], [B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_RSCP], [B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_EC_NO],
[HYSTERESIS], [TIME_TO_TRIGGER], [MAX_REPORT_CELL], [REPORT_INTERVAL],
[REPORT_AMOUNT], [TRIGGER_QUANTITY_EUTRA];
Command Description
Changes the UTRA B2 criteria information. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE parameter
values are set as input values, the UTRAN B2 event report information registered to the speci-
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA Event B2 ci_B2PurposeInterRatH NONE ci_B2Pu
information. It is currently used for the Inter- andover/ rposeIn-
RAT handover function. ci_B2PurposeSpare_1/ ter-
- ci_B2PurposeInterRatHandover: For ci_B2PurposeSpare_2/ RatHan
inter-RAT handover. dover
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use UTRA Event B2. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive

E - Inactive: UTRA Event B2 is not used.
B2_THRESHO RSRP threshold1 value used in the EUTRA 0 ~ 97 dBm 70

LD1_RSRP measurement report triggering condition for
the UTRA Event B2.
B2_THRESHO RSRQ threshold1 value used in the 0 ~ 34 dB 10
LD1_RSRQ EUTRA measurement report triggering
condition for the UTRA Event B2.
B2_THRESHO UTRA RSCP threshold2 value used in the -5 ~ 91 NONE 80
LD2_UTRA_RS Inter-RAT measurement report triggering
CP condition for the Event B2.
B2_THRESHO UTRA EcNO threshold2 value used in the 0 ~ 49 NONE 20
LD2_UTRA_EC Inter-RAT measurement report triggering
_NO condition for the Event B2.

Command Description

dition of the UTRA Event B2.
TIME_TO_TRI timeToTrigger value for the UTRA Event ci_TimeToTrigger_ms0/ NONE ci_Time
GGER B2. The timeToTrigger value is the period of ci_TimeToTrigger_ms4 ToTrigg
time that must be met for the UE to trigger 0/ er_ms8
a measurement report. ci_TimeToTrigger_ms6 0
4/
0/
00/
28/
60/
56/
20/
80/
12/
40/
024/
280/
560/
120/
_CELL measurement report for the UTRA Event
B2.


RVAL report for the UTRA Event B2. 0/ rtInterva
0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
UNT the UTRA Event B2. ci_reportAmount_r2/ tAmount
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/
TRIGGER_QU The EUTRA quantity used to calculate a ci_rsrp/ci_rsrq/ NONE ci_rsrp
ANTITY_EUTR triggering condition for the UTRA Event B2.
A - ci_rsrp: RSRP.
- ci_rsrq: RSRQ.

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA Event B2 information. It is

currently used for the Inter-RAT handover function.
- ci_B2PurposeInterRatHandover: For inter-RAT handover.


Command Description
B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRP RSRP threshold1 value used in the EUTRA measurement

B2_THRESHOLD1_RSRQ RSRQ threshold1 value used in the EUTRA measurement

B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_RSCP UTRA RSCP threshold2 value used in the Inter-RAT measure-

B2_THRESHOLD2_UTRA_EC_NO UTRA EcNO threshold2 value used in the Inter-RAT measure-

HYSTERESIS Hysteresis applied to entry and leave condition of the UTRA

Event B2.
TIME_TO_TRIGGER timeToTrigger value for the UTRA Event B2. The timeToTrig-
ger value is the period of time that must be met for the UE to
trigger a measurement report.

report for the UTRA Event B2.

Event B2.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the UTRA Event B2.
TRIGGER_QUANTITY_EUTRA The EUTRA quantity used to calculate a triggering condition

for the UTRA Event B2.
- ci_rsrp: RSRP.
- ci_rsrq: RSRQ.

C2201 CHANGE UTRA PERIOD CRITERIA

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-PRD: CELL_NUM, PURPOSE, [ACTIVE_STATE], [MAX_REPORT_CELL],
[REPORT_INTERVAL], [REPORT_AMOUNT];
Command Description
Changes the UTRA periodic criteria information. When the CELL_NUM and PURPOSE
parameter values are set as input values, the UTRAN Periodic Report information registered to
the specified E-UTRAN served cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA periodic ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos NONE ci_RatP
report. It is currently used for ReportStron- eReportStrongestCells/ eriodi-
gestCells(ICIC), ReportStrongestCellsFor- ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos calPur-
SON and ReportCGI functions. eReportStrongestCells- poseRe
- ForSON/ port-
ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestC ci_RatPeriodicalPurpos Stron-
ells: ICIC. eReportCGI/ gestCell
- s
ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestC
ellsForSON: SON.
ACTIVE_STAT Whether to use the EUTRA periodic report. Inactive/Active/ NONE Inactive
E - Inactive: The UTRA periodic report is not
used.

_CELL measurement report for the UTRA periodic
report.

Command Description

RVAL report for the UTRA periodic report. 0/ rtInterva
0/
0/
0/
24/
48/
20/
240/
2/
0/
0/
UNT the UTRA periodic report. ci_reportAmount_r2/ tAmount
ci_reportAmount_r8/
y/

PURPOSE The purpose for using the UTRA periodic report. It is currently
used for ReportStrongestCells(ICIC), ReportStrongestCellsFor-
SON and ReportCGI functions.
- ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCells: ICIC.
- ci_RatPeriodicalPurposeReportStrongestCellsForSON: SON.

- Inactive: The UTRA periodic report is not used.

report for the UTRA periodic report.

periodic report.
REPORT_AMOUNT The number of measurement reports for the UTRA periodic

report.

Command Description
C2208 CHANGE QUANTITY CONFIG EUTRA
Command Format
CHG-QUANT-EUTRA: CELL_NUM, [RSRP_FILTER_COEFFICIENT],
[RSRQ_FILTER_COEFFICIENT];
Command Description
Changes quantity settings for EUTRA measurement. When the Cell Num parameter value is set
as an input value, the EUTRAN-related measurement quantity information registered to the
specified cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

RSRP_FILTER The measurement filtering coefficient for ci_fc0/ci_fc1/ci_fc2/ NONE ci_fc8
_COEFFICIEN EUTRA RSRP. ci_fc3/ci_fc4/ci_fc5/
T ci_fc6/ci_fc7/ci_fc8/
RSRQ_FILTER The measurement filtering coefficient for ci_fc0/ci_fc1/ci_fc2/ NONE ci_fc8
_COEFFICIEN EUTRA RSRQ. ci_fc3/ci_fc4/ci_fc5/
T ci_fc6/ci_fc7/ci_fc8/

RSRP_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA RSRP.
RSRQ_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA RSRQ.

C2209 CHANGE QUANTITY CONFIG UTRA
Command Format
CHG-QUANT-UTRA: CELL_NUM, [MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_FDD], [MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_TDD],
[UTRA_FILTER_COEFFICIENT];
Command Description
Changes the quantity settings for UTRA FDD/TDD measurement. When the Cell Num parame-
ter value is set as an input value, the EUTRAN-related measurement quantity information regis-
tered to the specified cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

MEAS_QUANTI The measurement quantity information ci_cpich_RSCP/ NONE ci_cpich
TY_UTRA_FDD used for UTRA FDD measurement. Enter ci_cpich_EcN0/ _RSCP
this parameter to either cpich_RSCP or
cpich_EcN0.
MEAS_QUANTI The measurement quantity information ci_pccpch_RSCP/ NONE ci_pccp
TY_UTRA_TDD used for UTRA FDD measurement. This ch_RSC
parameter can have only one value: P
pccpch_RSCP.
UTRA_FILTER_ The measurement filtering coefficient for ci_fc0/ci_fc1/ci_fc2/ NONE ci_fc4
COEFFICIENT EUTRA. ci_fc3/ci_fc4/ci_fc5/

MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_FDD The measurement quantity information used for UTRA FDD

measurement. Enter this parameter to either cpich_RSCP or
cpich_EcN0.
MEAS_QUANTITY_UTRA_TDD The measurement quantity information used for UTRA FDD

measurement. This parameter can have only one value:

Command Description
pccpch_RSCP.
UTRA_FILTER_COEFFICIENT The measurement filtering coefficient for EUTRA.

C2215 CHANGE UTRA RESELECT INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-RESEL: CELL_NUM, [T_RESELECTION], [SF_USAGE],
[T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM], [T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH];
Command Description
Changes the UTRAN FA Reselection information. When the CELL_NUM parameter value is
set as an input value, the UTRAN Reselection information registered to the specified E-UTRAN
served cell can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
T_RESELECTI UTRAN FA Reselection timer value. The 0~7 sec 1
ON duration is in seconds.
SF_USAGE Whether to use the scaling factors related CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
to UTRAN FA reselection. se
T_RESELECTI The medium timer value of the scaling fac- ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot
ON_SF_MEDIU tors related to UTRAN FA reselection. ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
M - ci_oDot25: 0.25 is used for the medium
timer.
timer.
timer.
- ci_1Dot0: 1.0 is used for the medium
timer.
T_RESELECTI The high timer value of the scaling factors ci_oDot25/ci_oDot5/ NONE ci_1Dot
ON_SF_HIGH related to UTRAN FA reselection. ci_oDot75/ci_1Dot0/ 0
timer.
timer.

Command Description

T_RESELECTION UTRAN FA Reselection timer value. The duration is in sec-

onds.
SF_USAGE Whether to use the scaling factors related to UTRAN FA rese-

lection.
T_RESELECTION_SF_MEDIUM The medium timer value of the scaling factors related to

UTRAN FA reselection.
T_RESELECTION_SF_HIGH The high timer value of the scaling factors related to UTRAN
FA reselection.

C2217 CHANGE ROHC INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-ROHC-INF: QCI, [ROHC_SUPPORT], [MAX_CONTEXT_SESSION], [PROFILE0001],
[PROFILE0002], [PROFILE0003], [PROFILE0004], [PROFILE0006], [PROFILE0101],
[PROFILE0102], [PROFILE0103], [PROFILE0104];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values of the RObust Header Compression (ROHC) protocol. Informa-
tion on whether to operate the ROHC per QoS class and the supported profile types per QoS
class can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
ROHC_SUPPO Whether to support the ROHC. False/True/ NONE False
RT - False: ROHC is not used (default).

Command Description

MAX_CONTEX The maximum number of ROHC context ci_maxROHC_Session NONE ci_max
T_SESSION sessions supported per call. s_cs2/ ROHC_
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs2: Up to 2 ci_maxROHC_Session Session
sessions per call are supported. s_cs4/ s_cs16
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs4: Up to 4 ci_maxROHC_Session
sessions per call are supported. s_cs8/
ci_maxROHC_Session
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs8: Up to 8
s_cs12/
sessions per call are supported.
ci_maxROHC_Session
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs12: Supports
s_cs16/
up to 12 sessions per call are supported. ci_maxROHC_Session
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs16: Up to 16 s_cs24/
sessions per call are supported (default). ci_maxROHC_Session
sessions per call are supported. ci_maxROHC_Session
s_cs256/
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs128: Up to
ci_maxROHC_Session
128 sessions per call are supported.
s_cs512/
ci_maxROHC_Session
256 sessions per call are supported. s_cs1024/
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs512: Up to ci_maxROHC_Session
512 sessions per call are supported. s_cs16384/
PROFILE0001 Whether to support the profile0001 (RTP/ False/True/ NONE True
UDP/IP).
- True: The profile0001 is supported
(default).
PROFILE0002 Whether to support the profile0002 (UDP/ False/True/ NONE True
IP).
- False: The profile0002 is not supported
(default).
PROFILE0003 Whether to support the profile0003 (ESP/ False/True/ NONE False

IP).
(default).
PROFILE0004 Whether to support the profile0004 (IP). False/True/ NONE True

(default).


PROFILE0006 Whether to support the profile0006 (TCP/ False/True/ NONE False
IP).
(default).
PROFILE0101 Whether to support the profile0101 (RTP/ False/True/ NONE False

UDP/IP).
(default).
PROFILE0102 Whether to support the profile0102 (UDP/ False/True/ NONE False

IP).
(default).
PROFILE0103 Whether to support the profile0103 (ESP/ False/True/ NONE False

IP).
(default).
PROFILE0104 Whether to support the profile0104 (IP). False/True/ NONE False

(default).

ROHC_SUPPORT Whether to support the ROHC.

- False: ROHC is not used (default).
MAX_CONTEXT_SESSION The maximum number of ROHC context sessions supported per

call.
supported.
supported.
supported.
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs12: Supports up to 12 sessions per
call are supported.

Command Description

supported (default).
supported.
supported.
supported.
supported.
are supported.
are supported.
are supported.
are supported.
- ci_maxROHC_Sessions_cs16384: Up to 16384 sessions per
call are supported.

- True: The profile0001 is supported (default).



PROFILE0006 Whether to support the profile0006 (TCP/IP).







Command Description
C2218 CHANGE SECURITY INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SECU-INF: [INTEGRITY_EA_PRIOR], [CIPHER_EA_PRIOR];
Command Description
Changes the preferred integrity protection algorithm and ciphering algorithm of the eNB. When
the DB Index parameter value is set as an input value, the preferred integrity protection algo-
rithm and ciphering algorithm can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

INTEGRITY_E The integrity protection algorithm sup- EIA0/EIA1/EIA2/ NONE EIA2
A_PRIOR ported by the eNB.
- EIA0: NULL.
- EIA1: SNOW 3G.
- EIA2: AES.
CIPHER_EA_P The ciphering algorithm supported by the EEA0/EEA1/EEA2/ NONE EEA2

RIOR eNB.
- EEA0: NULL.
- EEA1: SNOW 3G.
- EEA2: AES.

INTEGRITY_EA_PRIOR The integrity protection algorithm supported by the eNB.
- EIA0: NULL.
- EIA1: SNOW 3G.
- EIA2: AES.
CIPHER_EA_PRIOR The ciphering algorithm supported by the eNB.

- EEA0: NULL.
- EEA1: SNOW 3G.
- EEA2: AES.

C2220 CHANGE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-NBR-ENB: NBR_ENB_INDEX, [STATUS], [NO_X2], [NO_HO], [ENB_ID], [ENB_TYPE],
[ENB_MCC], [ENB_MNC], [IP_VER], [NBR_ENB_IPV4], [NBR_ENB_IPV6],
[SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_IPV4], [SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_IPV6], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE],
[REMOTE_FLAG];
Command Description
Changes the neighboring eNB information required to operate a Neighbor eNB. This command
can change the neighboring eNB information by entering the NBR_ENB_INDEX parameter.
TIMEOUT 10

NBR_ENB_IND Index of the neighboring eNB. The value 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
EX entered when registering the neighboring
eNB is used.
STATUS The validity of the neighboring eNB infor- N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
mation. P
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
NO_X2 Whether to make X2 connection to the False/True/ NONE False

neighboring eNB.
- False: X2 connection with the neighbor-
ing eNB is made.
- True: X2 connection to the neighboring
eNB is not made.
NO_HO Whether to perform handover to the neigh- False/True/ NONE False
boring eNB.
- False: Handover to the neighboring eNB
is performed.
- True: Handover to the neighboring eNB is
not performed.
ENB_ID The eNB ID represents the neighboring 0 ~ 268435455 NONE 0
eNB. If the enbType value is macro eNB,
20 bit of the value is eNB ID. If the enbType
value is home eNB, 28 bit of the value is
eNB ID.
ENB_TYPE eNB type of the neighboring eNB. ci_Macro_eNB/ NONE ci_Macr
- ci_Macro_eNB: Indicates the macro eNB. ci_Home_eNB/ o_eNB

Command Description

ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) that repre- 3 NONE 450
sents the neighboring eNB. It is a three-
digit number with each digit being from 0 to
9.
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) that repre- 3 NONE 08
digit or two-digit number with each digit
being from 0 to 9.
IP_VER The IP version, which is the IP address of IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
the neighboring eNB.
NBR_ENB_IPV Enter the IP address of the neighboring IPv4 Address NONE -
4 eNB in the IP version 4 format.
SECONDARY_ Enter the secondary IP address of the IPv4 Address NONE -
NBR_ENB_IPV neighboring eNB in the IP version 4 format.
4
6
ADMINISTRATI This parameter defines Neighbor eNB Link locked/unlocked/shut- NONE unlocke
VE_STATE Status tingDown/ d
REMOTE_FLA This parameter defines the target eNB is False/True/ NONE False
G managed local EMS or other EMS


- EQUIP: Valid ID.






9.

being from 0 to 9.

format.

format.

version 4 format.

version 6 format.
other EMS

Command Description
C2221 CHANGE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-NBR-EUTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX, [STATUS], [ENB_ID], [FEMTO_INDICATOR],
[VIRTUAL_INDICATOR], [TARGET_CELL_NUM], [ENB_TYPE], [ENB_MCC], [ENB_MNC],
[PHY_CELL_ID], [TAC], [MCC0], [MNC0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [MCC2], [MNC2], [MCC3],
[MNC3], [MCC4], [MNC4], [MCC5], [MNC5], [EARFCN_UL], [EARFCN_DL],
[BANDWIDTH_UL], [BANDWIDTH_DL], [IND_OFFSET], [QOFFSET_CELL],
[IS_REMOVE_ALLOWED], [IS_HOALLOWED];
Command Description
Changes information on E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. This command can change
information on E-UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX
parameter values.
TIMEOUT 10

RELATION_IDX Database index of E-UTRAN neighboring 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
cell.
STATUS The validity of the E-UTRAN neighboring N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
cell information. P
- N_EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring
cell information is invalid ID.
- EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring cell
information is valid ID.
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which E-UTRAN 0 ~ 268435455 NONE 0
neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. If the
enbType value is macro eNB, 20 bit of the
value is eNB ID. If the enbType value is
home eNB, 28 bit of the value is eNB ID. It
is used when creating a cell identifier.
FEMTO_INDIC The femto indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor False/True/ NONE False
ATOR cell.
- True: Femto cell.
- False: Marco cell.
VIRTUAL_INDI The cloud indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor False/True/ NONE False

CATOR cell.
- True: Cloud macro cell.
- False: General macro cell.


TARGET_CELL The local cell ID of E-UTRAN neighboring 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
_NUM cell to the eNB. It is used when creating a
cell identifier.
ENB_TYPE The type of the eNB to which E-UTRAN ci_Macro_eNB/ NONE ci_Macr
neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. ci_Home_eNB/ o_eNB
ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) of the eNB to 3 NONE 450

which E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the
eNB belongs. It is a three-digit number with
each digit being from 0 to 9.
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) of the eNB to 3 NONE 08
eNB belongs. It is a three-digit or two-digit
number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
PHY_CELL_ID The physical cell ID of E-UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 503 NONE 1
ing cell to the eNB.
TAC The tracking area code of E-UTRAN neigh- H'0000 ~ H'FFFF NONE H'0000
boring cell to the eNB.
MCC0 The broadcast PLMN list information 3 NONE 450
(MCC) of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the
eNB. It is a three-digit number with each
MNC0 The broadcast PLMN list information 3 NONE 08
(MNC) of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the
eNB. It is a three-digit or two-digit number
with each digit being from 0 to 9.
MCC1 The broadcast PLMN list information 3 NONE FFF
MNC1 The broadcast PLMN list information 3 NONE FFF

Command Description

EARFCN_UL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600
Radio Frequency Channel Number) of E-
UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
EARFCN_DL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
BANDWIDTH_ The uplink bandwidth of E-UTRAN neigh- ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
UL boring cell to the eNB. 6/ mBand
ci_SystemBandwidth_n width_n
15/ 50
25/
50/
75/
100/
BANDWIDTH_ The downlink bandwidth of E-UTRAN ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
DL neighboring cell to the eNB. 6/ mBand
15/ 50
25/
50/
75/
100/


IND_OFFSET The cell individual offset to be applied to E- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. It is ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
used for UE measurement in RRC Con- ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
nected mode. ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
QOFFSET_CE The cell quality offset to be applied to E- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
LL UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. It is ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
used for UE cell re-selection in RRC Idle ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
mode. ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
IS_REMOVE_A Whether to delete a certain neighboring cell False/True/ NONE True
LLOWED to the eNB using the ANR (Automatic
Neighbor Relation) function.
- True: The neighboring cell can be
deleted.
- False: The neighboring cell cannot be
deleted.
IS_HOALLOWE Whether to perform handover to E-UTRAN False/True/ NONE True
D neighboring cell.

RELATION_IDX Database index of E-UTRAN neighboring cell.
STATUS The validity of the E-UTRAN neighboring cell information.

- N_EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring cell information is
invalid ID.
- EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring cell information is valid
ID.

Command Description
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which E-UTRAN neighboring cell to

the eNB belongs. If the enbType value is macro eNB, 20 bit of
the value is eNB ID. If the enbType value is home eNB, 28 bit
of the value is eNB ID. It is used when creating a cell identifier.
FEMTO_INDICATOR The femto indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor cell.

- True: Femto cell.
VIRTUAL_INDICATOR The cloud indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor cell.

TARGET_CELL_NUM The local cell ID of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. It

ENB_TYPE The type of the eNB to which E-UTRAN neighboring cell to

the eNB belongs.
ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) of the eNB to which E-UTRAN

neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. It is a three-digit number
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) of the eNB to which E-

UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. It is a three-digit
or two-digit number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
PHY_CELL_ID The physical cell ID of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.
TAC The tracking area code of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the

eNB.
MCC0 The broadcast PLMN list information (MCC) of E-UTRAN

MNC0 The broadcast PLMN list information (MNC) of E-UTRAN












EARFCN_UL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number) of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB.

Command Description
EARFCN_DL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency

BANDWIDTH_UL The uplink bandwidth of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the

eNB.
BANDWIDTH_DL The downlink bandwidth of E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the

eNB.
IND_OFFSET The cell individual offset to be applied to E-UTRAN neighbor-

ing cell to the eNB. It is used for UE measurement in RRC Con-
nected mode.
QOFFSET_CELL The cell quality offset to be applied to E-UTRAN neighboring

cell to the eNB. It is used for UE cell re-selection in RRC Idle
mode.

IS_HOALLOWED Whether to perform handover to E-UTRAN neighboring cell.


C2222 CHANGE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-NBR-UTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX, [STATUS], [RNC_ID], [C_ID], [LAC],
[RAC], [MCC0], [MNC0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [MCC2], [MNC2], [MCC3], [MNC3], [MCC4],
[MNC4], [MCC5], [MNC5], [DUPLEX_TYPE], [P_SCM_CODE], [CELL_PARA_ID],
[ARFCN_UL], [ARFCN_DL], [IS_REMOVE_ALLOWED], [IS_HOALLOWED], [VOIP_INCAPABLE],
[RIM_SUPPORT], [HIGH_PRIORITY_FOR_CSFB];
Command Description
Changes information on UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. This command can change infor-
mation on UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX param-
eter values.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.
STATUS The validity of the UTRAN neighboring cell N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
information. P
- N_EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell infor-
mation is invalid ID.
- EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell informa-
tion is valid ID.
eNB.
C_ID CID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
LAC The location area code of UTRAN neigh- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
RAC The routing area code of UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
(MCC) of UTRAN neighboring cell to the

Command Description

(MNC) of UTRAN neighboring cell to the
DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex type of UTRAN neighboring cell ci_FDD/ci_TDD/ NONE ci_FDD
to the eNB.
P_SCM_CODE The primary scramble code of UTRAN 0 ~ 511 NONE 0

neighboring cell to the eNB, which needs
only for FDD.


CELL_PARA_I The cell parameter ID of UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
D ing cell to the eNB, which needs only for
TDD.
ARFCN_UL The uplink absolute radio frequency chan- 0 ~ 16383 NONE 0
nel number (ARFCN) of UTRAN neighbor-
ARFCN_DL The downlink absolute radio frequency 0 ~ 16383 NONE 0
channel number (ARFCN) of UTRAN
neighboring cell to the eNB.
deleted.
deleted.
IS_HOALLOWE Whether to perform handover to UTRAN False/True/ NONE True
D neighboring cell.
VOIP_INCAPA Whether to support VoIp of UTRAN neigh- False/True/ NONE True

BLE boring cell.
RIM_SUPPORT Whether to support RIM Procedure of False/True/ NONE False

UTRAN neighbor cell.
HIGH_PRIORIT Whether to decide CSFB_Hysteresis appli- False/True/ NONE False

Y_FOR_CSFB cation availability about CSFB with PS HO

STATUS The validity of the UTRAN neighboring cell information.

ID.

Command Description























Command Description


C2225 CHANGE MME CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-MME-CONF: MME_INDEX, [STATUS], [ACTIVE_STATE], [IP_VER], [MME_IPV4],
[MME_IPV6], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE], [SECONDARY_MME_IPV4],
[SECONDARY_MME_IPV6];
Command Description
Changes the MME-related parameter values. MME Equip, activesState indicating whether S1 is
used, MME IP, and secondary MME IP can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
Since there are a total of 16 MMEs that can
be connected to an eNB, the index range is
0 to 15.
STATUS The EQUIP status information on the MME. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
- N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not P
exist (default).
ACTIVE_STAT The state information on the specified MME Inactive/Active/ NONE Active
E in operation. Of the MMEs for which the S1
Setup is established, if there is an unde-
sired MME, this parameter value must be
changed to Inactive. The default is active. If
the STATUS parameter is set to Equip, it is
better not to change this parameter value to
inactive.
IP_VER The IP address version of the MME. Either IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
IPv4 or IPv6 is assigned.
MME_IPV4 Information on the IPV4 address of the IPv4 Address NONE -
MME. This parameter value is valid only if
the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4. It is
not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to
IPv6.
MME_IPV6 Information on the IPV6 address of the IPv6 Address NONE -
eNB. This parameter value is valid only if
the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6. It is
not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to
IPv4.

Command Description

ADMINISTRATI The status of the MME link. locked/unlocked/shut- NONE unlocke
VE_STATE - locked: A state where active calls con- tingDown/ d
nected to the MME are all dropped, and
new call connections are not possible.
- unlocked: Connection to the MME is nor-
mal.
- shutting down: A state where active calls
connected to the MME are maintained, but
new call connections are not possible.
SECONDARY_ The secondary IP address of the IPv4 type IPv4 Address NONE -
MME_IPV4 set in the MME node to support the SCTP
Multi Homing function. It is valid only if the
IP_VER parameter is set to IPv4.
SECONDARY_ The secondary IP address of the IPv6 type IPv6 Address NONE -
MME_IPV6 set in the MME node to support the SCTP
Multi Homing function. It is valid only if the
IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6.

MME_INDEX The index used to access the information. Since there are a total
of 16 MMEs that can be connected to an eNB, the index range
is 0 to 15.
STATUS The EQUIP status information on the MME.

- N_EQUIP: The MME to connect does not exist (default).
ACTIVE_STATE The state information on the specified MME in operation. Of

the MMEs for which the S1 Setup is established, if there is an
undesired MME, this parameter value must be changed to Inac-
tive. The default is active. If the STATUS parameter is set to
Equip, it is better not to change this parameter value to inactive.

assigned.
MME_IPV4 Information on the IPV4 address of the MME. This parameter

MME_IPV6 Information on the IPV6 address of the eNB. This parameter


ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The status of the MME link.

- locked: A state where active calls connected to the MME are
all dropped, and new call connections are not possible.
- unlocked: Connection to the MME is normal.
- shutting down: A state where active calls connected to the
MME are maintained, but new call connections are not possi-
ble.

Command Description
C2226 CHANGE SON FUNCTION CELL CON-

TROL FLAGS
Command Format
CHG-SONFN-CELL: CELL_NUM, [ANR_ENABLE], [INTER_RAT_ANR_ENABLE_UTRAN],
[MOBILITY_ROBUSTNESS_ENABLE], [MOBILITY_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLE],
[BLANKING_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLE], [RACH_OPT_ENABLE],
[PICO_SUBBAND_BLANKING_ENABLE], [IDLE_MODE_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLE],
[SON_SRS_FUNC_ENABLE];
Command Description
Changes the flag for the SON function controlled by the cell. There can be 3 operation modes,
TIMEOUT 10

ANR_ENABLE Controls SON ANR in 3 modes. sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonAu-
- sonFuncOff: The ANR function is dis- alApply/sonAutoApply/ toApply
abled except for the NR deletion (X2-
based).
- sonManualApply: The NR adding and NR
ranking are performed automatically. The
management of HO Black List and NR
deletion are performed manually.
- sonAutoApply: The NR adding and NR
ranking, managing HO Black List, NR
deleting, and NR adding are performed
automatically.
INTER_RAT_A Controls SON Inter-RAT ANR for URTAN sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonFun-
NR_ENABLE_ (WCDMA). alApply/sonAutoApply/ cOff
UTRAN - sonFuncOff: The Inter-RAT ANR function
is disabled.
-sonManualApply: The NR Adding is per-
formed automatically.
- sonAutoApply: The NR Adding is per-
formed automatically.


MOBILITY_RO Whether to enable the Mobility Robustness sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonFun-
BUSTNESS_E Optimized function (one of the SON func- alApply/sonAutoApply/ cOff
NABLE tions).
- Manual Apply: When the parameter value
is changed by an algorithm, this change is
reported tot he the LSN and then the oper-
ator determines manually whether to apply
the changed parameter value.
- Auto Apply: When the parameter value is
changed by an algorithm, this change is
applied automatically.
MOBILITY_LO Whether to enable the Mobility-based Load sonFuncOff/sonAuto- NONE sonFun-
AD_BALANCE_ Balance function, (one of the SON func- Apply/ cOff
ENABLE tions).
BLANKING_LO Whether to enable the Blanking Load Bal- sonFuncOff/sonAuto- NONE sonFun-
AD_BALANCE_ ance function, (one of the SON functions). Apply/ cOff
ENABLE - OFF: The function is turned off.
RACH_OPT_E Whether to enable the Rach Optimized sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonFun-
NABLE function (one of the SON functions). alApply/sonAutoApply/ cOff
- Manual Apply: When the parameter value
is changed by an algorithm, this change is
reported tot he the LSN and then the oper-
ator determines manually whether to apply
the changed parameter value.
PICO_SUBBAN Whether to enable the Pico Subband Load sonFuncOff/sonAuto- NONE sonFun-
D_BLANKING_ Balancing function, (one of the SON func- Apply/ cOff
ENABLE tions).
IDLE_MODE_L Whether to enable the Idle Mode Load Bal- sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE son-
OAD_BALANC ancing function. alApply/sonAutoApply/ Manual-
E_ENABLE Apply
SON_SRS_FU Whether to enable the SRS SON function, sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonAu-
NC_ENABLE (one of the SON functions). alApply/sonAutoApply/ toApply

Command Description

ANR_ENABLE Controls SON ANR in 3 modes.

- sonFuncOff: The ANR function is disabled except for the NR
deletion (X2-based).
- sonManualApply: The NR adding and NR ranking are per-
formed automatically. The management of HO Black List and
NR deletion are performed manually.
- sonAutoApply: The NR adding and NR ranking, managing
HO Black List, NR deleting, and NR adding are performed
automatically.
INTER_RAT_ANR_ENABLE_UTRANControls SON Inter-RAT ANR for URTAN (WCDMA).

- sonFuncOff: The Inter-RAT ANR function is disabled.
-sonManualApply: The NR Adding is performed automati-
cally.
- sonAutoApply: The NR Adding is performed automatically.
MOBILITY_ROBUSTNESS_ENABLEWhether to enable the Mobility Robustness Optimized func-

tion (one of the SON functions).
parameter value.
MOBILITY_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Mobility-based Load Balance

BLANKING_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Blanking Load Balance function,

(one of the SON functions).

RACH_OPT_ENABLE Whether to enable the Rach Optimized function (one of the

SON functions).
parameter value.
PICO_SUBBAND_BLANKING_ENABLEWhether to enable the Pico Subband Load Balancing

IDLE_MODE_LOAD_BALANCE_ENABLEWhether to enable the Idle Mode Load Balancing func-

tion.
SON_SRS_FUNC_ENABLE Whether to enable the SRS SON function, (one of the SON
functions).

Command Description
C2227 CHANGE SON DL ICIC PARAMETERS
Command Format
CHG-SON-DLICIC: CELL_NUM, [DL_ICIC_TYPE];
Command Description
Changes information on parameters related to Downlink Inter-Cell Interference Cancellation
(DL ICIC). It is defined as one of the scheduler functions of the eNB system. It is set as a sepa-
rate flag unlike other SON functions. Manual Apply is disabled.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM cell index (number) 0~8 NONE 0
DL_ICIC_TYPE The DL ICIC type is specified. sonIcicDlNone/ NONE sonIcic
- sonIcicDlNone: The DL ICIC function is sonIcicDlDynamicStd/ DlNone
not performed. The UE performs the power sonIcicDlDynamicSam-
control function with fixed conditions. sung/
- sonIcicDlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC
function is performed. The system calcu-
lates the conditions based on the UE loca-
tion for performing the power control
function.

CELL_NUM cell index (number)
DL_ICIC_TYPE The DL ICIC type is specified.

- sonIcicDlNone: The DL ICIC function is not performed. The
UE performs the power control function with fixed conditions.
- sonIcicDlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC function is per-
formed. The system calculates the conditions based on the UE
location for performing the power control function.

C2228 CHANGE SON UL ICIC PARAMETERS
Command Format
CHG-SON-ULICIC: CELL_NUM, [UL_ICIC_TYPE];
Command Description
Changes information on parameters related to Uplink Inter-Cell Interference Cancellation (UL
ICIC). It is defined as one of the scheduler functions of the eNB system. It is set as a separate
flag unlike other SON functions. Manual Apply is disabled.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
UL_ICIC_TYPE The UL ICIC type is specified. sonIcicUlNone/ NONE sonIcic
- sonIcicUlNone: The UL ICIC function is sonIcicUlDynamicStd/ UlNone
not performed. The UE performs the power sonIcicUlDynamicSam-
control function with the specified condi- sung/
tions.
- sonIcicUlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC
function is performed. The system sug-
gests various conditions based on the UE
location. Then, the UE uses the suggested
conditions for performing the power control
function.

UL_ICIC_TYPE The UL ICIC type is specified.

- sonIcicUlNone: The UL ICIC function is not performed. The
UE performs the power control function with the specified con-
ditions.
- sonIcicUlDynamicStd: The Dynamic ICIC function is per-
formed. The system suggests various conditions based on the
UE location. Then, the UE uses the suggested conditions for
performing the power control function.

Command Description
C2231 CHANGE SON MRO
Command Format
CHG-SON-MRO: [T_PERIOD], [T_PERIOD_TEMP], [HANDOVER_SUCCESS_KPI],
[N_HANDOVER_THRESH], [OFFSET_MAX], [OFFSET_MIN];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required for Mobility Robustness Optimization (MRO). A period
of time to collect statistics related to handover data for MRO operation, criteria related to KPI
and handover attempts for triggering MRO, minimum/maximum offset values that can be
changed through MRO,
flags and parameter values for turning on/off the ping-pong optimization and the TTT optimiza-
tion can be changed. It has a significance if SONFN-CELL: mobilityRobustnessEnable:= 1
(Manual Apply) or 2 (Automatic Apply).
TIMEOUT 10

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. The one_day/one_week/ NONE one_we
timer (a unit of one_day/one_week, by one_month/ ek
default/one_month) used to trigger the han-
dover parameter control.
- one_day: MRO is triggered based on
handover statistics collected for 1 day.
- one_week: MRO is triggered based on
handover statistics collected for 1 week.
- one_month: MRO is triggered based on
handover statistics collected for
one_month.
T_PERIOD_TE The period of fallback statistics monitoring. one_hour/one_day/ NONE one_da
MP This value (one_hour/one_day/one_week, one_week/ y
default=one_week) is used for checking a
fault where HandoverSuccessKPI is not
temporarily met after the RACH parameter
is changed.
- one_hour: Fallback for MRO based on
the handover statistics collected for 1 hour.
- one_day: Fallback for MRO based on the
- one_week: Fallback for MRO based on
the handover statistics collected for 1 week.


HANDOVER_S The threshold related to the handover suc- 90.000000 ~ 0.1(%) 99.0000
UCCESS_KPI cess KPI to trigger MRO algorithm. The 100.000000 00
MRO algorithm is triggered if the handover
success rate is lower than this threshold.
N_HANDOVER The threshold to the number of handover 0 ~ 100000 1 10000
_THRESH attempts to trigger MRO algorithm. The
MRO algorithm is triggered if the number of
handover attempts collected during the sta-
tistics period is lower than this threshold.
OFFSET_MAX The maximum value allowable for HO mar- 0 ~ 39 1(dB) 5
gin which is equal to A3Offset - CIO. If and
only if the value of A3Offset - CIO is lower
than this maximum value, it is valid ID.
OFFSET_MIN The minimum value allowable for HO mar- -39 ~ 0 1(dB) 0
gin which is equal to A3Offset - CIO. If and
only if the value of A3Offset - CIO is higher
than this minimum value, it is valid ID.

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. The timer (a unit of
one_day/one_week, by default/one_month) used to trigger the
handover parameter control.
- one_day: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 day.
- one_week: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 week.

- one_month: MRO is triggered based on handover statistics
collected for 1 month.

checking a fault where HandoverSuccessKPI is not temporarily
- one_hour: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics

- one_day: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics
- one_week: Fallback for MRO based on the handover statistics
HANDOVER_SUCCESS_KPI The threshold related to the handover success KPI to trigger

MRO algorithm. The MRO algorithm is triggered if the hando-
ver success rate is lower than this threshold.

Command Description
N_HANDOVER_THRESH The threshold to the number of handover attempts to trigger

MRO algorithm. The MRO algorithm is triggered if the number
of handover attempts collected during the statistics period is
lower than this threshold.
OFFSET_MAX The maximum value allowable for HO margin which is equal to

lower than this maximum value, it is valid ID.
OFFSET_MIN The minimum value allowable for HO margin which is equal to

higher than this minimum value, it is valid ID.

C2232 CHANGE CLOCK CONTROL INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-CLOCK-CTRL: CELL_NUM, [CLOCK_ADVANCE], [CLOCK_RETARD];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required for the Modem/DSP clock advance/retard settings. A
period of time for the eNB to transmit/receive DU signals changes according to the value entered
in the clock advance/retard parameter. The value for UL timing advance in UE decreases if
increasing the clock advance/retard without changing the RU setting.
TIMEOUT 10

CLOCK_ADVA The clock advance value in ns. 0 ~ 137875 ns 137875
NCE
CLOCK_RETA The clock retard value in ns. 0 ~ 137875 ns 137875
RD

CLOCK_ADVANCE The clock advance value in ns.
CLOCK_RETARD The clock retard value in ns.

Command Description
C2233 CHANGE QCI BH BW INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-BHBW-QCI: QCI, [BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL],
[BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO], [BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL],
[BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO], [OVER_BOOKING_RATIO];
Command Description
Changes parameter information for backhaul Call Admission Control (CAC) per QoS Class
Identifier (QCI) enabled in the eNB. Backhaul-based CAC is enabled per QCI or service group
on GBR bearers. Changes thresholds to enable backhaul-based CAC per QCI.
TIMEOUT 10

ues 0 and 10-255.
BH_BW_CAC_ The total backhaul bandwidth in percent 0 ~ 100 % 30
DL_THRESH_F that can be assigned to the downlink per
OR_NORMAL QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for normal calls.
When a normal call is requested, if the
downlink usage exceeds the input parame-
ter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC
Fail is generated.
OR_EMER_HO QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for urgent and
handover calls. When emergency and han-
dover calls are requested, if the downlink
usage exceeds the input parameter value,
the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is gener-
ated.
UL_THRESH_F that can be assigned to the uplink per QoS
OR_NORMAL Class Identifier (QCI) for normal calls.
When a normal call is requested, if the
uplink usage exceeds the input parameter
value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is
generated.


UL_THRESH_F that can be assigned to the uplink per QoS
OR_EMER_HO Class Identifier (QCI) for urgent and hando-
ver calls. When emergency and handover
calls are requested, if the uplink usage
exceeds the input parameter value, the
Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is gener-
ated.
OVER_BOOKI The ratio of over-booking with downlink and 1.0 ~ 10.0 NONE 1.0
NG_RATIO uplink thresholds when executing back-
haul-based CAC per QoS Class Identifier
(QCI).


normal calls. When a normal call is requested, if the downlink
usage exceeds the input parameter value, the Backhaul Band-

urgent and handover calls. When emergency and handover calls
are requested, if the downlink usage exceeds the input parame-
ter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

assigned to the uplink per QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for nor-
mal calls. When a normal call is requested, if the uplink usage
exceeds the input parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth

assigned to the uplink per QoS Class Identifier (QCI) for urgent
and handover calls. When emergency and handover calls are
requested, if the uplink usage exceeds the input parameter
value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

Command Description

when executing backhaul-based CAC per QoS Class Identifier
(QCI).

C2234 CHANGE SCTP PARAMETER
Command Format
CHG-SCTP-PARA: [MME_FAILOVER_TIMER], [HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL], [NUM_PATH_RE_TX],
[RTO_INITIAL], [RTO_MIN], [RTO_MAX], [CONNECT_INTERVAL];
Command Description
Changes the SCTP-related parameter values. The changed values are necessary for the SCTP to
establish/maintain a connection with a peer.
TIMEOUT 10

MME_FAILOVE The timer to maintain the call connected to 1 ~ 30 sec 10
R_TIMER the MME if the SCTP returns to normal
within a specified time (mmeFailoverTimer)
after the MME SCTP is disconnected in
seconds.
HEART_BEAT_ The transmission interval of the HeartBeat 100 ~ 60000 msec 1500
INTERVAL message to be sent to verify the normality
of the SCTP Link in milliseconds.
NUM_PATH_R The number of times to re-send heartbeat 1 ~ 100 count 5
E_TX messages in order to check whether the
SCTP link is normal. The SCTP link is dis-
connected if responses to the heartbeats
are not received during specified (numP-
athReTx) attempts.
RTO_INITIAL The threshold used to calculate the SCTP 100 ~ 60000 msec 1000
round-trip time (RTT). It is an initial value of
Retransmission Time-Out used before the
RTT by packet transmission is measured.
RTO_MIN The minimum value of Retransmission 100 ~ 60000 msec 1000
Time-Out used to calculate the SCTP RTT.
RTO_MAX The maximum value of Retransmission 100 ~ 60000 msec 1400
Time-Out used to calculate the SCTP RTT.
CONNECT_INT The timer to establish connections periodi- 1 ~ 10 sec 4
ERVAL cally when the SCTP link is not currently
established while the peer node is EQUIP
in PLD in seconds.

Command Description

MME_FAILOVER_TIMER The timer to maintain the call connected to the MME if the
SCTP returns to normal within a specified time (mmeFailover-
Timer) after the MME SCTP is disconnected in seconds.
HEART_BEAT_INTERVAL The transmission interval of the HeartBeat message to be sent

to verify the normality of the SCTP Link in milliseconds.
NUM_PATH_RE_TX The number of times to re-send heartbeat messages in order to

check whether the SCTP link is normal. The SCTP link is dis-
connected if responses to the heartbeats are not received during
specified (numPathReTx) attempts.
RTO_INITIAL The threshold used to calculate the SCTP round-trip time

(RTT). It is an initial value of Retransmission Time-Out used
before the RTT by packet transmission is measured.
RTO_MIN The minimum value of Retransmission Time-Out used to calcu-

late the SCTP RTT.
RTO_MAX The maximum value of Retransmission Time-Out used to cal-

culate the SCTP RTT.
CONNECT_INTERVAL The timer to establish connections periodically when the SCTP

link is not currently established while the peer node is EQUIP
in PLD in seconds.

C2235 CHANGE SVC GRP BH BW INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-BHBW-SVCGR: SERVICE_GROUP, [BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL],
[BH_BW_CAC_DL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO], [BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_NORMAL],
[BH_BW_CAC_UL_THRESH_FOR_EMER_HO], [OVER_BOOKING_RATIO];
Command Description
Changes parameter information for backhaul Call Admission Control (CAC) per service group
enabled in the eNB. Backhaul-based CAC is enabled per QCI or service group on GBR bearers.
Changes thresholds to enable backhaul-based CAC per service group.
TIMEOUT 10

SERVICE_GRO Service group. voipService/videoSer- NONE voipSer-
UP - voipService: Service group that uses the vice/ vice
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service.
- videoService: Service group that uses the
video service.
OR_NORMAL service group for normal calls. When a nor-
mal call is requested, if the downlink usage
ated.
OR_EMER_HO service group for urgent and handover
calls. When emergency and handover calls
are requested, if the downlink usage
ated.
UL_THRESH_F that can be assigned to the uplink per ser-
OR_NORMAL vice group for normal calls. When a normal
call is requested, if the uplink usage
ated.

Command Description

UL_THRESH_F that can be assigned to the uplink per ser-
OR_EMER_HO vice group for urgent and handover calls.
When emergency and handover calls are
requested, if the uplink usage exceeds the
input parameter value, the Backhaul Band-
OVER_BOOKI The ratio of over-booking with downlink and 1.0 ~ 10.0 NONE 1.0
NG_RATIO uplink thresholds when operating backhaul-
based CAC per service group.

SERVICE_GROUP Service group.
- voipService: Service group that uses the Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) service.
- videoService: Service group that uses the video service.

assigned to the downlink per service group for normal calls.
When a normal call is requested, if the downlink usage exceeds
the input parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is
generated.

assigned to the downlink per service group for urgent and han-
dover calls. When emergency and handover calls are requested,
if the downlink usage exceeds the input parameter value, the
Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.

assigned to the uplink per service group for normal calls. When
a normal call is requested, if the uplink usage exceeds the input
parameter value, the Backhaul Bandwidth CAC Fail is gener-
ated.

assigned to the uplink per service group for urgent and hando-
ver calls. When emergency and handover calls are requested, if
the uplink usage exceeds the input parameter value, the Back-
haul Bandwidth CAC Fail is generated.


when operating backhaul-based CAC per service group.

Command Description
C2236 CHANGE SON SELF OPTIMIZATION

PARAMETERS
Command Format
CHG-SON-SO: [TX_TBMAX], [RX_TBMAX];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values related to SON self-optimization. The following functions are
related to the parameters that can be retrieved: - RRH Optic delay compensation measures RRH-
specific optical delay when initially installing RRH or if an optical delay change occurs and cal-
culates Tx and Rx time buffer by a formula. The calculated time buffer is sent to the RRH for
RRH delay compensation. The TX_TBMAX and RX_TBMAX values that can be retrieved by
using this command are necessary to calculate the time buffer.
- Related commands The operation of RRH optic delay compensation is determined by the
DELAY_COMPENSATION_ENABLE parameter value of the CHG-SONFN-ENB command.
If the value is SON FuncOff, the compensation function is not executed. If the value is sonAuto-
Apply, the compensation function is executed. The TX_TBMAX and RX_TBMAX parameter
values can be retrieved using the RTRV-SON-SO command.
TIMEOUT 10

TX_TBMAX Tx Time Buffer Maximum value. The value 19600 ~ 200000 nano- 140375
that can be set by using the maximum second
delay that occurs from DU to RRH. Assum-
ing the maximum distanced between DU
and RRH is d_max (km), the maximum DL
CPRI hopping delay is h_max (ns), the
maximum number of RRHs that can be
cascaded is N_max, and the maximum Tx
processing delay is PD_max, TX_TBMAX
can be calculated using the following for-
mula. However, this formula is based on
the basic concept of Max Timer buffer, and
thus can be changed due to various factors
in an actual network design. TX_TBMAX
(ns) = 5000 * d_max + (N_max-1) * h_max
+ PD_max


RX_TBMAX The maximum Tx Time Buffer value. The 14400 ~ 200000 nano- 140375
value that can be set by using the maxi- second
mum delay that occurs from DU to RRH.
Assuming the maximum distanced between
DU and RRH is d_max (km), the maximum
UL CPRI hopping delay is h_max (ns), the
maximum number of RRHs that can be
cascaded is N_max, and the maximum Tx
processing delay is PD_max, TX_TBMAX
can be calculated using the following for-
mula. However, this formula is based on
the basic concept of Max Timer buffer, and
thus can be changed due to various factors
in an actual network design. RX_TBMAX
(ns) = 5000 * d_max + (N_max-1) * h_max
+ PD_max

TX_TBMAX Tx Time Buffer Maximum value. The value that can be set by
using the maximum delay that occurs from DU to RRH.
d_max (km), the maximum DL CPRI hopping delay is h_max
an actual network design. TX_TBMAX (ns) = 5000 * d_max +
RX_TBMAX The maximum Tx Time Buffer value. The value that can be set
by using the maximum delay that occurs from DU to RRH.
d_max (km), the maximum UL CPRI hopping delay is h_max
an actual network design. RX_TBMAX (ns) = 5000 * d_max +

Command Description
C2237 CHANGE SIGNAL DSCP INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SIGDSCP-DATA: CLASS_ID, [DSCP];
Command Description
Changes Signal DSCP Data in the eNB.
TIMEOUT 10

CLASS_ID It is Signal Class ID within the eNB. 0~2 NONE 0
- 0 : S1 Signaling.
-1 : X2 Signaling.
-2 : S1/X2-U management
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the speci- 0 ~ 63 NONE 40
fied Signal ClassID.

CLASS_ID It is Signal Class ID within the eNB.
- 0 : S1 Signaling.
-1 : X2 Signaling.
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the specified Signal ClassID.

C2238 CREATE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CRTE-BLACK-LIST: CELL_NUM, BLACK_LIST_IDX, [STATUS], [PCI_TYPE], [START_PCI],
[PCI_RANGE], [EARFCN_UL], [EARFCN_DL];
Command Description
Creates the blacklist cell information for each cell in the eNB. The information on the blacklist
cell for each cell in the eNB. The information is sent to the UE when executing a basic call.
TIMEOUT 10

DX
STATUS Whether tuple information is valid ID. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
- N_EQUIP: Invalid ID P
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
PCI_TYPE Physical cell ID type of the blacklist cell. ci_singlePci/ NONE ci_singl
- ci_singlePci: Single PCI. ci_rangedPci/ ePci
START_PCI The starting physical cell ID for the blacklist 0 ~ 503 NONE 0
cell.
PCI_RANGE Range from the starting physical cell ID of ci_rangePCI_n4/ NONE ci_rang
the blacklist cell. Not used if it is a single ci_rangePCI_n8/ ePCI_n
physical cell ID type. ci_rangePCI_n12/ 4
ci_rangePCI_n16/
ci_rangePCI_n24/
ci_rangePCI_n32/
ci_rangePCI_n48/
ci_rangePCI_n64/
ci_rangePCI_n84/
ci_rangePCI_n96/
ci_rangePCI_n128/
ci_rangePCI_n168/
ci_rangePCI_n252/
ci_rangePCI_n504/
EARFCN_UL Uplink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute Radio 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600
Frequency Channel Number) of the black-
list cell.

Command Description

EARFCN_DL Downlink EARFCN (E-UTRA Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
Radio Frequency Channel Number) of the
blacklist cell.


- EQUIP: Valid ID.




C2239 RETRIEVE SIGNAL DSCP INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SIGDSCP-DATA: [CLASS_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves Signal DSCP Data in the eNB.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CLASS_ID It is Signal Class ID within the eNB. 0~2 NONE 0
- 0 : S1 Signaling.
-1 : X2 Signaling.

CLASS_ID It is Signal Class ID within the eNB.
- 0 : S1 Signaling.
-1 : X2 Signaling.
DSCP DSCP value that will be set for the specified Signal ClassID.

Command Description
C2244 CREATE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION
Command Format
CRTE-NBR-ENB: NBR_ENB_INDEX, [STATUS], [NO_X2], [NO_HO], [ENB_ID], [ENB_TYPE],
[ENB_MCC], [ENB_MNC], [IP_VER], [NBR_ENB_IPV4], [NBR_ENB_IPV6],
[SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_IPV4], [SECONDARY_NBR_ENB_IPV6], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE],
[OWNER_TYPE], [REMOTE_FLAG];
Command Description
Creates information on the neighboring eNB for operation. The user can create information on
the neighboring eNB by entering the NBR_ENB_INDEX parameter value. If parameters are not
specified, they are set to the defaults.
TIMEOUT 10

NBR_ENB_IND Index of the neighboring eNB. The value 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
EX entered when registering the neighboring
eNB is used.
STATUS The validity of the neighboring eNB infor- N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
mation. P
- EQUIP: Valid ID.
NO_X2 Whether to make X2 connection to the False/True/ NONE False

neighboring eNB.
- False: X2 connection with the neighbor-
ing eNB is made.
- True: X2 connection to the neighboring
eNB is not made.
NO_HO Whether to perform handover to the neigh- False/True/ NONE False
boring eNB.
- False: Handover to the neighboring eNB
is performed.
- True: Handover to the neighboring eNB is
not performed.
ENB_ID The eNB ID represents the neighboring 0 ~ 268435455 NONE 0
eNB. If the enbType value is macro eNB,
20 bit of the value is eNB ID. If the enbType
value is home eNB, 28 bit of the value is
eNB ID.
ENB_TYPE eNB type of the neighboring eNB. ci_Macro_eNB/ NONE ci_Macr
- ci_Macro_eNB: Indicates the macro eNB. ci_Home_eNB/ o_eNB


ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) that repre- 3 NONE 450
digit number with each digit being from 0 to
9.
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) that repre- 3 NONE 08
digit or two-digit number with each digit
being from 0 to 9.
IP_VER The IP version, which is the IP address of IPV4/IPV6/ NONE IPV4
the neighboring eNB.
4
6
ADMINISTRATI This parameter defines Neighbor eNB Link locked/unlocked/shut- NONE unlocke
VE_STATE Status tingDown/ d
OWNER_TYPE This parameter defines how NRT is NoneType/InitialNRT/ NONE Creat-
updated, This filed can be classfied Initial AnrByServer/AnrByUe/ edBy-
NRT / ANR by Server/ ANR by UE / Cre- CreatedByUserCom- UserCo
ated by User Command/CreatedByUserUI. mand/CreatedByUse- mmand
rUI/
REMOTE_FLA This parameter defines the target eNB is False/True/ NONE False
G managed local EMS or other EMS


- EQUIP: Valid ID.



Command Description



9.

being from 0 to 9.

format.

format.

version 4 format.

version 6 format.
other EMS

C2245 CREATE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD

INFORMATION
Command Format
CRTE-NBR-EUTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX, [STATUS], [ENB_ID], [FEMTO_INDICATOR],
[VIRTUAL_INDICATOR], [TARGET_CELL_NUM], [ENB_TYPE], [ENB_MCC], [ENB_MNC],
[PHY_CELL_ID], [TAC], [MCC0], [MNC0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [MCC2], [MNC2], [MCC3],
[MNC3], [MCC4], [MNC4], [MCC5], [MNC5], [EARFCN_UL], [EARFCN_DL],
[BANDWIDTH_UL], [BANDWIDTH_DL], [IND_OFFSET], [QOFFSET_CELL],
[IS_REMOVE_ALLOWED], [IS_HOALLOWED], [OWNER_TYPE];
Command Description
Creates information on E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. The user can create information
on E-UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX parameter
values. If parameters are not specified, they are set to the defaults.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.
STATUS The validity of the E-UTRAN neighboring N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
cell information. P
- N_EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring
cell information is invalid ID.
- EQUIP: The E-UTRAN neighboring cell
information is valid ID.
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which E-UTRAN 0 ~ 268435455 NONE 0
neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. If the
FEMTO_INDIC The femto indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor False/True/ NONE False
ATOR cell.
- True: Femto cell.
VIRTUAL_INDI The cloud indicator of E-UTRAN neighbor False/True/ NONE False

CATOR cell.

Command Description

TARGET_CELL The local cell ID of E-UTRAN neighboring 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
_NUM cell to the eNB. It is used when creating a
cell identifier.
ENB_TYPE The type of the eNB to which E-UTRAN ci_Macro_eNB/ NONE ci_Macr
neighboring cell to the eNB belongs. ci_Home_eNB/ o_eNB
ENB_MCC The PLMN information (MCC) of the eNB to 3 NONE 450

eNB belongs. It is a three-digit number with
each digit being from 0 to 9.
ENB_MNC The PLMN information (MNC) of the eNB to 3 NONE 08
eNB belongs. It is a three-digit or two-digit
number with each digit being from 0 to 9.
PHY_CELL_ID The physical cell ID of E-UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 503 NONE 1
TAC The tracking area code of E-UTRAN neigh- H'0000 ~ H'FFFF NONE H'0000


EARFCN_UL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 19600
EARFCN_DL The uplink EARFCN (E-UTRAN Absolute 0 ~ 65535 NONE 1600
BANDWIDTH_ The uplink bandwidth of E-UTRAN neigh- ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
UL boring cell to the eNB. 6/ mBand
15/ 50
25/
50/
75/
100/
BANDWIDTH_ The downlink bandwidth of E-UTRAN ci_SystemBandwidth_n NONE ci_Syste
DL neighboring cell to the eNB. 6/ mBand
15/ 50
25/
50/
75/
100/

Command Description

IND_OFFSET The cell individual offset to be applied to E- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. It is ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
used for UE measurement in RRC Con- ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
nected mode. ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
QOFFSET_CE The cell quality offset to be applied to E- ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ dB ci_dB0
LL UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. It is ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
used for UE cell re-selection in RRC Idle ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
mode. ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/
deleted.
deleted.
IS_HOALLOWE Whether to perform handover to E-UTRAN False/True/ NONE True
D neighboring cell.

ated by User Command/CreatedByUserUI. mand/CreatedByUse- mmand
rUI/



invalid ID.
ID.


- True: Femto cell.



the eNB belongs.



eNB.


Command Description















eNB.

eNB.

nected mode.

mode.



Command Description
C2246 CREATE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
CRTE-NBR-UTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX, [STATUS], [RNC_ID], [C_ID], [LAC],
[RAC], [MCC0], [MNC0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [MCC2], [MNC2], [MCC3], [MNC3], [MCC4],
[MNC4], [MCC5], [MNC5], [DUPLEX_TYPE], [P_SCM_CODE], [CELL_PARA_ID],
[ARFCN_UL], [ARFCN_DL], [IS_REMOVE_ALLOWED], [IS_HOALLOWED], [VOIP_INCAPABLE],
[RIM_SUPPORT], [OWNER_TYPE], [HIGH_PRIORITY_FOR_CSFB];
Command Description
Creates information on UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. The user can create information on
UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX parameter values.
If parameters are not specified, they are set to the defaults.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.
STATUS The validity of the UTRAN neighboring cell N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
information. P
- N_EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell infor-
mation is invalid ID.
- EQUIP: UTRAN neighboring cell informa-
tion is valid ID.
eNB.
C_ID CID of UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
LAC The location area code of UTRAN neigh- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
RAC The routing area code of UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 255 NONE 0


DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex type of UTRAN neighboring cell ci_FDD/ci_TDD/ NONE ci_FDD
to the eNB.
P_SCM_CODE The primary scramble code of UTRAN 0 ~ 511 NONE 0

neighboring cell to the eNB, which needs
only for FDD.

Command Description

CELL_PARA_I The cell parameter ID of UTRAN neighbor- 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
D ing cell to the eNB, which needs only for
TDD.
ARFCN_UL The uplink absolute radio frequency chan- 0 ~ 16383 NONE 0
nel number (ARFCN) of UTRAN neighbor-
ARFCN_DL The downlink absolute radio frequency 0 ~ 16383 NONE 0
channel number (ARFCN) of UTRAN
neighboring cell to the eNB.
deleted.
deleted.
IS_HOALLOWE Whether to perform handover to UTRAN False/True/ NONE True
D neighboring cell.
VOIP_INCAPA Whether to support VoIp of UTRAN neigh- False/True/ NONE True

BLE boring cell.
RIM_SUPPORT Whether to support RIM Procedure of False/True/ NONE False

UTRAN neighbor cell.

ated by User Command/CreatedByUserUI. mand/CreatedByUse- mmand-
rUI/ valid ID
HIGH_PRIORIT Whether to decide CSFB_Hysteresis appli- False/True/ NONE False
Y_FOR_CSFB cation availability about CSFB with PS HO

STATUS The valid IDity of the UTRAN neighboring cell information.

ID.











Command Description















Command Description
C2249 DELETE BLACK LISTED CELL INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
DLT-BLACK-LIST: CELL_NUM, BLACK_LIST_IDX;
Command Description
Deletes the blacklist cell information for each cell in the eNB. The user can delete the blacklist
cell information by entering the Cell Num and Black List Index parameter values.
TIMEOUT 10

DX


C2255 DELETE NEIGHBOR ENB INFORMATION
Command Format
DLT-NBR-ENB: NBR_ENB_INDEX;
Command Description
Deletes information on the neighboring eNB to the eNB. The user can delete information on the
neighboring eNB by entering the NBR_ENB_INDEX parameter value.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
NBR_ENB_INDEX Index of the neighboring eNB. The value 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
entered when registering the neighboring
eNB is used.


Command Description
C2256 DELETE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL FDD

INFORMATION
Command Format
DLT-NBR-EUTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX;
Command Description
Deletes information on E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. The user can delete information
on E-UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX parameter
values.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.


C2257 DELETE EXTERNAL UTRAN CELL INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
DLT-NBR-UTRAN: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX;
Command Description
Deletes information on UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. The user can delete information on
UTRAN neighboring cell by entering the CELL_NUM and RELATION_IDX parameter values.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.


Command Description
C2260 RETRIEVE SON FUNCTION ENB CON-

TROL FLAGS
Command Format
RTRV-SONFN-ENB;
Command Description
Retrieves the flag for the SON function controlled by the eNB. There can be 3 operation modes,
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

PCID_ENABLE Controls SON PCID in 3 modes.
- sonFuncOff: Performs X2 monitoring.
- sonManualApply: Assigns the initial PCI automatically, per-
forms X2 monitoring, and detects PCI collision/confusion.
- sonAutoApply: Assigns the initial PCI automatically, per-
DELAY_COMPENSATION_ENABLEControls SON delay compensation in 2 modes.

- sonFuncOff: SON delay compensation is disabled.
- sonAutoApply: SON delay compensation is enabled.

C2261 CHANGE SON FUNCTION ENB CONTROL

FLAGS
Command Format
CHG-SONFN-ENB: [PCID_ENABLE], [DELAY_COMPENSATION_ENABLE];
Command Description
Changes the flag for the SON function controlled by the eNB. There can be 3 operation modes,
TIMEOUT 10

PCID_ENABLE Controls SON PCID in 3 modes. sonFuncOff/sonManu- NONE sonFun-
- sonFuncOff: Performs X2 monitoring. alApply/sonAutoApply/ cOff
- sonManualApply: Assigns the initial PCI
automatically, performs X2 monitoring, and
detects PCI collision/confusion.
- sonAutoApply: Assigns the initial PCI
automatically, performs X2 monitoring, and
detects PCI collision/confusion.
DELAY_COMP Controls SON delay compensation in 2 sonFuncOff/sonAuto- NONE sonAu-
ENSATION_EN modes. Apply/ toApply
ABLE - sonFuncOff: SON delay compensation is
disabled.
- sonAutoApply: SON delay compensation
is enabled.

PCID_ENABLE Controls SON PCID in 3 modes.
- sonFuncOff: Performs X2 monitoring.
- sonManualApply: Assigns the initial PCI automatically, per-
- sonAutoApply: Assigns the initial PCI automatically, per-
DELAY_COMPENSATION_ENABLEControls SON delay compensation in 2 modes.

Command Description
- sonFuncOff: SON delay compensation is disabled.

- sonAutoApply: SON delay compensation is enabled.

C2266 RETRIEVE SON RO
Command Format
RTRV-SON-RO;
Command Description
Retrieves parameters required for RO (RACH Optimization). This command retrieves the fol-
lowing parameters: the collection period of RACH data-related statistics required to operate RO,
the minimum/maximum values of the parameters that can be changed by RO, the optimization-
related parameters for the number of dedicated preambles, RACH Tx power and PRACH con-
figuration index. It has a significance if SONFN-CELL: rachOptEnable := 1 (Manual Apply) or
2 (Automatic Apply).
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. This value (one_day/
one_week/one_month, default=one_month) is used for trigger-
ing the RACH parameter control.
- one_day: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 day.
- one_week: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 week.
- one_month: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 month.

checking a fault where RACH performance is not temporarily
- one_hour: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics
- one_day: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics

Command Description
- one_week: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics

RACH_FILTERING_COEFF The coefficient applied to filtering when processing RACH sta-

tistics data. F(n) = (1-rachFilteringCoeff)xF(n-1) + rachFilter-
ingCoeff x CurrentValue
DEDICATED_INCREASE The threshold that increases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
DEDICATED_DECREASE The threshold that decreases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
PROB_DEDICATED_INCREASE The probability that increases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
PROB_DEDICATED_DECREASE The probability that decreases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
DEDICATED_MAX The maximum value of the number of dedicated preambles.

{n0, n4, n8, n12, n16, n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48,
n52, n56, n60}
DEDICATED_MIN The minimum value of the number of dedicated preambles. {n0,

n4, n8, n12, n16, n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, n52,
n56, n60}
POWER_INCREASE The threshold that increases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
POWER_DECREASE The threshold that decreases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
POWER_INCREASE_DED The threshold that increases dedicated preamble Tx-related

power resources.
POWER_DECREASE_DED The threshold that decreases dedicated preamble Tx-related

power resources.
PROB_POWER_INCREASE The probability that increases preamble Tx-related power

resources.

PROB_POWER_DECREASE The probability that decreases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MAXThe maximum value of initial

received target power. {dBm-120, dBm-118, dBm-116, dBm-
114, dBm-112, dBm-110, dBm-108, dBm-106, dBm-104, dBm-
102, dBm-100, dBm-98, dBm-96, dBm-94, dBm-92, dBm-90}
PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MINThe minimum value of initial

POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MAX The maximum value of ramping step. {dB0, dB2,dB4, dB6}
POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MIN The minimum value of ramping step. {dB0, dB2,dB4, dB6}
CONTENTION_INCREASE The threshold that increases PRACH configuration index.
CONTENTION_DECREASE The threshold that decreases PRACH configuration index.
PROB_CONTENTION_INCREASE The probability that increases PRACH configuration index.
PROB_CONTENTION_DECREASEThe probability that decreases PRACH configuration index.
TIME_CHANCE_MAX The maximum value of time chance index related to PRACH

configuration index. {0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10}
TIME_CHANCE_MIN The minimum value of time chance index related to PRACH


Command Description
C2267 CHANGE SON RO
Command Format
CHG-SON-RO: [T_PERIOD], [T_PERIOD_TEMP], [RACH_FILTERING_COEFF],
[DEDICATED_INCREASE], [DEDICATED_DECREASE], [PROB_DEDICATED_INCREASE],
[PROB_DEDICATED_DECREASE], [DEDICATED_MAX], [DEDICATED_MIN], [POWER_INCREASE],
[POWER_DECREASE], [POWER_INCREASE_DED], [POWER_DECREASE_DED],
[PROB_POWER_INCREASE], [PROB_POWER_DECREASE],
[PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MAX],
[PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MIN], [POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MAX],
[POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MIN], [CONTENTION_INCREASE], [CONTENTION_DECREASE],
[PROB_CONTENTION_INCREASE], [PROB_CONTENTION_DECREASE], [TIME_CHANCE_MAX],
[TIME_CHANCE_MIN];
Command Description
Changes parameters required for RO (RACH Optimization). This command changes the follow-
ing parameters: the collection period of RACH data-related statistics required to operate RO, the
minimum/maximum values of the parameters that can be changed by RO, the optimization-
related parameters for the number of dedicated preambles, RACH Tx power and PRACH con-
figuration index. It has a significance if SONFN-CELL: rachOptEnable := 1 (Manual Apply) or
2 (Automatic Apply).
TIMEOUT 10

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. This one_day/one_week/ NONE one_mo
value (one_day/one_week/one_month, one_month/ nth
default=one_month) is used for triggering
the RACH parameter control.
- one_day: RO is triggered based on han-
dover statistics collected for 1 day.
- one_week: RO is triggered based on
- one_month: RO is triggered based on
handover statistics collected for 1 month.


T_PERIOD_TE The period of fallback statistics monitoring. one_hour/one_day/ NONE one_we
MP This value (one_hour/one_day/one_week, one_week/ ek
default=one_week) is used for checking a
fault where RACH performance is not tem-
porarily met after the RACH parameter is
changed.
- one_hour: Fallback for RO based on the
handover statistics collected for 1 hour.
- one_day: Fallback for RO based on the
- one_week: Fallback for RO based on the
RACH_FILTERI The coefficient applied to filtering when pro- 0.000000 ~ 1.000000 NONE 0.0333
NG_COEFF cessing RACH statistics data. F(n) = (1-
rachFilteringCoeff)xF(n-1) + rachFiltering-
Coeff x CurrentValue
DEDICATED_I The threshold that increases the number of 0 ~ 100 % 1
NCREASE dedicated preambles.
DEDICATED_D The threshold that decreases the number 0 ~ 100 % 1
ECREASE of dedicated preambles.
PROB_DEDICA The probability that increases the number 0 ~ 100 % 10
TED_INCREAS of dedicated preambles.
E
PROB_DEDICA The probability that decreases the number 0 ~ 100 % 10
TED_DECREA of dedicated preambles.
SE
DEDICATED_M The maximum value of the number of dedi- ci_ro_n0/ci_ro_n4/ NONE ci_ro_n
AX cated preambles. {n0, n4, n8, n12, n16, ci_ro_n8/ci_ro_n12/ 32
n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, ci_ro_n16/ci_ro_n20/
n52, n56, n60} ci_ro_n24/ci_ro_n28/
ci_ro_n32/ci_ro_n36/
DEDICATED_M The minimum value of the number of dedi- ci_ro_n0/ci_ro_n4/ NONE ci_ro_n
IN cated preambles. {n0, n4, n8, n12, n16, ci_ro_n8/ci_ro_n12/ 4
n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, ci_ro_n16/ci_ro_n20/
n52, n56, n60} ci_ro_n24/ci_ro_n28/
POWER_INCR The threshold that increases preamble Tx- 0 ~ 199 NONE 10
EASE related power resources.
POWER_DECR The threshold that decreases preamble Tx- 0 ~ 199 NONE 2
EASE related power resources.
POWER_INCR The threshold that increases dedicated pre- 0 ~ 199 NONE 3
EASE_DED amble Tx-related power resources.
POWER_DECR The threshold that decreases dedicated 0 ~ 199 NONE 2
EASE_DED preamble Tx-related power resources.
PROB_POWER The probability that increases preamble Tx- 0 ~ 100 % 10
_INCREASE related power resources.

Command Description

PROB_POWER The probability that decreases preamble 0 ~ 100 % 10
_DECREASE Tx-related power resources.
PREAMBLE_IN The maximum value of initial received tar- ci_roTarget_dbm_minu NONE ci_roTar
ITIAL_RECEIV get power. {dBm-120, dBm-118, dBm-116, s120/ get_db
ED_TARGET_P dBm-114, dBm-112, dBm-110, dBm-108, ci_roTarget_dbm_minu m_minu
OWER_MAX dBm-106, dBm-104, dBm-102, dBm-100, s118/ s90
dBm-98, dBm-96, dBm-94, dBm-92, dBm- ci_roTarget_dbm_minu
90} s116/
ci_roTarget_dbm_minu
s114/
s112/
s110/
s108/
s106/
s104/
s102/
s100/
s98/
s96/
s94/
s92/
s90/


PREAMBLE_IN The minimum value of initial received target ci_roTarget_dbm_minu NONE ci_roTar
ITIAL_RECEIV power. {dBm-120, dBm-118, dBm-116, s120/ get_db
ED_TARGET_P dBm-114, dBm-112, dBm-110, dBm-108, ci_roTarget_dbm_minu m_minu
OWER_MIN dBm-106, dBm-104, dBm-102, dBm-100, s118/ s120
dBm-98, dBm-96, dBm-94, dBm-92, dBm- ci_roTarget_dbm_minu
90} s116/
s114/
s112/
s110/
s108/
s106/
s104/
s102/
s100/
s98/
s96/
s94/
s92/
s90/
POWER_RAM The maximum value of ramping step. {dB0, ci_roStep_0dB/ NONE ci_roSte
PING_STEP_M dB2,dB4, dB6} ci_roStep_2dB/ p_6dB
AX ci_roStep_4dB/
ci_roStep_6dB/
POWER_RAM The minimum value of ramping step. {dB0, ci_roStep_0dB/ NONE ci_roSte
PING_STEP_M dB2,dB4, dB6} ci_roStep_2dB/ p_2dB
IN ci_roStep_4dB/
ci_roStep_6dB/
CONTENTION_ The threshold that increases PRACH con- 0 ~ 100 % 10
INCREASE figuration index.
CONTENTION_ The threshold that decreases PRACH con- 0 ~ 100 % 2
DECREASE figuration index.
PROB_CONTE The probability that increases PRACH con- 0 ~ 100 % 10
NTION_INCRE figuration index.
ASE
PROB_CONTE The probability that decreases PRACH 0 ~ 100 % 10
NTION_DECRE configuration index.
ASE

Command Description

TIME_CHANCE The maximum value of time chance index ci_roConfig_0_5/ NONE ci_roCo
_MAX related to PRACH configuration index. {0.5, ci_roConfig_1/ nfig_10
1, 2, 3, 5, 10} ci_roConfig_2/
ci_roConfig_3/
ci_roConfig_5/
ci_roConfig_10/
TIME_CHANCE The minimum value of time chance index ci_roConfig_0_5/ NONE ci_roCo
_MIN related to PRACH configuration index. {0.5, ci_roConfig_1/ nfig_0_
1, 2, 3, 5, 10} ci_roConfig_2/ 5
ci_roConfig_3/
ci_roConfig_5/
ci_roConfig_10/

T_PERIOD The period of statistics monitoring. This value (one_day/
one_week/one_month, default=one_month) is used for trigger-
ing the RACH parameter control.
- one_day: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 day.
- one_week: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 week.
- one_month: RO is triggered based on handover statistics col-
lected for 1 month.

checking a fault where RACH performance is not temporarily
- one_hour: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics
- one_day: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics
- one_week: Fallback for RO based on the handover statistics
RACH_FILTERING_COEFF The coefficient applied to filtering when processing RACH sta-

tistics data. F(n) = (1-rachFilteringCoeff)xF(n-1) + rachFilter-
ingCoeff x CurrentValue
DEDICATED_INCREASE The threshold that increases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.

DEDICATED_DECREASE The threshold that decreases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
PROB_DEDICATED_INCREASE The probability that increases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
PROB_DEDICATED_DECREASE The probability that decreases the number of dedicated pream-

bles.
DEDICATED_MAX The maximum value of the number of dedicated preambles.

{n0, n4, n8, n12, n16, n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48,
n52, n56, n60}
DEDICATED_MIN The minimum value of the number of dedicated preambles. {n0,

n4, n8, n12, n16, n20, n24, n28, n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, n52,
n56, n60}
POWER_INCREASE The threshold that increases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
POWER_DECREASE The threshold that decreases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
POWER_INCREASE_DED The threshold that increases dedicated preamble Tx-related

power resources.
POWER_DECREASE_DED The threshold that decreases dedicated preamble Tx-related

power resources.
PROB_POWER_INCREASE The probability that increases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
PROB_POWER_DECREASE The probability that decreases preamble Tx-related power

resources.
PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MAXThe maximum value of initial

PREAMBLE_INITIAL_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER_MINThe minimum value of initial


Command Description

POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MAX The maximum value of ramping step. {dB0, dB2,dB4, dB6}
POWER_RAMPING_STEP_MIN The minimum value of ramping step. {dB0, dB2,dB4, dB6}
CONTENTION_INCREASE The threshold that increases PRACH configuration index.
CONTENTION_DECREASE The threshold that decreases PRACH configuration index.
PROB_CONTENTION_INCREASE The probability that increases PRACH configuration index.
PROB_CONTENTION_DECREASEThe probability that decreases PRACH configuration index.
TIME_CHANCE_MAX The maximum value of time chance index related to PRACH

TIME_CHANCE_MIN The minimum value of time chance index related to PRACH


C2272 RETRIEVE HYBRID PCI RANGE INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-HYBRIDPCI-INF: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves hybrid cell-related PCI. This command retrieves PCI value or PCI range of the hybrid
cell when the cell type is set to hybrid cell.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
FA_INDEX This index refer to the faIndex of Eutra- 0~7 NONE 0
FaPriorInfoFunc PLD and used for check
the Hybrid PCI range under the same fre-
quency of the target cell when inbound
handover decision.

FA_INDEX This index refer to the faIndex of EutraFaPriorInfoFunc PLD

and used for check the Hybrid PCI range under the same fre-
quency of the target cell when inbound handover decision.
HYBRID_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the hybrid cell. (0: The range is not
used, 1: The range is used.)
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the hybrid cell.
HYBRID_PCISTART The PCI start value of the hybrid cell.
HYBRID_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the hybrid cell. The range includes the start

Command Description
value.

C2273 CHANGE HYBRID PCI RANGE INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-HYBRIDPCI-INF: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [HYBRID_PCIRANGE_USAGE], [PCI_TYPE],
[HYBRID_PCISTART], [HYBRID_PCIRANGE];
Command Description
Changes hybrid cell-related PCI of the cell. This command changes PCI value or PCI range of
the hybrid cell when the cell type is set to hybrid cell.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
the Hybrid PCI range under the same fre-
handover decision.
HYBRID_PCIR Whether to use PCI range of the hybrid CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
ANGE_USAGE cell. (0: The range is not used, 1: The range se
is used.)
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the hybrid cell. ci_singlePci/ NONE ci_singl
ci_rangedPci/ ePci
HYBRID_PCIS The PCI start value of the hybrid cell. 0 ~ 503 NONE 0
TART
HYBRID_PCIR The PCI range of the hybrid cell. The range ci_rangePCI_n4/ NONE ci_rang
ANGE includes the start value. ci_rangePCI_n8/ ePCI_n
ci_rangePCI_n12/ 4
ci_rangePCI_n16/
ci_rangePCI_n24/
ci_rangePCI_n32/
ci_rangePCI_n48/
ci_rangePCI_n64/
ci_rangePCI_n84/
ci_rangePCI_n96/
ci_rangePCI_n128/
ci_rangePCI_n168/
ci_rangePCI_n252/
ci_rangePCI_n504/

Command Description


and used for check the Hybrid PCI range under the same fre-
HYBRID_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the hybrid cell. (0: The range is not
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the hybrid cell.
HYBRID_PCISTART The PCI start value of the hybrid cell.
HYBRID_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the hybrid cell. The range includes the start
value.

C2274 RETRIEVE OPEN PCI RANGE INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-OPENPCI-INF: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves open cell-related PCI of the cell. This command retrieves PCI value or PCI range of
the open cell when the cell type is set to open cell.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
the Open PCI range under the same fre-
handover decision.


and used for check the Open PCI range under the same fre-
OPEN_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the open cell. (0: The range is not
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the open cell.
OPEN_PCISTART The PCI start value of the open cell.
OPEN_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the open cell. The range includes the start

Command Description
value.

C2275 CHANGE OPEN PCI RANGE INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-OPENPCI-INF: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [OPEN_PCIRANGE_USAGE], [PCI_TYPE],
[OPEN_PCISTART], [OPEN_PCIRANGE];
Command Description
Changes open cell-related PCI of the cell. This command changes PCI value or PCI range of the
open cell when the cell type is set to open cell.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
the Open PCI range under the same fre-
handover decision.
OPEN_PCIRAN Whether to use PCI range of the open cell. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
GE_USAGE (0: The range is not used, 1: The range is se
used.)
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the open cell. ci_singlePci/ NONE ci_singl
ci_rangedPci/ ePci
OPEN_PCISTA The PCI start value of the open cell. 0 ~ 503 NONE 0
RT
OPEN_PCIRAN The PCI range of the open cell. The range ci_rangePCI_n4/ NONE ci_rang
GE includes the start value. ci_rangePCI_n8/ ePCI_n
ci_rangePCI_n12/ 4
ci_rangePCI_n16/
ci_rangePCI_n24/
ci_rangePCI_n32/
ci_rangePCI_n48/
ci_rangePCI_n64/
ci_rangePCI_n84/
ci_rangePCI_n96/
ci_rangePCI_n128/
ci_rangePCI_n168/
ci_rangePCI_n252/
ci_rangePCI_n504/

Command Description


and used for check the Open PCI range under the same fre-
OPEN_PCIRANGE_USAGE Whether to use PCI range of the open cell. (0: The range is not
PCI_TYPE The PCI type of the open cell.
OPEN_PCISTART The PCI start value of the open cell.
OPEN_PCIRANGE The PCI range of the open cell. The range includes the start
value.

C2276 RETRIEVE POSITIONING CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-POS-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves parameters required for UE positioning. UE positioning has two ways: E-CID and
OTDOA. Both of methods can view the current parameter among information included in the
UE positioning measurement.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

LATITUDE The latitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function. The
UE location information included in the cell can be calculated
using the latitude value.
LONGITUDE The longitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function.
The UE location information included in the cell can be calcu-
lated using the longitude value.
HEIGHT The altitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function. The
using the altitude value.
UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MAJOR The uncertainty of semi major. The uncertainty, which the user
enters directly. It can be calculated by a formula of r=10*(1.1k-

Command Description
1).
UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MINOR The uncertainty of semi minor. The uncertainty, which the user
1).
ORIENTATION_OF_MAJOR_AXISThe orientation of the major axis, which the user directly enters
the value chosen from 0 to 179.
UNCERTAINTY_ALTITUDE The uncertainty of altitude tolerance, which the user enters

directly. It can be calculated by using a formula of
h=45*(1.025k-1).
CONFIDENCE The confidence (%) of location service.
MEASUREMENT_INTERVAL The value used when the measured periodicity included in E-

CID measurement initiation request is periodic. The interval at
which MRs are received when eNB receives MR from the UE
periodically. This value can be changed by the user, which is a
different value from the interval used in eNB.
PRS_CONFIG_INDEX PRS configuration index. If the user enters a value, eNB sends
the value to MAC layer.
NUM_OF_DL_FRAME The number of downlink frames. If the user enters a value, eNB
sends the value to MAC layer.
PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_SIZE PRS muting configuration size. If the user enters a value, eNB
PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_VALUE PRS muting configuration. If the user enters a value, eNB sends
PRS_BANDWIDTH PRS Bandwidth. If the user enters a value, eNB sends the value
to MAC layer.
OTDOA_ENABLE OTDOA function On/Off. If this parameter set 0, OTDOA ser-

vice is off and also PRS signaling is off.

C2277 CHANGE POSITIONING CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-POS-CONF: CELL_NUM, [LATITUDE], [LONGITUDE], [HEIGHT],
[UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MAJOR], [UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MINOR],
[ORIENTATION_OF_MAJOR_AXIS], [UNCERTAINTY_ALTITUDE], [CONFIDENCE],
[MEASUREMENT_INTERVAL], [PRS_CONFIG_INDEX], [NUM_OF_DL_FRAME],
[PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_SIZE], [PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_VALUE], [PRS_BANDWIDTH],
[OTDOA_ENABLE];
Command Description
Changes parameters required for UE positioning. UE positioning has two ways: E-CID and
OTDOA. Both of methods can change the current parameter among information included in the
UE positioning measurement.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
LATITUDE The latitude of the cell for providing the 20 NONE N
OTDOA function. The UE location informa- 000:00:
tion included in the cell can be calculated 00.000
LONGITUDE The longitude of the cell for providing the 20 NONE E
OTDOA function. The UE location informa- 000:00:
tion included in the cell can be calculated 00.000
using the longitude value.
HEIGHT The altitude of the cell for providing the 20 NONE 0000.00
OTDOA function. The UE location informa- m
tion included in the cell can be calculated
UNCERTAINTY The uncertainty of semi major. The uncer- 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
_SEMI_MAJOR tainty, which the user enters directly. It can
be calculated by a formula of r=10*(1.1k-1).
UNCERTAINTY The uncertainty of semi minor. The uncer- 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
_SEMI_MINOR tainty, which the user enters directly. It can
be calculated by a formula of r=10*(1.1k-1).
ORIENTATION The orientation of the major axis, which the 0 ~ 179 NONE 0
_OF_MAJOR_ user directly enters the value chosen from
AXIS 0 to 179.

Command Description

UNCERTAINTY The uncertainty of altitude tolerance, which 0 ~ 127 NONE 0
_ALTITUDE the user enters directly. It can be calculated
by using a formula of h=45*(1.025k-1).
CONFIDENCE The confidence (%) of location service. 0 ~ 100 NONE 0
MEASUREMEN The value used when the measured period- ci_120ms/ci_240ms/ NONE ci_120m
T_INTERVAL icity included in E-CID measurement initia- ci_480ms/ci_640ms/ s
tion request is periodic. The interval at ci_1024ms/ci_2048ms/
which MRs are received when eNB ci_5120ms/
receives MR from the UE periodically. This ci_10240ms/ci_1min/
value can be changed by the user, which is ci_6min/ci_12min/
a different value from the interval used in ci_30min/ci_60min/
eNB.
PRS_CONFIG_ PRS configuration index. If the user enters 0 ~ 4095 NONE 1131
INDEX a value, eNB sends the value to MAC layer.
NUM_OF_DL_ The number of downlink frames. If the user ci_sf1/ci_sf2/ci_sf4/ NONE ci_sf1
FRAME enters a value, eNB sends the value to ci_sf6/
MAC layer.
PRS_MUTING_ PRS muting configuration size. If the user ci_Two/ci_Four/ NONE ci_Eight
CONFIG_SIZE enters a value, eNB sends the value to ci_Eight/ci_Sixteen/
MAC layer.
PRS_MUTING_ PRS muting configuration. If the user 0 ~ 65535 NONE 255
CONFIG_VALU enters a value, eNB sends the value to
E MAC layer.
PRS_BANDWI PRS Bandwidth. If the user enters a value, ci_prsBw6/ci_prsBw15/ NONE ci_prsB
DTH eNB sends the value to MAC layer. ci_prsBw25/ w50
ci_prsBw50/
ci_prsBw75/
ci_prsBw100/
OTDOA_ENAB OTDOA function On/Off. If this parameter False/True/ NONE False
LE set 0, OTDOA service is off and also PRS
signaling is off.

LATITUDE The latitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function. The
LONGITUDE The longitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function.
The UE location information included in the cell can be calcu-
lated using the longitude value.
HEIGHT The altitude of the cell for providing the OTDOA function. The

UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MAJOR The uncertainty of semi major. The uncertainty, which the user
1).
UNCERTAINTY_SEMI_MINOR The uncertainty of semi minor. The uncertainty, which the user
1).
ORIENTATION_OF_MAJOR_AXISThe orientation of the major axis, which the user directly enters
the value chosen from 0 to 179.
UNCERTAINTY_ALTITUDE The uncertainty of altitude tolerance, which the user enters

directly. It can be calculated by using a formula of
h=45*(1.025k-1).
CONFIDENCE The confidence (%) of location service.
MEASUREMENT_INTERVAL The value used when the measured periodicity included in E-

CID measurement initiation request is periodic. The interval at
which MRs are received when eNB receives MR from the UE
periodically. This value can be changed by the user, which is a
different value from the interval used in eNB.
PRS_CONFIG_INDEX PRS configuration index. If the user enters a value, eNB sends
NUM_OF_DL_FRAME The number of downlink frames. If the user enters a value, eNB
PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_SIZE PRS muting configuration size. If the user enters a value, eNB
PRS_MUTING_CONFIG_VALUE PRS muting configuration. If the user enters a value, eNB sends
PRS_BANDWIDTH PRS Bandwidth. If the user enters a value, eNB sends the value
to MAC layer.
OTDOA_ENABLE OTDOA function On/Off. If this parameter set 0, OTDOA ser-

vice is off and also PRS signaling is off.

Command Description
C2292 RETRIEVE SRS NEIGHBOR CELL CON-

FIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-SRSNBR-CONF: [CELL_NUM], [SRS_NBR_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve SRS configuration of SRS neighbor cell. phyCellId, clusterId, SRS pool index,
groupHopping and sequenceHopping can be Retrieved for each cell.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
SRS_NBR_IDX SRS neighbor cell index. 0 ~ 19 NONE 0

SRS_NBR_IDX SRS neighbor cell index.
STATUS The validity of the SRS neighbor cell information.
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which SRS neighbor cell to the eNB
belongs. If the enbType value is macro eNB, 20 bit of the value
is eNB ID. If the enbType value is home eNB, 28 bit of the
value is eNB ID. It is used when creating a cell identifier.
TARGET_CELL_NUM The local cell ID of SRS neighbor cell to the eNB. It is used
when creating a cell identifier.

C2303 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL EUTRAN CELL

FDD INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-NBR-EUTRAN: [CELL_NUM], [RELATION_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieves information on E-UTRAN neighboring cell to the eNB. If the CELL_NUM and
RELATION_INDEX parameters are entered, the information for a certain E-UTRAN neighbor-
ing cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all E-UTRAN neighboring cells is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

cell.


invalid ID.
ID.


Command Description
- True: Femto cell.




the eNB belongs.



eNB.
















eNB.

Command Description

eNB.

nected mode.

mode.



C2304 RETRIEVE SYSTEM UE COUNT
Command Format
RTRV-SYS-UECNT;
Command Description
Retrieves the number of UE that is connected to the eNB. This command number of Active UE
of RRC Establishment cause and HO (Handover) is separated by a command to query.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

ACTIVE_UECOUNT The total number of calls assigned to all cells in the system.
EMER_AC_UECOUNT It is emergency access UE count.
H_PRIORITY_AC_UECOUNT It is high priority access UE count.
M_TERM_AC_UECOUNT It is mobile terminating access UE count.
M_ORG_SIGNAL_AC_UECOUNT It is mobile originating signalling access UE count.
M_ORG_DATA_AC_UECOUNT It is mobile originating data access UE count.
RELOCATE_HOCOUNT It is relocated handover count.

Command Description
C2305 RETRIEVE HANDOVER OPTION INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-HO-OPT;
Command Description
Retrieves handover information. The user can retrieve the E-RAB iteration method set in the
eNB, whether to include neighboring cell list (NCL), and whether to forward uplink data in the
target eNB.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

ERAB_INTERACTION Prioritization information when contention occurs between E-
RAB and handover procedures.
- 0: Performs handover first (Handover Prior).
- 1: Performs E-RAB procedures (ERAB Prior).
USED_NBR_LIST The method for providing the neighboring cell list included in
MeasObjectEUTRA of the RRC Connection Reconfiguration
message.
- 0: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is not dB0 are only
included in the list (by algorithm).
- 1: Neighboring cells whose CIO value is dB0 are also
included in the list (force-used).
UPLINK_FORWARD Whether to forward uplink data in the target base station during
handover.
NUM_OF_ENB The number of target base stations for multi-target preparation

during handover. The maximum of 4 eNBs can be prepared. If

the value entered is 1, the multi-target preparation is not exe-

cuted.
RIM_ENABLE Whether to RIM procedure decision.
MME_SELECT_FACTOR_FOR_RIMThis parameter is MME Selection Factor for RIM Procedure.

Command Description
C2306 RETRIEVE CELL UE COUNT
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-UECNT: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the number of UE that is connected to the Cell. This command number of Active UE
of RRC Establishment cause and HO (Handover) is separated by a command to query.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
supported.

ported.
ACTIVE_UECOUNT The number of calls assigned to the cell.


Command Description
C2307 CHANGE SRS INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SRS-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
This command defines to change SRS(Sounding Reference Signal) paramters in each cell.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM Cell index (number) 0~8 NONE 0
E changed value.

CELL_NUM Cell index (number)

C2308 RETRIEVE SRS INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SRS-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
This command defines to retrieve SRS(Sounding Reference Signal) paramters in each cell.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


Command Description
C2309 RETRIEVE INTERWORK PARAMETER
Command Format
RTRV-INTER-PARA: [SUB_CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the Interwork Parameter Information.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
SUB_CELL_NUM Indicated sub cell number. 0 ~ 17 NONE 0

SUB_CELL_NUM Indicated sub cell number.
CSFB_HYSTERESIS This attribute indicate the CSFB Hysteresis value.

C2310 RETRIEVE SON LB INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-SON-LB;
Command Description
Retrieve SON Load Balancing Multi-Carrier Information
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

NUM_LB_CANDIDATE Number of UEs which perform measurement for LBMC
NUM_LB_TARGET Number of UEs which perform handover for LBMC
NUM_LB_MAX_UE Maximum number of UEs defined for capacity value
CAPACITY_LB_ALPHA_FACTORCoefficient of numLbmcMaxUe defined for capacity value
CAPACITY_LB_BETA_FACTOR Coefficient of non-GBR PRB usage defined for capacity value
GOLD_UE_FACTOR Weight of Gold class UEs
SILVER_UE_FACTOR Weight of Silver class UEs
MULTI_CA_LOAD_GAP_THRESHOLDThreshold of load distribution between two cells in the

same group of same sector. If the radio resource load gap of the
two cells is greater than this threshold, multicarrier load distri-
bution is triggered.
INTRAGROUP_LB_TRIGGER_THRESHOLDThreshold of load distribution between two cells in

the same group of same sector. Only when the radio resource
load of source cell is greater than this threshold, multicarrier
load distribution can be triggered.

Command Description
OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_PRB Threshold of load distribution between two cells in the same

group of same sector. Only when the radio resource load of tar-
get cell is smaller than this threshold, multicarrier load distribu-
tion can be triggered.
OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_TARGETThreshold of inter-sector load distribution. Only when the

radio resource load of target cell is smaller than this threshold,
inter-sector load distribution can be triggered.
CPU_THRESHOLD MAximum CPU load defined for capacity value
MIN_BACK_HAUL_CAPACITY Minimum backhaul capacity per UE defined for capacity value
T_LOAD_DECISION_LB Period of cell load calculation
T_RESOURCE_STATUS_REPORTINGPeriod of cell load status reporting to X2 connected neigh-

bor cells
T_MEASUREMENT_COLLECTION_LBPeriod of measurement report collection
T_MEASUREMENT_REPORT_INTERVAL_LBInterval of periodic measurement report
M_LB_FLAG_STEP1 Whether to enable the mlb Step1.

- OFF (0): The function is turned off.
- ON (1): The function is turned on.


M_LB_RADIO_CONDITION Wheter to select RSRP or RSRQ as a radio condition for mlb.

- ci_rsrp : select RSRP.
- ci_rsrq : select RSRQ.
M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRP RSRP threshold used in selecting mLb candidate UEs in MLB

step 1, 2.
M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRQ RSRQ threshold used in selecting mLb candidate UEs in MLB

step 1, 2.

Command Description
C2311 CHANGE SON LB INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-SON-LB: [NUM_LB_CANDIDATE], [NUM_LB_TARGET], [NUM_LB_MAX_UE],
[CAPACITY_LB_ALPHA_FACTOR], [CAPACITY_LB_BETA_FACTOR], [GOLD_UE_FACTOR],
[SILVER_UE_FACTOR], [MULTI_CA_LOAD_GAP_THRESHOLD],
[INTRAGROUP_LB_TRIGGER_THRESHOLD], [OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_PRB],
[OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_TARGET], [CPU_THRESHOLD], [MIN_BACK_HAUL_CAPACITY],
[T_LOAD_DECISION_LB], [T_RESOURCE_STATUS_REPORTING],
[T_MEASUREMENT_COLLECTION_LB], [T_MEASUREMENT_REPORT_INTERVAL_LB],
[M_LB_FLAG_STEP1], [M_LB_FLAG_STEP2], [M_LB_FLAG_STEP3],
[M_LB_RADIO_CONDITION], [M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRP], [M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRQ];
Command Description
Change SON Load Balancing Multi-Carrier Information
TIMEOUT 10

NUM_LB_CAN Number of UEs which perform measure- 0 ~ 600 NONE 20
DIDATE ment for LBMC
NUM_LB_TAR Number of UEs which perform handover for 0 ~ 600 NONE 1
GET LBMC
NUM_LB_MAX Maximum number of UEs defined for 0 ~ 600 NONE 600
_UE capacity value
CAPACITY_LB Coefficient of numLbmcMaxUe defined for 0.0 ~ 1.0 NONE 0.8
_ALPHA_FACT capacity value
OR
CAPACITY_LB Coefficient of non-GBR PRB usage defined 0.0 ~ 1.0 NONE 1.0
_BETA_FACTO for capacity value
R
GOLD_UE_FA Weight of Gold class UEs 1.0 ~ 10.0 NONE 1.0
CTOR
SILVER_UE_F Weight of Silver class UEs 1.0 ~ 10.0 NONE 1.0
ACTOR
MULTI_CA_LO Threshold of load distribution between two 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 10.0
AD_GAP_THR cells in the same group of same sector. If
ESHOLD the radio resource load gap of the two cells
is greater than this threshold, multicarrier
load distribution is triggered.


INTRAGROUP Threshold of load distribution between two 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 40.0
_LB_TRIGGER cells in the same group of same sector.
_THRESHOLD Only when the radio resource load of
source cell is greater than this threshold,
multicarrier load distribution can be trig-
gered.
OVERLOAD_T Threshold of load distribution between two 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 75.0
HRESHOLD_P cells in the same group of same sector.
RB Only when the radio resource load of target
cell is smaller than this threshold, multicar-
rier load distribution can be triggered.
OVERLOAD_T Threshold of inter-sector load distribution. 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 75.0
HRESHOLD_T Only when the radio resource load of target
ARGET cell is smaller than this threshold, inter-sec-
tor load distribution can be triggered.
CPU_THRESH MAximum CPU load defined for capacity 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 70.0
OLD value
MIN_BACK_HA Minimum backhaul capacity per UE defined 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 3.0
UL_CAPACITY for capacity value
T_LOAD_DECI Period of cell load calculation 0 ~ 1440 NONE 5
SION_LB
T_RESOURCE Period of cell load status reporting to X2 ci_lbPeriod1_1000ms/ NONE ci_lbPer
_STATUS_REP connected neighbor cells ci_lbPeriod1_2000ms/ iod1_10
ORTING ci_lbPeriod1_5000ms/ 000ms
ci_lbPeriod1_10000ms/
T_MEASUREM Period of measurement report collection ci_lbPeriod2_500ms/ NONE ci_lbPer
ENT_COLLECT ci_lbPeriod2_1min/ iod2_1
ION_LB ci_lbPeriod2_2min/ min
ci_lbPeriod2_3min/
ci_lbPeriod2_4min/
ci_lbPeriod2_5min/
ci_lbPeriod2_10min/
ci_lbPeriod2_20min/
ci_lbPeriod2_30min/
ci_lbPeriod2_40min/
ci_lbPeriod2_50min/
ci_lbPeriod2_60min/
T_MEASUREM Interval of periodic measurement report ci_lbPeriod3_120ms/ NONE ci_lbPer
ENT_REPORT ci_lbPeriod3_240ms/ iod3_48
_INTERVAL_LB ci_lbPeriod3_480ms/ 0ms
ci_lbPeriod3_640ms/
ci_lbPeriod3_1min/
ci_lbPeriod3_6min/
ci_lbPeriod3_12min/
ci_lbPeriod3_30min/
ci_lbPeriod3_60min/
M_LB_FLAG_S Whether to enable the mlb Step1. OFF/ON/ NONE OFF
TEP1 - OFF (0): The function is turned off.

Command Description

M_LB_FLAG_S Whether to enable the mlb Step2. OFF/ON/ NONE ON
M_LB_FLAG_S Whether to enable the mlb Step3. OFF/ON/ NONE ON

M_LB_RADIO_ Wheter to select RSRP or RSRQ as a radio ci_rsrp/ci_rsrq/ NONE ci_rsrq

CONDITION condition for mlb.
M_LB_THRES RSRP threshold used in selecting mLb 0 ~ 97 NONE 55

HOLD_RSRP candidate UEs in MLB step 1, 2.
M_LB_THRES RSRQ threshold used in selecting mLb 0 ~ 34 NONE 23
HOLD_RSRQ candidate UEs in MLB step 1, 2.

NUM_LB_CANDIDATE Number of UEs which perform measurement for LBMC
NUM_LB_TARGET Number of UEs which perform handover for LBMC
NUM_LB_MAX_UE Maximum number of UEs defined for capacity value
CAPACITY_LB_ALPHA_FACTORCoefficient of numLbmcMaxUe defined for capacity value
CAPACITY_LB_BETA_FACTOR Coefficient of non-GBR PRB usage defined for capacity value
GOLD_UE_FACTOR Weight of Gold class UEs
SILVER_UE_FACTOR Weight of Silver class UEs
MULTI_CA_LOAD_GAP_THRESHOLDThreshold of load distribution between two cells in the

same group of same sector. If the radio resource load gap of the
two cells is greater than this threshold, multicarrier load distri-
bution is triggered.
INTRAGROUP_LB_TRIGGER_THRESHOLDThreshold of load distribution between two cells in

the same group of same sector. Only when the radio resource
load of source cell is greater than this threshold, multicarrier
load distribution can be triggered.
OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_PRB Threshold of load distribution between two cells in the same

group of same sector. Only when the radio resource load of tar-

get cell is smaller than this threshold, multicarrier load distribu-

tion can be triggered.
OVERLOAD_THRESHOLD_TARGETThreshold of inter-sector load distribution. Only when the

radio resource load of target cell is smaller than this threshold,
inter-sector load distribution can be triggered.
CPU_THRESHOLD MAximum CPU load defined for capacity value
MIN_BACK_HAUL_CAPACITY Minimum backhaul capacity per UE defined for capacity value
T_LOAD_DECISION_LB Period of cell load calculation
T_RESOURCE_STATUS_REPORTINGPeriod of cell load status reporting to X2 connected neigh-

bor cells
T_MEASUREMENT_COLLECTION_LBPeriod of measurement report collection
T_MEASUREMENT_REPORT_INTERVAL_LBInterval of periodic measurement report



M_LB_RADIO_CONDITION Wheter to select RSRP or RSRQ as a radio condition for mlb.

M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRP RSRP threshold used in selecting mLb candidate UEs in MLB

step 1, 2.
M_LB_THRESHOLD_RSRQ RSRQ threshold used in selecting mLb candidate UEs in MLB

step 1, 2.

Command Description
C2312 RETRIEVE SCHEDULER SERVER CON-

FIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-SCHRSERV-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the Scheduler system information.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

CLUSTER_ID This is the Scheduler server ID to which this eNB belongs.
SCHR_TYPE Scheduler server type
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the Scheduler server interworking

function configured by the user.

C2313 CHANGE SCHEDULER SERVER CONFIG-

URATION
Command Format
CHG-SCHRSERV-INF: [CLUSTER_ID], [SCHR_TYPE], [ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE];
Command Description
Changes the Scheduler system information.
TIMEOUT 10

CLUSTER_ID This is the Scheduler server ID to which 0 ~ 1023 NONE 0
this eNB belongs.
SCHR_TYPE Scheduler server type eRTCluster/ NONE eSCHR
eNRTScheduler/ _NONE
eSCHR_NONE/
ADMINISTRATI The administrative state of the Scheduler locked/unlocked/shut- NONE unlocke
VE_STATE server interworking function configured by tingDown/ d
the user.

CLUSTER_ID This is the Scheduler server ID to which this eNB belongs.
SCHR_TYPE Scheduler server type
ADMINISTRATIVE_STATE The administrative state of the Scheduler server interworking

function configured by the user.

Command Description
C2314 RETRIEVE SON SRS PARAMETERS
Command Format
RTRV-SON-SRS;
Command Description
Retrieves the parameter information for the SON SRS function. This command retrieves the
operation condition when the SRS function is set to Manual Apply or Auto Apply by the CHG-
SONFN-CELL command.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

MAX_SRS_NRT_SIZE Maximum SRS NRTsize of cell.
MIN_POOL_SIZE Minimum # of SRS Pool Index allowed
MAX_POOL_SIZE Maximum # of SRS Pool Index allowed
RESERV_POOL_START Start SRS Pool Index of the reserved SRS Pool area for new
Cell(eNB) grow.
NR_RANKING_PERIOD SRS NR Ranking ReCalculation Period(hours) if SRS SON

enabled.
TH_MR_CNT If the MR count of a NR cell is greater than or equal to this

threshold, the NR cell can be a SRS NR.
TH_MR_CNT_RATIO The ratio : Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_High/Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_Low
COEF_MR_CNT_FILTER MR count IIR filtering coefficient.

C2315 CHANGE SON SRS PARAMETERS
Command Format
CHG-SON-SRS: [MAX_SRS_NRT_SIZE], [MIN_POOL_SIZE], [MAX_POOL_SIZE],
[RESERV_POOL_START], [NR_RANKING_PERIOD], [TH_MR_CNT], [TH_MR_CNT_RATIO],
[COEF_MR_CNT_FILTER];
Command Description
Changes the parameter information for the SON SRS function. This command can change the
condition by using the CHG-SONFN-CELL command when the SRS function is set to Manual
Apply or Auto Apply.
TIMEOUT 10

MAX_SRS_NR Maximum SRS NRTsize of cell. 1 ~ 20 NONE 8
T_SIZE
MIN_POOL_SI Minimum # of SRS Pool Index allowed 1~4 NONE 1
ZE
MAX_POOL_SI Maximum # of SRS Pool Index allowed 4 ~ 16 NONE 4
ZE
RESERV_POO Start SRS Pool Index of the reserved SRS 50 ~ 79 NONE 60
L_START Pool area for new Cell(eNB) grow.
NR_RANKING_ SRS NR Ranking ReCalculation srs_6hour/srs_12hour/ NONE srs_1da
PERIOD Period(hours) if SRS SON enabled. srs_1day/srs_2day/ y
srs_3day/srs_4day/
srs_5day/srs_6day/
srs_7day/
TH_MR_CNT If the MR count of a NR cell is greater than 1 ~ 1000 NONE 100
or equal to this threshold, the NR cell can
be a SRS NR.
TH_MR_CNT_ The ratio : Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_High/ 1.000000 ~ 10.000000 NONE 2.00000
RATIO Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_Low 0
COEF_MR_CN MR count IIR filtering coefficient. 0.000000 ~ 1.000000 NONE 0.5
T_FILTER

MAX_SRS_NRT_SIZE Maximum SRS NRTsize of cell.

Command Description
MIN_POOL_SIZE Minimum # of SRS Pool Index allowed
MAX_POOL_SIZE Maximum # of SRS Pool Index allowed
RESERV_POOL_START Start SRS Pool Index of the reserved SRS Pool area for new
Cell(eNB) grow.
NR_RANKING_PERIOD SRS NR Ranking ReCalculation Period(hours) if SRS SON

enabled.
TH_MR_CNT If the MR count of a NR cell is greater than or equal to this

threshold, the NR cell can be a SRS NR.
TH_MR_CNT_RATIO The ratio : Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_High/Th_MR_Cnt_Ratio_Low
COEF_MR_CNT_FILTER MR count IIR filtering coefficient.

C2316 RETRIEVE SMARTCELL AND SCHED-

ULER INTERWORKING CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-CELLSCHR-CONF: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrives the interwoking function between a SmartCell of an eNB and Scheduler(SCHR) server.
This configuration is valid only if SmartCellType of this eNB(system) is not
e_SMARTCELL_TYPE_OFF.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
supported by the system.

number of cells supported by the system.
SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLEIt is the SmartCell Coordination function On(true)/Off(false)

flag, i.e. control flag of inteworking function between a Smart-
Cell and the Scheduler server.

Command Description
state.

C2317 CHANGE SMARTCELL AND SCHEDULER

INTERWORKING CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-CELLSCHR-CONF: CELL_NUM, [SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLE];
Command Description
Changes the interwoking function between a SmartCell of an eNB and Scheduler(SCHR) server.
This configuration is valid only if SmartCellType of this eNB(system) is not
e_SMARTCELL_TYPE_OFF.
TIMEOUT 10

ported by the system.
SMART_CELL_ It is the SmartCell Coordination function False/True/ NONE True
COORDI_ENA On(true)/Off(false) flag, i.e. control flag of
BLE inteworking function between a SmartCell
and the Scheduler server.
- locked: A transitional state in the cell
- unlocked: The cell growth is complete.
The grown resources are available in the
PLD to offer a call service.
cell degrowth process. In this state, the
grown resources in the PLD continue to
offer the call service of the previous
unlocked state but does not offer any new
call services. When the current call service
is complete, the resources automatically


Command Description
number of cells supported by the system.
SMART_CELL_COORDI_ENABLEIt is the SmartCell Coordination function On(true)/Off(false)

flag, i.e. control flag of inteworking function between a Smart-
Cell and the Scheduler server.
state.

C2320 RETRIEVE IDLE MODE LB INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-IDLELB-INFO: [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the Idle Mode Load Balancing Control Information.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
FA_INDEX Indicated FA Index 0~7 NONE 0

FA_INDEX Indicated FA Index
STATUS The validity of each tuple information.
BAND_INDICATOR Band indicator for Idle Mode Load Balancing.

ber) for Idle Mode Load Balancing.
SEARCH_RATE Frequency Selection Percentage
PRIORITY Cell Reselection Priority

Command Description
C2321 CHANGE IDLE MODE LB INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-IDLELB-INFO: FA_INDEX, [STATUS], [BAND_INDICATOR], [EARFCN_DL],
[SEARCH_RATE], [PRIORITY];
Command Description
Changes the Idle Mode Load Balancing Control Information.
TIMEOUT 10

FA_INDEX Indicated FA Index 0~7 NONE 0
STATUS The validity of each tuple information. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
P
BAND_INDICA Band indicator for Idle Mode Load Balanc- 1 ~ 64 NONE 2
TOR ing.
EARFCN_DL Downlink ARFCN (Absolute Radio Fre- 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
quency Channel Number) for Idle Mode
Load Balancing.
SEARCH_RAT Frequency Selection Percentage 0 ~ 65535 NONE 0
E
PRIORITY Cell Reselection Priority 0~7 NONE 0

FA_INDEX Indicated FA Index
STATUS The validity of each tuple information.
BAND_INDICATOR Band indicator for Idle Mode Load Balancing.

ber) for Idle Mode Load Balancing.
SEARCH_RATE Frequency Selection Percentage
PRIORITY Cell Reselection Priority

C2331 CHANGE INTERWORK PARAMETER
Command Format
CHG-INTER-PARA: SUB_CELL_NUM, [CSFB_HYSTERESIS];
Command Description
Changes the Interwork Parameter Information.
TIMEOUT 10

SUB_CELL_NU Indicated sub cell number. 0 ~ 17 NONE 0
M
CSFB_HYSTE This attribute indicate the CSFB Hysteresis 0 ~ 30 NONE 0
RESIS value.

SUB_CELL_NUM Indicated sub cell number.
CSFB_HYSTERESIS This attribute indicate the CSFB Hysteresis value.

Command Description
C2333 RETRIEVE EUTRAN CELL INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-INFO: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieve cell information
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

CELL_SIZE The is cell size.

- ci_cellsize_verysmall : Very Small size cell.
-ci_cellsize_small : Small size cell.
-ci_cellsize_medium : Medium size cell.
-ci_cellsize_large : Large size cell
HNB_NAME The name of the home eNB. Broadcast to the UE through SIB
(System Information Block) 9 when the cell is operated as a
CSG cell or as a hybrid cell in bytes.

Mobile Network (PLMN). It is broadcast to UE via SIB 1 when
cells are in operation. A total of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MCC of
PLMN #0, one of the six lists, is entered.
MNC0 MNC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast to UE via System

Information Block (SIB) 1 when cells are in operation. A total

of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MNC of PLMN #0, one of the six
lists, is entered.
CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE0 CellReservedOpUse of PLMN #0. Broadcast to the UE through

- ci_reserved: Selection/re-selection is reserved for UEs that
have a specific access class (AC) to PLMN #0.
- ci_notReserved: Selection/re-selection is available for UEs
that have all access classes (AC) to PLMN #0.
MCC1 MCC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast to UE via SIB 1

when cells are in operation. A total of 6 PLMN lists are sent.
MCC of PLMN #1, one of the six lists, is entered.
MNC1 MNC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast to UE via SIB 1

MNC of PLMN #1, one of the six lists, is entered.
CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE1 cellReservedOpUse of PLMN #1. It is broadcast to UE via SIB

1.
have a specific AC to PLMN #1.



1.


Command Description


1.



1.
MCC5 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that comprises PLMN. It is

broadcast to UE via SIB 1 when cells are in operation. A total of
6 PLMN lists are sent. MCC of PLMN #5, one of the six lists, is
entered.


1.

ADD_SPECTRUM_EMISSION Additional spectrum emission used by the active cell. At max

power, UE can additionally reduce power. See 6.2.4 in 3GPP
TS 36.101. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 2.
TRACKING_AREA_CODE TAC (Tracking Area Code) used by the active cell. It is used for
warning message transmission and interruption when paging
the UE. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
IMS_EMERGENCY_SUPPORT supports IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) emergency calls.

This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
- False: The cell in operation does not support IMS Emergency.
- True: The cell in operation supports IMS Emergency.

Command Description
C2334 CHANGE EUTRAN CELL INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-CELL-INFO: CELL_NUM, [CELL_SIZE], [HNB_NAME], [MCC0], [MNC0],
[CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE0], [MCC1], [MNC1], [CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE1], [MCC2],
[MNC2], [CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE2], [MCC3], [MNC3], [CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE3],
[MCC4], [MNC4], [CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE4], [MCC5], [MNC5],
[CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE5], [ADD_SPECTRUM_EMISSION], [TRACKING_AREA_CODE],
[IMS_EMERGENCY_SUPPORT];
Command Description
Change cell information
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
CELL_SIZE The is cell size. ci_cellsize_verysmall/ NONE ci_cellsi
- ci_cellsize_verysmall : Very Small size ci_cellsize_small/ ze_larg
cell. ci_cellsize_medium/ e
-ci_cellsize_small : Small size cell. ci_cellsize_large/
HNB_NAME The name of the home eNB. Broadcast to 48 NONE SAMSU

the UE through SIB (System Information NG_LT
Block) 9 when the cell is operated as a E
MCC0 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that com- 3 NONE 450
(PLMN). It is broadcast to UE via SIB 1
when cells are in operation. A total of 6
PLMN lists are sent. MCC of PLMN #0, one
of the six lists, is entered.
MNC0 MNC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast 3 NONE 08
to UE via System Information Block (SIB) 1
when cells are in operation. A total of 6
PLMN lists are sent. MNC of PLMN #0, one


CELL_RESERV CellReservedOpUse of PLMN #0. Broad- ci_reserved/ NONE ci_notR
ED_OP_USE0 cast to the UE through SIB (System Infor- ci_notReserved/ eserved
mation Block) 1.
- ci_reserved: Selection/re-selection is
reserved for UEs that have a specific
access class (AC) to PLMN #0.
- ci_notReserved: Selection/re-selection is
available for UEs that have all access
classes (AC) to PLMN #0.
MCC1 MCC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast 3 NONE FFF
to UE via SIB 1 when cells are in operation.
A total of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MCC of
MNC1 MNC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast 3 NONE FFF
A total of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MNC of
CELL_RESERV cellReservedOpUse of PLMN #1. It is ci_reserved/ NONE ci_notR
ED_OP_USE1 broadcast to UE via SIB 1. ci_notReserved/ eserved
reserved for UEs that have a specific AC to
PLMN #1.
PLMN #2.

Command Description

PLMN #3.
PLMN #4.
prises PLMN. It is broadcast to UE via SIB
1 when cells are in operation. A total of 6
PLMN lists are sent. MCC of PLMN #5, one
reserved for UEs that have a specific
access class (AC) to PLMN #5.
ADD_SPECTR Additional spectrum emission used by the 1 ~ 32 NONE 1
UM_EMISSION active cell. At max power, UE can addition-
ally reduce power. See 6.2.4 in 3GPP TS
36.101. This information is broadcast to UE
via SIB 2.
TRACKING_AR TAC (Tracking Area Code) used by the H'0000 ~ H'FFFF NONE H'0000
EA_CODE active cell. It is used for warning message
transmission and interruption when paging
the UE. This information is broadcast to UE
via SIB 1.


IMS_EMERGE supports IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) False/True/ NONE False
NCY_SUPPOR emergency calls. This information is broad-
T cast to UE via SIB 1.
- False: The cell in operation does not sup-
port IMS Emergency.
- True: The cell in operation supports IMS
Emergency.

CELL_SIZE The is cell size.

- ci_cellsize_verysmall : Very Small size cell.
-ci_cellsize_small : Small size cell.
HNB_NAME The name of the home eNB. Broadcast to the UE through SIB
(System Information Block) 9 when the cell is operated as a

Mobile Network (PLMN). It is broadcast to UE via SIB 1 when
cells are in operation. A total of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MCC of
MNC0 MNC that comprises PLMN. It is broadcast to UE via System

Information Block (SIB) 1 when cells are in operation. A total
of 6 PLMN lists are sent. MNC of PLMN #0, one of the six
lists, is entered.
CELL_RESERVED_OP_USE0 CellReservedOpUse of PLMN #0. Broadcast to the UE through



Command Description


1.



1.



1.




1.
MCC5 Mobile Country Code (MCC) that comprises PLMN. It is

broadcast to UE via SIB 1 when cells are in operation. A total of
6 PLMN lists are sent. MCC of PLMN #5, one of the six lists, is
entered.


1.
ADD_SPECTRUM_EMISSION Additional spectrum emission used by the active cell. At max

power, UE can additionally reduce power. See 6.2.4 in 3GPP
TS 36.101. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 2.
TRACKING_AREA_CODE TAC (Tracking Area Code) used by the active cell. It is used for
warning message transmission and interruption when paging
the UE. This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
IMS_EMERGENCY_SUPPORT supports IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) emergency calls.

This information is broadcast to UE via SIB 1.
- False: The cell in operation does not support IMS Emergency.
- True: The cell in operation supports IMS Emergency.

Command Description
C2335 RETRIEVE EMERGENCY AREA ID
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-EMRG: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieve Emergency Area Identity
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
retrieved.

EAID0_USAGE Whether using for emergency ared ID or not
EMERGENCY_AREA_ID0 Emergency area identity used by the active cell. Used for warn-
ing message transmission and interruption.


Command Description

C2336 CHANGE EMERGENCY AREA ID
Command Format
CHG-CELL-EMRG: CELL_NUM, [EAID0_USAGE], [EMERGENCY_AREA_ID0], [EAID1_USAGE],
[EMERGENCY_AREA_ID1], [EAID2_USAGE], [EMERGENCY_AREA_ID2], [EAID3_USAGE],
[EMERGENCY_AREA_ID13], [EAID14_USAGE], [EMERGENCY_AREA_ID14];
Command Description
Change Emergency Area Identity
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
EAID0_USAGE Whether using for emergency ared ID or CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
not se
EMERGENCY_ Emergency area identity used by the active H'0000 ~ H'FFFFFF NONE H'0000
AREA_ID0 cell. Used for warning message transmis-
sion and interruption.
not se
not se
not se
not se

Command Description

not se
not se
not se
not se
not se
EAID10_USAG Whether using for emergency ared ID or CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
E not se
E not se
E not se
E not se


E not se


Command Description

C2338 CHANGE UTRA CARRIER SIB INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-CAR: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [STATUS], [DUPLEX_TYPE], [UARFCN_DL],
[RESEL_PRIORITY_USAGE], [PRIORITY], [THRESH_XHIGH], [THRESH_XLOW],
[Q_RX_LEV_MIN], [P_MAX_UTRA], [Q_QUAL_MIN], [THRESH_XHIGH_QREL9],
[THRESH_XLOW_QREL9];
Command Description
Changes the UTRA FA priority information.
TIMEOUT 10

STATUS Whether the EUTRA FA is valid ID. N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
P
DUPLEX_TYPE The duplex mode information on a cell. ci_FDD/ci_TDD/ NONE ci_FDD
Enter either FDD or TDD.
UARFCN_DL Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency 0 ~ 16383 NONE 0

Channel Number.
RESEL_PRIOR Decide sending value of cellReselectionPri- CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_use
ITY_USAGE ority by reselPriorityUsage
PRIORITY Priority information on the UTRA FA. 0~7 NONE 4
THRESH_XHIG The threshold used in the UE to reselect a 0 ~ 31 NONE 0
THRESH_XLO The threshold used to reselect low-priority 0 ~ 31 NONE 0
Q_RX_LEV_MI The minimum RX level required in a cell in -60 ~ -13 NONE -50
N dBm units.
P_MAX_UTRA The maximum RF output power in the UE. -50 ~ 33 NONE 0
Q_QUAL_MIN The minimum quality level required in -24 ~ 0 NONE 0
UTRA FDD cells.

Command Description

THRESH_XHIG The threshold used in the UE to reselect a 0 ~ 31 NONE 0
THRESH_XLO The threshold used to reselect low-priority 0 ~ 31 NONE 0
Rel-9.


TDD.
RESEL_PRIORITY_USAGE Decide sending value of cellReselectionPriority by reselPriori-

tyUsage






Command Description
C2339 RETRIEVE UTRA CARRIER SIB INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-CAR: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves priority of UTRA FA. If the CELL_NUM and FA_INDEX parameters are entered, the
information only for the UTRAN FA object registered to the corresponding E-UTRAN served
cell is retrieved. If not, the information for all UTRAN FA objects is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10



TDD.
RESEL_PRIORITY_USAGE Decide sending value of cellReselectionPriority by reselPriori-

tyUsage






Command Description
C2343 RETRIEVE INTERWORKING OPTION
Command Format
RTRV-INTWO-OPT: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieve Interworking Option Information.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

INTER_FREQ_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the inter-frequency hando-

ver.
- 0: Redirection is not executed during handover (normal).
- 1: Redirection is executed regardless of condition (force-
used).
INTER_RAT_PS_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover.

used).
INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the CSFB with inter RAT
handover.
used).
IDLE_CSFB_OPTIMIZED Whether to optimize call setup procedure for CSFB in Idle state

UE.
- False : Do not optimized call setup procedure.
- True : Do optimized call setup procedure.

Command Description
C2344 CHANGE INTERWORKING OPTION
Command Format
CHG-INTWO-OPT: CELL_NUM, [INTER_FREQ_REDIRECTION], [INTER_RAT_PS_REDIRECTION],
[INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION], [IDLE_CSFB_OPTIMIZED];
Command Description
Change Interworking Option Information.
TIMEOUT 10

INTER_FREQ_ Whether to force redirection during the False/True/ NONE False
REDIRECTION inter-frequency handover.
- 0: Redirection is not executed during
handover (normal).
- 1: Redirection is executed regardless of
condition (force-used).
INTER_RAT_P Whether to force redirection during the inter False/True/ NONE True
S_REDIRECTI RAT PS handover.
ON - 0: Redirection is not executed during
handover (normal).
INTER_RAT_C Whether to force redirection during the False/True/ NONE True
S_REDIRECTI CSFB with inter RAT handover.
ON - 0: Redirection is not executed during
handover (normal).
IDLE_CSFB_O Whether to optimize call setup procedure False/True/ NONE True
PTIMIZED for CSFB in Idle state UE.
- False : Do not optimized call setup proce-
dure.


INTER_FREQ_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the inter-frequency hando-

ver.
used).
INTER_RAT_PS_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the inter RAT PS handover.

used).
INTER_RAT_CS_REDIRECTION Whether to force redirection during the CSFB with inter RAT
handover.
used).
IDLE_CSFB_OPTIMIZED Whether to optimize call setup procedure for CSFB in Idle state
UE.
- False : Do not optimized call setup procedure.

Command Description
C2370 CHANGE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-PRIOR: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, SPID, [DEDICATED_PRIORITY];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the UTRA FA dedicated Priority Information
accroding SPID. When the Cell Num, fa Index and SPID parameter values are set as input val-
ues, the UTRA FA Dedicated Priority information registered to the specified cell in the eNB can
be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

FA_INDEX UTRA frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be 0~5 NONE 0
assigned per cell. It is mapping to PLDUtra-
FaPriorInfo.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency spid_254/spid_255/ NONE spid_25
priority. spid_256/ 4
DEDICATED_P Dedicated Priority Value for frequency 0~7 NONE 4
RIORITY according SPID.

FA_INDEX UTRA frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be assigned per cell. It

is mapping to PLDUtraFaPriorInfo.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority.
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for frequency according SPID.

C2371 RETRIEVE UTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-PRIOR: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX], [SPID];
Command Description
Retrieves parameters required to operate dedicated priority information on UTRA FA accroding
SPID . If the Cell Num parameter is entered, the UTRA FA registered to the corresponding cell
is retrieved. If not, the UTRA FA information registered to all cells is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

FA_INDEX UTRA frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be 0~5 NONE 0
assigned per cell. It is mapping to PLDUtra-
FaPriorInfo.
priority. spid_256/ 4

FA_INDEX UTRA frequency index. Up to 6 FAs can be assigned per cell. It

is mapping to PLDUtraFaPriorInfo.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority.
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for frequency according SPID.

Command Description
C2372 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE1
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-SIB5T1: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve UTRA SIB5 Templete
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
DB_IDX DB Index 0 ~ 15 NONE 0

DB_IDX DB Index
SIB6_INDICATOR SIB 6 Indicator
PICH_POWER_OFFSET pichPowerOffset
AICH_POWER_OFFSET aichPowerOffset
TX_DIV_INDICATOR txDivIndicator
P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SIGNATUREpRachAvailableSignature
P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SF pRachAvailableSF
P_RACH_PRE_SCRAM_CODE_WORD_NUMpRachPreScramCodeWordNum
P_RACH_PUNCTURING_LIMIT pRachPuncturingLimit
P_RACH_AVAIL_SUB_CHANNEL_NUMpRachAvailSubChannelNum
P_RACH_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_IDpRachTransportChannelId

PRACH_TTI_SELECT prachTtiSelect
P_RACH_TTI_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1 pRachTtiRlcSizeType1
P_RACH_TTI_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST1pRachTtiNumOfTbSizeList1
P_RACH_TTI_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST1pRachTtiLogicalChannelList1
P_RACH_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPEpRachChannelCodingType
P_RACH_RATE_MATCHING_ATTRpRachRateMatchingAttr
P_RACH_CRC_SIZE pRachCrcSize
P_RACH_CTFC2_BIT0 pRachCtfc2Bit0
P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_C0pRachGainFactorBetaC0
P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_D0pRachGainFactorBetaD0
P_RACH_POWER_OFFSET_PPM0pRachPowerOffsetPpm0
P_RACH_PARTITIONING_USED pRachPartitioningUsed
AC_SERV_CLASS1_START_IDX acServClass1StartIdx
AC_SERV_CLASS1_END_IDX acServClass1EndIdx
AC_SERV_CLASS1_SUB_CHAN_NUMBERacServClass1SubChanNumber

Command Description
P_RACH_AC_TO_ASCMAPPING0 pRachAcToASCMapping0

P_RACH_PRIMARY_CPICHTX_POWERpRachPrimaryCPICHTxPower
P_RACH_CONSTANT_VAL pRachConstantVal
P_RACH_POWER_RAMP_STEP pRachPowerRampStep
P_RACH_PREAMBLE_RETRANS_MAXpRachPreambleRetransMax
P_RACH_MMAX pRachMmax
P_RACH_NB01_MIN pRachNb01Min
P_RACH_NB01_MAX pRachNb01Max
P_RACH_CHANNELISATION_CODEpRachChannelisationCode
P_RACH_STTD_INDICATOR pRachSttdIndicator
P_RACH_AICH_TRANSMISSION_TIMINGpRachAichTransmissionTiming
PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_USEDpersistenceScallingFactorList Usage Indicator
PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VAL0persistenceScallingFactorListVal0
PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VA3persistenceScallingFactorListVal3

Command Description
RES_VALUE1 reserved Field

C2373 CHANGE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE1
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-SIB5T1: DB_IDX, [SIB6_INDICATOR], [PICH_POWER_OFFSET],
[AICH_POWER_OFFSET], [TX_DIV_INDICATOR], [P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SIGNATURE],
[P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SF], [P_RACH_PRE_SCRAM_CODE_WORD_NUM],
[P_RACH_PUNCTURING_LIMIT], [P_RACH_AVAIL_SUB_CHANNEL_NUM],
[P_RACH_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_ID], [PRACH_TTI_SELECT],
[P_RACH_TTI_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1], [P_RACH_TTI_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST1],
[P_RACH_TTI_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST1], [P_RACH_TTI_RLC_SIZE_TYPE2],
[P_RACH_TTI_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST2], [P_RACH_TTI_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST2],
[P_RACH_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPE], [P_RACH_RATE_MATCHING_ATTR], [P_RACH_CRC_SIZE],
[P_RACH_CTFC2_BIT0], [P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_C0],
[P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_D0], [P_RACH_POWER_OFFSET_PPM0], [P_RACH_CTFC2_BIT1],
[P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_C1], [P_RACH_GAIN_FACTOR_BETA_D1],
[P_RACH_POWER_OFFSET_PPM1], [P_RACH_PARTITIONING_USED],
[AC_SERV_CLASS1_START_IDX], [AC_SERV_CLASS1_END_IDX],
[AC_SERV_CLASS1_SUB_CHAN_NUMBER], [AC_SERV_CLASS2_START_IDX],
[AC_SERV_CLASS2_END_IDX], [AC_SERV_CLASS2_SUB_CHAN_NUMBER],
[P_RACH_AC_TO_ASCMAPPING0], [P_RACH_AC_TO_ASCMAPPING1],
[P_RACH_AC_TO_ASCMAPPING6], [P_RACH_PRIMARY_CPICHTX_POWER],
[P_RACH_CONSTANT_VAL], [P_RACH_POWER_RAMP_STEP],
[P_RACH_PREAMBLE_RETRANS_MAX], [P_RACH_MMAX], [P_RACH_NB01_MIN],
[P_RACH_NB01_MAX], [P_RACH_CHANNELISATION_CODE], [P_RACH_STTD_INDICATOR],
[P_RACH_AICH_TRANSMISSION_TIMING], [PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_USED],
[PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VAL0],
[PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VA3],
[PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VAL5], [RES_VALUE1];
Command Description
Change UTRA SIB5 Templete
TIMEOUT 10

Command Description

SIB6_INDICAT SIB 6 Indicator False/True/ NONE False
OR
PICH_POWER pichPowerOffset -10 ~ 5 NONE -5
_OFFSET
AICH_POWER aichPowerOffset -22 ~ 5 NONE -7
_OFFSET
TX_DIV_INDIC txDivIndicator False/True/ NONE False
ATOR
P_RACH_AVAI pRachAvailableSignature 0 ~ 65535 NONE 65535
LABLE_SIGNA
TURE
P_RACH_AVAI pRachAvailableSF ci_sfpr32/ci_sfpr64/ NONE ci_sfpr6
LABLE_SF ci_sfpr128/ci_sfpr256/ 4
P_RACH_PRE pRachPreScramCodeWordNum 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
_SCRAM_COD
E_WORD_NU
M
P_RACH_PUN pRachPuncturingLimit ci_pl0_40/ci_pl0_44/ NONE ci_pl1
CTURING_LIMI ci_pl0_48/ci_pl0_52/
T ci_pl0_56/ci_pl0_60/
ci_pl0_64/ci_pl0_68/
ci_pl0_96/ci_pl1/
P_RACH_AVAI pRachAvailSubChannelNum 0 ~ 4095 NONE 4095
L_SUB_CHAN
NEL_NUM
P_RACH_TRA pRachTransportChannelId 1 ~ 32 NONE 3
NSPORT_CHA
NNEL_ID
PRACH_TTI_S prachTtiSelect ci_utran_tti10/ NONE ci_utran
ELECT ci_utran_tti20/ _tti20
P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiRlcSizeType1 0 ~ 31 NONE 15
RLC_SIZE_TY
PE1
P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiNumOfTbSizeList1 ci_utran_zero/ NONE ci_utran
NUM_OF_TB_ ci_utran_one/ _one
SIZE_LIST1 ci_utran_small/
ci_utran_large/
P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiLogicalChannelList1 ci_allSizes/ NONE ci_confi
LOGICAL_CHA ci_configured/ gured
NNEL_LIST1
P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiRlcSizeType2 0 ~ 63 NONE 3
RLC_SIZE_TY
PE2


P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiNumOfTbSizeList2 ci_utran_zero/ NONE ci_utran
NUM_OF_TB_ ci_utran_one/ _one
SIZE_LIST2 ci_utran_small/
ci_utran_large/
P_RACH_TTI_ pRachTtiLogicalChannelList2 ci_allSizes/ NONE ci_confi
LOGICAL_CHA ci_configured/ gured
NNEL_LIST2
P_RACH_CHA pRachChannelCodingType ci_noCodoing/ NONE ci_conv
NNEL_CODIN ci_convolutioanl_half/ olutioanl
G_TYPE ci_convolutioanl_third/ _half
ci_turbo/
P_RACH_RATE pRachRateMatchingAttr 1 ~ 256 NONE 1
_MATCHING_A
TTR
P_RACH_CRC pRachCrcSize ci_crc0/ci_crc8/ NONE ci_crc16
_SIZE ci_crc12/ci_crc16/
ci_crc24/
P_RACH_CTF pRachCtfc2Bit0 0~3 NONE 0
C2_BIT0
P_RACH_GAIN pRachGainFactorBetaC0 0 ~ 15 NONE 11
_FACTOR_BET
A_C0
P_RACH_GAIN pRachGainFactorBetaD0 0 ~ 15 NONE 15
_FACTOR_BET
A_D0
P_RACH_POW pRachPowerOffsetPpm0 -5 ~ 10 NONE 3
ER_OFFSET_P
PM0
P_RACH_CTF pRachCtfc2Bit1 0~3 NONE 1
C2_BIT1
P_RACH_GAIN pRachGainFactorBetaC1 0 ~ 15 NONE 10
_FACTOR_BET
A_C1
P_RACH_GAIN pRachGainFactorBetaD1 0 ~ 15 NONE 15
_FACTOR_BET
A_D1
P_RACH_POW pRachPowerOffsetPpm1 -5 ~ 10 NONE 3
ER_OFFSET_P
PM1
P_RACH_PART pRachPartitioningUsed ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
ITIONING_USE ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
D ed
AC_SERV_CLA acServClass1StartIdx 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
SS1_START_ID
X
AC_SERV_CLA acServClass1EndIdx 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
SS1_END_IDX
AC_SERV_CLA acServClass1SubChanNumber ci_utran_b3_b2_b1_b0/ NONE ci_utran
SS1_SUB_CHA ci_utran_b2_b0/ _b3_b2
N_NUMBER _b1_b0

Command Description

SS2_START_ID
X
SS2_END_IDX
N_NUMBER _b1_b0
SS3_START_ID
X
SS3_END_IDX
N_NUMBER _b1_b0
SS4_START_ID
X
SS4_END_IDX
N_NUMBER _b1_b0
SS5_START_ID
X
SS5_END_IDX
N_NUMBER _b1_b0
SS6_START_ID
X
SS6_END_IDX
N_NUMBER
SS7_START_ID
X
SS7_END_IDX
N_NUMBER


SS8_START_ID
X
SS8_END_IDX
N_NUMBER
P_RACH_AC_T pRachAcToASCMapping0 0~7 NONE 0
O_ASCMAPPI
NG0
O_ASCMAPPI
NG1
O_ASCMAPPI
NG2
O_ASCMAPPI
NG3
O_ASCMAPPI
NG4
O_ASCMAPPI
NG5
O_ASCMAPPI
NG6
P_RACH_PRIM pRachPrimaryCPICHTxPower -10 ~ 50 NONE 29
ARY_CPICHTX
_POWER
P_RACH_CON pRachConstantVal -35 ~ -10 NONE -34
STANT_VAL
P_RACH_POW pRachPowerRampStep 1~8 NONE 4
ER_RAMP_ST
EP
P_RACH_PRE pRachPreambleRetransMax 1 ~ 64 NONE 16
AMBLE_RETR
ANS_MAX
P_RACH_MMA pRachMmax 1 ~ 32 NONE 3
X
P_RACH_NB01 pRachNb01Min 0 ~ 50 NONE 0
_MIN
P_RACH_NB01 pRachNb01Max 0 ~ 50 NONE 0
_MAX
P_RACH_CHA pRachChannelisationCode 0 ~ 255 NONE 2
NNELISATION_
CODE

Command Description

P_RACH_STT pRachSttdIndicator False/True/ NONE False
D_INDICATOR
P_RACH_AICH pRachAichTransmissionTiming ci_e0/ci_e1/ NONE ci_e1
_TRANSMISSI
ON_TIMING
PERSISTENCE persistenceScallingFactorList Usage Indi- ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
_SCALLING_F cator ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
ACTOR_LIST_ ed
USED
PERSISTENCE persistenceScallingFactorListVal0 ci_utran_psf0_9/ NONE ci_utran
_SCALLING_F ci_utran_psf0_8/ _psf0_8
ACTOR_LIST_ ci_utran_psf0_7/
VAL0 ci_utran_psf0_6/
ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/
ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/
ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/
VA3 ci_utran_psf0_6/
ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/
ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/


ci_utran_psf0_5/
ci_utran_psf0_4/
ci_utran_psf0_3/
ci_utran_psf0_2/
RES_VALUE1 reserved Field 0 ~ 255 NONE 0

DB_IDX DB Index
SIB6_INDICATOR SIB 6 Indicator
PICH_POWER_OFFSET pichPowerOffset
AICH_POWER_OFFSET aichPowerOffset
TX_DIV_INDICATOR txDivIndicator
P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SIGNATUREpRachAvailableSignature
P_RACH_AVAILABLE_SF pRachAvailableSF
P_RACH_PRE_SCRAM_CODE_WORD_NUMpRachPreScramCodeWordNum
P_RACH_PUNCTURING_LIMIT pRachPuncturingLimit
P_RACH_AVAIL_SUB_CHANNEL_NUMpRachAvailSubChannelNum
P_RACH_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_IDpRachTransportChannelId
PRACH_TTI_SELECT prachTtiSelect

Command Description
P_RACH_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPEpRachChannelCodingType
P_RACH_RATE_MATCHING_ATTRpRachRateMatchingAttr
P_RACH_CRC_SIZE pRachCrcSize
P_RACH_PARTITIONING_USED pRachPartitioningUsed


Command Description
P_RACH_PRIMARY_CPICHTX_POWERpRachPrimaryCPICHTxPower
P_RACH_CONSTANT_VAL pRachConstantVal
P_RACH_POWER_RAMP_STEP pRachPowerRampStep
P_RACH_PREAMBLE_RETRANS_MAXpRachPreambleRetransMax
P_RACH_MMAX pRachMmax
P_RACH_NB01_MIN pRachNb01Min
P_RACH_NB01_MAX pRachNb01Max
P_RACH_CHANNELISATION_CODEpRachChannelisationCode
P_RACH_STTD_INDICATOR pRachSttdIndicator
P_RACH_AICH_TRANSMISSION_TIMINGpRachAichTransmissionTiming
PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_USEDpersistenceScallingFactorList Usage Indicator
PERSISTENCE_SCALLING_FACTOR_LIST_VA3persistenceScallingFactorListVal3

C2374 RETRIEVE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFOR-

MATION
Command Format
RTRV-EUTRA-PRIOR: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX], [SPID];
Command Description
Retrieves parameters required to operate dedicated priority information on EUTRA FA accrod-
ing SPID. If the Cell Num parameter is entered, the EUTRA FA registered to the corresponding
cell is retrieved. If not, the EUTRA FA information registered to all cells is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

be assigned per cell. It is mapping to
PLDEutraFaPriorInfo.
priority spid_256/ 4


It is mapping to PLDEutraFaPriorInfo.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID.

Command Description
C2375 CHANGE EUTRA FA PRIORITY INFORMA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-EUTRA-PRIOR: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, SPID, [DEDICATED_PRIORITY];
Command Description
Changes the parameter values required to operate the EUTRA FA dedicated Priority Information
accroding SPID. When the Cell Num, fa Index and SPID parameter values are set as input val-
ues, the EUTRA FA dedicated Priority information registered to the specified cell in the eNB
can be changed.
TIMEOUT 10

be assigned per cell. It is mapping to
PLDEutraFaPriorInfo.
priority spid_256/ 4
DEDICATED_P Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency 0~7 NONE 4
RIORITY according SPID.


It is mapping to PLDEutraFaPriorInfo.
SPID Subscriber Profile ID for RAT/Frequency priority
DEDICATED_PRIORITY Dedicated Priority Value for Frequency according SPID.

C2376 RETRIEVE RIM CONTROL
Command Format
RTRV-RIM-CONTROL;
Command Description
Retrieve the RIM Status required to operate a RIM. This command can show the RIM Status
information by entering the RIM_STATUS_DB Index.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

STATUS Information of Change RIM Connection.

Command Description
C2377 RETRIEVE UTRAN MIB
Command Format
RTRV-UTRAN-MIB: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve UTRAN MIB
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index
VALUE_TAG Value Tag
MCC MCC
MNC MNC
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_INCLUDEDScheduling Block 1 Included
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_CELL_VALUE_TAGScheduling Block 1 value Tag
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS Scheduling Block 1 Positioning
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS_VALScheduling Block 1 Position value
RES_VALUE1 reserved field
SYS_INFO_TYPE1_PLMN_VALUE_TAGSystemInformationBlock 1 value Tag

SYS_INFO_TYPE1_SIB_POS SystemInformationBlock 1 Positioning
SYS_INFO_TYPE1_SIB_POS_VAL SystemInformationBlock 1 Position value
SYS_INFO_TYPE3_CELL_VALUE_TAGSystemInformationBlock 3 value Tag
SYS_INFO_TYPE5_SEG_COUNT SystemInformationBlock 5 SegCount
SYS_INFO_TYPE11_SIB_POS_VALSystemInformationBlock 11 Position value

Command Description

C2378 CHANGE UTRAN MIB
Command Format
CHG-UTRAN-MIB: DB_IDX, [VALUE_TAG], [MCC], [MNC], [SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_INCLUDED],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_CELL_VALUE_TAG], [SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS_VAL], [RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE1_PLMN_VALUE_TAG], [SYS_INFO_TYPE1_SIB_POS],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE1_SIB_POS_VAL], [RES_VALUE3], [RES_VALUE4],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE3_CELL_VALUE_TAG], [SYS_INFO_TYPE3_SIB_POS],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE3_SIB_POS_VAL], [RES_VALUE5], [RES_VALUE6],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE5_CELL_VALUE_TAG], [SYS_INFO_TYPE5_SEG_COUNT],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE5_SIB_POS], [SYS_INFO_TYPE5_SIB_POS_VAL], [RES_VALUE7],
[RES_VALUE8], [SYS_INFO_TYPE7_SIB_POS], [SYS_INFO_TYPE7_SIB_POS_VAL],
[RES_VALUE9], [RES_VALUE10], [SYS_INFO_TYPE11_CELL_VALUE_TAG],
[SYS_INFO_TYPE11_SIB_POS], [SYS_INFO_TYPE11_SIB_POS_VAL], [RES_VALUE11],
[RES_VALUE12];
Command Description
Change UTRAN MIB
TIMEOUT 10

VALUE_TAG Value Tag 1~8 NONE 3
MCC MCC 3 NONE 450
MNC MNC 3 NONE 08
SYS_INFO_TY Scheduling Block 1 Included False/True/ NONE False
PE_SB1_INCL
UDED
SYS_INFO_TY Scheduling Block 1 value Tag 1~4 NONE 2
PE_SB1_CELL
_VALUE_TAG

Command Description

SYS_INFO_TY Scheduling Block 1 Positioning ci_utran_rep4/ NONE ci_utran
PE_SB1_SIB_P ci_utran_rep8/ _rep128
OS ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/
SYS_INFO_TY Scheduling Block 1 Position value 0 ~ 256 NONE 63
PE_SB1_SIB_P
OS_VAL
RES_VALUE1 reserved field 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
SYS_INFO_TY SystemInformationBlock 1 value Tag 1 ~ 256 NONE 170
PE1_PLMN_VA
LUE_TAG
SYS_INFO_TY SystemInformationBlock 1 Positioning ci_utran_rep4/ NONE ci_utran
PE1_SIB_POS ci_utran_rep8/ _rep32
ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/
SYS_INFO_TY SystemInformationBlock 1 Position value 0 ~ 256 NONE 2
PE1_SIB_POS
_VAL
SYS_INFO_TY SystemInformationBlock 3 value Tag 1~4 NONE 3
PE3_CELL_VA
LUE_TAG
ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/
PE3_SIB_POS
_VAL


PE5_CELL_VA
LUE_TAG
SYS_INFO_TY SystemInformationBlock 5 SegCount 1 ~ 16 NONE 3
PE5_SEG_CO
UNT
ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/
PE5_SIB_POS
_VAL
ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/
PE7_SIB_POS
_VAL
PE11_CELL_V
ALUE_TAG
PE11_SIB_PO ci_utran_rep8/ _rep128
S ci_utran_rep16/
ci_utran_rep32/
ci_utran_rep64/
ci_utran_rep128/
ci_utran_rep256/
ci_utran_rep512/
ci_utran_rep1024/
ci_utran_rep2048/
ci_utran_rep4096/

Command Description

PE11_SIB_PO
S_VAL

DB_IDX DB Index
VALUE_TAG Value Tag
MCC MCC
MNC MNC
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_INCLUDEDScheduling Block 1 Included
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_CELL_VALUE_TAGScheduling Block 1 value Tag
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS Scheduling Block 1 Positioning
SYS_INFO_TYPE_SB1_SIB_POS_VALScheduling Block 1 Position value
SYS_INFO_TYPE1_PLMN_VALUE_TAGSystemInformationBlock 1 value Tag

SYS_INFO_TYPE5_SEG_COUNT SystemInformationBlock 5 SegCount
SYS_INFO_TYPE11_SIB_POS_VALSystemInformationBlock 11 Position value

Command Description
C2379 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB1
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-SIB1: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve UTRAN SIB 1
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index
CS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF CS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient
PS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF PS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient
CON_TIMT302 Connected Time t302
CON_TIMN302 Connected Time n302
IDLE_TIMT300 Idle Time t300

IDLE_TIMN300 Idle Time n300

Command Description
C2380 CHANGE UTRA SIB1
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-SIB1: DB_IDX, [CS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF], [PS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF],
[CON_TIMT302], [CON_TIMN302], [CON_TIMT308], [CON_TIMT309], [CON_TIMN313],
[CON_TIMT314], [CON_TIMT315], [IDLE_TIMT300], [IDLE_TIMN300], [IDLE_TIMT312],
[IDLE_TIMN312], [RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2], [RES_VALUE4], [RES_VALUE5],
[RES_VALUE6], [RES_VALUE7], [RES_VALUE8], [RES_VALUE9], [RES_VALUE10];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB 1
TIMEOUT 10

CS_DRXCYCL CS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient 6~9 NONE 7
E_LEN_COEFF
PS_DRXCYCL PS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient 6~9 NONE 7
E_LEN_COEFF
CON_TIMT302 Connected Time t302 ci_utran_ms100/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_ms200/ _ms100
ci_utran_ms400/ 0
ci_utran_ms600/
ci_utran_ms800/
ci_utran_ms1000/
ci_utran_ms1200/
ci_utran_ms1400/
ci_utran_ms1600/
ci_utran_ms1800/
ci_utran_ms2000/
ci_utran_ms3000/
ci_utran_ms4000/
ci_utran_ms6000/
ci_utran_ms8000/
CON_TIMN302 Connected Time n302 0~7 NONE 6
CON_TIMT308 Connected Time t308 ci_utran_ms40/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_ms80/ _ms40
ci_utran_ms160/
ci_utran_ms320/
CON_TIMT309 Connected Time t309 1~8 NONE 6


CON_TIMN313 Connected Time n313 ci_utran_n313_s1/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_n313_s2/ _n313_
ci_utran_n313_s4/ s100
ci_utran_n313_s10/
ci_utran_n313_s20/
ci_utran_n313_s50/
ci_utran_n313_s100/
ci_utran_n313_s200/
CON_TIMT314 Connected Time t314 ci_utran_t314_s0/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_t314_s2/ _t314_s
ci_utran_t314_s4/ 0
ci_utran_t314_s6/
ci_utran_t314_s8/
ci_utran_t314_s12/
ci_utran_t314_s16/
ci_utran_t314_s20/
CON_TIMT315 Connected Time t315 ci_utran_t315_s0/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_t315_s10/ _t315_s
ci_utran_t315_s30/ 0
ci_utran_t315_s60/
ci_utran_t315_s180/
ci_utran_t315_s600/
ci_utran_t315_s1200/
ci_utran_t315_s1800/
IDLE_TIMT300 Idle Time t300 ci_utran_t300_ms100/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_t300_ms200/ _t300_
ci_utran_t300_ms400/ ms2000
ci_utran_t300_ms600/
IDLE_TIMN300 Idle Time n300 0~7 NONE 5
IDLE_TIMT312 Idle Time t312 0 ~ 15 NONE 10
IDLE_TIMN312 Idle Time n312 ci_utran_n312_s1/ NONE ci_utran
ci_utran_n312_s50/ _n312_
ci_utran_n312_s100/ s1
ci_utran_n312_s200/
ci_utran_n312_s400/
ci_utran_n312_s600/
ci_utran_n312_s800/
ci_utran_n312_s1000/

Command Description


DB_IDX DB Index
CS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF CS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient
PS_DRXCYCLE_LEN_COEFF PS domain DRX Cycle Length Coefficient


Command Description
C2381 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB3
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-SIB3: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index
SIB4_INDICATOR SIB4 Indicator
QUALITY_MEASURE Quality Measure
Q_HYST2_S Q Hyst 2s
S_INTRA_SEARCH S-Intra Search
S_INTER_SEARCH S-Inter Search
S_SEARCH_HCS S-Search HCS
RAT_IDENTIFIER1 inter RAT Type
S_SEARCH_RAT1 S-Search RAT
S_HCS_RAT1 S-HCS RAT
S_LIMIT_SEARCH_RAT1 S Limit Search RAT

Q_QUAL_MIN Q Qual Min
Q_RXLEV_MIN Q Rxlev Min
Q_HYST1_S Q Hyst 1s
T_RESELECTION_S t-Reselections
MAX_ALLOWED_UL_TX_POWERMax Allowed UL TX Power
CELL_BARRED Cell Barred
CELL_RESERVED_FOR_OP_USE Cell Reserved For Operator Use
CELL_RESERVATION_EXT Cell Reversation
ACCESS_CLASS_BARRED1 access Class Barred

Command Description
DELTA_QRXLEVMIN delta Q rx Level Min
NON_HCST_CRMAX nonHCStCRMax
NON_HCST_CRMAX_VAL nonHCStCRMax value
INTER_FREQ_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTORinter Frequency ScalingFactor Value
INTER_RAT_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTORinter RAT ScalingFactor Value

C2382 CHANGE UTRA SIB3
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-SIB3: DB_IDX, [SIB4_INDICATOR], [QUALITY_MEASURE], [Q_HYST2_S],
[S_INTRA_SEARCH], [S_INTER_SEARCH], [S_SEARCH_HCS], [RAT_IDENTIFIER1],
[S_SEARCH_RAT1], [S_HCS_RAT1], [S_LIMIT_SEARCH_RAT1], [RAT_IDENTIFIER2],
[S_SEARCH_RAT2], [S_HCS_RAT2], [S_LIMIT_SEARCH_RAT2], [Q_QUAL_MIN],
[Q_RXLEV_MIN], [Q_HYST1_S], [T_RESELECTION_S], [MAX_ALLOWED_UL_TX_POWER],
[RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2], [RES_VALUE3], [RES_VALUE4], [CELL_BARRED],
[CELL_RESERVED_FOR_OP_USE], [CELL_RESERVATION_EXT], [ACCESS_CLASS_BARRED1],
[ACCESS_CLASS_BARRED2], [ACCESS_CLASS_BARRED3], [ACCESS_CLASS_BARRED4],
[RES_VALUE5], [RES_VALUE6], [RES_VALUE7], [RES_VALUE8], [DELTA_QRXLEVMIN],
[NON_HCST_CRMAX], [NON_HCST_CRMAX_VAL], [INTER_FREQ_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTOR],
[INTER_RAT_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTOR], [RES_VALUE9], [RES_VALUE10], [RES_VALUE11];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB 3
TIMEOUT 10

SIB4_INDICAT SIB4 Indicator False/True/ NONE False
OR
QUALITY_MEA Quality Measure ci_utran_cpichEcN0/ NONE ci_utran
SURE ci_utran_cpichRSCP/ _cpichE
cN0
Q_HYST2_S Q Hyst 2s 0 ~ 40 NONE 1
S_INTRA_SEA S-Intra Search -32 ~ 20 NONE 6
RCH
S_INTER_SEA S-Inter Search -32 ~ 20 NONE 3
RCH
S_SEARCH_H S-Search HCS -105 ~ 91 NONE 25
CS
RAT_IDENTIFI inter RAT Type ci_utran_ratType_GSM/ NONE ci_utran
ER1 ci_utran_ratType_cdma _ratTyp
2000/ e_cdma
2000

Command Description

S_SEARCH_R S-Search RAT -32 ~ 20 NONE 9
AT1
S_HCS_RAT1 S-HCS RAT -105 ~ 91 NONE 6
S_LIMIT_SEAR S Limit Search RAT -32 ~ 20 NONE 0
CH_RAT1
RAT_IDENTIFI inter RAT Type ci_utran_ratType_GSM/ NONE ci_utran
ER2 ci_utran_ratType_cdma _ratTyp
2000/ e_cdma
2000
S_SEARCH_R S-Search RAT -32 ~ 20 NONE 2
AT2
S_HCS_RAT2 S-HCS RAT -105 ~ 91 NONE 5
S_LIMIT_SEAR S Limit Search RAT -32 ~ 20 NONE 2
CH_RAT2
Q_QUAL_MIN Q Qual Min -24 ~ 0 NONE -18
Q_RXLEV_MIN Q Rxlev Min -115 ~ -25 NONE -58
Q_HYST1_S Q Hyst 1s 0 ~ 40 NONE 2
T_RESELECTI t-Reselections 0 ~ 31 NONE 1
ON_S
MAX_ALLOWE Max Allowed UL TX Power -50 ~ 33 NONE 24
D_UL_TX_PO
WER
CELL_BARRE Cell Barred ci_barred/ci_notBarred/ NONE ci_notB
D arred
CELL_RESERV Cell Reserved For Operator Use ci_reserved/ NONE ci_notR
ED_FOR_OP_ ci_notReserved/ eserved
USE
CELL_RESERV Cell Reversation ci_reserved/ NONE ci_notR
ATION_EXT ci_notReserved/ eserved
ACCESS_CLA access Class Barred ci_barred/ci_notBarred/ NONE ci_notB
SS_BARRED1 arred
SS_BARRED2 arred
SS_BARRED3 arred
SS_BARRED4 arred
SS_BARRED5 arred
SS_BARRED6 arred


SS_BARRED7 arred
SS_BARRED8 arred
SS_BARRED9 arred
SS_BARRED10 arred
SS_BARRED11 arred
SS_BARRED12 arred
SS_BARRED13 arred
SS_BARRED14 arred
SS_BARRED15 arred
SS_BARRED16 arred
DELTA_QRXLE delta Q rx Level Min -4 ~ -2 NONE -2
VMIN
NON_HCST_C nonHCStCRMax ci_utran_non_HCS_not NONE ci_utran
RMAX _used/ _non_H
ci_utran_non_HCS_10/ CS_not
ci_utran_non_HCS_20/ _used
ci_utran_non_HCS_30/
NON_HCST_C nonHCStCRMax value 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
RMAX_VAL
INTER_FREQ_ inter Frequency ScalingFactor Value 0 ~ 19 NONE 10
TRESEL_SCAL
ING_FACTOR
INTER_RAT_T inter RAT ScalingFactor Value 0 ~ 19 NONE 10
RESEL_SCALI
NG_FACTOR

Command Description

DB_IDX DB Index
SIB4_INDICATOR SIB4 Indicator
QUALITY_MEASURE Quality Measure
Q_HYST2_S Q Hyst 2s
S_INTRA_SEARCH S-Intra Search
S_INTER_SEARCH S-Inter Search
S_SEARCH_HCS S-Search HCS
Q_QUAL_MIN Q Qual Min
Q_RXLEV_MIN Q Rxlev Min
Q_HYST1_S Q Hyst 1s
T_RESELECTION_S t-Reselections
MAX_ALLOWED_UL_TX_POWERMax Allowed UL TX Power

CELL_BARRED Cell Barred
CELL_RESERVED_FOR_OP_USE Cell Reserved For Operator Use
CELL_RESERVATION_EXT Cell Reversation

Command Description
DELTA_QRXLEVMIN delta Q rx Level Min
NON_HCST_CRMAX nonHCStCRMax
NON_HCST_CRMAX_VAL nonHCStCRMax value
INTER_FREQ_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTORinter Frequency ScalingFactor Value
INTER_RAT_TRESEL_SCALING_FACTORinter RAT ScalingFactor Value

C2383 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB7
Command Format
RTRV-UTRAN-SIB7: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index
UL_INTERFERENCE UL Interference
PRACH_INFO_SIB5_DYNAMIC_PRES_LEVPrach Info SIB5

Command Description
C2384 CHANGE UTRAN SIB7
Command Format
CHG-UTRAN-SIB7: DB_IDX, [UL_INTERFERENCE], [PRACH_INFO_SIB5_DYNAMIC_PRES_LEV],
[RES_VALUE1];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB 7
TIMEOUT 10

UL_INTERFER UL Interference -110 ~ -70 NONE -100
ENCE
PRACH_INFO_ Prach Info SIB5 1~8 NONE 1
SIB5_DYNAMI
C_PRES_LEV

DB_IDX DB Index
UL_INTERFERENCE UL Interference
PRACH_INFO_SIB5_DYNAMIC_PRES_LEVPrach Info SIB5

C2385 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB11
Command Format
RTRV-UTRAN-SIB11: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index
INTER_FREQ_FDDMEAS_IND Inter Frequency FDD Meas Indicator
INTER_FREQ_TDDMEAS_IND Inter Frequency TDD Meas Indicator
INTER_RATMEAS_IND Inter RAT Meas Ind Type
USE_OF_HCS usage of HCS
CELL_SELECT_QUALITY_MEAS cell Select Quality Measure
READ_SFNINDICATOR Read SFN Indicator
TX_DIVERSITY_INDICATOR TX Diversity Indicator

Command Description
C2386 CHANGE UTRAN SIB11
Command Format
CHG-UTRAN-SIB11: DB_IDX, [INTER_FREQ_FDDMEAS_IND], [INTER_FREQ_TDDMEAS_IND],
[INTER_RATMEAS_IND], [USE_OF_HCS], [CELL_SELECT_QUALITY_MEAS],
[READ_SFNINDICATOR], [TX_DIVERSITY_INDICATOR], [RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB 11
TIMEOUT 10

INTER_FREQ_ Inter Frequency FDD Meas Indicator False/True/ NONE True
FDDMEAS_IND
INTER_FREQ_ Inter Frequency TDD Meas Indicator False/True/ NONE False
TDDMEAS_IND
INTER_RATME Inter RAT Meas Ind Type ci_utran_measInd_gsm NONE ci_utran
AS_IND / _measI
ci_utran_measInd_is20 nd_gsm
00/
USE_OF_HCS usage of HCS ci_utran_useOfHcs_not NONE ci_utran
_used/ _useOf
ci_utran_useOfHcs_us Hcs_not
ed/ _used
CELL_SELECT cell Select Quality Measure ci_cpich_RSCP/ NONE ci_cpich
_QUALITY_ME ci_cpich_EcN0/ _EcN0
AS
READ_SFNIND Read SFN Indicator False/True/ NONE True
ICATOR
TX_DIVERSITY TX Diversity Indicator False/True/ NONE False
_INDICATOR

DB_IDX DB Index

INTER_FREQ_FDDMEAS_IND Inter Frequency FDD Meas Indicator
INTER_FREQ_TDDMEAS_IND Inter Frequency TDD Meas Indicator
INTER_RATMEAS_IND Inter RAT Meas Ind Type
USE_OF_HCS usage of HCS
CELL_SELECT_QUALITY_MEAS cell Select Quality Measure
READ_SFNINDICATOR Read SFN Indicator
TX_DIVERSITY_INDICATOR TX Diversity Indicator

Command Description
C2387 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB RELATION
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-SIBREL: CELL_NUM, [RELATION_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve UTRAN SIB Relation Mapping Information
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM Cell Number 0~8 NONE 0
RELATION_IDX UTRAN Neighbor Relation Index 0 ~ 255 NONE 0

CELL_NUM Cell Number
RELATION_IDX UTRAN Neighbor Relation Index
STATUS Relation Status Info
MIBTEMPLATE_IDX UTRAN MIB Template Index
SIB1_TEMPLATE_IDX UTRAN SIB1 Template Index
SUB_CELL_NUM_1 This parameter indicates sub cell number.

C2388 CHANGE UTRA SIB RELATION
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-SIBREL: CELL_NUM, RELATION_IDX, [STATUS], [MIBTEMPLATE_IDX],
[SIB1_TEMPLATE_IDX], [SIB3_TEMPLATE_IDX], [SIB5_TEMPLATE_IDX],
[SIB7_TEMPLATE_IDX], [SIB11_TEMPLATE_IDX], [SUB_CELL_NUM_1], [SUB_CELL_NUM_2];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB Relation Mapping Information
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM Cell Number 0~8 NONE 0
RELATION_IDX UTRAN Neighbor Relation Index 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
STATUS Relation Status Info N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
P
MIBTEMPLATE UTRAN MIB Template Index 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
_IDX
SIB1_TEMPLA UTRAN SIB1 Template Index 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
TE_IDX
TE_IDX
TE_IDX
TE_IDX
SIB11_TEMPL UTRAN SIB11 Template Index 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
ATE_IDX
SUB_CELL_NU This parameter indicates sub cell number. 0 ~ 17 NONE 0
M_1
SUB_CELL_NU This parameter indicates sub cell number. 0 ~ 17 NONE 0
M_2

CELL_NUM Cell Number
RELATION_IDX UTRAN Neighbor Relation Index

Command Description
STATUS Relation Status Info
MIBTEMPLATE_IDX UTRAN MIB Template Index

C2389 CHANGE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE 2
Command Format
CHG-UTRA-SIB5T2: DB_IDX, [S_CCPCH0_STTD_INDICATOR],
[S_CCPCH0_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBER], [S_CCPCH0_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBER_VAL],
[S_CCPCH0_PILOT_SYMBOL_EXISTENCE], [S_CCPCH0_TFCI_EXISTENCE],
[S_CCPCH0_POSITION_FIXED_OR_FLEXIBLE], [S_CCPCH0_TIMING_OFFSET],
[S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT1], [S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT2], [S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT3_INCLUDED],
[S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT3_VAL], [S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT4_INCLUDED],
[S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT4_VAL], [S_CCPCH0_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1],
[S_CCPCH0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST0], [S_CCPCH0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST1],
[S_CCPCH0_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST], [S_CCPCH0_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPE],
[S_CCPCH0_RATE_MATCHING_ATTR], [S_CCPCH0_CRC_SIZE],
[S_CCPCH0_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_ID], [S_CCPCH0_CTCH_INDICATOR],
[S_CCPCH0_PICHCHANNELISATION_CODE], [S_CCPCH0_PICHPI_COUNT_PER_FRAME],
[S_CCPCH0_PICHSTTD_INDICATOR], [S_CCPCH1_STTD_INDICATOR],
[S_CCPCH1_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBER], [S_CCPCH1_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBER_VAL],
[S_CCPCH1_PILOT_SYMBOL_EXISTENCE], [S_CCPCH1_TFCI_EXISTENCE],
[S_CCPCH1_POSITION_FIXED_OR_FLEXIBLE], [S_CCPCH1_TIMING_OFFSET_INCLUDED],
[S_CCPCH1_TIMING_OFFSET], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC2_BIT1], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC2_BIT2],
[S_CCPCH1_CTFC2_BIT3], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC2_BIT4],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST0],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST2_VAL],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPE], [S_CCPCH1_TFS0_RATE_MATCHING_ATTR],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CRC_SIZE], [S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_ID],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CTCH_INDICATOR], [S_CCPCH1_TFS1_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE2],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS1_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LIST],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS1_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPE], [S_CCPCH1_TFS1_RATE_MATCHING_ATTR],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS1_CRC_SIZE], [S_CCPCH1_TFS1_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_ID],
[S_CCPCH1_TFS1_CTCH_INDICATOR], [FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATOR],
[HSDPA_CELL_INDICATOR], [EDCH_CELL_INDICATOR], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT_USED],
[S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT1], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT2], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT3],
[S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT4], [S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT5], [RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2],
[RES_VALUE3], [RES_VALUE4], [RES_VALUE5];
Command Description
Change UTRA SIB5 Templete
TIMEOUT 10

Command Description

S_CCPCH0_ST sCCPCH0sttdIndicator False/True/ NONE False
TD_INDICATO
R
S_CCPCH0_SF sCCPCH0sfAndCodeNumber ci_utran_sf4/ NONE ci_utran
_AND_CODE_ ci_utran_sf8/ _sf128
NUMBER ci_utran_sf16/
ci_utran_sf32/
ci_utran_sf64/
ci_utran_sf128/
ci_utran_sf256/
ci_utran_sf512/
S_CCPCH0_SF sCCPCH0sfAndCodeNumberVal 0 ~ 255 NONE 4
_AND_CODE_
NUMBER_VAL
S_CCPCH0_PI sCCPCH0pilotSymbolExistence False/True/ NONE False
LOT_SYMBOL
_EXISTENCE
S_CCPCH0_TF sCCPCH0tfciExistence False/True/ NONE False
CI_EXISTENC
E
S_CCPCH0_P sCCPCH0positionFixedOrFlexible ci_fixed/ci_flexible/ NONE ci_fixed
OSITION_FIXE
D_OR_FLEXIB
LE
S_CCPCH0_TI sCCPCH0timingOffset 0 ~ 149 NONE 20
MING_OFFSET
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctfc2bit1 0~3 NONE 0
TFC2_BIT1
TFC2_BIT2
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctfc2bit3Included ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
TFC2_BIT3_IN ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
CLUDED ed
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctfc2bit3Val 0~3 NONE 2
TFC2_BIT3_VA
L
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctfc2bit4Included ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
TFC2_BIT4_IN ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
CLUDED ed
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctfc2bit4Val 0~3 NONE 3
TFC2_BIT4_VA
L
S_CCPCH0_TT sCCPCH0tti10RlcSizeType1 0 ~ 31 NONE 24
I10_RLC_SIZE
_TYPE1


S_CCPCH0_TT sCCPCH0tti10NumOfTbSizeList0 ci_utran_zero/ NONE ci_utran
I10_NUM_OF_ ci_utran_one/ _zero
TB_SIZE_LIST ci_utran_small/
0 ci_utran_large/
S_CCPCH0_TT sCCPCH0tti10NumOfTbSizeList1 ci_utran_zero/ NONE ci_utran
I10_NUM_OF_ ci_utran_one/ _one
TB_SIZE_LIST ci_utran_small/
1 ci_utran_large/
S_CCPCH0_TT sCCPCH0tti10LogicalChannelList ci_allSizes/ NONE ci_allSiz
I10_LOGICAL_ ci_configured/ es
CHANNEL_LIS
T
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0channelCodingType ci_noCodoing/ NONE ci_conv
HANNEL_CODI ci_convolutioanl_half/ olutioanl
NG_TYPE ci_convolutioanl_third/ _half
ci_turbo/
S_CCPCH0_R sCCPCH0rateMatchingAttr 1 ~ 256 NONE 230
ATE_MATCHIN
G_ATTR
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0crcSize ci_crc0/ci_crc8/ NONE ci_crc16
RC_SIZE ci_crc12/ci_crc16/
ci_crc24/
S_CCPCH0_T sCCPCH0transportChannelId 1 ~ 32 NONE 4
RANSPORT_C
HANNEL_ID
S_CCPCH0_C sCCPCH0ctchIndicator False/True/ NONE False
TCH_INDICAT
OR
S_CCPCH0_PI sCCPCH0PichchannelisationCode 0 ~ 255 NONE 3
CHCHANNELIS
ATION_CODE
S_CCPCH0_PI sCCPCH0PichpiCountPerFrame ci_e18/ci_e36/ci_e72/ NONE ci_e18
CHPI_COUNT_ ci_e144/
PER_FRAME
S_CCPCH0_PI sCCPCH0PichsttdIndicator False/True/ NONE False
CHSTTD_INDI
CATOR
S_CCPCH1_ST sCCPCH1sttdIndicator False/True/ NONE False
TD_INDICATO
R
S_CCPCH1_SF sCCPCH1sfAndCodeNumber ci_utran_sf4/ NONE ci_utran
_AND_CODE_ ci_utran_sf8/ _sf64
NUMBER ci_utran_sf16/
ci_utran_sf32/
ci_utran_sf64/
ci_utran_sf128/
ci_utran_sf256/
ci_utran_sf512/
S_CCPCH1_SF sCCPCH1sfAndCodeNumberVal 0 ~ 255 NONE 1
_AND_CODE_
NUMBER_VAL

Command Description

S_CCPCH1_PI sCCPCH1pilotSymbolExistence False/True/ NONE False
LOT_SYMBOL
_EXISTENCE
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1tfciExistence False/True/ NONE True
CI_EXISTENC
E
S_CCPCH1_P sCCPCH1positionFixedOrFlexible ci_fixed/ci_flexible/ NONE ci_flexib
OSITION_FIXE le
D_OR_FLEXIB
LE
S_CCPCH1_TI sCCPCH1timingOffsetIncluded ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
MING_OFFSET ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
_INCLUDED ed
S_CCPCH1_TI sCCPCH1timingOffset 0 ~ 149 NONE 0
MING_OFFSET
TFC2_BIT1
TFC2_BIT2
TFC2_BIT3
TFC2_BIT4
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0tti10RlcSizeType1 0 ~ 31 NONE 15
S0_TTI10_RLC
_SIZE_TYPE1
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0tti10NumOfTbSizeList0 ci_utran_zero/ NONE ci_utran
S0_TTI10_NU ci_utran_one/ _zero
M_OF_TB_SIZ ci_utran_small/
E_LIST0 ci_utran_large/
S0_TTI10_NU ci_utran_one/ _one
S0_TTI10_NU ci_utran_one/ _small
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0tti10NumOfTbSizeList2Val 0 ~ 255 NONE 2
S0_TTI10_NU
M_OF_TB_SIZ
E_LIST2_VAL
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0tti10LogicalChannelList ci_allSizes/ NONE ci_allSiz
S0_TTI10_LOG ci_configured/ es
ICAL_CHANNE
L_LIST
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0channelCodingType ci_noCodoing/ NONE ci_conv
S0_CHANNEL_ ci_convolutioanl_half/ olutioanl
CODING_TYPE ci_convolutioanl_third/ _half
ci_turbo/


S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0rateMatchingAttr 1 ~ 256 NONE 220
S0_RATE_MAT
CHING_ATTR
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0crcSize ci_crc0/ci_crc8/ NONE ci_crc16
S0_CRC_SIZE ci_crc12/ci_crc16/
ci_crc24/
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0transportChannelId 1 ~ 32 NONE 1
S0_TRANSPO
RT_CHANNEL_
ID
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS0ctchIndicator False/True/ NONE False
S0_CTCH_INDI
CATOR
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1tti10RlcSizeType2 0 ~ 31 NONE 3
S1_TTI10_RLC
_SIZE_TYPE2
S1_TTI10_NU ci_utran_one/ _zero
S1_TTI10_NU ci_utran_one/ _one
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1tti10LogicalChannelList ci_allSizes/ NONE ci_allSiz
S1_TTI10_LOG ci_configured/ es
ICAL_CHANNE
L_LIST
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1channelCodingType ci_noCodoing/ NONE ci_turbo
S1_CHANNEL_ ci_convolutioanl_half/
CODING_TYPE ci_convolutioanl_third/
ci_turbo/
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1rateMatchingAttr 1 ~ 256 NONE 130
S1_RATE_MAT
CHING_ATTR
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1crcSize ci_crc0/ci_crc8/ NONE ci_crc16
S1_CRC_SIZE ci_crc12/ci_crc16/
ci_crc24/
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1transportChannelId 1 ~ 32 NONE 2
S1_TRANSPO
RT_CHANNEL_
ID
S_CCPCH1_TF sCCPCH1TFS1ctchIndicator False/True/ NONE False
S1_CTCH_INDI
CATOR
FREQUENCY_ frequencyBandIndicator ci_fdd2100/ci_fdd1900/ NONE ci_fdd21
BAND_INDICA ci_fdd1800/ci_bandVI/ 00
TOR ci_bandIV/ci_bandV/
ci_bandVII/
ci_RadioFrequencyBan
dFDD_extension_indica
tor/

Command Description

HSDPA_CELL_ hsdpaCellIndicator False/True/ NONE True
INDICATOR
EDCH_CELL_I edchCellIndicator False/True/ NONE True
NDICATOR
S_CCPCH1_C sCCPCH1ctfc4bitUsed ci_utran_used/ NONE ci_utran
TFC4_BIT_US ci_utran_not_used/ _not_us
ED ed
S_CCPCH1_C sCCPCH1ctfc4bit1 0 ~ 15 NONE 0
TFC4_BIT1
TFC4_BIT2
TFC4_BIT3
TFC4_BIT4
TFC4_BIT5

DB_IDX DB Index
S_CCPCH0_STTD_INDICATOR sCCPCH0sttdIndicator
S_CCPCH0_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBERsCCPCH0sfAndCodeNumber
S_CCPCH0_SF_AND_CODE_NUMBER_VALsCCPCH0sfAndCodeNumberVal
S_CCPCH0_PILOT_SYMBOL_EXISTENCEsCCPCH0pilotSymbolExistence
S_CCPCH0_TFCI_EXISTENCE sCCPCH0tfciExistence
S_CCPCH0_POSITION_FIXED_OR_FLEXIBLEsCCPCH0positionFixedOrFlexible
S_CCPCH0_TIMING_OFFSET sCCPCH0timingOffset
S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT1 sCCPCH0ctfc2bit1

S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT3_INCLUDEDsCCPCH0ctfc2bit3Included
S_CCPCH0_CTFC2_BIT3_VAL sCCPCH0ctfc2bit3Val
S_CCPCH0_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1sCCPCH0tti10RlcSizeType1
S_CCPCH0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST0sCCPCH0tti10NumOfTbSizeList0
S_CCPCH0_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LISTsCCPCH0tti10LogicalChannelList
S_CCPCH0_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPEsCCPCH0channelCodingType
S_CCPCH0_RATE_MATCHING_ATTRsCCPCH0rateMatchingAttr
S_CCPCH0_CRC_SIZE sCCPCH0crcSize
S_CCPCH0_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_IDsCCPCH0transportChannelId
S_CCPCH0_CTCH_INDICATOR sCCPCH0ctchIndicator
S_CCPCH0_PICHCHANNELISATION_CODEsCCPCH0PichchannelisationCode
S_CCPCH0_PICHPI_COUNT_PER_FRAMEsCCPCH0PichpiCountPerFrame
S_CCPCH0_PICHSTTD_INDICATORsCCPCH0PichsttdIndicator

Command Description
S_CCPCH1_TIMING_OFFSET_INCLUDEDsCCPCH1timingOffsetIncluded
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1sCCPCH1TFS0tti10RlcSizeType1
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST0sCCPCH1TFS0tti10NumOfTbSizeList0
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST2_VAL
sCCPCH1TFS0tti10NumOfTbSizeList2Val
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LISTsCCPCH1TFS0tti10LogicalChannelList
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPEsCCPCH1TFS0channelCodingType
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_RATE_MATCHING_ATTRsCCPCH1TFS0rateMatchingAttr
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CRC_SIZE sCCPCH1TFS0crcSize
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_IDsCCPCH1TFS0transportChannelId
S_CCPCH1_TFS0_CTCH_INDICATORsCCPCH1TFS0ctchIndicator

FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATORfrequencyBandIndicator
HSDPA_CELL_INDICATOR hsdpaCellIndicator
EDCH_CELL_INDICATOR edchCellIndicator
S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT_USED sCCPCH1ctfc4bitUsed

Command Description
C2390 RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB RESERVED
Command Format
RTRV-UTRAN-SIBRES: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
Retrieve UTRAN SIB Reserved
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index


Command Description
C2391 CHANGE UTRAN SIB RESERVED
Command Format
CHG-UTRAN-SIBRES: DB_IDX, [RES_VALUE0], [RES_VALUE1], [RES_VALUE2],
[RES_VALUE3], [RES_VALUE4], [RES_VALUE5], [RES_VALUE6], [RES_VALUE7],
[RES_VALUE28], [RES_VALUE29], [RES_VALUE30];
Command Description
Change UTRAN SIB Reserved
TIMEOUT 10




DB_IDX DB Index

Command Description

C2394 RETRIEVE UTRA SIB5 TEMPLATE 2
Command Format
RTRV-UTRA-SIB5T2: [DB_IDX];
Command Description
RETRIEVE UTRAN SIB 5 Template2
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

DB_IDX DB Index

Command Description
S_CCPCH0_TTI10_RLC_SIZE_TYPE1sCCPCH0tti10RlcSizeType1
S_CCPCH0_TTI10_LOGICAL_CHANNEL_LISTsCCPCH0tti10LogicalChannelList
S_CCPCH0_CHANNEL_CODING_TYPEsCCPCH0channelCodingType
S_CCPCH0_RATE_MATCHING_ATTRsCCPCH0rateMatchingAttr
S_CCPCH0_CRC_SIZE sCCPCH0crcSize
S_CCPCH0_TRANSPORT_CHANNEL_IDsCCPCH0transportChannelId
S_CCPCH0_CTCH_INDICATOR sCCPCH0ctchIndicator
S_CCPCH0_PICHCHANNELISATION_CODEsCCPCH0PichchannelisationCode
S_CCPCH0_PICHPI_COUNT_PER_FRAMEsCCPCH0PichpiCountPerFrame
S_CCPCH0_PICHSTTD_INDICATORsCCPCH0PichsttdIndicator
S_CCPCH1_TIMING_OFFSET_INCLUDEDsCCPCH1timingOffsetIncluded

S_CCPCH1_TFS0_TTI10_NUM_OF_TB_SIZE_LIST2_VAL
sCCPCH1TFS0tti10NumOfTbSizeList2Val

Command Description
FREQUENCY_BAND_INDICATORfrequencyBandIndicator
HSDPA_CELL_INDICATOR hsdpaCellIndicator
EDCH_CELL_INDICATOR edchCellIndicator
S_CCPCH1_CTFC4_BIT_USED sCCPCH1ctfc4bitUsed

C2400 RETRIEVE DIAG CALL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-DIAG-CONF;
Command Description
Retrieves the basic information of the eNB DiagCall Configuration. The user can retrieve the
information of DiagCall Configuration. Itinclude diagCallEnable, triggeringConditionTimer,
maxNumofUEID and etc.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

DIAG_CALL_ENABLE The diagCallEnable parameter to decide Diagnosis Call Func-
tion is chosen On or OFF.
TRIGGERING_CONDITION_TIMERIf there is no RRC Connection in cell for triggeringCondi-

tionTimer, the ENB start Diagnosis Call Function.
DIAG_CALL_TIMER After the Diagnosis Call Function is started in ENB and send
Paging message to UE using IMSI and S-TMSI information in
eNB buffer, eNB start diagCallTimer. If eNB receive RRC Con-
nection Request for diagCallTimer, The diag Call Timer is
expired. If eNB doesn't receive RRC Connection Request for
diagCallTimer, the silent alarm is happend.
MAX_NUMOF_UEID The maxNumofUEID is the maximum number of S-TMSI,

IMSI buffer in eNB for diagnosis call functioin.
RECOVERY_MODE_SELECTION This is the information that whether to use cell auto-recovery

method or not Auto (1) : execute cell auto-recovery method
provided from system Manual (0) : notify only the detected
alarm to operator without any recovery action

Command Description
AUTO_RECOVERY_METHOD This is the cell auto-recovery method 0 : Cell release 1 : DSP

reset 2 : RU reset 3 : DSP reset RU reset

C2401 CHANGE DIAG CALL CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-DIAG-CONF: [DIAG_CALL_ENABLE], [TRIGGERING_CONDITION_TIMER],
[DIAG_CALL_TIMER], [MAX_NUMOF_UEID], [RECOVERY_MODE_SELECTION],
[AUTO_RECOVERY_METHOD];
Command Description
Changes the basic information of the eNB DiagCall Configuration. The user can retrieve the
information of DiagCall Configuration. It include diagCallEnable, triggeringConditionTimer,
maxNumofUEID and etc.
TIMEOUT 10

DIAG_CALL_E The diagCallEnable parameter to decide OFF/ON/ NONE OFF
NABLE Diagnosis Call Function is chosen On or
OFF.
TRIGGERING_ If there is no RRC Connection in cell for 5 ~ 120 NONE 60
CONDITION_TI triggeringConditionTimer, the ENB start
MER Diagnosis Call Function.
DIAG_CALL_TI After the Diagnosis Call Function is started 1 ~ 10 NONE 5
MER in ENB and send Paging message to UE
using IMSI and S-TMSI information in eNB
buffer, eNB start diagCallTimer. If eNB
receive RRC Connection Request for diag-
CallTimer, The diag Call Timer is expired. If
eNB doesn't receive RRC Connection
Request for diagCallTimer, the silent alarm
is happend.
MAX_NUMOF_ The maxNumofUEID is the maximum num- 1 ~ 30 NONE 10
UEID ber of S-TMSI, IMSI buffer in eNB for diag-
nosis call functioin.
RECOVERY_M This is the information that whether to use MANUAL/AUTO/ NONE AUTO
ODE_SELECTI cell auto-recovery method or not Auto (1) :
ON execute cell auto-recovery method pro-
vided from system Manual (0) : notify only
the detected alarm to operator without any
recovery action
AUTO_RECOV This is the cell auto-recovery method 0 : CELL_RELEASE/ NONE CELL_R
ERY_METHOD Cell release 1 : DSP reset 2 : RU reset 3 : DSP_RESET_ONLY/ ELEAS
DSP reset RU reset RU_RESET_ONLY/ E
DSP_RU_RESET/

Command Description

DIAG_CALL_ENABLE The diagCallEnable parameter to decide Diagnosis Call Func-
tion is chosen On or OFF.
TRIGGERING_CONDITION_TIMERIf there is no RRC Connection in cell for triggeringCondi-

tionTimer, the ENB start Diagnosis Call Function.
DIAG_CALL_TIMER After the Diagnosis Call Function is started in ENB and send
Paging message to UE using IMSI and S-TMSI information in
eNB buffer, eNB start diagCallTimer. If eNB receive RRC Con-
nection Request for diagCallTimer, The diag Call Timer is
expired. If eNB doesn't receive RRC Connection Request for
diagCallTimer, the silent alarm is happend.
MAX_NUMOF_UEID The maxNumofUEID is the maximum number of S-TMSI,

IMSI buffer in eNB for diagnosis call functioin.
RECOVERY_MODE_SELECTION This is the information that whether to use cell auto-recovery

method or not Auto (1) : execute cell auto-recovery method
provided from system Manual (0) : notify only the detected
alarm to operator without any recovery action
AUTO_RECOVERY_METHOD This is the cell auto-recovery method 0 : Cell release 1 : DSP

reset 2 : RU reset 3 : DSP reset RU reset

C2409 RETRIEVE FEMTO MOBILITY CONFIGU-

RATION
Command Format
RTRV-FEMTO-MOBIL: [CELL_NUM], [FA_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the Femto Cell Information that includes Femtocell PCI index, phycellId etc for SIB4.
When Making intraFreqNeighCellList in SIB4, use Femto PCI, Qoffset. Femto cell's informa-
tion priority is first than other neighcell information.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.

FEMTO_PCIINDEX The index of femto PCI.
USAGE The usage of femto PCI, qOffset
PHY_CELL_ID The PCI of Femto Cell
IND_OFFSET The Cell Individual Offset belongs to Femto PCI
Q_OFFSET_CELL The qOffset belongs to Femto PCI.

Command Description
C2410 CHANGE FEMTO MOBILITY CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-FEMTO-MOBIL: CELL_NUM, FA_INDEX, [FEMTO_PCIINDEX], [USAGE], [PHY_CELL_ID],
[IND_OFFSET], [Q_OFFSET_CELL];
Command Description
Changes the Femto Cell Information that includes Femtocell PCI index, phycellId etc for SIB4.
When Making intraFreqNeighCellList in SIB4, use Femto PCI, Qoffset. That Femto Cell's Infor-
mation priority is first than other neighcell information.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
FEMTO_PCIIN The index of femto PCI. 0~7 NONE 0
DEX
USAGE The usage of femto PCI, qOffset CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
se
PHY_CELL_ID The PCI of Femto Cell 496 ~ 503 NONE 496
IND_OFFSET The Cell Individual Offset belongs to Femto ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ NONE ci_dB0
PCI ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/


Q_OFFSET_C The qOffset belongs to Femto PCI. ci_dB-24/ci_dB-22/ NONE ci_dB0
ELL ci_dB-20/ci_dB-18/
ci_dB-16/ci_dB-14/
ci_dB-12/ci_dB-10/
5/ci_dB-4/ci_dB-3/
ci_dB-2/ci_dB-1/
ci_dB12/ci_dB14/
ci_dB16/ci_dB18/
ci_dB20/ci_dB22/
ci_dB24/

FEMTO_PCIINDEX The index of femto PCI.
USAGE The usage of femto PCI, qOffset
PHY_CELL_ID The PCI of Femto Cell
IND_OFFSET The Cell Individual Offset belongs to Femto PCI
Q_OFFSET_CELL The qOffset belongs to Femto PCI.

Command Description
C2412 CHANGE SRS NEIGHBOR CELL CONFIG-

URATION
Command Format
CHG-SRSNBR-CONF: CELL_NUM, SRS_NBR_IDX, [STATUS], [ENB_ID], [TARGET_CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Change SRS configuration of SRS neighbor cell. phyCellId, clusterId, SRS pool index,
groupHopping and sequenceHopping can be changed for each cell.
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
SRS_NBR_IDX SRS neighbor cell index. 0 ~ 19 NONE 0
STATUS The validity of the SRS neighbor cell infor- N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
mation. P
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which SRS 0 ~ 268435455 NONE 0
neighbor cell to the eNB belongs. If the
TARGET_CELL The local cell ID of SRS neighbor cell to the 0 ~ 255 NONE 0
_NUM eNB. It is used when creating a cell identi-
fier.

SRS_NBR_IDX SRS neighbor cell index.
STATUS The validity of the SRS neighbor cell information.
ENB_ID The eNB ID of the eNB to which SRS neighbor cell to the eNB
belongs. If the enbType value is macro eNB, 20 bit of the value

is eNB ID. If the enbType value is home eNB, 28 bit of the

value is eNB ID. It is used when creating a cell identifier.
TARGET_CELL_NUM The local cell ID of SRS neighbor cell to the eNB. It is used
when creating a cell identifier.

Command Description
C2432 RETRIEVE PUCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-PUCCHCONF-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves PUCCH idle configuration
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t


C2433 CHANGE PUCCH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-PUCCHCONF-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [FORCED_MODE];
Command Description
Changes PUCCH idle configuration
TIMEOUT 10

E changed value.


Command Description
C2435 RETRIEVE UL RESOURCE CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
RTRV-ULRESCONF-IDLE: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieve settings for PUCCH/SRS state
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
was executed.

RESOURCE_TABLE_USAGE Whether UL resource table is used.
START_STATE_IDX Start stateIdx
END_STATE_IDX End stateIdx

C2436 CHANGE UL RESOURCE CONFIGURA-

TION
Command Format
CHG-ULRESCONF-IDLE: CELL_NUM, [RESOURCE_TABLE_USAGE], [START_STATE_IDX],
[END_STATE_IDX];
Command Description
Change settings for PUCCH/SRS state
TIMEOUT 10

was executed.
RESOURCE_T Whether UL resource table is used. CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
ABLE_USAGE se
START_STATE Start stateIdx 0~7 NONE 0
_IDX
END_STATE_I End stateIdx 0~7 NONE 2
DX

RESOURCE_TABLE_USAGE Whether UL resource table is used.
START_STATE_IDX Start stateIdx
END_STATE_IDX End stateIdx

Command Description
C2477 RETRIEVE CELL THROUGHPUT
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-TP: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
This command shows Throughput status according to cell of eNB for RLC,MAC DL UL.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
supported.

ported.
RLC_DLTP The RLC DL throughput value of the cell.
RLC_ULTP The RLC DL throughput value of the cell.
MAC_DLTP The MAC DL throughput value of the cell.
MAC_ULTP The MAC UL throughput value of the cell.

C2480 CHANGE ACCESS BARRING PARAME-

TERS
Command Format
CHG-BAR-PARA: CELL_NUM, BARRING_STATUS_TYPE, [BARRING_SIGNAL_USAGE],
[ACC_PROB_FAC_SIGNAL], [ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_SIGNAL], [BAR_AC11_SIGNAL],
[BAR_AC12_SIGNAL], [BAR_AC13_SIGNAL], [BAR_AC14_SIGNAL], [BAR_AC15_SIGNAL],
[BARRING_DATA_USAGE], [ACC_PROB_FAC_DATA], [ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_DATA],
[BAR_AC11_DATA], [BAR_AC12_DATA], [BAR_AC13_DATA], [BAR_AC14_DATA],
[BAR_AC15_DATA], [ACCESS_BARRING_EMERGENCY_CALL], [BARRING_MMTELVOICE_USAGE],
[ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVOICE], [ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVOICE],
[BAR_AC11_MMTELVOICE], [BAR_AC12_MMTELVOICE], [BAR_AC13_MMTELVOICE],
[BAR_AC14_MMTELVOICE], [BAR_AC15_MMTELVOICE], [BARRING_MMTELVIDEO_USAGE],
[ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVIDEO], [ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVIDEO],
[BAR_AC11_MMTELVIDEO], [BAR_AC12_MMTELVIDEO], [BAR_AC13_MMTELVIDEO],
[BAR_AC14_MMTELVIDEO], [BAR_AC15_MMTELVIDEO];
Command Description
Changes the access barring parameters according to the CPU status in the eNB. This command
changes the access barring parameters transmitted to SIB (System Information Block) 2 accord-
ing to the CPU overload state. The UE controls cell access according to the access barring
parameters value at service request.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
BARRING_STA The barring status to be changed or cpuNormal/cpuMinor/ NONE cpuNor-
TUS_TYPE retrieved. cpuMajor/cpuCritical/ mal
- cpuNormal : The main board CPU is in barManual/
Normal state.
- cpuMinor : The main board CPU is in
Minor state.
- cpuMajor : The main board CPU is in
Major state.
- cpuCritical: The main board CPU is in
Critical state.
- barManual : Manual Mode

Command Description

BARRING_SIG Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Signaling CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
NAL_USAGE of the cell in the eNB. se
- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is
not used. UE can access the cell when
attaching.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is
used. The UE controls cell access accord-
ing to the access barring signaling parame-
ter value.
ACC_PROB_F UE generates a random value (rand) ci_p00/ci_p05/ci_p10/ NONE ci_p95
AC_SIGNAL between 0 and 1. If rand value less than ci_p15/ci_p20/ci_p25/
accessProbabilityFactor, UE can access ci_p30/ci_p40/ci_p50/
the cell; otherwise, access is not possible. ci_p60/ci_p70/ci_p75/
ci_p80/ci_p85/ci_p90/
ci_p95/
ACC_CLASS_B Access barring time of the cell in the eNB. ci_s4/ci_s8/ci_s16/ NONE ci_s512
AR_TIME_SIG UE generates a random value (rand) ci_s32/ci_s64/ci_s128/
NAL between 0 and 1. If rand value less than ci_s256/ci_s512/
accessProbabilityFactor, UE determines
that the cell is barred, and does not estab-
lish RRC connection until T305 timer termi-
nates. The expression used to calculate
T305 timer value is (0.7+0.6*rand)*acBar-
ringTime.
BAR_AC11_SI Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the False/True/ NONE False
GNAL EHPLMN list is not present; otherwise, any
EHPLMN) in the eNB is barred.
- False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_SI Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited False/True/ NONE False

GNAL PLMNs of home country only. For this pur-
pose, the home country is defined as the
country of the MCC part of the IMSI) in the
eNB is barred.
- True: Barred.

eNB is barred.
- True: Barred.

eNB is barred.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_SI Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred. False/True/ NONE False

GNAL - False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.


BARRING_DAT Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Data of CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u
A_USAGE the cell in the eNB. se
- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is not
used. The UE can access the cell at ser-
vice request.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is used.
The UE controls cell access according to
the access barring data parameter value at
service request.
ACC_PROB_F Access probability factor of the cell in the ci_p00/ci_p05/ci_p10/ NONE ci_p95
AC_DATA eNB. UE generates a random value (rand) ci_p15/ci_p20/ci_p25/
between 0 and 1. If rand less than 0, ci_p30/ci_p40/ci_p50/
ci_p95/
AR_TIME_DAT UE generates a random value (rand) ci_s32/ci_s64/ci_s128/
A between 0 and 1. If rand value less than ci_s256/ci_s512/
ringTime.
BAR_AC11_DA Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the False/True/ NONE False
TA EHPLMN list is not present; otherwise, any
EHPLMN) in the eNB is barred at barring
data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_DA Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited False/True/ NONE False

TA PLMNs of home country only. For this pur-
eNB is barred at barring data.
- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_DA Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred. False/True/ NONE False

TA - False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.

Command Description

ACCESS_BAR Whether to use emergency call barring for False/True/ NONE False
RING_EMERG the cell in the eNB.
ENCY_CALL - False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.
BARRING_MM Whether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL- CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u

TELVOICE_US Voice of the cell in the eNB. se
AGE - CI_no_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-
Voice is not used. The UE can access the
cell at service request.
- CI_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice is
ing to the access barring data parameter
value at service request.
AC_MMTELVOI eNB. UE generates a random value (rand) ci_p15/ci_p20/ci_p25/
CE between 0 and 1. If rand less than 0, ci_p30/ci_p40/ci_p50/
ci_p95/
AR_TIME_MMT UE generates a random value (rand) ci_s32/ci_s64/ci_s128/
ELVOICE between 0 and 1. If rand value less than ci_s256/ci_s512/
ringTime.
BAR_AC11_M Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the False/True/ NONE False
MTELVOICE EHPLMN list is not present; otherwise, any
data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_M Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited False/True/ NONE False

MTELVOICE PLMNs of home country only. For this pur-
- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.


- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_M Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred. False/True/ NONE False

MTELVOICE - False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.
BARRING_MM Whether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL- CI_no_use/CI_use/ NONE CI_no_u

TELVIDEO_US Voice of the cell in the eNB. se
AGE - CI_no_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-
Voice is not used. The UE can access the
cell at service request.
- CI_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice is
ing to the access barring data parameter
AC_MMTELVID eNB. UE generates a random value (rand) ci_p15/ci_p20/ci_p25/
EO between 0 and 1. If rand less than 0, ci_p30/ci_p40/ci_p50/
ci_p95/
AR_TIME_MMT UE generates a random value (rand) ci_s32/ci_s64/ci_s128/
ELVIDEO between 0 and 1. If rand value less than ci_s256/ci_s512/
ringTime.
BAR_AC11_M Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the False/True/ NONE False
MTELVIDEO EHPLMN list is not present; otherwise, any
data.
- True: Barred.

MTELVIDEO PLMNs of home country only. For this pur-
- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.

Command Description

- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_M Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred. False/True/ NONE False

MTELVIDEO - False: Not barred.
- True: Barred.

BARRING_STATUS_TYPE The barring status to be changed or retrieved.

- cpuNormal : The main board CPU is in Normal state.
- cpuMinor : The main board CPU is in Minor state.
- cpuMajor : The main board CPU is in Major state.
- cpuCritical: The main board CPU is in Critical state.
BARRING_SIGNAL_USAGE Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Signaling of the cell in the

eNB.
- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is not used. UE can
access the cell when attaching.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is used. The UE controls
cell access according to the access barring signaling parameter

value.
ACC_PROB_FAC_SIGNAL UE generates a random value (rand) between 0 and 1. If rand

value less than accessProbabilityFactor, UE can access the cell;
otherwise, access is not possible.
ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_SIGNALAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a ran-

dom value (rand) between 0 and 1. If rand value less than
accessProbabilityFactor, UE determines that the cell is barred,
and does not establish RRC connection until T305 timer termi-
nates. The expression used to calculate T305 timer value is
(0.7+0.6*rand)*acBarringTime.
BAR_AC11_SIGNAL Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

present; otherwise, any EHPLMN) in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_SIGNAL Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited PLMNs of home

country only. For this purpose, the home country is defined as
the country of the MCC part of the IMSI) in the eNB is barred.
- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_SIGNAL Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
BARRING_DATA_USAGE Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Data of the cell in the eNB.

- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is not used. The UE can
access the cell at service request.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is used. The UE controls cell
access according to the access barring data parameter value at
service request.
ACC_PROB_FAC_DATA Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a

random value (rand) between 0 and 1. If rand less than 0,
accessProbabilityFactor, UE can access the cell; otherwise,
access is not possible.
ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_DATA Access barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a ran-

Command Description
BAR_AC11_DATA Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

present; otherwise, any EHPLMN) in the eNB is barred at bar-
ring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_DATA Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited PLMNs of home

the country of the MCC part of the IMSI) in the eNB is barred
at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_DATA Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
ACCESS_BARRING_EMERGENCY_CALLWhether to use emergency call barring for the cell in

the eNB.
- True: Barred.
BARRING_MMTELVOICE_USAGEWhether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice of the cell in

the eNB.
- CI_no_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice is not used. The
UE can access the cell at service request.
- CI_use: ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice is used. The UE con-
trols cell access according to the access barring data parameter
ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVOICE Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a

ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVOICEAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE gener-

ates a random value (rand) between 0 and 1. If rand value less
than accessProbabilityFactor, UE determines that the cell is
barred, and does not establish RRC connection until T305 timer
terminates. The expression used to calculate T305 timer value is
BAR_AC11_MMTELVOICE Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

ring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_MMTELVOICE Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited PLMNs of home

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.


Command Description
at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_MMTELVOICE Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
BARRING_MMTELVIDEO_USAGEWhether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice of the cell in

the eNB.
ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVIDEO Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a

ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVIDEOAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE gener-

BAR_AC11_MMTELVIDEO Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

ring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC12_MMTELVIDEO Whether AC 12 (Home PLMN and visited PLMNs of home

at barring data.
- True: Barred.


at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_MMTELVIDEO Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.

Command Description
C2481 RETRIEVE ACCESS BARRING PARAME-

TERS
Command Format
RTRV-BAR-PARA: [CELL_NUM], [BARRING_STATUS_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieves the access barring parameters according to state of the CPU within the eNB. This com-
mand retrieves the access barring parameters transmitted to SIB (System Information Block) 2
according to the CPU overload state. The UE controls cell access according to the access barring
parameters value of SIB2 at service request.
TIMEOUT 10

retrieved.
BARRING_STA The barring status to be changed or cpuNormal/cpuMinor/ NONE cpuNor-
TUS_TYPE retrieved. cpuMajor/cpuCritical/ mal
- cpuNormal : The main board CPU is in barManual/
Normal state.
- cpuMinor : The main board CPU is in
Minor state.
- cpuMajor : The main board CPU is in
Major state.
- cpuCritical: The main board CPU is in
Critical state.

BARRING_STATUS_TYPE The barring status to be changed or retrieved.

- cpuNormal : The main board CPU is in Normal state.
- cpuMinor : The main board CPU is in Minor state.
- cpuMajor : The main board CPU is in Major state.
- cpuCritical: The main board CPU is in Critical state.

BARRING_SIGNAL_USAGE Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Signaling of the cell in the

eNB.
- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is not used. UE can
access the cell when attaching.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Signaling is used. The UE controls
cell access according to the access barring signaling parameter

value.
ACC_PROB_FAC_SIGNAL UE generates a random value (rand) between 0 and 1. If rand

value less than accessProbabilityFactor, UE can access the cell;
otherwise, access is not possible.
ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_SIGNALAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a ran-

BAR_AC11_SIGNAL Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

present; otherwise, any EHPLMN) in the eNB is barred.
- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.

- True: Barred.


Command Description

- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_SIGNAL Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
BARRING_DATA_USAGE Whether to use ac-BarringforMO-Data of the cell in the eNB.

- CI_no_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is not used. The UE can
access the cell at service request.
- CI_use: ac-BarringforMO-Data is used. The UE controls cell
access according to the access barring data parameter value at
service request.
ACC_PROB_FAC_DATA Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a

ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_DATA Access barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a ran-
BAR_AC11_DATA Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

ring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.


at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_DATA Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
ACCESS_BARRING_EMERGENCY_CALLWhether to use emergency call barring for the cell in

the eNB.
- True: Barred.
BARRING_MMTELVOICE_USAGEWhether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice of the cell in

the eNB.
ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVOICE Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a

ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVOICEAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE gener-


Command Description
BAR_AC11_MMTELVOICE Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

ring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_MMTELVOICE Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.
BARRING_MMTELVIDEO_USAGEWhether to use ssac-BarringForMMTEL-Voice of the cell in

the eNB.
ACC_PROB_FAC_MMTELVIDEO Access probability factor of the cell in the eNB. UE generates a



ACC_CLASS_BAR_TIME_MMTELVIDEOAccess barring time of the cell in the eNB. UE gener-

BAR_AC11_MMTELVIDEO Whether AC 11 (Home PLMN only if the EHPLMN list is not

ring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.

at barring data.
- True: Barred.
BAR_AC15_MMTELVIDEO Whether AC15 in the eNB is barred.

- True: Barred.

Command Description
C2484 RETRIEVE QOS CAC QCI PARAMETER

FUNCTION
Command Format
RTRV-QCACQ-PARA: CELL_NUM, [QCI];
Command Description
Retrieves the active QoS (Quality of Service) CAC (call admission control) parameter in the
eNB. QoS CAC is performed at the cell level, for QCI of each GBR bearer. Retrieves the thresh-
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM CAC(Call Admission Control) based on 0~8 NONE 0
QoS Parameters is defined.
ues 0 and 10-255.

CELL_NUM CAC(Call Admission Control) based on QoS Parameters is
defined.
DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of Downlink calls that can be assigned per QoS

Class Identifier (QCI). It is used when a new call is requested. It
is calculated as PRB percentage. When a new call is requested,
if the downlink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value,

DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of Downlink Handover calls that can be assigned

per QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It is used when a Handover call
is requested. It is calculated as PRB percentage . When a Han-
dover call is requested, if the downlink GBR PRB usage
exceeds this parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of Uplink calls that can be assigned per QoS

is calculated as PRB fpercentage. When a new call is requested,
if the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the
UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of Uplink Handover calls that can be assigned per
QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It is used when a Handover call is
requested. It is calculated as PRB percentage . When a Hando-
ver call is requested, if the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this
parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UNIT_USAGE_MANUAL The value of PRB usage that can be caltuated manually.

Command Description
C2485 CHANGE QOS CAC QCI PARAMETER

FUNCTION
Command Format
CHG-QCACQ-PARA: CELL_NUM, QCI, [DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMAL],
[DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO], [UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMAL], [UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO],
[UNIT_USAGE_MANUAL];
Command Description
Changes the active QoS (Quality of Service) CAC (call admission control) parameter in the
eNB. QoS CAC is performed at the cell level, for QCI of each GBR bearer. Changes the thresh-
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM CAC(Call Admission Control) based on 0~8 NONE 0
QoS Parameters is defined.
ues 0 and 10-255.
DL_QCIUSAGE The threshold of Downlink calls that can be 0 ~ 100 % 80
_THRESH_NO assigned per QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It
RMAL is used when a new call is requested. It is
calculated as PRB percentage. When a
new call is requested, if the downlink GBR
DL_QCIUSAGE The threshold of Downlink Handover calls 0 ~ 100 % 100
_THRESH_HO that can be assigned per QoS Class Identi-
fier (QCI). It is used when a Handover call
is requested. It is calculated as PRB per-
centage . When a Handover call is
requested, if the downlink GBR PRB usage
exceeds this parameter value, the QoS


UL_QCIUSAGE The threshold of Uplink calls that can be 0 ~ 100 % 80
_THRESH_NO assigned per QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It
RMAL is used when a new call is requested. It is
calculated as PRB fpercentage. When a
new call is requested, if the uplink GBR
UL_QCIUSAGE The threshold of Uplink Handover calls that 0 ~ 100 % 100
_THRESH_HO can be assigned per QoS Class Identifier
(QCI). It is used when a Handover call is
requested. It is calculated as PRB percent-
age . When a Handover call is requested, if
the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this
parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is gen-
erated.
UNIT_USAGE_ The value of PRB usage that can be cal- 0.000000 ~ 100.000 NONE 0.00000
MANUAL tuated manually. 0

CELL_NUM CAC(Call Admission Control) based on QoS Parameters is
defined.
DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of Downlink calls that can be assigned per QoS

is calculated as PRB percentage. When a new call is requested,
if the downlink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value,
DL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of Downlink Handover calls that can be assigned

per QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It is used when a Handover call
is requested. It is calculated as PRB percentage . When a Han-
dover call is requested, if the downlink GBR PRB usage
exceeds this parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_NORMALThe threshold of Uplink calls that can be assigned per QoS

is calculated as PRB fpercentage. When a new call is requested,
if the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this parameter value, the

Command Description
UL_QCIUSAGE_THRESH_HO The threshold of Uplink Handover calls that can be assigned per
QoS Class Identifier (QCI). It is used when a Handover call is
requested. It is calculated as PRB percentage . When a Hando-
ver call is requested, if the uplink GBR PRB usage exceeds this
parameter value, the QoS CAC Fail is generated.
UNIT_USAGE_MANUAL The value of PRB usage that can be caltuated manually.

C2495 RETRIEVE CHANNELCARD UE COUNT
Command Format
RTRV-CC-UECNT: [CC_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the number of UE that is connected to the Channelcard. This command number of
Active UE of RRC Establishment cause and HO (Handover) is separated by a command to
query.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CC_ID The ID of the channel card (unique within 0~2 NONE 0
the system).

CC_ID The ID of the channel card (unique within the system).
ACTIVE_UECOUNT The number of calls assigned to the channelcard.

Command Description
C2499 RETRIEVE ENB INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-ENB-INF;
Command Description
Retrieves the basic information of the eNB. The user can retrieve the information whether the
eNB is a macro eNB or a Home eNB, the representative PLMN of the eNB, eNB ID, SCTP port,
and capacity of the backhaul link.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

ENB_TYPE This parameter defines eNB Type ( Macro eNB(0). Home
eNB(1) )
ENB_MCC This parameter defines the Representative PMNN's MCC infor-

mation
ENB_MNC This parameter defines the Representative PMNN's MNC infor-

mation
ENB_ID This parameter defines eNB ID ( Macro eNB : BIT

STRING(20), Home eNB : BIT STRING(28) )
SCTP_PORT_NUM_S1 The port number to be used in SCTP association configuration

for S1AP with the MME. (The port number is fixed at 36412.
SCTP association is possible only when the port value is the
same as SCTP of the MME.)
SCTP_PORT_NUM_X2 The port number to be used in SCTP association configuration

for X2AP with the neighbor eNB. (The port number is fixed at
36422. SCTP association is possible only when the port value is
the same as SCTP of the neighbor eNB.)

BH_LINK_CAPACITY Total backhaul link capacity of the eNB (in Kbps, 0-10G,
default 1G).
DL_CRS_PORT_COUNT This parameter defines Downlink CRS Port Count

Command Description
C2516 RETRIEVE RRH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-RRH-CONF: [CONNECT_BOARD_ID], [CONNECT_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_RRH_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the configuration information of RRH which is a remote RF unit. This information can
be retrieved by entering the board ID, port ID, or cascade ID connected to the RRH according to
the RRH ID scheme. If a board ID is entered but not a port ID and a cascade ID, the configura-
tion information for all RRHs in the board ID is displayed. If a board ID and a port ID are
entered but not a cascade ID, the configuration information for all RRHs in the board ID and port
ID is displayed. The user can retrieve the RRH mounting status in the PLD, the cells supported
by the RRH, the RRH location, the maximum output value and the alarm threshold value.
TIMEOUT 10

CONNECT_BO The ID of the channel card connected to 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID the RRH. For example, if the RRH is con-
nected to ECP #1, CONNECT_BOARD_ID
is 1. The user can enter the
CONNECT_BOARD_ID parameter value to
retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the
channel card.
CONNECT_PO The port ID of the channel card connected 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID to the RRH. For example, if the RRH is
connected to channel card port #1,
CONNECT_PORT_ID is 1. The user can
enter the CONNECT_PORT_ID parameter
value to retrieve the ID of the RRH con-
nected to the channel card port.
CASCADE_RR The cascade ID of the channel card port 0~2 NONE 0
H_ID connected to the RRH. For example, if the
RRH is the first RRH in the cascade con-
nection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 0, and if
the RRH is the second RRH in the cascade
connection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 1. The
user can enter the CASCADE_RRH_ID
parameter value to retrieve the ID of the
RRH connected to the cascade of the
channel card port.


CONNECT_BOARD_ID The ID of the channel card connected to the RRH. For example,
if the RRH is connected to ECP #1, CONNECT_BOARD_ID is
1. The user can enter the CONNECT_BOARD_ID parameter
value to retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the channel
card.
CONNECT_PORT_ID The port ID of the channel card connected to the RRH. For
example, if the RRH is connected to channel card port #1,
CONNECT_PORT_ID is 1. The user can enter the
CONNECT_PORT_ID parameter value to retrieve the ID of the
RRH connected to the channel card port.
CASCADE_RRH_ID The cascade ID of the channel card port connected to the RRH.
For example, if the RRH is the first RRH in the cascade connec-
tion, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 0, and if the RRH is the second
RRH in the cascade connection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 1. The
user can enter the CASCADE_RRH_ID parameter value to
retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the cascade of the
channel card port.
STATUS The mounting status of the RRH in the PLD, which is a remote
RF unit.
BOARD_TYPE It is RRH board type.
CELL_NUM The cell number serviced by the RRH.
PSU_STATUS The mounting status in the PLD for the PSU which is a power
supply unit of the RRH.

Command Description
LATITUDE The latitude of the RRH location. (A BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A :

hemisphere. N or S , BBB : degree. 0~90, CC : minutes. 0~59,
DD.DDD : milliseconds. 00.000~59.999)
LONGITUDE The longitude of the RRH location. (A BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A :

hemisphere. E or W, BBB : degree. 0~180, CC : minutes. 0~59,
HEIGHT The altitude of the RRH location. (AAAA.AAm : AAAA.AA :

water elevation.
-9999.99m ~ 9999.99m, Unit is m. ex) 53.85m)
DL_ANT_AZIMUTH The antenna azimuth of the RRH downlink.
DL_ANT_BEAMWIDTH It is antenna beamwidth for downlink.
DL_MAX_TX_POWER The maximum output power of the RRH downlink.
TX_ATTEN The Tx attenuation for the RRH.
RX_ATTEN The Rx attenuation for the RRH.
TX_DELAY The Tx time buffer for delay compensation between RRH and
DU.
RX_DELAY The Rx time buffer for delay compensation between RRH and
DU.
OVER_PWR_ALARM_TH The over-power alarm threshold used by the RRH for detecting
over power alarms.
LOW_PWR_ALARM_TH The low power alarm threshold used by the RRH for detecting
low power alarms.
TX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Tx Path A FA signals.
TX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Tx Path B FA signals.
RX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Rx Path A FA signals.
RX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Rx Path B FA signals.
CLOCK_ADVANCE_RPT The clock advance value required by the RIU output line and

the repeater.
VSWR_FAIL_ALARM_THR The VSWR failure alarm threshold used by the RRH for detect-
ing VSWR alarms.
RSSI_HIGH_ALARM_TH The RSSI too high alarm threshold.
RSSI_LOW_ALARM_TH The RSSI too low alarm threshold.

Command Description
C2517 CHANGE RRH CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-RRH-CONF: CONNECT_BOARD_ID, CONNECT_PORT_ID, CASCADE_RRH_ID, [STATUS],
[BOARD_TYPE], [PSU_STATUS], [USER_LABEL], [LATITUDE], [LONGITUDE], [HEIGHT],
[DL_ANT_AZIMUTH], [DL_ANT_BEAMWIDTH], [TX_ATTEN], [RX_ATTEN], [TX_DELAY],
[RX_DELAY], [OVER_PWR_ALARM_TH], [LOW_PWR_ALARM_TH], [TX_PATH_A], [TX_PATH_B],
[RX_PATH_A], [RX_PATH_B], [CLOCK_ADVANCE_RPT], [VSWR_FAIL_ALARM_THR],
[RSSI_HIGH_ALARM_TH], [RSSI_LOW_ALARM_TH];
Command Description
Changes the RRH grow/degrow and configuration information. The user can enter the
CONNECT_BOARD_ID, CONNECT_PORT_ID, CASCADE_RRH_ID parameter values to
select the RRH to be changed. To manage the PSU connected to the RRH in the system, the user
can use this command to set the PSU_STATUS parameter to EQUIP to grow the PSU.
Reversely, PSU_STATUS can be changed to N_EQUIP to degrow the PSU. The user can name
the RRH in USER_LABEL. The user also can set the latitude, longitude and altitude in LATI-
TUDE, LONGITUDE, and HEIGHT; the downlink antenna azimuth in DL_ANT_AZIMUTH;
the Tx and Rx attenuation values for each path in TX_ATTEN and RX_ATTEN respectively; the
RRH Tx/Rx delay values in TX_DELAY and RX_DELAY; the VSWR alarm, OVER PWR
alarm and LOW PWR alarm thresholds in VSWR_SHUT_ALARM_TH,
OVER_PWR_ALARM_TH, and LOW_PWR_ALARM_TH; the FA information for each path
by toggling TX_PATH_A, TX_PATH_B, TX_PATH_C, TX_PATH_D, RX_PATH_A,
RX_PATH_B, RX_PATH_C, or RX_PATH_D on/off.
TIMEOUT 10

CONNECT_BO The ID of the channel card connected to 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID the RRH. For example, if the RRH is con-
nected to ECP #1, CONNECT_BOARD_ID
is 1. The user can enter the
CONNECT_BOARD_ID parameter value to
retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the
channel card.


CONNECT_PO The port ID of the channel card connected 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID to the RRH. For example, if the RRH is
connected to channel card port #1,
CONNECT_PORT_ID is 1. The user can
enter the CONNECT_PORT_ID parameter
value to retrieve the ID of the RRH con-
nected to the channel card port.
CASCADE_RR The cascade ID of the channel card port 0~2 NONE 0
H_ID connected to the RRH. For example, if the
RRH is the first RRH in the cascade con-
nection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 0, and if
the RRH is the second RRH in the cascade
connection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 1. The
user can enter the CASCADE_RRH_ID
parameter value to retrieve the ID of the
RRH connected to the cascade of the
channel card port.
STATUS The mounting status of the RRH in the N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
PLD, which is a remote RF unit. P
the system.
BOARD_TYPE It is RRH board type. RRH_T1/RRH_T2/RIU/ NONE RRH_T
RRH_W4T3/RIU_T2/ 2
RRH_W1/
PSU_STATUS The mounting status in the PLD for the N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE N_EQUI
PSU which is a power supply unit of the P
RRH.
the system.
USER_LABEL An additional system name given by the 96 NONE -
user.
LATITUDE The latitude of the RRH location. (A 20 NONE N
BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A : hemisphere. N or S 000:00:
, BBB : degree. 0~90, CC : minutes. 0~59, 00.000
LONGITUDE The longitude of the RRH location. (A 20 NONE E
BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A : hemisphere. E or W, 000:00:
BBB : degree. 0~180, CC : minutes. 0~59, 00.000
HEIGHT The altitude of the RRH location. 20 m 0000.00
(AAAA.AAm : AAAA.AA : water elevation. m
-9999.99m ~ 9999.99m, Unit is m. ex)
53.85m)
DL_ANT_AZIM The antenna azimuth of the RRH downlink. -1 ~ 3600 0.1degr -1
UTH ee
DL_ANT_BEA It is antenna beamwidth for downlink. 0 ~ 3600 0.1degr 700
MWIDTH ee

Command Description

TX_ATTEN The Tx attenuation for the RRH. 1 0.1dB 0
RX_ATTEN The Rx attenuation for the RRH. 1 0.1dB 0
TX_DELAY The Tx time buffer for delay compensation 0 ~ 200000 ns 137875
between RRH and DU.
RX_DELAY The Rx time buffer for delay compensation 0 ~ 200000 ns 137875
between RRH and DU.
OVER_PWR_A The over-power alarm threshold used by 10000 ~ 540000 x 1000 18022
LARM_TH the RRH for detecting over power alarms.
LOW_PWR_AL The low power alarm threshold used by the 1 ~ 1000 x 1000 169
ARM_TH RRH for detecting low power alarms.
TX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Tx 1 NONE 0
Path A FA signals.
TX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Tx 1 NONE 0
Path B FA signals.
RX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Rx 1 NONE 0
Path A FA signals.
RX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Rx 1 NONE 0
Path B FA signals.
CLOCK_ADVA The clock advance value required by the 0 ~ 100000 ns 50000
NCE_RPT RIU output line and the repeater.
VSWR_FAIL_A The VSWR failure alarm threshold used by 30 ~ 100 0.1dB 60
LARM_THR the RRH for detecting VSWR alarms.
RSSI_HIGH_AL The RSSI too high alarm threshold. -1280 ~ -440 0.1dBm -440
ARM_TH
RSSI_LOW_AL The RSSI too low alarm threshold. -1280 ~ -440 0.1dBm -1280
ARM_TH

CONNECT_BOARD_ID The ID of the channel card connected to the RRH. For example,
if the RRH is connected to ECP #1, CONNECT_BOARD_ID is
1. The user can enter the CONNECT_BOARD_ID parameter
value to retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the channel
card.
CONNECT_PORT_ID The port ID of the channel card connected to the RRH. For
example, if the RRH is connected to channel card port #1,
CONNECT_PORT_ID is 1. The user can enter the
CONNECT_PORT_ID parameter value to retrieve the ID of the
RRH connected to the channel card port.
CASCADE_RRH_ID The cascade ID of the channel card port connected to the RRH.
For example, if the RRH is the first RRH in the cascade connec-

tion, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 0, and if the RRH is the second

RRH in the cascade connection, CASCADE_RRH_ID is 1. The
user can enter the CASCADE_RRH_ID parameter value to
retrieve the ID of the RRH connected to the cascade of the
channel card port.
STATUS The mounting status of the RRH in the PLD, which is a remote
RF unit.
BOARD_TYPE It is RRH board type.
PSU_STATUS The mounting status in the PLD for the PSU which is a power
supply unit of the RRH.
LATITUDE The latitude of the RRH location. (A BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A :

hemisphere. N or S , BBB : degree. 0~90, CC : minutes. 0~59,
LONGITUDE The longitude of the RRH location. (A BBB:CC:DD.DDD : A :

hemisphere. E or W, BBB : degree. 0~180, CC : minutes. 0~59,
HEIGHT The altitude of the RRH location. (AAAA.AAm : AAAA.AA :

water elevation.
-9999.99m ~ 9999.99m, Unit is m. ex) 53.85m)
DL_ANT_AZIMUTH The antenna azimuth of the RRH downlink.
DL_ANT_BEAMWIDTH It is antenna beamwidth for downlink.
TX_ATTEN The Tx attenuation for the RRH.

Command Description
RX_ATTEN The Rx attenuation for the RRH.
TX_DELAY The Tx time buffer for delay compensation between RRH and
DU.
RX_DELAY The Rx time buffer for delay compensation between RRH and
DU.
OVER_PWR_ALARM_TH The over-power alarm threshold used by the RRH for detecting
over power alarms.
LOW_PWR_ALARM_TH The low power alarm threshold used by the RRH for detecting
low power alarms.
TX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Tx Path A FA signals.
TX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Tx Path B FA signals.
RX_PATH_A The set value used by RRH to control Rx Path A FA signals.
RX_PATH_B The set value used by RRH to control Rx Path B FA signals.
CLOCK_ADVANCE_RPT The clock advance value required by the RIU output line and
the repeater.
VSWR_FAIL_ALARM_THR The VSWR failure alarm threshold used by the RRH for detect-
ing VSWR alarms.
RSSI_HIGH_ALARM_TH The RSSI too high alarm threshold.
RSSI_LOW_ALARM_TH The RSSI too low alarm threshold.

C2518 RETRIEVE DURU PORT CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-DURUPT-CONF: [BOARDID], [PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the port configuration information of the channel card (board) by channel card and
port. If a board ID or port ID is not entered, the configuration information for all ports is
retrieved. If a board ID is entered but not a port ID, the configuration information for all ports
within the board ID entered is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10

BOARDID The unique board ID of the board type in 0~2 NONE 0
the system
PORT_ID The unique port ID in Board ID 0 ~ 11 NONE 0

BOARDID The unique board ID of the board type in the system
PORT_ID The unique port ID in Board ID
STATUS The mounting information in the PLD.

CONNECT_RU_TYPE The type of the RF unit connected to the board ID and port ID.
(Use CONNECT_RRH to retrieve it if the RRH is connected to
the port.)

Command Description
C2530 RETRIEVE SYSTEM STATE/STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-SYS-STS;
Command Description
Retrieves the system's operational state. Displays whether the system's operational status is
Enable or Disable and whether calls are assigned (Act), calls cannot be assigned (Busy) or no
calls are assigned (Idle). This command also retrieves the number of calls if the system is in the
Act or Busy state. The number of calls in the Idle state is 0. The system information reflects all
cells.
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

OPERATIONAL_STATE The system's operational state.
- enable: One or more cells are available to assign calls.
- disable: No cells are available to assign calls.
USAGE_STATE The current state of the system.

- act: There are one or more cells where calls are assigned.
- busy: All resources of the system are already allocated and no
more calls can be assigned.

- idle: No calls are assigned to the system (If
OPERATIONAL_STATE of the system is disable,
USAGE_STATE is also idle).

C2531 RETRIEVE CELL STATE/STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-STS: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Displays whether the cell's operational status is Enable or Disable and whether calls are assigned
(Act), calls cannot be assigned (Busy) or no calls are assigned (Idle). This command also
retrieves the number of calls if the cell is in the Act or Busy state. The number of calls in the Idle
state is 0.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
supported.

ported.
OPERATIONAL_STATE The operational state of the cell after it is set up.

- enable: Calls can be assigned to the cell.
- disable: Calls cannot be assigned to the cell because it is not
set up yet.
USAGE_STATE The current state of the cell.

- act: One or more calls are assigned to the cell.

Command Description
- busy: All resources of the cell are already allocated and no

more calls can be assigned.
- idle: No calls are assigned to the cell (If
OPERATIONAL_STATE of the cell is disable,
USAGE_STATE is also idle).

C2533 RETRIEVE CELL DATA
Command Format
RTRV-CELL-DATA: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the data of the cells provided by the system. The user can enter CELL_NUM to select
a cell to be retrieved.The user can retrieve the cell's sectorMode.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
supported.

ported.
SECTOR_MODE It is SectorMode

Command Description
C2608 RETRIEVE REMOTE DEVICE USER

DEFINED ALARM DATA
Command Format
RTRV-RDUDA-DATA: [CONNECT_BOARD_ID], [CONNECT_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID],
[PORT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieve the Remote Device UDA Configuration.
TIMEOUT 10

CONNECT_BO It is board ID that UDA is connected. 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID
CONNECT_PO It is port ID that UDA is connected. 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID
CASCADE_ID It is cascade ID of UDA. 0~2 NONE 0
PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm. 0~2 NONE 0

CONNECT_BOARD_ID It is board ID that UDA is connected.
CONNECT_PORT_ID It is port ID that UDA is connected.
CASCADE_ID It is cascade ID of UDA.
PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm.
or equipped.
SEVERITY Alarm severity. Supported severities are critical, major, minor,

warning.

C2609 CHANGE REMOTE DEVICE USER

DEFINED ALARM DATA
Command Format
CHG-RDUDA-DATA: CONNECT_BOARD_ID, CONNECT_PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID, PORT_ID, [STA-
TUS], [ALARM_NAME], [SEVERITY];
Command Description
Change the Remote Device UDA Configuration.
TIMEOUT 10

CONNECT_BO It is board ID that UDA is connected. 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID
CONNECT_PO It is port ID that UDA is connected. 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID
CASCADE_ID It is cascade ID of UDA. 0~2 NONE 0
PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm. 0~2 NONE 0
STATUS The equip status of input port. The input N_EQUIP/EQUIP/ NONE NONE
port can be unequipped or equipped.
ALARM_NAME User-defined alarm name 64 NONE -
SEVERITY Alarm severity. Supported severities are critical/major/minor/ NONE NONE
critical, major, minor, warning. warning/

CONNECT_BOARD_ID It is board ID that UDA is connected.
CONNECT_PORT_ID It is port ID that UDA is connected.
CASCADE_ID It is cascade ID of UDA.
PORT_ID Port ID for detect UDA Alarm.
or equipped.

Command Description
SEVERITY Alarm severity. Supported severities are critical, major, minor,

warning.

C2614 RETRIEVE REMOTE DEVICE ALARM INHI-

BITION CONFIGURATION
Command Format
RTRV-RDALM-INH: UNIT_TYPE, CONNECT_BD_ID, CONNECT_PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID,
[ALARM_TYPE];
Command Description
Retrieve the remote device alarm inhibition configuration information
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type. RRH/PSU/ NONE RRH
CONNECT_BD This field indicates the connected board ID 0~2 NONE 0
_ID of remote device.
CONNECT_PO This field indicates the connected port ID of 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID remote device.
CASCADE_ID This field indicates the cascade ID. 0~2 NONE 0

Command Description

ALARM_TYPE This field indicates alarm type that can be COMMUNICATION_FA NONE COM-
inhibited. IL/CLOCK_FAIL/ MUNIC
CPRI_FAIL/ ATION_
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE FAIL
R_RX_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE
R_TX_FAULT/
DC_INPUT_FAIL/DIS-
ABLED/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
LNA_FAIL/LOW_GAIN/
LOW_POWER/
OVER_POWER/
VSWR_FAIL/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH
/RSSI_HIGH/
RSSI_LOW/UDA/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPU
T_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY
_DISCHARGE/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY
_DISCONNECT/
RECTIFIER_COMMUN
ICATION_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_DC_OVE
R_CURRENT/
RECTIFIER_DOOR_O
PEN/
RECTIFIER_HEATER_
FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE
_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_LOW/
HW_TYPE_MISMATC
H/

UNIT_TYPE This field indicates the connected board ID of remote Device.
CONNECT_BD_ID This field indicates the connected board ID of remote device.
CONNECT_PORT_ID This field indicates the connected port ID of remote device.
CASCADE_ID This field indicates the cascade ID.
ALARM_TYPE This field indicates alarm type that can be inhibited.
ALARM_CODE This field indicates alarm code that can be inhibited.

INHIBIT_STATUS This field indiccates the inhibit status of alarm.

Command Description
C2615 CHANGE REMOTE DEVICE ALARM INHI-

BITION CONFIGURATION
Command Format
CHG-RDALM-INH: [UNIT_TYPE], [CONNECT_BD_ID], [CONNECT_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID],
[ALARM_TYPE], INHIBIT_STATUS;
Command Description
Change the remote device alarm inhibition configuration information.
TIMEOUT 30

UNIT_TYPE It is unit type RRH/PSU/ NONE RRH
CONNECT_BD It is the connected board ID of remote 0~2 NONE 0
_ID device.
CONNECT_PO It is the connected port ID of remote device. 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID
CASCADE_ID It is cascade ID. 0~2 NONE 0


ALARM_TYPE This field describes an alarm type that can COMMUNICATION_FA NONE COM-
be inhibited. IL/CLOCK_FAIL/ MUNIC
CPRI_FAIL/ ATION_
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE FAIL
R_RX_LOS/
OPTIC_TRANSCEIVE
R_TX_FAULT/
DC_INPUT_FAIL/DIS-
ABLED/
FUNCTION_FAIL/
LNA_FAIL/LOW_GAIN/
LOW_POWER/
OVER_POWER/
VSWR_FAIL/
TEMPERATURE_HIGH
/RSSI_HIGH/
RSSI_LOW/UDA/
RECTIFIER_AC_INPU
T_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY
_DISCHARGE/
RECTIFIER_BATTERY
_DISCONNECT/
RECTIFIER_COMMUN
ICATION_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_DC_OVE
R_CURRENT/
RECTIFIER_DOOR_O
PEN/
RECTIFIER_HEATER_
FAIL/
RECTIFIER_MODULE
_FAIL/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_HIGH/
RECTIFIER_OUTPUT_
VOLTAGE_LOW/
HW_TYPE_MISMATC
H/
INHIBIT_STAT This field describes a status inhibited of an ALLOW/INHIBIT/ NONE ALLOW
US alarm.


Command Description
C2632 RETRIEVE RRH STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-RRH-STS: [CONNECT_BOARD_ID], [CONNECT_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_RRH_ID],
[PATH_ID];
Command Description
Retireves the RRH state. This command retrieves where the RRH connected, the operational
state, path state, FW mode, alarm threshold and others.
TIMEOUT 20

CONNECT_BO It is board ID that RRH is connected. 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID
CONNECT_PO It is port ID that RRH is connected. 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID
CASCADE_RR It is cascade ID of RRH. 0~2 NONE 0
H_ID
PATH_ID It is path ID of RRH. 0~1 NONE 0

CONNECT_BOARD_ID It is board ID that RRH is connected.
CONNECT_PORT_ID It is port ID that RRH is connected.
CASCADE_RRH_ID It is cascade ID of RRH.
PATH_ID It is path ID of RRH.
OPERATIONAL_STATE It is operational state of a resource.
PATH_STATE It is operational state of a path.
FW_MODE It is current mode of the FW image.(0 : user mode, 1 : factory

mode)

NUM_OF_FA It is number of FA.
MAP_OF_FA0 It is mapping of FA0.
FA0_ON_OFF It is FA0 On/Off .
FA0_CH_BANDWIDTH It is FA0 channel bandwith.
FA0_TX_EARFCN It is FA0 TX EARFCN(E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number).
FA0_RX_EARFCN It is FA0 RX EARFCN(E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency

Channel Number).
OPTIC_DELAY It is optic delay.
TX_DELAY It is TX delay.
RX_DELAY It is RX delay.
LOOPBACK It is loopback on/off.
TX_ON_OFF It is TX On/Off configuration.
TX_CONTROL It is TX enable/disable configuration for path.
RX_ON_OFF It is RX On/Off configuration.
TEMP It is temperature.
TX_RF_POWER It is TX RF Power.
RETURN_LOSS It is Return Loss.
FA0_RSSI It is FA0 RSSI.
FA0_RSSI_IQ_LEVEL It is FA0 RSSI Digital IQ level.
FA0_TSSI_IQ_LEVEL It is FA0 TSSI Digital IQ level.
FA0_TX_ATTEN It is FA0 TX attenuation.

Command Description
C2635 RETRIEVE GPSR STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-GPS-STS;
Command Description
Retrieves the state information of the GPS. The information retrieved includes the GPS antenna
delay value, electronic frequency control value, FFOM value, hold over state, GPS ID (GPS
identifier), GPS locking state, location (latitude, longitude, altitude), number of satellites traced,
list of satellites traced, TFOM value, and TOD (time of day).
TIMEOUT 10

No input parameter.

LOCK_STATE It is locking status.
HOLDOVER_STATE It is holdover status.
TOD It is TOD(Time Of Day).
POS It is location information(latitude, longitude, altitude(height)).
TFOM It is Time Figure Of Merit.
ANT_DLY It is GPS Anternna Delay in seconds.
SAT_C It is number of satellites being tracked.
SAT_N It is list of all satellites being tracked.
EFC It is electronic frequency control value.
TINT It is Difference or timing shift between the SmartClock 1PPS

and GPS 1 PPS signals.

FFOM It is Frequency Figure Of Merit.
IDN It is identification(Vendor name, Product part number, Product

serial number, F/W version, H/W revision).
SAT_ID It is satellite ID string including S/N.

Command Description
C2637 RETRIEVE S1 STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-S1-STS: [MME_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the state information of the S1 interface. The S1 interface is responsible for connecting
the MME (mobility management entity) in the center of the system to the eNB. The S1 interface
exchanges signals with the MME to exchange the OAM (operation and management) informa-
tion required for supporting mobility of the UE. This command retrieves the MME ID, SCTP
(Stream Control Transmission Protocol) state, and S1 interface state (S1AP_STATE).
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
MME_INDEX It is index of MME. 0 ~ 15 NONE 0

MME_INDEX It is index of MME.
MME_ID It is ID of MME.
SCTP_STATE It is SCTP state.
S1AP_STATE It is interface state.
MME_NAME It is MME Name

assigned.
MME_IP_V4 Information on the IPV4 address of the MME. This parameter

not used if the IP_VER parameter is set to IPv6

MME_IP_V6 Information on the IPV6 address of the eNB. This parameter


Command Description
C2639 RETRIEVE PRB USAGE
Command Format
RTRV-PRB-USG: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves usage rate of the PRB (physical resource block). The user can retrieve total uplink
usage, usage per QCI (QoS class identifier), and total downlink usage for PRBs of each cell.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM It is cell number. 0~8 NONE 0

CELL_NUM It is cell number.

C2644 RETRIEVE PSU STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-PSU-STS: [CONNECT_BOARD_ID], [CONNECT_PORT_ID], [CASCADE_PSU_ID];
Command Description
Inquire PSU status. The result shows PSU operation state, AC/DC input Voltage/Current value,
temperature, module, battery state and etc.
TIMEOUT 10

CONNECT_BO It is board ID that PSU is connected. 0~2 NONE 0
ARD_ID
CONNECT_PO It is port ID that PSU is connected. 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
RT_ID
CASCADE_PS It is cascade ID of PSU. 0~2 NONE 0
U_ID

CONNECT_BOARD_ID It is board ID that PSU is connected.
CONNECT_PORT_ID It is port ID that PSU is connected.
CASCADE_PSU_ID It is cascade ID of PSU.
OPERATIONAL_STATE It is operational state of a resource.
AC_IN_VOLTAGE_R It is AC input voltage(R).
AC_IN_VOLTAGE_S It is AC input voltage(S).
AC_IN_VOLTAGE_T It is AC input voltage(T).
DC_IN_VOLTAGE It is DC input voltage.

Command Description
DC_IN_CURRENT It is DC input current.
RECT_DESCRIPTION It is rectifier description.
RECT_TEMPERATURE It is rectifier temperature.
MODULE_STATE It is module state.
BATT_RESIDUAL_RATE It is battery residual rate.
BATT_RESIDUAL_VOLTAGE It is battery residual voltage.
BATT_TEST_STATE It is battery test state.

C2647 RETRIEVE X2 STATUS
Command Format
RTRV-X2-STS: [NBR_ENB_INDEX];
Command Description
Retrieves the state information of the X2 interface. The X2 interface is responsible for providing
a direct path of communication with eNBs of other cells in the system. The X2 interface facili-
tates exchange of signals and the load indicator information between eNBs for fast handover and
the information required for self-optimization. This command retrieves the neighbor eNB ID,
SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) state (SCTP_STATE), and X2 interface state
(IF_STATE).
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
NBR_ENB_INDEX It is index of neighbor eNB. 0 ~ 255 NONE 0

NBR_ENB_INDEX It is index of neighbor eNB.
NBR_ENB_ID It is ID of neighbor eNB.
SCTP_STATE It is operational state.
X2AP_STATE It is interface state.

Command Description
C2803 RETRIEVE CELL COMMON CHANNEL

STATE
Command Format
RTRV-CCCH-STS: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
This command supports function that confirm Cell's common channel state. Operator can con-
firm following article.
- PBCH's normalcy/abnormality.
- PDCCH's normalcy/abnormality.
- PDCCH USAGE.
-PUCCH USAGE.
-RS DL USAGE
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
CELL_NUM The Number of the cell on which to 0~8 NONE 0
retrieve common channel state.

CELL_NUM Cell Number to request common channel state
PBCH_STATUS Cell Pbch(Physical Broadcast Channel) Status.

-normal : Pbch status is normal.
- abnormal: Pbch status is abnormal.
PDCCH_STATUS Cell Pdcch(Physical Downlink Control Channel) Status.

-normal : Pdcch status is normal.
- abnormal: Pdcch status is abnormal.
PDCCH_USAGE Among PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel)

resource, average abundance of population that allocate to

UE(%)
PUCCH_USAGE Among PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel) resource,

average abundance of population that allocate to UE(%)
RS_DL_USAGE Among PDSCH(Physical Downlink Shared Channel) resource,

average abundance of population that allocate in Reference Sig-
nal transfer(%)

Command Description
C2808 RETRIEVE TX POWER ONLINE TEST

RESULT
Command Format
RTRV-TXPWR-RSLT: TI_ID, [RESULT_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the Tx power online test results. It retrieves the results of the Tx power tests performed
by the test schedule added by the CHG-TEST-LIST command. Each test item ID (TI_ID) can
have up to 30 results. Lower the result ID, the more recent the results are. Even when the online
test scheduler is added, if the actual test has not been performed, the result retrieval returns
NO_DATA with NOK processing. The online test results are saved only after the actual test is
executed. If the test is interrupted by PAUSE_ONLINE, for example, the result is not updated.
TIMEOUT 10

for Tx power online test. Up to 10 can be
method of the Tx power online
test(TEST_ID). This is set by the user in
advance.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the Tx power 0 ~ 29 NONE 0
online test result is saved after the test is
executed. The smaller the result ID, the
deleted first.

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for Tx power
tests.
RESULT_ID The result ID in which order the Tx power online test result is
saved after the test is executed. The smaller the result ID, the
more recent the result is. (Each ID can have up to 30 results. If


deleted first.)
TIME_STAMP The execution time of the Tx power online test.
BD_ID The board ID connected to the RRH on which the Tx power test
is to performed. (The eNB system works with the RRH through
the CPRI port of the ECP board.)
PORT_ID The port ID connected to the RRH on which the Tx power test
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID of the RRH on which the Tx power test is to be

performed. (The cascade ID of the RRH connected directly to
the ECP board is 0, with increments by 1.)
ERROR_REASON The error reason if the Tx power test result is NOK.
DL_PATH_CNT
UL_PATH_CNT
POWER_0 Path 0 power value of the RRH.
POWER_1 Path 1 power value of the RRH.
POWER_STATE_0 Path 0 output state of the RRH.

- RF_PWR_ABNORMAL: The RF output is 0 or less.
- RF_PWR_NORMAL: The RF output is normal.
- NOT_USE: Not use path.
POWER_STATE_1 Path 1 output state of the RRH.

- RF_PWR_ABNORMAL: The RF output is 0 or less.
- RF_PWR_NORMAL: The RF output is normal.
- NOT_USE: Not use path.
FA0_RSSI_0 The 1st carrier RSSI level of RRH path 0 (Unit:dBm)
FA0_RSSI_1 The 1st carrier RSSI level of RRH path 1 (Unit:dBm)

Command Description
C2809 TERMINATE ONGOING TEST
Command Format
TERM-TEST: INVOCATION_ID;
Command Description
Terminates the on-going test in the eNB. Note that this command is not used for terminating
online tests because the CHG-TEST-LIST command can be used for terminating the active
scheduler. MON-TEST can be used for retrieving the active commands and their invocation IDs,
and then the invocation IDs can be used for terminating the active commands.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
INVOCATION_ID The ID assigned when the command is 0 ~ 128 NONE 0
executed in the LSM or the CLI. At the
time the command is executed, the small-
est number among the invocation IDs
managed by the TM is assigned. When
TERM-TEST is performed, the command
for the invocation ID is terminated and the
command termination is notified by the
EMS.


C2811 EXECUTE BER TEST
Command Format
TEST-BER: BD_TYPE, BD_ID, PORT_ID, [CASCADE_ID], BD_ID, PORT_ID, BD_ID,
PORT_ID, UNIT_ID, FPGA_ID, [ITERATION], [INTERVAL];
Command Description
Performs the BER (Bit Error Rate) on-demand test on the DU-RU CPRI section. The BER test
checks the error rate by calculating the BIP (Bit Interleaved Parity) at the CPRI port of the chan-
nel card. When the TEST_LB command starts successfully, the user can check the on-demand
test result and the Event notification. The test is performed for the iteration count over the inter-
val time (min) and the error count accumulates until the test is complete.
TIMEOUT 10

BD_TYPE The type of the target board on which the ECP/RRH/ NONE ECP
BER test is to be performed.
BD_ID The board ID connected to the CPRI port of 0~2 NONE 0
the DU and the Target Board to be tested.
PORT_ID The CPRI port ID on which the BER test to 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
be performed.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID for the RRH with the cas- 0~2 NONE 0
cade connection on which the BER test is
to be performed. The test is performed for
the cascade RRH. The cascade ID is acti-
vated only when RRH is selected for
BD_TYPE. The cascade ID is assigned at
the time of PAU (RRH) growth.
be performed.
be performed.
UNIT_ID It carries ID of IIU to be tested 0~1 NONE 0
FPGA_ID It carries ID of IIU to be tested 0~2 NONE 0

Command Description

ITERATION The iteration count for the BER test. A 1 ~ 30 NONE 1
value between 1 and 30 can be entered for
iteration.
INTERVAL The BER test interval. A value between 1 1 ~ 60 NONE 1
and 60 (minutes) can be entered for test
interval.


C2814 EXECUTE LOOPBACK TEST
Command Format
TEST-LB: BD_ID, PORT_ID, [CASCADE_ID], TYPE;
Command Description
Performs the on-demand test on DU-PAU loopback. The DU-PAU loopback test transmits pack-
ets from the CPRI port of the channel card to the PAU, receives a response, and compares it
against the packets transmitted to check the optical link for any problems. Before executing the
loopback command, the target cell must be in Lock state. (Loopback cannot be performed when
running services.) The cell state can be retrieved from the 'Cell Management' window in the
LSM. If the cell is in Unlock state, it must be changed to Lock before performing the test. When
the TEST_LB command starts successfully, the user can check the on-demand test result and the
notification in the 'Event' window of the LSM CLI.
TIMEOUT 10

the DU and the RU to be tested. The board
ID of the ECP mounted on Slot #1 is 0.
Additional ECP boards can be expanded
on Slot #2, Slot #3 and so on as the board
ID increases sequentially.
PORT_ID The CPRI port of the DU and the RU to be 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
tested. The port ID value can be from 0 to 5
or from 0 to 11 depending on the ECP
board type.
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID for the RRH with the cas- 0~2 NONE 0
cade connection between the DU and the
RU to be tested. The section up to the cas-
cade RRH is tested. The cascade ID is
assigned at the time of PAU (RRH) growth.
If the cascade ID is 0, the ECP.
-RRH_0 section is tested. If 1 or greater,
the ECP.
-RRH_0 - RRH_n section is tested for
loopback.

Command Description

TYPE The loopback type to be tested. The avail- DU_MGT/RU_MGT/ NONE DU_MG
able loopback types are DU_MGT, RU_MAPPER/ T
RU_MGT, and RU_MAPPER.
- DU_MGT: Packets are looped back at the
MGT in the FPGA of the DU, which con-
verts the CPRI frame into the physical sig-
nal.
- RU_MGT: Packets are looped back at the
MGT in the FPGA of the RRH, which, in the
reverse order of the DU_MGT, converts the
physical signal into the CPRI frame.
- RU_MAPPER: Packets are looped back
at the MAPPER in the FPGA of the RRH,
which converts the CPRI signal into the I/Q
signal.


C2815 EXECUTE MODEL TEST
Command Format
TEST-MODEL: CELL_NUM, MODEL_ID;
Command Description
Performs the conformance test by artificially generating traffic and then measuring output prop-
erties. The DU (DSP) specifies the property items defined in the standard (E-UTRA test models)
for RF property tests and then the RF outputs are tested on the DSP. The model test can be per-
formed or terminated using the following commands:.
-TEST-MODEL: Performs the model test for a specific cell/subcell.
- MON-TEST: Retrieves the state of the on-going test.
- TERM-TEST: Terminates the on-going test.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM The cell number for which the model test is 0~8 NONE 0
to be performed.
MODEL_ID The ID of the property item defined in the ETM_1_1/ETM_1_2/ NONE E_TM_1
standard for performing the model test. The ETM_2/ETM_3_1/ _1
following test types are available. The sig- ETM_3_2/ETM_3_3/
nals defined in LTE TS 36.141 are transmit- ETM_1_1_TA/
ted to the eNB output according to the type
selected.
- ETM_1_1: Refer to Section 6.1.1.1 of TS
36.141.
36.141.
- ETM_2: Refer to Section 6.1.1.3 of TS
36.141.
36.141.
36.141.
36.141.
- ETM_1_1_TA: ETM_1_1 applied 2 ant
port to timing alignment test

Command Description


C2816 EXECUTE OCNS TEST
Command Format
TEST-OCNS: CELL_NUM, MODULATION, CELL_LOAD;
Command Description
Sets virtual calls to generate the signals necessary for the eNB's cell planning and wireless envi-
ronment analysis of the forward link. The OCNS (orthogonal channel noise simulator) can be set
or cleared using the following commands:..
-TEST-OCNS: Sets the OCNS for a specific cell/subcell.
- MON-TEST: Retrieves the state of the on-going test.
- TERM-TEST: Terminates the on-going test.
TIMEOUT 10

CELL_NUM The cell number for which the OCNS is to 0~8 NONE 0
be set.
MODULATION The modulation type. Available modulation QPSK/QAM_16/ NONE QPSK
types are QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM. QAM_64/
CELL_LOAD The load ratio for the cell on which the PORTION_0/ NONE PORTI
OCNS is set. The range is between 0% and PORTION_10/ ON_0
100% in intervals of 10. If 100, the maxi- PORTION_20/
mum noise load is used. PORTION_30/
PORTION_40/
PORTION_50/
PORTION_60/
PORTION_70/
PORTION_80/
PORTION_90/
PORTION_100/


Command Description
C2817 EXECUTE OPTIC DATA TEST
Command Format
TEST-OPT-DATA: BD_ID, PORT_ID;
Command Description
Status for the optical link between DU and RU. The optical link information for the first RRH
section on the DU port is obtained by the DU FPGA, and the RRH with the cascade connection
is processed by sending the request message and receiving its response.
TIMEOUT 10

BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the opti- 0~2 NONE 0
cal link to be tested.
PORT_ID The ID of the port connected to the optical 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
link to be tested.


C2818 MEASURE THE CELL TRANSMITTED

POWER
Command Format
TEST-TXPWR: BD_ID, PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID;
Command Description
Performs the on-demand test on Tx power. T x power test measures the transmission power
strength of the power amplifier unit (PAU). During the Tx power test, the user can test the Tx
path of the PAU by measuring the Tx RF power and the RSSI. The measuring point is the PAU
output line, where the RF power is checked and the normal operation status is reported to the
user. When the command starts successfully, the user can check the on-demand test result and
the notification (NOTIFY TEST RESULT) in the 'Event' tab of the LSM CLI. The test result is
returned as NOK when:.
-The cell tested is in 'Lock' state and the Tx output is off.
- At least one of the operating paths of the PAU is abnormal (The number of operating paths can
be checked by 'PATH_CNT' in result notification).
- The PAU is grown in the configuration but is not operating correctly because it is disconnected
or powered off. If the test result is NOK:.
-Check whether the PAU is correctly connected and powered on.
- Check whether the cell is in 'Unlock' state.
- Check the alarm state of the PAU.
- Check whether the PAU is in the Tx Enable, Tx On or Fa On state.
TIMEOUT 10

BD_ID The ID of the board connected to the target 0~2 NONE 0
PAU on which to perform the Tx power test.
The board ID of the channel card starts
from 0 at Slot_1 and increases in sequence
as the channel card grows.
PORT_ID The port ID of the board connected to the 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
target PAU on which to perform the Tx
power test. The port IDs are assigned in
sequence from the left.

Command Description

the board connected to the target PAU on
which to perform the Tx power test. The
cascade ID is assigned at the time of PAU
growth.


C2819 MEASURE THE ANTENNA VSWR
Command Format
TEST-VSWR: BD_ID, PORT_ID, CASCADE_ID;
Command Description
Performs the on-demand test on VSWR. The VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) test measures
return loss at the output line antenna of the PAU (power amplifier unit) RRH. During the VSWR
test, the user can check the matching state of the antenna by measuring the return loss (can be
converted into VSWR) at the final output line of the PAU. During the VSWR test, the return loss
is measured for each path of the PAU and the test results are reported to the user. Since the power
reflected is smaller than the input power, the return loss is always indicated as a negative (-)
value in dB. However, since this is a ratio measurement, the value is normally indicated as an
absolute value. The VSWR test compares the Tx RF power and the RF power reflected off the
antenna. A measurement can be taken only when the Tx RF power is above a certain level.
When the command starts successfully, the user can check the on-demand test result and the
notification (NOTIFY TEST RESULT) in the 'Event' tab of the LSM CLI. The test result is
returned as NOK when:.
-The cell tested is in 'Lock' state and the Tx output is off.
- At least one of the operating paths of the PAU is abnormal. (The number of operating paths can
be checked by 'PATH_CNT' in result notification.).
- The PAU is grown in the configuration but is not operating correctly because it is disconnected
or powered off. If the test result is NOK:.
- Check whether the PAU is correctly connected and powered on.
- Check whether the RF power output is normal. (Check whether the cell is in 'Unlock' state.).
- Check whether the antenna connection is normal.
TIMEOUT 10

BD_ID The port ID of the board connected to the 0~2 NONE 0
target PAU (RRH) on which to perform the
VSWR test. The board ID of the channel
card starts from 0 at Slot_1 and increases
in sequence as the channel card grows.
PORT_ID The ID of the board connected to the target 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
PAU (RRH) on which to perform the VSWR
test. The port IDs are assigned in sequence
from the left.

Command Description

the board connected to the target PAU
(RRH) on which to perform the VSWR test.
The cascade ID is assigned at the time of
PAU (RRH) growth.


C2821 CHANGE TX POWER ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
CHG-TXPWR-INF: TI_ID, [BOARD_ID], [PORT_ID], [CASCADE_ID];
Command Description
Sets or changes the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the Tx power online test. The test
item ID can set or change the parameter information used as a reference by the Tx power com-
mand. Up to 10 test items can be added.
TIMEOUT 10

for Tx Power Online Test. Up to 10 can be
method of the Tx Power Online Test
(TEST_ID). This is set by the user in
advance.
BOARD_ID The board ID. 0~2 NONE 0
PORT_ID The port ID connected to the RRH on which 0 ~ 11 NONE 0
the Tx power test is to performed. (The
eNB system works with the RRH through
CASCADE_ID The cascade ID of the RRH on which the 0~2 NONE 0
Tx power test is to be performed. The cas-
cade ID of the RRH connected directly to
the ECP board is 0, with increments by 1.

TI_ID The ID for identifying the information added for online Tx
power tests.
BOARD_ID The board ID.

Command Description

performed. (The cascade ID of the RRH connected directly to
the ECP board is 0, with increments by 1).

C2822 RETRIEVE TX POWER ONLINE TEST

INFORMATION
Command Format
RTRV-TXPWR-INF: [TI_ID];
Command Description
Retrieves the test item ID (TI_ID) referenced during the Tx power online test. The test item ID
provides the parameter information used as a reference by the Tx power command. Entering a
TI_ID value displays the information corresponding to TI_ID. If none is entered, information for
all (10) test items is retrieved.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t
added for Tx Power Online Test. Up to 10
can be added. TI_ID defines the detailed
execution method of the Tx Power Online
Test (TEST_ID). This is set by the user in
advance.

ping tests.
BOARD_ID The board ID.
is to be performed.

performed.

Command Description
C2862 CHANGE SON ANR FUNCTION SCHED-

ULES
Command Format
CHG-ANR-SCHED: CELL_NUM, [ANR_STATE], [DAY], [HOUR], [MINUTE], [PERIOD],
[UE_PROPORTION_UTRAN];
Command Description
Changes the schedule of SON ANR-specific Operation by the cell.
TIMEOUT 10

ANR_STATE Control the schedule for ANR-specific anrSuspend/anrActive/ NONE anrSus-
Operation. pend
- anrSuspend: The ANR-specific Operation
by the schedule is not operated.
- anrActive: The ANR-specific Operation
by the schedule is operated.
DAY Day of the Week for ANR-specific Opera- Sunday/Monday/Tues- NONE Sunday
tion by the schedule day/Wednesday/Thurs-
day/Friday/Saturday/
Everyday/
HOUR Hour for ANR-specific Operation by the Hour_0/Hour_1/ NONE Hour_0
schedule Hour_2/Hour_3/
Hour_4/Hour_5/
Hour_6/Hour_7/
Hour_8/Hour_9/
Hour_10/Hour_11/
Hour_12/Hour_13/
Hour_14/Hour_15/
Hour_16/Hour_17/
Hour_18/Hour_19/
Hour_20/Hour_21/
Hour_22/Hour_23/
Everyhour/
MINUTE Minute for ANR-specific Operation by the 0 ~ 59 NONE 0
schedule
PERIOD Period for ANR-specific Operation by the 1 ~ 30 MIN 1
schedule (Unit: Minute)


UE_PROPORTI Proportion of UE Selection for measure- 0.000 ~ 1.000 NONE 0.000
ON_UTRAN ment of UTRAN neighbors during ANR-
specific Operation by the schedule

ANR_STATE Control the schedule for ANR-specific Operation.

- anrSuspend: The ANR-specific Operation by the schedule is
not operated.
- anrActive: The ANR-specific Operation by the schedule is
operated.
DAY Day of the Week for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
HOUR Hour for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
MINUTE Minute for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
PERIOD Period for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule (Unit: Min-

ute)
UE_PROPORTION_UTRAN Proportion of UE Selection for measurement of UTRAN neigh-

bors during ANR-specific Operation by the schedule

Command Description
C2863 RETRIEVE SON ANR FUNCTION SCHED-

ULES
Command Format
RTRV-ANR-SCHED: [CELL_NUM];
Command Description
Retrieves the schedule of SON ANR-specific Operation by the cell.
TIMEOUT 10
Defaul
t

ANR_STATE Control the schedule for ANR-specific Operation.

- anrSuspend: The ANR-specific Operation by the schedule is
not operated.
- anrActive: The ANR-specific Operation by the schedule is
operated.
DAY Day of the Week for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
HOUR Hour for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
MINUTE Minute for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule
PERIOD Period for ANR-specific Operation by the schedule (Unit: Min-

ute)
UE_PROPORTION_UTRAN Proportion of UE Selection for measurement of UTRAN neigh-

bors during ANR-specific Operation by the schedule

LTE eNB
Command Description_SLR2.3
2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved.
Information in this manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG

Electronics Co., Ltd.
No information contained here may be copied, translated,
transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

LTE ENB Command Description SLR2.3 Ver.1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LTE ENB Command Description SLR2.3 Ver.1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2600-00F3QEGA6

2012 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Document Content and Organization

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I

This page is intentionally left blank.

II SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

C0062 RETRIEVE BULKCM SESSION STATUS ............................................................................... 1

C0063 RETRIEVE CALL STATE/STATUS ......................................................................................... 2

C0101 CHANGE CELL CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 3

C0102 CHANGE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 5

C0133 EXPORT AND UPLOAD PART OF CONFIGURATION .......................................................... 7

C0136 RESTORE PLD ........................................................................................................................ 8

C0137 BACKUP PLD .......................................................................................................................... 9

C0138 IMPORT CONFIGURATION FILE ......................................................................................... 11

C0139 EXPORT CONFIGURATION FILE ......................................................................................... 12

C0152 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE BATCH ........................................................................................... 13

C0153 ACTIVATE NE SOFTWARE PACKAGE ............................................................................... 14

C0154 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE UNIT ............................................................................................... 15

C0155 ACTIVATE SOFTWARE BATCH .......................................................................................... 16

C0156 RETRIEVE ALL THE ACTIVE SOFTWARE UNIT ................................................................ 17

C0157 CHANGE ENVIRONMENT DATA ......................................................................................... 19

C0158 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE UNIT ............................................................................................ 20

C0159 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE BATCH ........................................................................................ 21

C0160 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE PACKAGE ................................................................................. 22

C0161 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE .................................................................................................... 23

C0162 DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE BATCH ....................................................................................... 24

C0163 RETRIEVE ENVIRONMENT DATA ....................................................................................... 25

C0164 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR FIRMWARE LIST ........................................................................ 26

C0165 RETRIEVE PROCESSOR INVENTORY LIST ....................................................................... 28

C0166 UPLOAD INVENTORY .......................................................................................................... 30

C0167 RETRIEVE THE ACTIVE PACKAGE VERSION ................................................................... 31

C0168 DELETE ALL THE PASSIVE PACKAGE VERSION ............................................................ 32

C0169 RESET THE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 33

C0170 RESET PROCESSOR UNIT .................................................................................................. 34

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III

C0171 RESET SOFTWARE UNIT ..................................................................................................... 35

C0172 RETRIEVE ALL THE SOFTWARE UNIT'S INFORMATION ................................................. 36

C0173 RETRIEVE ALL THE DIRECTORY INFORMATION ............................................................. 38

C0174 RETRIEVE LOADING TIME INFORMATION ........................................................................ 39

C0188 ACTIVATE FIRMWARE ......................................................................................................... 40

C0189 RETRIEVE PSU INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 42

C0193 RESET RRH ........................................................................................................................... 44

C0206 ACTIVATE RRH FIRMWARE ................................................................................................ 45

C0207 ACTIVATE PSU FIRMWARE ................................................................................................ 46

C0220 RETRIEVE RRH INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 47

C0222 RETRIEVE GPS INVENTORY LIST ...................................................................................... 49

C0224 RETRIEVE SFP INVENTORY LIST ....................................................................................... 51

C0246 RESET DSP ........................................................................................................................... 53

C0247 RESET GPS ........................................................................................................................... 54

C0249 RESET SCTP ......................................................................................................................... 55

C0300 RETRIEVE FILE LIST ............................................................................................................ 56

C0350 RESUME MEASUREMENT JOB ........................................................................................... 58

C0351 SUSPEND MEASUREMENT JOB ......................................................................................... 59

C0352 RETRIEVE MEASUREMENT JOB INFORMATION .............................................................. 60

C0353 CHANGE MEASUREMENT JOB DATA ............................................................................... 61

C0356 RETRIEVE PM FILE DATA ................................................................................................... 64

C0357 CHANGE PM FILE DATA ...................................................................................................... 65

C0506 EXECUTE INTERNAL PING TEST ....................................................................................... 66

C0507 EXECUTE EXTERNAL PING TEST ...................................................................................... 67

C0508 MONITOR TEST STATUS ..................................................................................................... 69

C0510 EXECUTE TRACE ROUTE TEST ......................................................................................... 71

C0511 RETRIEVE ONLINE TEST PARAMETER ............................................................................. 72

C0512 RETRIEVE EXTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ............................................ 74

C0513 RETRIEVE INTERNAL PING ONLINE TEST INFORMATION ............................................. 76